Tk Source Code

Check-in [0540ca2c]
Login

Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login to enable hyperlinks.

Overview
Comment:Doc update (to be reviewed)
Downloads: Tarball | ZIP archive | SQL archive
Timelines: family | ancestors | doc-update
Files: files | file ages | folders
SHA3-256: 0540ca2c71319f629293b304ffec030eac4193e1fc36bcf78ab1671ea8e1ea96
User & Date: jan.nijtmans 2024-05-01 15:30:10
Context
2024-05-01
15:30
Doc update (to be reviewed) Leaf check-in: 0540ca2c user: jan.nijtmans tags: doc-update
09:39
Backport ttk documentation from Tk 9.0 check-in: 0764601c user: jan.nijtmans tags: core-8-branch
Changes
Hide Diffs Unified Diffs Ignore Whitespace Patch

Changes to doc/3DBorder.3.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

68
69
70
71
72
73
74
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj, Tk_ClipDrawableToRect, Tk_DrawHighlightBorder, Tk_Get3DBorder, Tk_Get3DBorderColors, Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Draw3DRectangle, Tk_Fill3DRectangle, Tk_Draw3DPolygon, Tk_Fill3DPolygon, Tk_3DVerticalBevel, Tk_3DHorizontalBevel, Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder, Tk_NameOf3DBorder, Tk_3DBorderColor, Tk_3DBorderGC, Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Free3DBorder \- draw borders with three-dimensional appearance
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_3DBorder
\fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_ClipDrawableToRect(\fIdisplay, drawable, x, y, width, height\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_DrawHighlightBorder(\fItkwin, fgGC, bgGC, highlightWidth, drawable\fB)\fR
.sp
Tk_3DBorder
\fBTk_Get3DBorder(\fIinterp, tkwin, colorName\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_Get3DBorderColors(\fIborder, bgColorPtr, darkColorPtr, lightColorPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
Tk_3DBorder
\fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_Draw3DRectangle(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_Fill3DRectangle(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_Draw3DPolygon(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_Fill3DPolygon(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftBevel, relief\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftIn, rightIn, topBevel, relief\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(\fItkwin, border\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOf3DBorder(\fIborder\fB)\fR
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_3DBorderColor(\fIborder\fB)\fR
.sp
GC *
\fBTk_3DBorderGC(\fItkwin, border, which\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_Free3DBorder(\fIborder\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_3DBorder" borderWidth
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window (for all procedures except \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR,
must be the window for which the border was allocated).







|

|

<
|

<
|


|

<
|


|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|


|


|


|

|

|
>







9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

20
21

22
23
24
25
26

27
28
29
30
31

32
33

34
35

36
37

38
39

40
41

42
43

44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj, Tk_ClipDrawableToRect, Tk_DrawHighlightBorder, Tk_Get3DBorder, Tk_Get3DBorderColors, Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Draw3DRectangle, Tk_Fill3DRectangle, Tk_Draw3DPolygon, Tk_Fill3DPolygon, Tk_3DVerticalBevel, Tk_3DHorizontalBevel, Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder, Tk_NameOf3DBorder, Tk_3DBorderColor, Tk_3DBorderGC, Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Free3DBorder \- draw borders with three-dimensional appearance
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR

Tk_3DBorder
\fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_ClipDrawableToRect\fR(\fIdisplay, drawable, x, y, width, height\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_DrawHighlightBorder\fR(\fItkwin, fgGC, bgGC, highlightWidth, drawable\fR)
.sp
Tk_3DBorder
\fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, colorName\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_Get3DBorderColors\fR(\fIborder, bgColorPtr, darkColorPtr, lightColorPtr\fR)
.sp
Tk_3DBorder
\fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_Fill3DPolygon\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftBevel, relief\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftIn, rightIn, topBevel, relief\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_SetBackgroundFromBorder\fR(\fItkwin, border\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOf3DBorder\fR(\fIborder\fR)
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_3DBorderColor\fR(\fIborder\fR)
.sp
GC *
\fBTk_3DBorderGC\fR(\fItkwin, border, which\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR(\fIborder\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_3DBorder" borderWidth
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window (for all procedures except \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR,
must be the window for which the border was allocated).
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103

104
105
106
107
108
109
110
.AP int height in
Height of rectangle describing border or bevel, in pixels.
.AP int borderWidth in
Width of border in pixels. Positive means border is inside rectangle
given by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR, negative means
border is outside rectangle.
.AP int highlightWidth in
Width of ring around the outside of the widget if the widget has received the input focus.

.AP int relief in
Indicates 3-D position of interior of value relative to exterior;
should be \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR,
\fBTK_RELIEF_SOLID\fR, or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR (may also be \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR
for \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR).
.AP XPoint *pointPtr in
Pointer to array of points describing the set of vertices in a polygon.







|
>







87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
.AP int height in
Height of rectangle describing border or bevel, in pixels.
.AP int borderWidth in
Width of border in pixels. Positive means border is inside rectangle
given by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR, negative means
border is outside rectangle.
.AP int highlightWidth in
Width of ring around the outside of the widget if the widget has received the
input focus.
.AP int relief in
Indicates 3-D position of interior of value relative to exterior;
should be \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR,
\fBTK_RELIEF_SOLID\fR, or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR (may also be \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR
for \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR).
.AP XPoint *pointPtr in
Pointer to array of points describing the set of vertices in a polygon.
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150

151
152

153
154
155
156
157
158
159
it forms the bottom side.
.AP int which in
Specifies which of the border's graphics contexts is desired.
Must be \fBTK_3D_FLAT_GC\fR, \fBTK_3D_LIGHT_GC\fR, or \fBTK_3D_DARK_GC\fR.
.AP XColor *bgColorPtr out
Pointer to location in which to store the background color of the given border.
.AP XColor *darkColorPtr out
Pointer to location in which to store the color for darker areas of the given border.

.AP XColor *lightColorPtr out
Pointer to location in which to store the color for lighter areas of the given border.

.AP GC fgGC in
Foreground X graphics context.
.AP GC fgGC in
Background X graphics context.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP







|
>

|
>







135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
it forms the bottom side.
.AP int which in
Specifies which of the border's graphics contexts is desired.
Must be \fBTK_3D_FLAT_GC\fR, \fBTK_3D_LIGHT_GC\fR, or \fBTK_3D_DARK_GC\fR.
.AP XColor *bgColorPtr out
Pointer to location in which to store the background color of the given border.
.AP XColor *darkColorPtr out
Pointer to location in which to store the color for darker areas of the
given border.
.AP XColor *lightColorPtr out
Pointer to location in which to store the color for lighter areas of the
given border.
.AP GC fgGC in
Foreground X graphics context.
.AP GC fgGC in
Background X graphics context.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183


184
185

186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
then NULL is returned and an error message is left as the result of
interpreter \fIinterp\fR.
If it returns successfully, \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR caches
information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up
future calls to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR
and \fItkwin\fR.
.PP
\fBTk_ClipDrawableToRect\fR will clip all drawing into the drawable d to the given rectangle. If width or height are negative, reset to no clipping.


Subsequent drawing into d is offset and clipped as specified.
The function is only used when \fBTK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING\fR is specified at compile time.

.PP
\fBTk_DrawHighlightBorder\fR draws a rectangular ring around the outside of a widget
to indicate that it has received the input focus.
On the Macintosh, this puts a 1 pixel border in the bgGC color between
the widget and the focus ring, except in the case where highlightWidth
is 1, in which case the border is left out.
For proper Mac L&F, use highlightWidth of 3.
.PP
\fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR is identical to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR except
that the color is specified with a string instead of a value.  This







|
>
>
|
|
>

|
|







170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
then NULL is returned and an error message is left as the result of
interpreter \fIinterp\fR.
If it returns successfully, \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR caches
information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up
future calls to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR
and \fItkwin\fR.
.PP
\fBTk_ClipDrawableToRect\fR will clip all drawing into the drawable \fId\fR
to the given rectangle. If \fIwidth\fR or \fIheight\fR are negative, reset
to no clipping.
Subsequent drawing into \fId\fR is offset and clipped as specified.
The function is only used when \fBTK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING\fR is specified at
compile time.
.PP
\fBTk_DrawHighlightBorder\fR draws a rectangular ring around the outside of
a widget to indicate that it has received the input focus.
On the Macintosh, this puts a 1 pixel border in the bgGC color between
the widget and the focus ring, except in the case where highlightWidth
is 1, in which case the border is left out.
For proper Mac L&F, use highlightWidth of 3.
.PP
\fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR is identical to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR except
that the color is specified with a string instead of a value.  This
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
\fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are the dimensions of the window), and
\fIborderWidth\fR specifies the number of pixels actually
occupied by the border.  The \fIrelief\fR argument indicates
which of several three-dimensional effects is desired:
\fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR means that the interior of the rectangle should
appear raised relative to the exterior of the rectangle, and
\fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR means that the interior should appear depressed.
\fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR and \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR mean that there should appear to be
a groove or ridge around the exterior of the rectangle.
.PP
\fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR is somewhat like \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR except
that it first fills the rectangular area with the background color
(one corresponding
to the color used to create \fIborder\fR).  Then it calls
\fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR to draw a border just inside the outer edge of
the rectangular area.  The argument \fIrelief\fR indicates the desired







|
|







219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
\fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are the dimensions of the window), and
\fIborderWidth\fR specifies the number of pixels actually
occupied by the border.  The \fIrelief\fR argument indicates
which of several three-dimensional effects is desired:
\fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR means that the interior of the rectangle should
appear raised relative to the exterior of the rectangle, and
\fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR means that the interior should appear depressed.
\fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR and \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR mean that there should
appear to be a groove or ridge around the exterior of the rectangle.
.PP
\fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR is somewhat like \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR except
that it first fills the rectangular area with the background color
(one corresponding
to the color used to create \fIborder\fR).  Then it calls
\fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR to draw a border just inside the outer edge of
the rectangular area.  The argument \fIrelief\fR indicates the desired
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328

with the window and color name used to create the
border; for \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR the border to release is specified
with the Tk_3DBorder token for the border.
There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR or
\fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR for each call to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR
or \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR.
.SH KEYWORDS
3D, background, border, color, depressed, illumination, value, polygon, raised, shadow, three-dimensional effect








|
>
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
with the window and color name used to create the
border; for \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR the border to release is specified
with the Tk_3DBorder token for the border.
There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR or
\fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR for each call to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR
or \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR.
.SH KEYWORDS
3D, background, border, color, depressed, illumination, value, polygon,
raised, shadow, three-dimensional effect

Changes to doc/AddOption.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_AddOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, value, priority\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_GetSystemDefault\fR(\fItkwin, dbName, className\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP "const char" *name in
Multi-element name of option.
.AP "const char" *value in
Value of option.







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_AddOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, value, priority\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_GetSystemDefault\fR(\fItkwin, dbName, className\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP "const char" *name in
Multi-element name of option.
.AP "const char" *value in
Value of option.

Changes to doc/BindTable.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateBindingTable, Tk_DeleteBindingTable, Tk_CreateBinding, Tk_DeleteBinding, Tk_GetBinding, Tk_GetAllBindings, Tk_DeleteAllBindings, Tk_BindEvent \- invoke scripts in response to X events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_BindingTable
\fBTk_CreateBindingTable(\fIinterp\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteBindingTable(\fIbindingTable\fB)\fR
.sp
unsigned long
\fBTk_CreateBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString, script, append\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_DeleteBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_GetBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_GetAllBindings(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteAllBindings(\fIbindingTable, object\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_BindEvent(\fIbindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_BindingTable bindingTable
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use when invoking bindings in binding table.  Also
used for returning results and errors from binding procedures.
.AP Tk_BindingTable bindingTable in
Token for binding table;  must have been returned by some previous







|

|


|


|


|

|

|

|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateBindingTable, Tk_DeleteBindingTable, Tk_CreateBinding, Tk_DeleteBinding, Tk_GetBinding, Tk_GetAllBindings, Tk_DeleteAllBindings, Tk_BindEvent \- invoke scripts in response to X events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_BindingTable
\fBTk_CreateBindingTable\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteBindingTable\fR(\fIbindingTable\fR)
.sp
unsigned long
\fBTk_CreateBinding\fR(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString, script, append\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_DeleteBinding\fR(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_GetBinding\fR(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_GetAllBindings\fR(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteAllBindings\fR(\fIbindingTable, object\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_BindEvent\fR(\fIbindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_BindingTable bindingTable
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use when invoking bindings in binding table.  Also
used for returning results and errors from binding procedures.
.AP Tk_BindingTable bindingTable in
Token for binding table;  must have been returned by some previous

Changes to doc/CanvPsY.3.

25
26
27
28
29
30
31

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
int
\fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, tkFont\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_CanvasPsPath\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, coordPtr, numPoints\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_CanvasPsStipple\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, bitmap\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS int "numPoints"
.AP Tk_Canvas canvas in
A token that identifies a canvas widget for which Postscript is
being generated.
.AP double canvasY in
Y-coordinate in the space of the canvas.







>







25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
int
\fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, tkFont\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_CanvasPsPath\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, coordPtr, numPoints\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_CanvasPsStipple\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, bitmap\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS int "numPoints"
.AP Tk_Canvas canvas in
A token that identifies a canvas widget for which Postscript is
being generated.
.AP double canvasY in
Y-coordinate in the space of the canvas.

Changes to doc/CanvTkwin.3.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
\fBTk_CanvasWindowCoords\fR(\fIcanvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR(\fIcanvas, x1, y1, x2, y2\fR)
.sp
Tk_OptionParseProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsParseProc\fR;
.sp
Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsPrintProc\fR;

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ItemType *drawableXPtr
.AP Tk_Canvas canvas in
A token that identifies a canvas widget.
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP "const char" *string in







>







26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
\fBTk_CanvasWindowCoords\fR(\fIcanvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR(\fIcanvas, x1, y1, x2, y2\fR)
.sp
Tk_OptionParseProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsParseProc\fR;
.sp
Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsPrintProc\fR;
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ItemType *drawableXPtr
.AP Tk_Canvas canvas in
A token that identifies a canvas widget.
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP "const char" *string in
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
.CS
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc,
    Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL
};

static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
    ...
    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "\-tags", NULL, NULL,
        NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
    ...
};
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
canvas, focus, item type, redisplay, selection, type manager







|






146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
.CS
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc,
    Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL
};

static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
    ...
    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
        NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
    ...
};
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
canvas, focus, item type, redisplay, selection, type manager

Changes to doc/CanvTxtInfo.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Tk_CanvasTextInfo \- additional information for managing text items in canvases
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *
\fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR(\fIcanvas\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Canvas canvas
.AP Tk_Canvas canvas in
A token that identifies a particular canvas widget.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_CanvasTextInfo \- additional information for managing text items in canvases
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *
\fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR(\fIcanvas\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Canvas canvas
.AP Tk_Canvas canvas in
A token that identifies a particular canvas widget.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP

Changes to doc/Clipboard.3.

15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, target, format, buffer\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ClipboardClear tkwin
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for reporting errors.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window that determines which display's clipboard to manipulate.
.AP Atom target in







>







15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, target, format, buffer\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ClipboardClear tkwin
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for reporting errors.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window that determines which display's clipboard to manipulate.
.AP Atom target in

Changes to doc/ClrSelect.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_ClearSelection \- Deselect a selection
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_ClearSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
The selection will be cleared from the display containing this
window.
.AP Atom selection in
The name of selection to be cleared.







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
Tk_ClearSelection \- Deselect a selection
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_ClearSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
The selection will be cleared from the display containing this
window.
.AP Atom selection in
The name of selection to be cleared.

Changes to doc/ConfigWidg.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
.SH NAME
Tk_ConfigureWidget, Tk_ConfigureInfo, Tk_ConfigureValue, Tk_FreeOptions \- process configuration options for widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_ConfigureWidget(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_ConfigureInfo(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_ConfigureValue(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeOptions(\fIspecs, widgRec, display, flags\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS void *widgRec in/out
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for returning error messages.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window used to represent widget (needed to set up X resources).
.AP "const Tk_ConfigSpec" *specs in







|


|


|

|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
.SH NAME
Tk_ConfigureWidget, Tk_ConfigureInfo, Tk_ConfigureValue, Tk_FreeOptions \- process configuration options for widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_ConfigureValue\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeOptions\fR(\fIspecs, widgRec, display, flags\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS void *widgRec in/out
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for returning error messages.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window used to represent widget (needed to set up X resources).
.AP "const Tk_ConfigSpec" *specs in
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
options.
.AP Display *display in
Display containing widget whose record is being freed;  needed in
order to free up resources.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Note: \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR should be replaced with the new
\fBTcl_Obj\fR based API \fBTk_SetOptions\fR.  The old interface is
retained for backward compatibility.
.PP
\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is called to configure various aspects of a
widget, such as colors, fonts, border width, etc.
It is intended as a convenience procedure to reduce the amount
of code that must be written in individual widget managers to
handle configuration information.







|
|







59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
options.
.AP Display *display in
Display containing widget whose record is being freed;  needed in
order to free up resources.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Note that \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR should be replaced with the new
\fBTcl_Obj\fR based API, \fBTk_SetOptions\fR.  The old interface is
retained for backward compatibility.
.PP
\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is called to configure various aspects of a
widget, such as colors, fonts, border width, etc.
It is intended as a convenience procedure to reduce the amount
of code that must be written in individual widget managers to
handle configuration information.
167
168
169
170
171
172
173

174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187

188
189
190
191
192
193

194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203

204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222

223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232

233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240

241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250

251
252
253
254

255
256
257
258
259
260

261
262
263
264
265
266

267
268
269
270
271

272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281

282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291

292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299

300
301
302
303
304
305
306

307
308
309
310
311
312

313
314
315
316
317
318

319
320
321
322
323
324
325

326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334

335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348

349
350
351
352
353
354
355

356
357
358
359
360
361
362
in the descriptions below.
.PP
The \fItype\fR field of each entry in \fIspecs\fR determines what
to do with the string value of that configuration option.  The
legal values for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are:
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR

The value
must be an ASCII string identifying a cursor in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR.
The value is converted to a \fBTk_Cursor\fR by calling
\fBTk_GetCursor\fR and the result is stored in the target.
In addition, the resulting cursor is made the active cursor
for \fItkwin\fR by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target and \fItkwin\fR's
active cursor will be set to \fBNone\fR.
If the previous value of the target
was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_ANCHOR\fR

The value must be an ASCII string identifying an anchor point in one of the ways
accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR.
The string is converted to a \fBTk_Anchor\fR by calling
\fBTk_GetAnchor\fR and the result is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_BITMAP\fR

The value must be an ASCII string identifying a bitmap in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.  The value is converted
to a \fBPixmap\fR by calling \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target is set to \fBNone\fR.
If the previous value of the target
was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN\fR

The value must be an ASCII string specifying a boolean value.  Any
of the values
.QW true ,
.QW yes ,
.QW on ,
or
.QW 1 ,
or an abbreviation of one of these values, means true;
any of the values
.QW false ,
.QW no ,
.QW off ,
or
.QW 0 ,
or an abbreviation of one of these values, means false.
The target is expected to be an integer;  for true values it will
be set to 1 and for false values it will be set to 0.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_BORDER\fR

The value must be an ASCII string identifying a border color in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR.  The value is converted
to a (\fBTk_3DBorder *\fR) by calling \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL.
If the previous value of the target
was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE\fR

The value must be
an ASCII string identifying a cap style in one of the ways
accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR.
The string is converted to an integer value corresponding
to the cap style by calling
\fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR

The value must be an ASCII string identifying a color in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  The value is converted
to an (\fBXColor *\fR) by calling \fBTk_GetColor\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to \fBNone\fR.
If the previous value of the target
was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeColor\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_CURSOR\fR

This option is identical to \fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR except
that the new cursor is not made the active one for \fItkwin\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR

This option allows applications to define new option types.
The \fIcustomPtr\fR field of the entry points to a structure
defining the new option type.
See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_DOUBLE\fR

The value must be an ASCII floating-point number in
the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR.  The string is converted
to a \fBdouble\fR value, and the value is stored in the
target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_END\fR

Marks the end of the table.  The last entry in \fIspecs\fR
must have this type;  all of its other fields are ignored and it
will never match any arguments.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_FONT\fR

The value must be an ASCII string identifying a font in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.  The value is converted
to a \fBTk_Font\fR by calling \fBTk_GetFont\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL.
If the previous value of the target
was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeFont\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR

The value must be an ASCII integer string
in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g.
.QW 0
and
.QW 0x
prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal
numbers, respectively).  The string is converted to an integer
value and the integer is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE\fR

The value must be
an ASCII string identifying a join style in one of the ways
accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR.
The string is converted to an integer value corresponding
to the join style by calling
\fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY\fR

The value must be
an ASCII string identifying a justification method in one of the
ways accepted by \fBTk_GetJustify\fR.
The string is converted to a \fBTk_Justify\fR by calling
\fBTk_GetJustify\fR and the result is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_MM\fR

The value must specify a screen distance in one of the forms acceptable
to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR.
The string is converted to double-precision floating-point distance
in millimeters and the value is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_PIXELS\fR

The value must specify screen units in one of the forms acceptable
to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
The string is converted to an integer distance in pixels and the
value is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_RELIEF\fR

The value must be an ASCII string identifying a relief in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetRelief\fR.  The value is converted
to an integer relief value by calling \fBTk_GetRelief\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_STRING\fR
A copy

of the value is made by allocating memory space with
\fBTcl_Alloc\fR and copying the value into the dynamically-allocated
space.  A pointer to the new string is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL.
If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is
freed by passing it to \fBTcl_Free\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR

This \fItype\fR value identifies special entries in \fIspecs\fR that
are synonyms for other entries.  If an \fIargv\fR value matches the
\fIargvName\fR of a \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry, the entry is not used
directly. Instead, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR searches \fIspecs\fR
for another entry whose \fIargvName\fR is the same as the \fIdbName\fR
field in the \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry;  this new entry is used just
as if its \fIargvName\fR had matched the \fIargv\fR value.  The
synonym mechanism allows multiple \fIargv\fR values to be used for
a single configuration option, such as
.QW \-background
and
.QW \-bg .
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_UID\fR

The value is translated to a \fBTk_Uid\fR
(by passing it to \fBTk_GetUid\fR).  The resulting value
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR and the value
is an empty string then the target will be set to NULL.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_WINDOW\fR

The value must be a window path name.  It is translated to a
\fBTk_Window\fR token and the token is stored in the target.
.SH "GROUPED ENTRIES"
.PP
In some cases it is useful to generate multiple resources from
a single configuration value.  For example, a color name might
be used both to generate the background color for a widget (using







>














>






>










>



















>










>








>










>




>






>






>





>










>










>








>







>






>






>






<
>
|








>














>







>







168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343

344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
in the descriptions below.
.PP
The \fItype\fR field of each entry in \fIspecs\fR determines what
to do with the string value of that configuration option.  The
legal values for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are:
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR
.
The value
must be an ASCII string identifying a cursor in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR.
The value is converted to a \fBTk_Cursor\fR by calling
\fBTk_GetCursor\fR and the result is stored in the target.
In addition, the resulting cursor is made the active cursor
for \fItkwin\fR by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target and \fItkwin\fR's
active cursor will be set to \fBNone\fR.
If the previous value of the target
was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_ANCHOR\fR
.
The value must be an ASCII string identifying an anchor point in one of the ways
accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR.
The string is converted to a \fBTk_Anchor\fR by calling
\fBTk_GetAnchor\fR and the result is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_BITMAP\fR
.
The value must be an ASCII string identifying a bitmap in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.  The value is converted
to a \fBPixmap\fR by calling \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target is set to \fBNone\fR.
If the previous value of the target
was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN\fR
.
The value must be an ASCII string specifying a boolean value.  Any
of the values
.QW true ,
.QW yes ,
.QW on ,
or
.QW 1 ,
or an abbreviation of one of these values, means true;
any of the values
.QW false ,
.QW no ,
.QW off ,
or
.QW 0 ,
or an abbreviation of one of these values, means false.
The target is expected to be an integer;  for true values it will
be set to 1 and for false values it will be set to 0.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_BORDER\fR
.
The value must be an ASCII string identifying a border color in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR.  The value is converted
to a (\fBTk_3DBorder *\fR) by calling \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL.
If the previous value of the target
was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE\fR
.
The value must be
an ASCII string identifying a cap style in one of the ways
accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR.
The string is converted to an integer value corresponding
to the cap style by calling
\fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR
.
The value must be an ASCII string identifying a color in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  The value is converted
to an (\fBXColor *\fR) by calling \fBTk_GetColor\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to \fBNone\fR.
If the previous value of the target
was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeColor\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_CURSOR\fR
.
This option is identical to \fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR except
that the new cursor is not made the active one for \fItkwin\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR
.
This option allows applications to define new option types.
The \fIcustomPtr\fR field of the entry points to a structure
defining the new option type.
See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_DOUBLE\fR
.
The value must be an ASCII floating-point number in
the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR.  The string is converted
to a \fBdouble\fR value, and the value is stored in the
target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_END\fR
.
Marks the end of the table.  The last entry in \fIspecs\fR
must have this type;  all of its other fields are ignored and it
will never match any arguments.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_FONT\fR
.
The value must be an ASCII string identifying a font in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.  The value is converted
to a \fBTk_Font\fR by calling \fBTk_GetFont\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL.
If the previous value of the target
was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeFont\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR
.
The value must be an ASCII integer string
in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g.
.QW 0
and
.QW 0x
prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal
numbers, respectively).  The string is converted to an integer
value and the integer is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE\fR
.
The value must be
an ASCII string identifying a join style in one of the ways
accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR.
The string is converted to an integer value corresponding
to the join style by calling
\fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY\fR
.
The value must be
an ASCII string identifying a justification method in one of the
ways accepted by \fBTk_GetJustify\fR.
The string is converted to a \fBTk_Justify\fR by calling
\fBTk_GetJustify\fR and the result is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_MM\fR
.
The value must specify a screen distance in one of the forms acceptable
to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR.
The string is converted to double-precision floating-point distance
in millimeters and the value is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_PIXELS\fR
.
The value must specify screen units in one of the forms acceptable
to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
The string is converted to an integer distance in pixels and the
value is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_RELIEF\fR
.
The value must be an ASCII string identifying a relief in a form
suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetRelief\fR.  The value is converted
to an integer relief value by calling \fBTk_GetRelief\fR and the result
is stored in the target.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_STRING\fR

.
A copy of the value is made by allocating memory space with
\fBTcl_Alloc\fR and copying the value into the dynamically-allocated
space.  A pointer to the new string is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL.
If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is
freed by passing it to \fBTcl_Free\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR
.
This \fItype\fR value identifies special entries in \fIspecs\fR that
are synonyms for other entries.  If an \fIargv\fR value matches the
\fIargvName\fR of a \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry, the entry is not used
directly. Instead, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR searches \fIspecs\fR
for another entry whose \fIargvName\fR is the same as the \fIdbName\fR
field in the \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry;  this new entry is used just
as if its \fIargvName\fR had matched the \fIargv\fR value.  The
synonym mechanism allows multiple \fIargv\fR values to be used for
a single configuration option, such as
.QW \-background
and
.QW \-bg .
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_UID\fR
.
The value is translated to a \fBTk_Uid\fR
(by passing it to \fBTk_GetUid\fR).  The resulting value
is stored in the target.
If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR and the value
is an empty string then the target will be set to NULL.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_WINDOW\fR
.
The value must be a window path name.  It is translated to a
\fBTk_Window\fR token and the token is stored in the target.
.SH "GROUPED ENTRIES"
.PP
In some cases it is useful to generate multiple resources from
a single configuration value.  For example, a color name might
be used both to generate the background color for a widget (using
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384

385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397

398
399
400
401
402

403
404
405
406
407

408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420

421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
The \fIflags\fR argument passed to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is used
in conjunction with the \fIspecFlags\fR fields in the entries of \fIspecs\fR
to provide additional control over the processing of configuration
options.  These values are used in three different ways as
described below.
.PP
First, if the \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR has
the \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR bit set (i.e., \fIflags\fR | \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR != 0),

then the option database and
\fIdefValue\fR fields are not used.  In this case, if an entry in
\fIspecs\fR does not match a field in \fIargv\fR then nothing happens:
the corresponding target is not modified.  This feature is useful
when the goal is to modify certain configuration options while
leaving others in their current state, such as when a \fBconfigure\fR
widget command is being processed.
.PP
Second, the \fIspecFlags\fR field of an entry in \fIspecs\fR may be used
to control the processing of that entry.  Each \fIspecFlags\fR
field may consists of an OR-ed combination of the following values:
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR

If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the
display for \fItkwin\fR has more than one bit plane.  If the display
is monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR

If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the
display for \fItkwin\fR has exactly one bit plane.  If the display
is not monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR

This bit is only relevant for some types of entries (see the
descriptions of the various entry types above).
If this bit is set, it indicates that an empty string value
for the field is acceptable and if it occurs then the
target should be set to NULL or \fBNone\fR, depending
on the type of the target.
This flag is typically used to allow a
feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to
\fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor.
If this bit is not set then empty strings are processed as strings,
which generally results in an error.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR

If this bit is one, it means that the \fIdefValue\fR field of the
entry should only be used for returning the default value in
\fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR.
In calls to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR no default will be supplied
for entries with this flag set;  it is assumed that the
caller has already supplied a default value in the target location.
This flag provides a performance optimization where it is expensive
to process the default string:  the client can compute the default
once, save the value, and provide it before calling
\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED\fR
This bit is
deprecated. It used to be set and cleared by \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR
so that callers could detect what entries were specified in
\fIargv\fR, but it was removed because it was inherently
thread-unsafe. Code that wishes to detect what options were specified
should use \fBTk_SetOptions\fR instead.
.PP
The \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR and \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR flags are typically
used to specify different default values for
monochrome and color displays.  This is done by creating two
entries in \fIspecs\fR that are identical except for their
\fIdefValue\fR and \fIspecFlags\fR fields.  One entry should have
the value \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR in its \fIspecFlags\fR and the







|
>













>





>





>













>










<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<







399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457








458
459
460
461
462
463
464
The \fIflags\fR argument passed to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is used
in conjunction with the \fIspecFlags\fR fields in the entries of \fIspecs\fR
to provide additional control over the processing of configuration
options.  These values are used in three different ways as
described below.
.PP
First, if the \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR has
the \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR bit set
(i.e., \fIflags\fR | \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR != 0),
then the option database and
\fIdefValue\fR fields are not used.  In this case, if an entry in
\fIspecs\fR does not match a field in \fIargv\fR then nothing happens:
the corresponding target is not modified.  This feature is useful
when the goal is to modify certain configuration options while
leaving others in their current state, such as when a \fBconfigure\fR
widget command is being processed.
.PP
Second, the \fIspecFlags\fR field of an entry in \fIspecs\fR may be used
to control the processing of that entry.  Each \fIspecFlags\fR
field may consists of an OR-ed combination of the following values:
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR
.
If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the
display for \fItkwin\fR has more than one bit plane.  If the display
is monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR
.
If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the
display for \fItkwin\fR has exactly one bit plane.  If the display
is not monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR
.
This bit is only relevant for some types of entries (see the
descriptions of the various entry types above).
If this bit is set, it indicates that an empty string value
for the field is acceptable and if it occurs then the
target should be set to NULL or \fBNone\fR, depending
on the type of the target.
This flag is typically used to allow a
feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to
\fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor.
If this bit is not set then empty strings are processed as strings,
which generally results in an error.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR
.
If this bit is one, it means that the \fIdefValue\fR field of the
entry should only be used for returning the default value in
\fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR.
In calls to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR no default will be supplied
for entries with this flag set;  it is assumed that the
caller has already supplied a default value in the target location.
This flag provides a performance optimization where it is expensive
to process the default string:  the client can compute the default
once, save the value, and provide it before calling
\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.








.PP
The \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR and \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR flags are typically
used to specify different default values for
monochrome and color displays.  This is done by creating two
entries in \fIspecs\fR that are identical except for their
\fIdefValue\fR and \fIspecFlags\fR fields.  One entry should have
the value \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR in its \fIspecFlags\fR and the
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
corresponding field of the widget record to null.
.SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES"
.PP
Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with additional
configuration types by writing procedures to parse and print options
of the a type and creating a structure pointing to those procedures:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_CustomOption {
    Tk_OptionParseProc *\fIparseProc\fR;
    Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fIprintProc\fR;
    void *\fIclientData\fR;
} \fBTk_CustomOption\fR;

typedef int \fBTk_OptionParseProc\fR(
        void *\fIclientData\fR,







|







548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
corresponding field of the widget record to null.
.SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES"
.PP
Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with additional
configuration types by writing procedures to parse and print options
of the a type and creating a structure pointing to those procedures:
.CS
typedef struct {
    Tk_OptionParseProc *\fIparseProc\fR;
    Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fIprintProc\fR;
    void *\fIclientData\fR;
} \fBTk_CustomOption\fR;

typedef int \fBTk_OptionParseProc\fR(
        void *\fIclientData\fR,

Changes to doc/ConfigWind.3.

35
36
37
38
39
40
41

42
43
44
45
46
47
48
\fBTk_SetWindowBorderPixmap\fR(\fItkwin, pixmap\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR(\fItkwin, colormap\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin, cursor\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_UndefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS XSetWindowAttributes borderWidth
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP "unsigned int" valueMask in
OR-ed mask of values like \fBCWX\fR or \fBCWBorderPixel\fR,
indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR or \fI*attsPtr\fR to use.







>







35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
\fBTk_SetWindowBorderPixmap\fR(\fItkwin, pixmap\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR(\fItkwin, colormap\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin, cursor\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_UndefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS XSetWindowAttributes borderWidth
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP "unsigned int" valueMask in
OR-ed mask of values like \fBCWX\fR or \fBCWBorderPixel\fR,
indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR or \fI*attsPtr\fR to use.

Changes to doc/CoordToWin.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_CoordsToWindow \- Find window containing a point
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_CoordsToWindow\fR(\fIrootX, rootY, tkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP int rootX in
X-coordinate (in root window coordinates).
.AP int rootY in
Y-coordinate (in root window coordinates).
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Tk_CoordsToWindow \- Find window containing a point
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_CoordsToWindow\fR(\fIrootX, rootY, tkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP int rootX in
X-coordinate (in root window coordinates).
.AP int rootY in
Y-coordinate (in root window coordinates).
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in

Changes to doc/CrtCmHdlr.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc in
Procedure to invoke whenever a ClientMessage X event occurs on any display.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be invoked







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc in
Procedure to invoke whenever a ClientMessage X event occurs on any display.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be invoked

Changes to doc/CrtConsoleChan.3.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
.SH NAME
Tk_InitConsoleChannels \- Install the console channels as standard channels
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR(\fIinterp\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *interp in
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter in which the console channels are created.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP







>







10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_InitConsoleChannels \- Install the console channels as standard channels
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *interp in
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter in which the console channels are created.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP

Changes to doc/CrtErrHdlr.3.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_ErrorHandler
\fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR(\fIdisplay, error, request, minor, proc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR(\fIhandler\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_ErrorHandler" clientData
.AP Display *display in
Display whose errors are to be handled.
.AP int error in
Match only error events with this value in the \fIerror_code\fR
field.  If \-1, then match any \fIerror_code\fR value.







>







14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_ErrorHandler
\fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR(\fIdisplay, error, request, minor, proc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR(\fIhandler\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_ErrorHandler" clientData
.AP Display *display in
Display whose errors are to be handled.
.AP int error in
Match only error events with this value in the \fIerror_code\fR
field.  If \-1, then match any \fIerror_code\fR value.

Changes to doc/CrtGenHdlr.3.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_GenericProc" clientData
.AP Tk_GenericProc *proc in
Procedure to invoke whenever any X event occurs on any display.
.AP void *clientData in
Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
.BE







>







13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_GenericProc" clientData
.AP Tk_GenericProc *proc in
Procedure to invoke whenever any X event occurs on any display.
.AP void *clientData in
Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
.BE

Changes to doc/CrtImgType.3.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateImageType, Tk_GetImageModelData, Tk_InitImageArgs \- define new kind of image
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateImageType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
.sp
void *
\fBTk_GetImageModelData\fR(\fIinterp, name, typePtrPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR(\fIinterp, argc, argvPtr\fR)
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtrPtr
.AP "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtr in
Structure that defines the new type of image.
For Tk 8.4 and earlier this must be static: a
pointer to this structure is retained by the image code.
In Tk 8.5, this limitation was relaxed.
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter in which image was created.
.AP "const char" *name in
Name of existing image.
.AP Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr out
Points to word in which to store a pointer to type information for
the given image, if it exists.
.AP int argc in
Number of arguments
.AP char ***argvPtr in/out
Pointer to argument list
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_CreateImageType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of image.
An image type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR











|








|
<














<
<







1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35


36
37
38
39
40
41
42
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateImageType, Tk_GetImageModelData \- define new kind of image
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateImageType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
.sp
void *
\fBTk_GetImageModelData\fR(\fIinterp, name, typePtrPtr\fR)
.fi

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtrPtr
.AP "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtr in
Structure that defines the new type of image.
For Tk 8.4 and earlier this must be static: a
pointer to this structure is retained by the image code.
In Tk 8.5, this limitation was relaxed.
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter in which image was created.
.AP "const char" *name in
Name of existing image.
.AP Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr out
Points to word in which to store a pointer to type information for
the given image, if it exists.


.AP char ***argvPtr in/out
Pointer to argument list
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_CreateImageType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of image.
An image type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
\fIimage manager\fR.
It consists of a collection of procedures plus three different
kinds of data structures.
The first data structure is a Tk_ImageType structure, which contains
the name of the image type and pointers to five procedures provided
by the image manager to deal with images of this type:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ImageType {
    const char *\fIname\fR;
    Tk_ImageCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageGetProc *\fIgetProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
} \fBTk_ImageType\fR;







|







51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
\fIimage manager\fR.
It consists of a collection of procedures plus three different
kinds of data structures.
The first data structure is a Tk_ImageType structure, which contains
the name of the image type and pointers to five procedures provided
by the image manager to deal with images of this type:
.CS
typedef struct {
    const char *\fIname\fR;
    Tk_ImageCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageGetProc *\fIgetProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
} \fBTk_ImageType\fR;
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
in the interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR, then \fI*typePtrPtr\fR is
filled in with type information for the image (the \fItypePtr\fR value
passed to \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR when the image type was registered)
and the return value is the clientData value returned by the
\fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created (this is typically a
pointer to the image model data structure).  If no such image exists
then NULL is returned and NULL is stored at \fI*typePtrPtr\fR.
.SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT"
.PP
In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR
was incompatibly different, with the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        char *\fIname\fR,
        int \fIargc\fR,
        char **\fIargv\fR,
        Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR,
        Tk_ImageModel \fImodel\fR,
        void **\fImodelDataPtr\fR);
.CE
Legacy programs and libraries dating from those days may still
contain code that defines extended Tk image types using the old
interface.  The Tk header file will still support this legacy
interface if the code is compiled with the macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR
defined.
.PP
When the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR legacy support is enabled, you may
see the routine \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR in use.  This was a migration
tool used to create stub-enabled extensions that could be loaded
into interps containing all versions of Tk 8.1 and later.  Tk 8.5 no longer
provides this routine, but uses a macro to convert any attempted
calls of this routine into an empty comment.  Any stub-enabled
extension providing an extended image type via the legacy interface
that is compiled against Tk 8.5 headers and linked against the
Tk 8.5 stub library will produce a file that can be loaded only
into interps with Tk 8.5 or later; that is, the normal stub-compatibility
rules.  If a developer needs to generate from such code a file
that is loadable into interps with Tk 8.4 or earlier, they must
use Tk 8.4 headers and stub libraries to do so.
.PP
Any new code written today should not make use of the legacy
interfaces.  Expect their support to go away in Tk 9.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
Tk_ImageChanged, Tk_GetImage, Tk_FreeImage, Tk_RedrawImage, Tk_SizeOfImage
.SH KEYWORDS
image manager, image type, instance, model







<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<




234
235
236
237
238
239
240




































241
242
243
244
in the interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR, then \fI*typePtrPtr\fR is
filled in with type information for the image (the \fItypePtr\fR value
passed to \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR when the image type was registered)
and the return value is the clientData value returned by the
\fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created (this is typically a
pointer to the image model data structure).  If no such image exists
then NULL is returned and NULL is stored at \fI*typePtrPtr\fR.




































.SH "SEE ALSO"
Tk_ImageChanged, Tk_GetImage, Tk_FreeImage, Tk_RedrawImage, Tk_SizeOfImage
.SH KEYWORDS
image manager, image type, instance, model

Changes to doc/CrtItemType.3.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19

20
21
22
23

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateItemType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
.sp
Tk_ItemType *
\fBTk_GetItemTypes\fR()

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ItemType *typePtr
.AP Tk_ItemType *typePtr in
Structure that defines the new type of canvas item.

.BE
.SH INTRODUCTION
.PP
\fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of canvas item
described by the \fItypePtr\fR argument.
An item type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR
argument to the \fBcreate\fR widget command for canvases, and







>




>







13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateItemType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
.sp
Tk_ItemType *
\fBTk_GetItemTypes\fR()
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ItemType *typePtr
.AP Tk_ItemType *typePtr in
Structure that defines the new type of canvas item.
Note that this is not \fIconst\fR; Tk may write to these structures.
.BE
.SH INTRODUCTION
.PP
\fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of canvas item
described by the \fItypePtr\fR argument.
An item type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR
argument to the \fBcreate\fR widget command for canvases, and
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
    size_t \fIitemSize\fR;
    Tk_ItemCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
    const Tk_ConfigSpec *\fIconfigSpecs\fR;
    Tk_ItemConfigureProc *\fIconfigProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemCoordProc *\fIcoordProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR;
    int \fIalwaysRedraw\fR;
    Tk_ItemPointProc *\fIpointProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemAreaProc *\fIareaProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *\fIpostscriptProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemScaleProc *\fIscaleProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemTranslateProc *\fItranslateProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemIndexProc *\fIindexProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemCursorProc *\fIicursorProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemSelectionProc *\fIselectionProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemInsertProc *\fIinsertProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemDCharsProc *\fIdCharsProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemType *\fInextPtr\fR;
.VS "8.7, TIP164"
    Tk_ItemRotateProc *\fIrotateProc\fR;
.VE "8.7, TIP164"
} \fBTk_ItemType\fR;
.CE
.PP
The fields of a Tk_ItemType structure are described in more detail







|










|







69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
    size_t \fIitemSize\fR;
    Tk_ItemCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
    const Tk_ConfigSpec *\fIconfigSpecs\fR;
    Tk_ItemConfigureProc *\fIconfigProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemCoordProc *\fIcoordProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR;
    int \fIflags\fR;
    Tk_ItemPointProc *\fIpointProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemAreaProc *\fIareaProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *\fIpostscriptProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemScaleProc *\fIscaleProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemTranslateProc *\fItranslateProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemIndexProc *\fIindexProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemCursorProc *\fIicursorProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemSelectionProc *\fIselectionProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemInsertProc *\fIinsertProc\fR;
    Tk_ItemDCharsProc *\fIdCharsProc\fR;
    struct Tk_ItemType *\fInextPtr\fR;
.VS "8.7, TIP164"
    Tk_ItemRotateProc *\fIrotateProc\fR;
.VE "8.7, TIP164"
} \fBTk_ItemType\fR;
.CE
.PP
The fields of a Tk_ItemType structure are described in more detail
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
defined by Tk via the type Tk_Item; the rest of the item
record is defined by the type manager.
A type manager must define its item records with a Tk_Item as
the first field.
For example, the item record for bitmap items is defined as follows:
.PP
.CS
typedef struct BitmapItem {
    Tk_Item \fIheader\fR;
    double \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR;
    Tk_Anchor \fIanchor\fR;
    Pixmap \fIbitmap\fR;
    XColor *\fIfgColor\fR;
    XColor *\fIbgColor\fR;
    GC \fIgc\fR;







|







111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
defined by Tk via the type Tk_Item; the rest of the item
record is defined by the type manager.
A type manager must define its item records with a Tk_Item as
the first field.
For example, the item record for bitmap items is defined as follows:
.PP
.CS
typedef struct {
    Tk_Item \fIheader\fR;
    double \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR;
    Tk_Anchor \fIanchor\fR;
    Pixmap \fIbitmap\fR;
    XColor *\fIfgColor\fR;
    XColor *\fIbgColor\fR;
    GC \fIgc\fR;
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
Once \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR returns, this name may be used
in \fBcreate\fR widget commands to create items of the new
type.
If there already existed an item type by this name then
the new item type replaces the old one.
.SS "FLAGS (IN ALWAYSREDRAW)"
.PP
The \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field (so named for historic reasons)
contains a collection of flag bits that modify how the canvas core interacts
with the item. The following bits are defined:
.TP
\fBTK_ALWAYS_REDRAW\fR
.
Indicates that the item should always be redrawn when any part of the canvas
is redrawn, rather than only when the bounding box of the item overlaps the
area being redrawn. This is used by window items, for example, which need to
unmap subwindows that are not on the screen.
.TP
\fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR
.
Indicates that operations which would otherwise take a string (or array of
strings) actually take a Tcl_Obj reference (or an array of such references).
The operations to which this applies are the \fIconfigProc\fR, the
\fIcoordProc\fR, the \fIcreateProc\fR, the \fIindexProc\fR and the
\fIinsertProc\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_MOVABLE_POINTS\fR
.VS 8.6
Indicates that the item supports the \fIdCharsProc\fR, \fIindexProc\fR and
\fIinsertProc\fR with the same semantics as Tk's built-in line and polygon
types, and that hence individual coordinate points can be moved. Must not be
set if any of the above methods is NULL.
.VE 8.6







|










<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<







167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184








185
186
187
188
189
190
191
Once \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR returns, this name may be used
in \fBcreate\fR widget commands to create items of the new
type.
If there already existed an item type by this name then
the new item type replaces the old one.
.SS "FLAGS (IN ALWAYSREDRAW)"
.PP
The \fItypePtr\->flags\fR field
contains a collection of flag bits that modify how the canvas core interacts
with the item. The following bits are defined:
.TP
\fBTK_ALWAYS_REDRAW\fR
.
Indicates that the item should always be redrawn when any part of the canvas
is redrawn, rather than only when the bounding box of the item overlaps the
area being redrawn. This is used by window items, for example, which need to
unmap subwindows that are not on the screen.
.TP








\fBTK_MOVABLE_POINTS\fR
.VS 8.6
Indicates that the item supports the \fIdCharsProc\fR, \fIindexProc\fR and
\fIinsertProc\fR with the same semantics as Tk's built-in line and polygon
types, and that hence individual coordinate points can be moved. Must not be
set if any of the above methods is NULL.
.VE 8.6
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
\fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to a newly-allocated item of
size \fItypePtr\->itemSize\fR.
Tk has already initialized the item's header (the first
\fBsizeof(Tk_ItemType)\fR bytes).
The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all of the
arguments to the \fBcreate\fR command after the \fItype\fR
argument.
Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobjv\fR parameter will actually
contain a pointer to an array of constant strings.
For example, in the widget command:
.PP
.CS
\fB\&.c create rectangle 10 20 50 50 \-fill black\fR
.CE
.PP
\fIobjc\fR will be \fB6\fR and \fIobjv\fR[0] will contain the







<
<
<







219
220
221
222
223
224
225



226
227
228
229
230
231
232
\fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to a newly-allocated item of
size \fItypePtr\->itemSize\fR.
Tk has already initialized the item's header (the first
\fBsizeof(Tk_ItemType)\fR bytes).
The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all of the
arguments to the \fBcreate\fR command after the \fItype\fR
argument.



For example, in the widget command:
.PP
.CS
\fB\&.c create rectangle 10 20 50 50 \-fill black\fR
.CE
.PP
\fIobjc\fR will be \fB6\fR and \fIobjv\fR[0] will contain the
257
258
259
260
261
262
263

264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.
This table will normally be used by \fItypePtr\->createProc\fR
and \fItypePtr\->configProc\fR, but Tk also uses it directly
to retrieve option information in the \fBitemcget\fR and
\fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands.
\fItypePtr\->configSpecs\fR must point to the configuration table
for this type.

Note: Tk provides a custom option type \fBtk_CanvasTagsOption\fR
for implementing the \fB\-tags\fR option; see an existing type
manager for an example of how to use it in \fIconfigSpecs\fR.
.SS CONFIGPROC
.PP
\fItypePtr\->configProc\fR is called by Tk whenever the
\fBitemconfigure\fR widget command is invoked to change the
configuration options for a canvas item.







>
|







248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.
This table will normally be used by \fItypePtr\->createProc\fR
and \fItypePtr\->configProc\fR, but Tk also uses it directly
to retrieve option information in the \fBitemcget\fR and
\fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands.
\fItypePtr\->configSpecs\fR must point to the configuration table
for this type.
.PP
Note that Tk provides a custom option type \fBtk_CanvasTagsOption\fR
for implementing the \fB\-tags\fR option; see an existing type
manager for an example of how to use it in \fIconfigSpecs\fR.
.SS CONFIGPROC
.PP
\fItypePtr\->configProc\fR is called by Tk whenever the
\fBitemconfigure\fR widget command is invoked to change the
configuration options for a canvas item.
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
        int \fIflags\fR);
.CE
.PP
The \fIinterp\fR argument identifies the interpreter in which the
widget command was invoked, \fIcanvas\fR is a handle for the canvas
widget, and \fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to the item being configured.
\fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR contain the configuration options.
Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobjv\fR parameter will actually
contain a pointer to an array of constant strings.
For example, if the following command is invoked:
.PP
.CS
\fB\&.c itemconfigure 2 \-fill red \-outline black\fR
.CE
.PP
\fIobjc\fR is \fB4\fR and \fIobjv\fR contains the string objects \fB\-fill\fR







<
<
<







273
274
275
276
277
278
279



280
281
282
283
284
285
286
        int \fIflags\fR);
.CE
.PP
The \fIinterp\fR argument identifies the interpreter in which the
widget command was invoked, \fIcanvas\fR is a handle for the canvas
widget, and \fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to the item being configured.
\fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR contain the configuration options.



For example, if the following command is invoked:
.PP
.CS
\fB\&.c itemconfigure 2 \-fill red \-outline black\fR
.CE
.PP
\fIobjc\fR is \fB4\fR and \fIobjv\fR contains the string objects \fB\-fill\fR
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
        int \fIobjc\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[]);
.CE
.PP
The arguments \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR
all have the standard meanings, and \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR
describe the coordinate arguments.
Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobjv\fR parameter will actually
contain a pointer to an array of constant strings.
For example, if the following widget command is invoked:
.PP
.CS
\fB\&.c coords 2 30 90\fR
.CE
.PP
\fIobjc\fR will be \fB2\fR and \fBobjv\fR will contain the integer objects







<
<
<







309
310
311
312
313
314
315



316
317
318
319
320
321
322
        int \fIobjc\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[]);
.CE
.PP
The arguments \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR
all have the standard meanings, and \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR
describe the coordinate arguments.



For example, if the following widget command is invoked:
.PP
.CS
\fB\&.c coords 2 30 90\fR
.CE
.PP
\fIobjc\fR will be \fB2\fR and \fBobjv\fR will contain the integer objects
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
will not necessarily be the same as those in the canvas.
\fIdisplayProc\fR should call \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR
to transform coordinates from those of the canvas to those
of \fIdst\fR.
.PP
Normally an item's \fIdisplayProc\fR is only invoked if the item
overlaps the area being displayed.
However, if bit zero of \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR is 1,
(i.e.\|
.QW "\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw & 1 == 1\fR" )
then \fIdisplayProc\fR is invoked during every redisplay operation,
even if the item does not overlap the area of redisplay; this is useful for
cases such as window items, where the subwindow needs to be unmapped when it
is off the screen.
.SS POINTPROC
.PP
\fItypePtr\->pointProc\fR is invoked by Tk to find out how close







|

|







383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
will not necessarily be the same as those in the canvas.
\fIdisplayProc\fR should call \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR
to transform coordinates from those of the canvas to those
of \fIdst\fR.
.PP
Normally an item's \fIdisplayProc\fR is only invoked if the item
overlaps the area being displayed.
However, if bit zero of \fItypePtr\->flags\fR is 1,
(i.e.\|
.QW "\fItypePtr\->flags & 1 == 1\fR" )
then \fIdisplayProc\fR is invoked during every redisplay operation,
even if the item does not overlap the area of redisplay; this is useful for
cases such as window items, where the subwindow needs to be unmapped when it
is off the screen.
.SS POINTPROC
.PP
\fItypePtr\->pointProc\fR is invoked by Tk to find out how close
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
the item is to be rotated, and \fIangleRad\fR gives the anticlockwise
rotation to be applied in radians.
The item should adjust the coordinates of its control points so that where
they used to have coordinates \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, they will have new
coordinates \fIx\(fm\fR and \fIy\(fm\fR, where
.PP
.CS
\fIrelX\fR = \fIx\fR - \fIoriginX\fR
\fIrelY\fR = \fIy\fR - \fIoriginY\fR
\fIx\(fm\fR = \fIoriginX\fR + \fIrelX\fR \(mu cos(\fIangleRad\fR) + \fIrelY\fR \(mu sin(\fIangleRad\fR)
\fIy\(fm\fR = \fIoriginY\fR \(mi \fIrelX\fR \(mu sin(\fIangleRad\fR) + \fIrelY\fR \(mu cos(\fIangleRad\fR)
.CE
.PP
The control points for an item are not necessarily the coordinates provided to
the item when it is created (or via the \fItypePtr\->coordProc\fR), but could
instead be derived from them.







|
|







559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
the item is to be rotated, and \fIangleRad\fR gives the anticlockwise
rotation to be applied in radians.
The item should adjust the coordinates of its control points so that where
they used to have coordinates \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, they will have new
coordinates \fIx\(fm\fR and \fIy\(fm\fR, where
.PP
.CS
\fIrelX\fR = \fIx\fR \(mi \fIoriginX\fR
\fIrelY\fR = \fIy\fR \(mi \fIoriginY\fR
\fIx\(fm\fR = \fIoriginX\fR + \fIrelX\fR \(mu cos(\fIangleRad\fR) + \fIrelY\fR \(mu sin(\fIangleRad\fR)
\fIy\(fm\fR = \fIoriginY\fR \(mi \fIrelX\fR \(mu sin(\fIangleRad\fR) + \fIrelY\fR \(mu cos(\fIangleRad\fR)
.CE
.PP
The control points for an item are not necessarily the coordinates provided to
the item when it is created (or via the \fItypePtr\->coordProc\fR), but could
instead be derived from them.
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
.CE
.PP
The \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments all
have the usual meaning.
\fIindexObj\fR contains a textual description of an index,
and \fIindexPtr\fR points to an integer value that should be
filled in with a numerical index.
Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIindexObj\fR parameter will
actually contain a pointer to a constant string.
It is up to the type manager to decide what forms of index
are supported (e.g., numbers, \fBinsert\fR, \fBsel.first\fR,
\fBend\fR, etc.).
\fIindexProc\fR should return a Tcl completion code and set
the interpreter result in the event of an error.
.SS ICURSORPROC
.PP







<
<
<







598
599
600
601
602
603
604



605
606
607
608
609
610
611
.CE
.PP
The \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments all
have the usual meaning.
\fIindexObj\fR contains a textual description of an index,
and \fIindexPtr\fR points to an integer value that should be
filled in with a numerical index.



It is up to the type manager to decide what forms of index
are supported (e.g., numbers, \fBinsert\fR, \fBsel.first\fR,
\fBend\fR, etc.).
\fIindexProc\fR should return a Tcl completion code and set
the interpreter result in the event of an error.
.SS ICURSORPROC
.PP
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
.CE
.PP
\fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings.
\fIindex\fR is an index into the item's text, as returned by a
previous call to \fItypePtr\->insertProc\fR, and \fIobj\fR
contains new text to insert just before the character given
by \fIindex\fR.
Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobj\fR parameter will
actually contain a pointer to a constant string to be inserted.
If the item supports modification of the coordinates list by this
.PP
The type manager should insert the text and recompute the bounding
box in the item's header.
.SS DCHARSPROC
.PP
\fItypePtr\->dCharsProc\fR is invoked by Tk during the \fBdchars\fR







<
<
<







681
682
683
684
685
686
687



688
689
690
691
692
693
694
.CE
.PP
\fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings.
\fIindex\fR is an index into the item's text, as returned by a
previous call to \fItypePtr\->insertProc\fR, and \fIobj\fR
contains new text to insert just before the character given
by \fIindex\fR.



If the item supports modification of the coordinates list by this
.PP
The type manager should insert the text and recompute the bounding
box in the item's header.
.SS DCHARSPROC
.PP
\fItypePtr\->dCharsProc\fR is invoked by Tk during the \fBdchars\fR

Changes to doc/CrtPhImgFmt.3.

54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
An image file format handler consists of a collection of procedures
plus a \fBTk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3\fR structure, which contains the
name of the image file format and pointers to six procedures provided
by the handler to deal with files and strings in this format.  The
Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 structure contains the following fields:
.VS 8.7
.CS
typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 {
    const char *\fIname\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileMatchProcVersion3 *\fIfileMatchProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringMatchProcVersion3 *\fIstringMatchProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileReadProcVersion3 *\fIfileReadProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringReadProcVersion3 *\fIstringReadProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileWriteProcVersion3 *\fIfileWriteProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringWriteProcVersion3 *\fIstringWriteProc\fR;







|







54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
An image file format handler consists of a collection of procedures
plus a \fBTk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3\fR structure, which contains the
name of the image file format and pointers to six procedures provided
by the handler to deal with files and strings in this format.  The
Tk_PhotoImageFormatVersion3 structure contains the following fields:
.VS 8.7
.CS
typedef struct {
    const char *\fIname\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileMatchProcVersion3 *\fIfileMatchProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringMatchProcVersion3 *\fIstringMatchProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileReadProcVersion3 *\fIfileReadProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringReadProcVersion3 *\fIstringReadProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileWriteProcVersion3 *\fIfileWriteProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringWriteProcVersion3 *\fIstringWriteProc\fR;
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
return 0.
.SS FILEREADPROC
.PP
\fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
Tk to call to read data from an image file into a photo image.
\fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageFileReadProc\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        Tcl_Channel \fIchan\fR,
        const char *\fIfileName\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR,
        PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR,
        int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR,







|







147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
return 0.
.SS FILEREADPROC
.PP
\fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
Tk to call to read data from an image file into a photo image.
\fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageFileReadProcVersion3\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        Tcl_Channel \fIchan\fR,
        const char *\fIfileName\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR,
        PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR,
        int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR,
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
.SS STRINGREADPROC
.PP
\fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure
for Tk to call to read data from a string into a photo image.
\fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringReadProc\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIdata\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR,
        PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR,
        int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR,
        int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR,







|







180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
.SS STRINGREADPROC
.PP
\fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure
for Tk to call to read data from a string into a photo image.
\fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringReadProcVersion3\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIdata\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR,
        PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR,
        int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR,
        int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR,
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
.SS FILEWRITEPROC
.PP
\fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
Tk to call to write data from a photo image to a file.
\fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageFileWriteProc\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        const char *\fIfileName\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR,
        Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR);
.CE
The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was







|







212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
.SS FILEWRITEPROC
.PP
\fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
Tk to call to write data from a photo image to a file.
\fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageFileWriteProcVersion3\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        const char *\fIfileName\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR,
        Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR);
.CE
The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
.SS STRINGWRITEPROC
.PP
\fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure
for Tk to call to translate image data from a photo image into a
string.
\fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringWriteProc\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR,
        Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR);
.CE
The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was
invoked to convert the image; it should be used for reporting errors.







|







241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
.SS STRINGWRITEPROC
.PP
\fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure
for Tk to call to translate image data from a photo image into a
string.
\fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringWriteProcVersion3\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fImetadataIn\fR,
        Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR);
.CE
The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was
invoked to convert the image; it should be used for reporting errors.
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309



310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346


347
348
349
350
351
352
353
Image formats contain a description of the image bitmap and may
contain additional information like image resolution or comments.
Image metadata may be read from image files and passed to the script
level by including dictionary keys into the metadata property of the
image. Image metadata may be written to image data on file write or
image data output.
.PP
.PP
.SS "METADATA KEYS"
.PP
The metadata may contain any key.
A driver will handle only a set of dictionary keys documented in the
documentation. See the photo image manual page for currently defined
keys for the system drivers.
.PP
The following rules may give guidance to name metadata keys:
.RS
Abreviation are in upper case
.RE
.RS
Words are in US English in small case (except proper nouns)
.RE
.RS
Vertical DPI is expressed as DPI/aspect. The reason is, that some
image formats may feature aspect and no resolution value.
.RE
.SS "METADATA INPUT"
.PP
Each driver function gets a Tcl object pointer \fBmetadataIn\fR as
parameter. This parameter serves to input a metadata dict to the
driver function.
It may be NULL to flag that the metadata dict is empty.
.PP
A typical driver code snipped to check for a metadata key is:
.CS
if (NULL != metadataIn) {
    Tcl_Obj *itemData;
    Tcl_DictObjGet(interp, metadataIn, Tcl_NewStringObj("Comment",-1), &itemData));



.CE
.PP
The \-metadata command option data of the following commands is passed
to the driver: \fBimage create\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBput\fR,
\fBread\fR, \fBdata\fR and \fBwrite\fR.
If no \-metadata command option available or not given, the metadata
property of the image is passed to the driver using the following
commands: \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBdata\fR and \fBwrite\fR.
.PP
Note that setting the \-metadata property of an image using
\fBconfigure\fR without any other option does not invoke any driver
function.
.PP
The metadata dictionary is not suited to pass options to the driver
related to the bitmap representation, as the image bitmap is not
recreated on a metadata change. The format string should be used for
this purpose.
.PP
.SS "METADATA OUTPUT"
.PP
The image match and read driver functions may set keys in a prepared
matadata dict to return them.
Those functions get a Tcl object pointer \fBmetadataOut\fR as
parameter.
metadataOut may be NULL to indicate, that no metadata return is
attended(\fBput\fR, \fBread\fR subcommands).
\fBmetadataOut\fR is initialized to an empty unshared dict object if
metadata return is attended (\fBimage create\fR command, \fBconfigure\fR
subcommand). The driver may set dict keys in this object to return
metadata.
If a match function succeeds, the metadataOut pointer is passed to the
corresponding read function.
.PP
A sample driver code snippet is:
.CS
if (NULL != metadataOut) {
    Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, metadataOut, Tcl_NewStringObj("XMP",-1), Tcl_NewStringObj(xmpMetadata);


.CE
.PP
The metadata keys returned by the driver are merged into the present
metadata property of the image or into the metadata dict given by the
\fB\-metadata\fR command line option.
At the script level, the command \fBimage create\fR and the
\fBconfigure\fR method may return metadata from the driver.







<








|
|
|
<

|
<


<











|
>
>
>


|


|



|











|
|

|
|
|









|
>
>







272
273
274
275
276
277
278

279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289

290
291

292
293

294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
Image formats contain a description of the image bitmap and may
contain additional information like image resolution or comments.
Image metadata may be read from image files and passed to the script
level by including dictionary keys into the metadata property of the
image. Image metadata may be written to image data on file write or
image data output.
.PP

.SS "METADATA KEYS"
.PP
The metadata may contain any key.
A driver will handle only a set of dictionary keys documented in the
documentation. See the photo image manual page for currently defined
keys for the system drivers.
.PP
The following rules may give guidance to name metadata keys:
.IP \(bu
Abbreviations are in upper case.
.IP \(bu

Words are in US English in small case (except proper nouns)
.IP \(bu

Vertical DPI is expressed as DPI/aspect. The reason is, that some
image formats may feature aspect and no resolution value.

.SS "METADATA INPUT"
.PP
Each driver function gets a Tcl object pointer \fBmetadataIn\fR as
parameter. This parameter serves to input a metadata dict to the
driver function.
It may be NULL to flag that the metadata dict is empty.
.PP
A typical driver code snipped to check for a metadata key is:
.CS
if (NULL != metadataIn) {
    Tcl_Obj *itemData;
    Tcl_DictObjGet(interp, metadataIn, Tcl_NewStringObj("Comment",-1),
            &itemData));
    // use value reference in itemData
}
.CE
.PP
The \fB\-metadata\fR command option data of the following commands is passed
to the driver: \fBimage create\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBput\fR,
\fBread\fR, \fBdata\fR and \fBwrite\fR.
If no \fB\-metadata\fR command option available or not given, the metadata
property of the image is passed to the driver using the following
commands: \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBdata\fR and \fBwrite\fR.
.PP
Note that setting the \fB\-metadata\fR property of an image using
\fBconfigure\fR without any other option does not invoke any driver
function.
.PP
The metadata dictionary is not suited to pass options to the driver
related to the bitmap representation, as the image bitmap is not
recreated on a metadata change. The format string should be used for
this purpose.
.PP
.SS "METADATA OUTPUT"
.PP
The image match and read driver functions may set keys in a prepared
metadata dict to return them.
Those functions get a Tcl object pointer \fImetadataOut\fR as
parameter.
\fImetadataOut\fR may be NULL to indicate, that no metadata return is
required (\fBput\fR, \fBread\fR subcommands). The variable pointed to
by \fImetadataOut\fR is initialized to an empty unshared dict object if
metadata return is attended (\fBimage create\fR command, \fBconfigure\fR
subcommand). The driver may set dict keys in this object to return
metadata.
If a match function succeeds, the metadataOut pointer is passed to the
corresponding read function.
.PP
A sample driver code snippet is:
.CS
if (NULL != metadataOut) {
    Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, metadataOut, Tcl_NewStringObj("XMP",-1),
            Tcl_NewStringObj(xmpMetadata));
}
.CE
.PP
The metadata keys returned by the driver are merged into the present
metadata property of the image or into the metadata dict given by the
\fB\-metadata\fR command line option.
At the script level, the command \fBimage create\fR and the
\fBconfigure\fR method may return metadata from the driver.
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
Structure that defines the new file format.
.BE
.SS DESCRIPTION
A driver using the version 2 interface invokes \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR
for driver registration. The Tk_PhotoImageFormat structure
contains the following fields:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat {
    const char *\fIname\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *\fIfileMatchProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringMatchProc *\fIstringMatchProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileReadProc *\fIfileReadProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringReadProc *\fIstringReadProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileWriteProc *\fIfileWriteProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *\fIstringWriteProc\fR;







|







373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
Structure that defines the new file format.
.BE
.SS DESCRIPTION
A driver using the version 2 interface invokes \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR
for driver registration. The Tk_PhotoImageFormat structure
contains the following fields:
.CS
typedef struct {
    const char *\fIname\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *\fIfileMatchProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringMatchProc *\fIstringMatchProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileReadProc *\fIfileReadProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringReadProc *\fIstringReadProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageFileWriteProc *\fIfileWriteProc\fR;
    Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *\fIstringWriteProc\fR;
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
\fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringWriteProc\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR);
.CE
.PP
.SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT"
.PP
In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of all the function pointer
types stored in fields of a \fBTk_PhotoImageFormat\fR struct were
incompatibly different.  Legacy programs and libraries dating from
those days may still contain code that defines extended Tk photo image
formats using the old interface.  The Tk header file will still support
this legacy interface if the code is compiled with the
macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR defined.  Alternatively, the legacy interfaces
are used if the first character of \fIformatPtr->name\fR is an
uppercase ASCII character (\fBA\fR-\fBZ\fR), and explicit casts
are used to forgive the type mismatch.  For example,
.CS
static Tk_PhotoImageFormat myFormat = {
    "MyFormat",
    (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *) FileMatch,
    NULL,
    (Tk_ImageFileReadProc *) FileRead,
    NULL,
    NULL,
    NULL
};
.CE
would define a minimal \fBTk_PhotoImageFormat\fR that operates provide
only file reading capability, where \fBFileMatch\fR and \fBFileRead\fR
are written according to the legacy interfaces of Tk 8.2 or earlier.
.PP
Any stub-enabled extension providing an extended photo image format
via the legacy interface enabled by the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR macro
that is compiled against Tk 8.5 headers and linked against the
Tk 8.5 stub library will produce a file that can be loaded only
into interps with Tk 8.5 or later; that is, the normal stub-compatibility
rules.  If a developer needs to generate from such code a file
that is loadable into interps with Tk 8.4 or earlier, they must
use Tk 8.4 headers and stub libraries to do so.
.PP
Any new code written today should not make use of the legacy
interfaces.  Expect their support to go away in Tk 9.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
Tk_FindPhoto, Tk_PhotoPutBlock
.SH KEYWORDS
photo image, image file







<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<




454
455
456
457
458
459
460







































461
462
463
464
\fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringWriteProc\fR(
        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
        Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR);
.CE







































.SH "SEE ALSO"
Tk_FindPhoto, Tk_PhotoPutBlock
.SH KEYWORDS
photo image, image file

Changes to doc/CrtSelHdlr.3.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_SelectionProc clientData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window for which \fIproc\fR will provide selection information.
.AP Atom selection in
The name of the selection for which \fIproc\fR will provide
selection information.







>







13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_SelectionProc clientData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window for which \fIproc\fR will provide selection information.
.AP Atom selection in
The name of the selection for which \fIproc\fR will provide
selection information.

Changes to doc/CrtWindow.3.

22
23
24
25
26
27
28

29
30
31
32
33
34
35
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, pathName, topLevScreen\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR(\fItkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *topLevScreen
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
Tcl interpreter to use for error reporting.  If no error occurs,
then \fI*interp\fR is not modified.
.AP Tk_Window parent in
Token for the window that is to serve as the logical parent of







>







22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, pathName, topLevScreen\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *topLevScreen
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
Tcl interpreter to use for error reporting.  If no error occurs,
then \fI*interp\fR is not modified.
.AP Tk_Window parent in
Token for the window that is to serve as the logical parent of

Changes to doc/DeleteImg.3.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
.SH NAME
Tk_DeleteImage \- Destroy an image.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteImage\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter for which the image was created.
.AP "const char" *name in
Name of the image.
.BE







>







10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_DeleteImage \- Destroy an image.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteImage\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter for which the image was created.
.AP "const char" *name in
Name of the image.
.BE

Changes to doc/DrawFocHlt.3.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_DrawFocusHighlight \- draw the traversal highlight ring for a widget
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_DrawFocusHighlight(\fItkwin, gc, width, drawable\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window for which the highlight is being drawn.  Used to retrieve
the window's dimensions, among other things.
.AP GC gc in
Graphics context to use for drawing the highlight.







|
>







9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_DrawFocusHighlight \- draw the traversal highlight ring for a widget
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_DrawFocusHighlight\fR(\fItkwin, gc, width, drawable\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window for which the highlight is being drawn.  Used to retrieve
the window's dimensions, among other things.
.AP GC gc in
Graphics context to use for drawing the highlight.

Changes to doc/EventHndlr.3.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
\fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_GetButtonMask\fR(\fIbutton\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SendVirtualEvent\fR(\fItkwin, eventName, detail\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "unsigned long" clientData
.AP unsigned button in
Button number.
.AP "const char" *eventName in
The name of the virtual event.
.AP Tcl_Obj *detail in







>







17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
\fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_GetButtonMask\fR(\fIbutton\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SendVirtualEvent\fR(\fItkwin, eventName, detail\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "unsigned long" clientData
.AP unsigned button in
Button number.
.AP "const char" *eventName in
The name of the virtual event.
.AP Tcl_Obj *detail in

Changes to doc/FindPhoto.3.

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45

46
47
48
49
50
51
52
int
\fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR(\fIinterp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,\
zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR(\fIhandle, blockPtr\fR)
.sp
void
\fBTk_PhotoBlank\fR(\fIhandle\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR(\fIinterp, handle, width, height\fR)
.sp
void
\fBTk_PhotoGetSize\fR(\fIhandle, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR(\fIinterp. handle, width, height\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_PhotoImageBlock window_path
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter in which image was created and in which error reporting is
to be done.
.AP "const char" *imageName in
Name of the photo image.







<





<




>







28
29
30
31
32
33
34

35
36
37
38
39

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
int
\fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR(\fIinterp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,\
zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR(\fIhandle, blockPtr\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_PhotoBlank\fR(\fIhandle\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR(\fIinterp, handle, width, height\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_PhotoGetSize\fR(\fIhandle, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR(\fIinterp. handle, width, height\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_PhotoImageBlock window_path
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter in which image was created and in which error reporting is
to be done.
.AP "const char" *imageName in
Name of the photo image.

Changes to doc/FontId.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Tk_FontId, Tk_GetFontMetrics, Tk_PostscriptFontName \- accessor functions for
fonts
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Font
\fBTk_FontId(\fItkfont\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_GetFontMetrics(\fItkfont, fmPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_PostscriptFontName(\fItkfont, dsPtr\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_FontMetrics *dsPtr
.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
Opaque font token being queried.  Must have been returned by a previous
call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
.AP Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr out
Pointer to structure in which the font metrics for \fItkfont\fR will







|

|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Tk_FontId, Tk_GetFontMetrics, Tk_PostscriptFontName \- accessor functions for
fonts
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Font
\fBTk_FontId\fR(\fItkfont\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR(\fItkfont, fmPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_PostscriptFontName\fR(\fItkfont, dsPtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_FontMetrics *dsPtr
.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
Opaque font token being queried.  Must have been returned by a previous
call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
.AP Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr out
Pointer to structure in which the font metrics for \fItkfont\fR will
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
Any other font families may not print correctly because the computed
Postscript font name may be incorrect or not exist on the printer.
.SH "DATA STRUCTURES"
.PP
The \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR data structure is used by \fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR to
return information about a font and is defined as follows:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_FontMetrics {
    int \fIascent\fR;
    int \fIdescent\fR;
    int \fIlinespace\fR;
} \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR;
.CE
.PP
The \fIascent\fR field is the amount in pixels that the tallest







|







66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Any other font families may not print correctly because the computed
Postscript font name may be incorrect or not exist on the printer.
.SH "DATA STRUCTURES"
.PP
The \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR data structure is used by \fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR to
return information about a font and is defined as follows:
.CS
typedef struct {
    int \fIascent\fR;
    int \fIdescent\fR;
    int \fIlinespace\fR;
} \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR;
.CE
.PP
The \fIascent\fR field is the amount in pixels that the tallest

Changes to doc/GeomReq.3.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

40
41

42
43

44
45

46
47
48
49
50
51
52
\fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR(\fItkwin, minWidth, minHeight\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR(\fItkwin, width\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR(\fItkwin, left, right, top, bottom\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS baseHeight clientData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window for which geometry is being requested.
.AP int reqWidth in
Desired width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int reqHeight in
Desired height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int minWidth in
Desired minimum requested width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int minHeight in
Desired minimum requested height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int width in
Space to leave for internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int left in
Space to leave for left side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.

.AP int right in
Space to leave for right side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.

.AP int top in
Space to leave for top side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.

.AP int bottom in
Space to leave for bottom side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR is called by widget code to indicate its
preference for the dimensions of a particular window.  The arguments
to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR are made available to the geometry
manager for the window, which then decides on the actual geometry







>















|
>

|
>

|
>

|
>







17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
\fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR(\fItkwin, minWidth, minHeight\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR(\fItkwin, width\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR(\fItkwin, left, right, top, bottom\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS baseHeight clientData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window for which geometry is being requested.
.AP int reqWidth in
Desired width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int reqHeight in
Desired height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int minWidth in
Desired minimum requested width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int minHeight in
Desired minimum requested height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int width in
Space to leave for internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
.AP int left in
Space to leave for left side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR,
in pixel units.
.AP int right in
Space to leave for right side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR,
in pixel units.
.AP int top in
Space to leave for top side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR,
in pixel units.
.AP int bottom in
Space to leave for bottom side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR,
in pixel units.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR is called by widget code to indicate its
preference for the dimensions of a particular window.  The arguments
to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR are made available to the geometry
manager for the window, which then decides on the actual geometry

Changes to doc/GetAnchor.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
.SH NAME
Tk_GetAnchorFromObj, Tk_GetAnchor, Tk_NameOfAnchor \- translate between strings and anchor positions
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, anchorPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetAnchor(\fIinterp, string, anchorPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfAnchor(\fIanchor\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_Anchor" *anchorPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
String value contains name of anchor point:
.QW \fBn\fR  ,







|


|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
.SH NAME
Tk_GetAnchorFromObj, Tk_GetAnchor, Tk_NameOfAnchor \- translate between strings and anchor positions
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, anchorPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetAnchor\fR(\fIinterp, string, anchorPtr\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfAnchor\fR(\fIanchor\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_Anchor" *anchorPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
String value contains name of anchor point:
.QW \fBn\fR  ,

Changes to doc/GetBitmap.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
.SH NAME
Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj, Tk_GetBitmap, Tk_GetBitmapFromObj, Tk_DefineBitmap, Tk_NameOfBitmap, Tk_SizeOfBitmap, Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, Tk_FreeBitmap \- maintain database of single-plane pixmaps
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Pixmap
\fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
Pixmap
\fBTk_GetBitmap(\fIinterp, tkwin, info\fB)\fR
.sp
Pixmap
\fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_DefineBitmap(\fIinterp, name, source, width, height\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_SizeOfBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting; if NULL then no error message
is left after errors.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which the bitmap will be used.







|


|


|


|


|

|

|

|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
.SH NAME
Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj, Tk_GetBitmap, Tk_GetBitmapFromObj, Tk_DefineBitmap, Tk_NameOfBitmap, Tk_SizeOfBitmap, Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, Tk_FreeBitmap \- maintain database of single-plane pixmaps
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Pixmap
\fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
Pixmap
\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, info\fR)
.sp
Pixmap
\fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR(\fIinterp, name, source, width, height\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfBitmap\fR(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SizeOfBitmap\fR(\fIdisplay, bitmap, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting; if NULL then no error message
is left after errors.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which the bitmap will be used.
76
77
78
79
80
81
82

83
84
85
86

87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
\fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR returns a Pixmap identifier for a bitmap
that matches the description in \fIobjPtr\fR and is suitable for use
in \fItkwin\fR.  It re-uses an existing bitmap, if possible, and
creates a new one otherwise.  \fIObjPtr\fR's value must have one
of the following forms:
.TP 20
\fB@\fIfileName\fR

\fIFileName\fR must be the name of a file containing a bitmap
description in the standard X11 format.
.TP 20
\fIname\fR

\fIName\fR must be the name of a bitmap defined previously with
a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR.  The following names are pre-defined
by Tk:
.RS
.TP 12
\fBerror\fR
The international
.QW don't
symbol:  a circle with a diagonal line across it.
.TP 12
\fBgray75\fR
75% gray: a checkerboard pattern where three out of four bits are on.
.TP 12
\fBgray50\fR
50% gray: a checkerboard pattern where every other bit is on.
.TP 12
\fBgray25\fR
25% gray: a checkerboard pattern where one out of every four bits is on.
.TP 12
\fBgray12\fR
12.5% gray: a pattern where one-eighth of the bits are on, consisting of
every fourth pixel in every other row.
.TP 12
\fBhourglass\fR
An hourglass symbol.
.TP 12
\fBinfo\fR
A large letter
.QW i .
.TP 12
\fBquesthead\fR
The silhouette of a human head, with a question mark in it.
.TP 12
\fBquestion\fR
A large question-mark.
.TP 12
\fBwarning\fR
A large exclamation point.
.PP
In addition, the following pre-defined names are available only on the
\fBMacintosh\fR platform:
.TP 12
\fBdocument\fR
A generic document.
.TP 12
\fBstationery\fR
Document stationery.
.TP 12
\fBedition\fR
The \fIedition\fR symbol.
.TP 12
\fBapplication\fR
Generic application icon.
.TP 12
\fBaccessory\fR
A desk accessory.
.TP 12
\fBfolder\fR
Generic folder icon.
.TP 12
\fBpfolder\fR
A locked folder.
.TP 12
\fBtrash\fR
A trash can.
.TP 12
\fBfloppy\fR
A floppy disk.
.TP 12
\fBramdisk\fR
A floppy disk with chip.
.TP 12
\fBcdrom\fR
A cd disk icon.
.TP 12
\fBpreferences\fR
A folder with prefs symbol.
.TP 12
\fBquerydoc\fR
A database document icon.
.TP 12
\fBstop\fR
A stop sign.
.TP 12
\fBnote\fR
A face with balloon words.
.TP 12
\fBcaution\fR
A triangle with an exclamation point.
.RE
.LP
Under normal conditions, \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR
returns an identifier for the requested bitmap.  If an error
occurs in creating the bitmap, such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers
to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error







>




>




<
|



<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|


<
|

<
|


<
|

<
|

<
|




<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|







77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93

94
95
96
97

98
99

100
101

102
103

104
105
106

107
108

109
110
111

112
113

114
115

116
117
118
119
120

121
122

123
124

125
126

127
128

129
130

131
132

133
134

135
136

137
138

139
140

141
142

143
144

145
146

147
148

149
150

151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
\fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR returns a Pixmap identifier for a bitmap
that matches the description in \fIobjPtr\fR and is suitable for use
in \fItkwin\fR.  It re-uses an existing bitmap, if possible, and
creates a new one otherwise.  \fIObjPtr\fR's value must have one
of the following forms:
.TP 20
\fB@\fIfileName\fR
.
\fIFileName\fR must be the name of a file containing a bitmap
description in the standard X11 format.
.TP 20
\fIname\fR
.
\fIName\fR must be the name of a bitmap defined previously with
a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR.  The following names are pre-defined
by Tk:
.RS

.IP \fBerror\fR 12
The international
.QW don't
symbol:  a circle with a diagonal line across it.

.IP \fBgray75\fR 12
75% gray: a checkerboard pattern where three out of four bits are on.

.IP \fBgray50\fR 12
50% gray: a checkerboard pattern where every other bit is on.

.IP \fBgray25\fR 12
25% gray: a checkerboard pattern where one out of every four bits is on.

.IP \fBgray12\fR 12
12.5% gray: a pattern where one-eighth of the bits are on, consisting of
every fourth pixel in every other row.

.IP \fBhourglass\fR 12
An hourglass symbol.

.IP \fBinfo\fR 12
A large letter
.QW i .

.IP \fBquesthead\fR 12
The silhouette of a human head, with a question mark in it.

.IP \fBquestion\fR 12
A large question-mark.

.IP \fBwarning\fR 12
A large exclamation point.
.PP
In addition, the following pre-defined names are available only on the
\fBMacintosh\fR platform:

.IP \fBdocument\fR 12
A generic document.

.IP \fBstationery\fR 12
Document stationery.

.IP \fBedition\fR 12
The \fIedition\fR symbol.

.IP \fBapplication\fR 12
Generic application icon.

.IP \fBaccessory\fR 12
A desk accessory.

.IP \fBfolder\fR 12
Generic folder icon.

.IP \fBpfolder\fR 12
A locked folder.

.IP \fBtrash\fR 12
A trash can.

.IP \fBfloppy\fR 12
A floppy disk.

.IP \fBramdisk\fR 12
A floppy disk with chip.

.IP \fBcdrom\fR 12
A cd disk icon.

.IP \fBpreferences\fR 12
A folder with prefs symbol.

.IP \fBquerydoc\fR 12
A database document icon.

.IP \fBstop\fR 12
A stop sign.

.IP \fBnote\fR 12
A face with balloon words.

.IP \fBcaution\fR 12
A triangle with an exclamation point.
.RE
.LP
Under normal conditions, \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR
returns an identifier for the requested bitmap.  If an error
occurs in creating the bitmap, such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers
to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
have been used in a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR.
The arguments \fIsource\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR
describe the bitmap.
\fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs
(e.g. a bitmap named \fInameId\fR has already been defined) then
\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in
interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
Note:  \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR expects the memory pointed to by
\fIsource\fR to be static:  \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR does not make
a private copy of this memory, but uses the bytes pointed to
by \fIsource\fR later in calls to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or
\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
.PP
Typically \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR is used by \fB#include\fR-ing a
bitmap file directly into a C program and then referencing







|







183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
have been used in a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR.
The arguments \fIsource\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR
describe the bitmap.
\fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs
(e.g. a bitmap named \fInameId\fR has already been defined) then
\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in
interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
Note that \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR expects the memory pointed to by
\fIsource\fR to be static:  \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR does not make
a private copy of this memory, but uses the bytes pointed to
by \fIsource\fR later in calls to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or
\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
.PP
Typically \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR is used by \fB#include\fR-ing a
bitmap file directly into a C program and then referencing

Changes to doc/GetCapStyl.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
.SH NAME
Tk_GetCapStyle, Tk_NameOfCapStyle \- translate between strings and cap styles
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetCapStyle(\fIinterp, string, capPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfCapStyle(\fIcap\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *capPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP "const char" *string in
String containing name of cap style \- one of
.QW \fBbutt\fR ,







|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
.SH NAME
Tk_GetCapStyle, Tk_NameOfCapStyle \- translate between strings and cap styles
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR(\fIinterp, string, capPtr\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfCapStyle\fR(\fIcap\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *capPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP "const char" *string in
String containing name of cap style \- one of
.QW \fBbutt\fR ,

Changes to doc/GetClrmap.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
.SH NAME
Tk_GetColormap, Tk_PreserveColormap, Tk_FreeColormap \- allocate and free colormaps
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Colormap
\fBTk_GetColormap(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_PreserveColormap(\fIdisplay, colormap\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeColormap(\fIdisplay, colormap\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Colormap" colormap
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which colormap will be used.
.AP "const char" *string in







|

|

|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
.SH NAME
Tk_GetColormap, Tk_PreserveColormap, Tk_FreeColormap \- allocate and free colormaps
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Colormap
\fBTk_GetColormap\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_PreserveColormap\fR(\fIdisplay, colormap\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeColormap\fR(\fIdisplay, colormap\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Colormap" colormap
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which colormap will be used.
.AP "const char" *string in

Changes to doc/GetColor.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

38
39
40
41
42
43
44
.SH NAME
Tk_AllocColorFromObj, Tk_GetColor, Tk_GetColorFromObj, Tk_GetColorByValue, Tk_NameOfColor, Tk_FreeColorFromObj, Tk_FreeColor \- maintain database of colors
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_GetColor(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fB)\fR
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_GetColorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_GetColorByValue(\fItkwin, prefPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfColor(\fIcolorPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
GC
\fBTk_GCForColor(\fIcolorPtr, drawable\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeColorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeColor(\fIcolorPtr\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *colorPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which color will be used.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out







|


|


|


|


|


|

|

|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
.SH NAME
Tk_AllocColorFromObj, Tk_GetColor, Tk_GetColorFromObj, Tk_GetColorByValue, Tk_NameOfColor, Tk_FreeColorFromObj, Tk_FreeColor \- maintain database of colors
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_GetColor\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fR)
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
XColor *
\fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR(\fItkwin, prefPtr\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfColor\fR(\fIcolorPtr\fR)
.sp
GC
\fBTk_GCForColor\fR(\fIcolorPtr, drawable\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeColorFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeColor\fR(\fIcolorPtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *colorPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which color will be used.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
67
68
69
70
71
72
73

74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83

84
85
86
87
88
89
90
.PP
Given a textual description of a color, \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR
locates a pixel value that may be used to render the color
in a particular window.  The desired color is specified with a
value whose string value must have one of the following forms:
.TP 20
\fIcolorname\fR

Any of the valid textual names for a color defined in the
server's color database file, such as \fBred\fR or \fBPeachPuff\fR.
.TP 20
\fB#\fIRGB\fR
.TP 20
\fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR
.TP 20
\fB#\fIRRRGGGBBB\fR
.TP 20
\fB#\fIRRRRGGGGBBBB\fR

A numeric specification of the red, green, and blue intensities
to use to display the color.  Each \fIR\fR, \fIG\fR, or \fIB\fR
represents a single hexadecimal digit.  The four forms permit
colors to be specified with 4-bit, 8-bit, 12-bit or 16-bit values.
When fewer than 16 bits are provided for each color, they represent
the most significant bits of the color, while the lower unfilled
bits will be repeatedly replicated from the available higher bits.







>










>







68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
.PP
Given a textual description of a color, \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR
locates a pixel value that may be used to render the color
in a particular window.  The desired color is specified with a
value whose string value must have one of the following forms:
.TP 20
\fIcolorname\fR
.
Any of the valid textual names for a color defined in the
server's color database file, such as \fBred\fR or \fBPeachPuff\fR.
.TP 20
\fB#\fIRGB\fR
.TP 20
\fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR
.TP 20
\fB#\fIRRRGGGBBB\fR
.TP 20
\fB#\fIRRRRGGGGBBBB\fR
.
A numeric specification of the red, green, and blue intensities
to use to display the color.  Each \fIR\fR, \fIG\fR, or \fIB\fR
represents a single hexadecimal digit.  The four forms permit
colors to be specified with 4-bit, 8-bit, 12-bit or 16-bit values.
When fewer than 16 bits are provided for each color, they represent
the most significant bits of the color, while the lower unfilled
bits will be repeatedly replicated from the available higher bits.

Changes to doc/GetCursor.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

35
36
37
38
39
40
41
.SH NAME
Tk_AllocCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursor, Tk_GetCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursorFromData, Tk_NameOfCursor, Tk_FreeCursorFromObj, Tk_FreeCursor \- maintain database of cursors
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Cursor
\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
Tk_Cursor
\fBTk_GetCursor(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fB)\fR
.sp
Tk_Cursor
\fBTk_GetCursorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
Tk_Cursor
\fBTk_GetCursorFromData(\fIinterp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height, xHot, yHot, fg, bg\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfCursor(\fIdisplay, cursor\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeCursor(\fIdisplay, cursor\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which the cursor will be used.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out







|


|


|


|


|

|

|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
.SH NAME
Tk_AllocCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursor, Tk_GetCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursorFromData, Tk_NameOfCursor, Tk_FreeCursorFromObj, Tk_FreeCursor \- maintain database of cursors
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Cursor
\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
Tk_Cursor
\fBTk_GetCursor\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fR)
.sp
Tk_Cursor
\fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
Tk_Cursor
\fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height, xHot, yHot, fg, bg\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR(\fIdisplay, cursor\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeCursor\fR(\fIdisplay, cursor\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which the cursor will be used.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
83
84
85
86
87
88
89

90
91
92
93
94
95
96
\fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR. If an error occurs in creating the cursor,
such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR
is returned and an error message will be stored in \fIinterp\fR's result
if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.  \fIObjPtr\fR must contain a standard Tcl
list with one of the following forms:
.TP
\fIname\fR\0[\fIfgColor\fR\0[\fIbgColor\fR]]

\fIName\fR is the name of a cursor in the standard X cursor cursor,
i.e., any of the names defined in \fBcursorcursor.h\fR, without
the \fBXC_\fR.  Some example values are \fBX_cursor\fR, \fBhand2\fR,
or \fBleft_ptr\fR.  Appendix B of
.QW "The X Window System"
by Scheifler & Gettys has illustrations showing what each of these
cursors looks like.  If \fIfgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR are both







>







84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
\fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR. If an error occurs in creating the cursor,
such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR
is returned and an error message will be stored in \fIinterp\fR's result
if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.  \fIObjPtr\fR must contain a standard Tcl
list with one of the following forms:
.TP
\fIname\fR\0[\fIfgColor\fR\0[\fIbgColor\fR]]
.
\fIName\fR is the name of a cursor in the standard X cursor cursor,
i.e., any of the names defined in \fBcursorcursor.h\fR, without
the \fBXC_\fR.  Some example values are \fBX_cursor\fR, \fBhand2\fR,
or \fBleft_ptr\fR.  Appendix B of
.QW "The X Window System"
by Scheifler & Gettys has illustrations showing what each of these
cursors looks like.  If \fIfgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR are both
111
112
113
114
115
116
117

118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126

127
128
129
130
131
132

133
134
135
136
137
138
139
name of the resource.  The application and all its open
dynamic library's resource files will be searched for the named
cursor.  If there are conflicts color cursors will always be loaded
in preference to black and white cursors.
.RE
.TP
\fB@\fIsourceName\0maskName\0fgColor\0bgColor\fR

In this form, \fIsourceName\fR and \fImaskName\fR are the names of
files describing cursors for the cursor's source bits and mask.
Each file must be in standard X11 cursor format.
\fIFgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR
indicate the colors to use for the
cursor, in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  This
form of the command will not work on Macintosh or Windows computers.
.TP
\fB@\fIsourceName\0fgColor\fR

This form is similar to the one above, except that the source is
used as mask also.  This means that the cursor's background is
transparent.  This form of the command will not work on Macintosh
or Windows computers.
.TP
\fB@\fIsourceName\fR

This form only works on Windows, and will load a Windows system
cursor (\fB.ani\fR or \fB.cur\fR) from the file specified in
\fIsourceName\fR.
.PP
\fBTk_GetCursor\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR except
that the description of the cursor is specified with a string instead
of an object.  This prevents \fBTk_GetCursor\fR from caching the







>









>






>







113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
name of the resource.  The application and all its open
dynamic library's resource files will be searched for the named
cursor.  If there are conflicts color cursors will always be loaded
in preference to black and white cursors.
.RE
.TP
\fB@\fIsourceName\0maskName\0fgColor\0bgColor\fR
.
In this form, \fIsourceName\fR and \fImaskName\fR are the names of
files describing cursors for the cursor's source bits and mask.
Each file must be in standard X11 cursor format.
\fIFgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR
indicate the colors to use for the
cursor, in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  This
form of the command will not work on Macintosh or Windows computers.
.TP
\fB@\fIsourceName\0fgColor\fR
.
This form is similar to the one above, except that the source is
used as mask also.  This means that the cursor's background is
transparent.  This form of the command will not work on Macintosh
or Windows computers.
.TP
\fB@\fIsourceName\fR
.
This form only works on Windows, and will load a Windows system
cursor (\fB.ani\fR or \fB.cur\fR) from the file specified in
\fIsourceName\fR.
.PP
\fBTk_GetCursor\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR except
that the description of the cursor is specified with a string instead
of an object.  This prevents \fBTk_GetCursor\fR from caching the
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
The procedure \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is roughly the inverse of
\fBTk_GetCursor\fR.  If its \fIcursor\fR argument was created
by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, then the return value is the \fIname\fR
argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR to create the
cursor.  If \fIcursor\fR was created by a call to \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR,
or by any other mechanism, then the return value is a hexadecimal string
giving the X identifier for the cursor.
Note:  the string returned by \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is
only guaranteed to persist until the next call to
\fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR.  Also, this call is not portable except for
cursors returned by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR.
.PP
When a cursor returned by \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR,
or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR
is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj\fR or







|







197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
The procedure \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is roughly the inverse of
\fBTk_GetCursor\fR.  If its \fIcursor\fR argument was created
by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, then the return value is the \fIname\fR
argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR to create the
cursor.  If \fIcursor\fR was created by a call to \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR,
or by any other mechanism, then the return value is a hexadecimal string
giving the X identifier for the cursor.
Note that the string returned by \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is
only guaranteed to persist until the next call to
\fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR.  Also, this call is not portable except for
cursors returned by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR.
.PP
When a cursor returned by \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR,
or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR
is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj\fR or

Changes to doc/GetFont.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
.SH NAME
Tk_AllocFontFromObj, Tk_GetFont, Tk_GetFontFromObj, Tk_NameOfFont, Tk_FontGetDescription, Tk_FreeFontFromObj, Tk_FreeFont \- maintain database of fonts
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Font
\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
Tk_Font
\fBTk_GetFont(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR
.sp
Tk_Font
\fBTk_GetFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_FontGetDescription(\fItkfont\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR
.sp
Tk_Font
\fBTk_FreeFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_FreeFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "const char" *tkfont
.AP "Tcl_Interp" *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.  If \fBNULL\fR, then no error
messages are left after errors.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which font will be used.







|


|


|


|


|


|

<
|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
.SH NAME
Tk_AllocFontFromObj, Tk_GetFont, Tk_GetFontFromObj, Tk_NameOfFont, Tk_FontGetDescription, Tk_FreeFontFromObj, Tk_FreeFont \- maintain database of fonts
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Font
\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
Tk_Font
\fBTk_GetFont\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fR)
.sp
Tk_Font
\fBTk_GetFontFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_FontGetDescription\fR(\fItkfont\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfFont\fR(\fItkfont\fR)
.sp
Tk_Font
\fBTk_FreeFontFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_FreeFont\fR(\fItkfont\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "const char" *tkfont
.AP "Tcl_Interp" *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.  If \fBNULL\fR, then no error
messages are left after errors.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which font will be used.
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95

96
97
98
99
100
101
102
a database of all fonts they have allocated.  If
the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different
windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be
shared for all uses.  The underlying resources will be freed automatically
when no-one is using the font anymore.
.PP
The procedure \fBTk_FontGetDescription\fR returns information about the font
description as a Tcl list. One possible result is "{{DejaVu Sans} -16 bold underline}".

.PP
The procedure \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is roughly the inverse of
\fBTk_GetFont\fR.  Given a \fItkfont\fR that was created by
\fBTk_GetFont\fR (or \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR), the return value is
the \fIstring\fR argument that was
passed to \fBTk_GetFont\fR to create the font.  The string returned by
\fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the \fItkfont\fR







|
>







88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
a database of all fonts they have allocated.  If
the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different
windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be
shared for all uses.  The underlying resources will be freed automatically
when no-one is using the font anymore.
.PP
The procedure \fBTk_FontGetDescription\fR returns information about the font
description as a Tcl list. One possible result is
.QW "{{DejaVu Sans} -16 bold underline}" .
.PP
The procedure \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is roughly the inverse of
\fBTk_GetFont\fR.  Given a \fItkfont\fR that was created by
\fBTk_GetFont\fR (or \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR), the return value is
the \fIstring\fR argument that was
passed to \fBTk_GetFont\fR to create the font.  The string returned by
\fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the \fItkfont\fR

Changes to doc/GetGC.3.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
GC
\fBTk_GetGC\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, valuePtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeGC(\fIdisplay, gc\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "unsigned long" valueMask
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which the graphics context will be used.
.AP "unsigned long" valueMask in
Mask of bits (such as \fBGCForeground\fR or \fBGCStipple\fR)
indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR are valid.







|
>







13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
GC
\fBTk_GetGC\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, valuePtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeGC\fR(\fIdisplay, gc\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "unsigned long" valueMask
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which the graphics context will be used.
.AP "unsigned long" valueMask in
Mask of bits (such as \fBGCForeground\fR or \fBGCStipple\fR)
indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR are valid.

Changes to doc/GetHINSTANCE.3.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Tk_GetHINSTANCE \- retrieve the global application instance handle
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR
.sp
HINSTANCE
\fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR()

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR returns the Windows application instance handle
for the Tk application.  This function is only available on Windows platforms.
.SH KEYWORDS
identifier, instance







>







9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Tk_GetHINSTANCE \- retrieve the global application instance handle
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR
.sp
HINSTANCE
\fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR()
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR returns the Windows application instance handle
for the Tk application.  This function is only available on Windows platforms.
.SH KEYWORDS
identifier, instance

Changes to doc/GetHWND.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
\fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR
.sp
HWND
\fBTk_GetHWND\fR(\fIwindow\fR)
.sp
Window
\fBTk_AttachHWND\fR(\fItkwin, hwnd\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Window window in
X token for window.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Tk window for window.
.AP HWND hwnd in
Windows HWND for window.







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
\fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR
.sp
HWND
\fBTk_GetHWND\fR(\fIwindow\fR)
.sp
Window
\fBTk_AttachHWND\fR(\fItkwin, hwnd\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Window window in
X token for window.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Tk window for window.
.AP HWND hwnd in
Windows HWND for window.

Changes to doc/GetImage.3.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
\fBTk_GetImage\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_RedrawImage\fR(\fIimage, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable, drawableX, drawableY\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SizeOfImage\fR(\fIimage, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeImage\fR(\fIimage\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Place to leave error message.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window in which image will be used.
.AP "const char" *name in







>







18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
\fBTk_GetImage\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_RedrawImage\fR(\fIimage, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable, drawableX, drawableY\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_SizeOfImage\fR(\fIimage, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeImage\fR(\fIimage\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Place to leave error message.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window in which image will be used.
.AP "const char" *name in

Changes to doc/GetJoinStl.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
.SH NAME
Tk_GetJoinStyle, Tk_NameOfJoinStyle \- translate between strings and join styles
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetJoinStyle(\fIinterp, string, joinPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfJoinStyle(\fIjoin\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP "const char" *string in
String containing name of join style \- one of
.QW \fBbevel\fR ,







|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
.SH NAME
Tk_GetJoinStyle, Tk_NameOfJoinStyle \- translate between strings and join styles
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR(\fIinterp, string, joinPtr\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfJoinStyle\fR(\fIjoin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP "const char" *string in
String containing name of join style \- one of
.QW \fBbevel\fR ,

Changes to doc/GetJustify.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
.SH NAME
Tk_GetJustifyFromObj, Tk_GetJustify, Tk_NameOfJustify \- translate between strings and justification styles
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, justifyPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetJustify(\fIinterp, string, justifyPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfJustify(\fIjustify\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_Justify" *justifyPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
String value contains name of justification style \- one of
.QW \fBleft\fR ,







|


|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
.SH NAME
Tk_GetJustifyFromObj, Tk_GetJustify, Tk_NameOfJustify \- translate between strings and justification styles
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, justifyPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetJustify\fR(\fIinterp, string, justifyPtr\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfJustify\fR(\fIjustify\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_Justify" *justifyPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
String value contains name of justification style \- one of
.QW \fBleft\fR ,
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Justification style (one of the values listed below).
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR places in \fI*justifyPtr\fR the justify value
corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR's value.
This value will be one of the following:
.TP
\fBTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT\fR
Means that the text on each line should start at the left edge of
the line;  as a result, the right edges of lines may be ragged.
.TP
\fBTK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT\fR
Means that the text on each line should end at the right edge of
the line;  as a result, the left edges of lines may be ragged.
.TP
\fBTK_JUSTIFY_CENTER\fR
Means that the text on each line should be centered;  as a result,
both the left and right edges of lines may be ragged.
.PP
Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and
\fIinterp\fR is unused.
If \fIobjPtr\fR does not contain a valid justification style
or an abbreviation of one of these names, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned,







<
|


<
|


<
|







45
46
47
48
49
50
51

52
53
54

55
56
57

58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
Justification style (one of the values listed below).
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR places in \fI*justifyPtr\fR the justify value
corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR's value.
This value will be one of the following:

.IP \fBTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT\fR
Means that the text on each line should start at the left edge of
the line;  as a result, the right edges of lines may be ragged.

.IP \fBTK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT\fR
Means that the text on each line should end at the right edge of
the line;  as a result, the left edges of lines may be ragged.

.IP \fBTK_JUSTIFY_CENTER\fR
Means that the text on each line should be centered;  as a result,
both the left and right edges of lines may be ragged.
.PP
Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and
\fIinterp\fR is unused.
If \fIobjPtr\fR does not contain a valid justification style
or an abbreviation of one of these names, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned,

Changes to doc/GetOption.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_GetOption \- retrieve an option from the option database
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Uid
\fBTk_GetOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, class\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window *class
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP "const char" *name in
Name of desired option.
.AP "const char" *class in







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Tk_GetOption \- retrieve an option from the option database
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Uid
\fBTk_GetOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, class\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window *class
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP "const char" *name in
Name of desired option.
.AP "const char" *class in

Changes to doc/GetPixels.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
.SH NAME
Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, Tk_GetPixels, Tk_GetMMFromObj, Tk_GetScreenMM, Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj \- translate between strings and screen units
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetPixels(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, intPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetMMFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetScreenMM(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, doublePtr\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window whose screen geometry determines the conversion between absolute
units and pixels.







|


|


|


|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
.SH NAME
Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, Tk_GetPixels, Tk_GetMMFromObj, Tk_GetScreenMM, Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj \- translate between strings and screen units
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetPixels\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, intPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetMMFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, doublePtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window whose screen geometry determines the conversion between absolute
units and pixels.
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
the screen (\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR) and compute the
corresponding distance either in integer pixels or floating-point millimeters.
In either case,
\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR
specifies a screen distance as a
floating-point number followed by one of the following characters
that indicates units:
.TP
<none>
The number specifies a distance in pixels.
.TP
\fBc\fR
The number specifies a distance in centimeters on the screen.
.TP
\fBi\fR
The number specifies a distance in inches on the screen.
.TP
\fBm\fR
The number specifies a distance in millimeters on the screen.
.TP
\fBp\fR
The number specifies a distance in printer's points (1/72 inch)
on the screen.
.PP
\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR converts the value of \fIobjPtr\fR to the
nearest even number of pixels and stores that value at \fI*intPtr\fR.
It returns \fBTCL_OK\fR under normal circumstances.
If an error occurs (e.g. \fIobjPtr\fR contains a number followed







<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|







53
54
55
56
57
58
59

60
61

62
63

64
65

66
67

68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
the screen (\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR) and compute the
corresponding distance either in integer pixels or floating-point millimeters.
In either case,
\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR
specifies a screen distance as a
floating-point number followed by one of the following characters
that indicates units:

.IP <none>
The number specifies a distance in pixels.

.IP \fBc\fR
The number specifies a distance in centimeters on the screen.

.IP \fBi\fR
The number specifies a distance in inches on the screen.

.IP \fBm\fR
The number specifies a distance in millimeters on the screen.

.IP \fBp\fR
The number specifies a distance in printer's points (1/72 inch)
on the screen.
.PP
\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR converts the value of \fIobjPtr\fR to the
nearest even number of pixels and stores that value at \fI*intPtr\fR.
It returns \fBTCL_OK\fR under normal circumstances.
If an error occurs (e.g. \fIobjPtr\fR contains a number followed

Changes to doc/GetPixmap.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.SH NAME
Tk_GetPixmap, Tk_FreePixmap \- allocate and free pixmaps
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Pixmap
\fBTk_GetPixmap(\fIdisplay, d, width, height, depth\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreePixmap(\fIdisplay, pixmap\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Drawable" *pixelPtr
.AP Display *display in
X display for the pixmap.
.AP Drawable d in
Pixmap or window where the new pixmap will be used for drawing.
.AP "int" width in







|

|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
.SH NAME
Tk_GetPixmap, Tk_FreePixmap \- allocate and free pixmaps
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Pixmap
\fBTk_GetPixmap\fR(\fIdisplay, d, width, height, depth\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreePixmap\fR(\fIdisplay, pixmap\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Drawable" *pixelPtr
.AP Display *display in
X display for the pixmap.
.AP Drawable d in
Pixmap or window where the new pixmap will be used for drawing.
.AP "int" width in

Changes to doc/GetRelief.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
.SH NAME
Tk_GetReliefFromObj, Tk_GetRelief, Tk_NameOfRelief \- translate between strings and relief values
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetReliefFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, reliefPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetRelief(\fIinterp, name, reliefPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfRelief(\fIrelief\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *reliefPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
String value contains name of relief, one of
.QW \fBflat\fR ,







|


|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
.SH NAME
Tk_GetReliefFromObj, Tk_GetRelief, Tk_NameOfRelief \- translate between strings and relief values
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, reliefPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetRelief\fR(\fIinterp, name, reliefPtr\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfRelief\fR(\fIrelief\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *reliefPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
String value contains name of relief, one of
.QW \fBflat\fR ,

Changes to doc/GetRootCrd.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_GetRootCoords \- Compute root-window coordinates of window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP int *xPtr out
Pointer to location in which to store root-window x-coordinate
corresponding to left edge of \fItkwin\fR's border.







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
Tk_GetRootCoords \- Compute root-window coordinates of window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP int *xPtr out
Pointer to location in which to store root-window x-coordinate
corresponding to left edge of \fItkwin\fR's border.

Changes to doc/GetScroll.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
.SH NAME
Tk_GetScrollInfoObj, Tk_GetScrollInfo \- parse arguments for scrolling commands
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj(\fIinterp, objc, objv, fractionPtr, stepsPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetScrollInfo(\fIinterp, argc, argv, fractionPtr, stepsPtr\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *fractionPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP int objc in
Number of Tcl_Obj's in \fIobjv\fR array.
.AP "Tcl_Obj *const *" objv in







|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
.SH NAME
Tk_GetScrollInfoObj, Tk_GetScrollInfo \- parse arguments for scrolling commands
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR(\fIinterp, objc, objv, fractionPtr, stepsPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR(\fIinterp, argc, argv, fractionPtr, stepsPtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *fractionPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP int objc in
Number of Tcl_Obj's in \fIobjv\fR array.
.AP "Tcl_Obj *const *" objv in

Changes to doc/GetSelect.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_GetSelection \- retrieve the contents of a selection
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetSelection\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_GetSelProc clientData
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for reporting errors.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window on whose behalf to retrieve the selection (determines
display from which to retrieve).







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Tk_GetSelection \- retrieve the contents of a selection
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetSelection\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_GetSelProc clientData
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for reporting errors.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window on whose behalf to retrieve the selection (determines
display from which to retrieve).

Changes to doc/GetUid.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_GetUid, Tk_Uid \- convert from string to unique identifier
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Uid
\fBTk_GetUid\fR(\fIstring\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP char *string in
String for which the corresponding unique identifier is
desired.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Tk_GetUid, Tk_Uid \- convert from string to unique identifier
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Uid
\fBTk_GetUid\fR(\fIstring\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP char *string in
String for which the corresponding unique identifier is
desired.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP

Changes to doc/GetVRoot.3.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetVRootGeometry \- Get location and size of virtual root for window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_GetVRootGeometry(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window heightPtr
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window whose virtual root is to be queried.
.AP int xPtr out
Points to word in which to store x-offset of virtual root.
.AP int yPtr out







|
>







10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_GetVRootGeometry \- Get location and size of virtual root for window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_GetVRootGeometry\fR(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window heightPtr
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window whose virtual root is to be queried.
.AP int xPtr out
Points to word in which to store x-offset of virtual root.
.AP int yPtr out

Changes to doc/GetVisual.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
Tk_GetVisual \- translate from string to visual
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Visual *
\fBTk_GetVisual(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *colormapPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which the visual will be used.
.AP "const char" *string in







|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.SH NAME
Tk_GetVisual \- translate from string to visual
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Visual *
\fBTk_GetVisual\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tcl_Interp" *colormapPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in which the visual will be used.
.AP "const char" *string in
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

65
66
67

68
69
70
71
72

73
74
75

76
77
78
79
80
81
82
also locates an appropriate colormap for use with the result visual
and stores its X identifier at \fI*colormapPtr\fR.
.PP
The \fIstring\fR argument specifies the desired visual in one
of the following ways:
.TP 15
\fIclass depth\fR

The string consists of a class name followed by an integer depth,
with any amount of white space (including none) in between.
\fIclass\fR selects what sort of visual is desired and must be one of
\fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR, \fBgreyscale\fR, \fBpseudocolor\fR,
\fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, \fBstaticgrey\fR, or
\fBtruecolor\fR, or a unique abbreviation.
\fIdepth\fR specifies how many bits per pixel are needed for the
visual.
If possible, \fBTk_GetVisual\fR will return a visual with this depth;
if there is no visual of the desired depth then \fBTk_GetVisual\fR
looks first for a visual with greater depth, then one with less
depth.
.TP 15
\fBdefault\fR

Use the default visual for \fItkwin\fR's screen.
.TP 15
\fIpathName\fR

Use the visual for the window given by \fIpathName\fR.
\fIpathName\fR must be the name of a window on the same screen
as \fItkwin\fR.
.TP 15
\fInumber\fR

Use the visual whose X identifier is \fInumber\fR.
.TP 15
\fBbest\fR ?\fIdepth\fR?

Choose the
.QW "best possible"
visual, using the following rules, in decreasing order of priority:
.RS
.IP (a)
a visual that has exactly the desired depth is best, followed
by a visual with greater depth than requested (but as little extra







>














>



>





>



>







45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
also locates an appropriate colormap for use with the result visual
and stores its X identifier at \fI*colormapPtr\fR.
.PP
The \fIstring\fR argument specifies the desired visual in one
of the following ways:
.TP 15
\fIclass depth\fR
.
The string consists of a class name followed by an integer depth,
with any amount of white space (including none) in between.
\fIclass\fR selects what sort of visual is desired and must be one of
\fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR, \fBgreyscale\fR, \fBpseudocolor\fR,
\fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, \fBstaticgrey\fR, or
\fBtruecolor\fR, or a unique abbreviation.
\fIdepth\fR specifies how many bits per pixel are needed for the
visual.
If possible, \fBTk_GetVisual\fR will return a visual with this depth;
if there is no visual of the desired depth then \fBTk_GetVisual\fR
looks first for a visual with greater depth, then one with less
depth.
.TP 15
\fBdefault\fR
.
Use the default visual for \fItkwin\fR's screen.
.TP 15
\fIpathName\fR
.
Use the visual for the window given by \fIpathName\fR.
\fIpathName\fR must be the name of a window on the same screen
as \fItkwin\fR.
.TP 15
\fInumber\fR
.
Use the visual whose X identifier is \fInumber\fR.
.TP 15
\fBbest\fR ?\fIdepth\fR?
.
Choose the
.QW "best possible"
visual, using the following rules, in decreasing order of priority:
.RS
.IP (a)
a visual that has exactly the desired depth is best, followed
by a visual with greater depth than requested (but as little extra

Changes to doc/Grab.3.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_Grab\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, grabGlobal\fR)
.sp
void
\fBTk_Ungrab\fR(\fItkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window on whose behalf the pointer is to be grabbed or released
.AP int grabGlobal in
Boolean indicating whether the grab is global or application local







<

>







10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_Grab\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, grabGlobal\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_Ungrab\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for error reporting
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window on whose behalf the pointer is to be grabbed or released
.AP int grabGlobal in
Boolean indicating whether the grab is global or application local

Changes to doc/HWNDToWindow.3.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Tk_HWNDToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for a Windows window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_HWNDToWindow\fR(\fIhwnd\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP HWND hwnd in
Windows handle for the window.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Given a Windows HWND window identifier, this procedure returns the







>







9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Tk_HWNDToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for a Windows window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_HWNDToWindow\fR(\fIhwnd\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP HWND hwnd in
Windows handle for the window.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Given a Windows HWND window identifier, this procedure returns the

Changes to doc/HandleEvent.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_HandleEvent \- invoke event handlers for window system events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_HandleEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS XEvent *eventPtr
.AP XEvent *eventPtr in
Pointer to X event to dispatch to relevant handler(s). It is important
that all unused fields of the structure be set to zero.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
Tk_HandleEvent \- invoke event handlers for window system events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_HandleEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS XEvent *eventPtr
.AP XEvent *eventPtr in
Pointer to X event to dispatch to relevant handler(s). It is important
that all unused fields of the structure be set to zero.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION

Changes to doc/IdToWindow.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Tk_IdToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for an X window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_IdToWindow\fR(\fIdisplay, window\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window display
.AP Display *display in
X display containing the window.
.AP Window window in
X id for window.
.BE







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_IdToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for an X window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_IdToWindow\fR(\fIdisplay, window\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window display
.AP Display *display in
X display containing the window.
.AP Window window in
X id for window.
.BE

Changes to doc/ImgChanged.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fImodel, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ImageModel imageHeight
.AP Tk_ImageModel model in
Token for image, which was passed to image's \fIcreateProc\fR when
the image was created.
.AP int x in
X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fImodel, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ImageModel imageHeight
.AP Tk_ImageModel model in
Token for image, which was passed to image's \fIcreateProc\fR when
the image was created.
.AP int x in
X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured

Changes to doc/Inactive.3.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_GetUserInactiveTime, Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \- discover user inactivity time
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
long
\fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime(\fIdisplay\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_ResetUserInactiveTime(\fIdisplay\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Display *display
.AP Display *display in
The display on which the user inactivity timer is to be queried or
reset.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION







|

|
>







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
Tk_GetUserInactiveTime, Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \- discover user inactivity time
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
long
\fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime\fR(\fIdisplay\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_ResetUserInactiveTime\fR(\fIdisplay\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Display *display
.AP Display *display in
The display on which the user inactivity timer is to be queried or
reset.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION

Changes to doc/InternAtom.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
.SH NAME
Tk_InternAtom, Tk_GetAtomName \- manage cache of X atoms
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Atom
\fBTk_InternAtom(\fItkwin, name\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_GetAtomName(\fItkwin, atom\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window parent
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.  Used to map atom or name relative to a particular display.
.AP "const char" *name in
String name for which atom is desired.
.AP Atom atom in







|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
.SH NAME
Tk_InternAtom, Tk_GetAtomName \- manage cache of X atoms
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Atom
\fBTk_InternAtom\fR(\fItkwin, name\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_GetAtomName\fR(\fItkwin, atom\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window parent
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.  Used to map atom or name relative to a particular display.
.AP "const char" *name in
String name for which atom is desired.
.AP Atom atom in

Changes to doc/MainLoop.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_MainLoop \- loop for events until all windows are deleted
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_MainLoop\fR()

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_MainLoop\fR is a procedure that loops repeatedly calling
\fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR.  It returns only when there are no applications
left in this process (i.e. no main windows exist anymore).  Most
windowing applications will call \fBTk_MainLoop\fR after







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
Tk_MainLoop \- loop for events until all windows are deleted
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_MainLoop\fR()
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTk_MainLoop\fR is a procedure that loops repeatedly calling
\fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR.  It returns only when there are no applications
left in this process (i.e. no main windows exist anymore).  Most
windowing applications will call \fBTk_MainLoop\fR after

Changes to doc/MainWin.3.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_MainWindow\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
.sp
void
\fBTk_SetMainMenubar\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, menuName\fR)
.sp
void
\fBTk_SetWindowMenubar\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, oldMenuName, menuName\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR()

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *pathName
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
Interpreter associated with the application.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for main window.
.AP const char *menuName in







<


<




>







13
14
15
16
17
18
19

20
21

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_MainWindow\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_SetMainMenubar\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, menuName\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_SetWindowMenubar\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, oldMenuName, menuName\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR()
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *pathName
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
Interpreter associated with the application.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for main window.
.AP const char *menuName in
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
associated with \fIinterp\fR then \fBTk_MainWindow\fR returns NULL and
leaves an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
.PP
\fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR returns a count of the number of main
windows currently open in the current thread.
\fBTk_SetMainMenubar\fR
Called when a toplevel widget is brought to front. On the Macintosh,
sets up the menubar that goes accross the top of the main monitor. On
other platforms, nothing is necessary.
\fBTk_SetWindowMenubar\fR associates a menu with a window.
The old menu clones for the menubar are thrown away, and a handler is
set up to allocate the new ones.
.SH KEYWORDS
application, main window







|






47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
associated with \fIinterp\fR then \fBTk_MainWindow\fR returns NULL and
leaves an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
.PP
\fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR returns a count of the number of main
windows currently open in the current thread.
\fBTk_SetMainMenubar\fR
Called when a toplevel widget is brought to front. On the Macintosh,
sets up the menubar that goes across the top of the main monitor. On
other platforms, nothing is necessary.
\fBTk_SetWindowMenubar\fR associates a menu with a window.
The old menu clones for the menubar are thrown away, and a handler is
set up to allocate the new ones.
.SH KEYWORDS
application, main window

Changes to doc/MaintGeom.3.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR(\fIwindow, container, x, y, width, height\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR(\fIwindow, container\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window container
.AP Tk_Window window in
Window whose geometry is to be controlled.
.AP Tk_Window container in
Window relative to which \fIwindow\fR's geometry will be controlled.
.AP int x in







>







13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR(\fIwindow, container, x, y, width, height\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR(\fIwindow, container\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window container
.AP Tk_Window window in
Window whose geometry is to be controlled.
.AP Tk_Window container in
Window relative to which \fIwindow\fR's geometry will be controlled.
.AP int x in

Changes to doc/ManageGeom.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_ManageGeometry \- arrange to handle geometry requests for a window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR(\fItkwin, mgrPtr, clientData\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_GeometryProc clientData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window to be managed.
.AP "const Tk_GeomMgr" *mgrPtr in
Pointer to data structure containing information about the
geometry manager, or NULL to indicate that \fItkwin\fR's geometry







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
Tk_ManageGeometry \- arrange to handle geometry requests for a window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR(\fItkwin, mgrPtr, clientData\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_GeometryProc clientData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window to be managed.
.AP "const Tk_GeomMgr" *mgrPtr in
Pointer to data structure containing information about the
geometry manager, or NULL to indicate that \fItkwin\fR's geometry

Changes to doc/MapWindow.3.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_MapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_UnmapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window parent
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP







>







14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_MapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_UnmapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window parent
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP

Changes to doc/MeasureChar.3.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
.SH NAME
Tk_MeasureChars, Tk_TextWidth, Tk_DrawChars, Tk_UnderlineChars \- routines to measure and display simple single-line strings.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_MeasureChars(\fItkfont, string, numBytes, maxPixels, flags, lengthPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_TextWidth(\fItkfont, string, numBytes\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_DrawChars(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, numBytes, x, y\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_UnderlineChars(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte, lastByte\fB)\fR
.sp
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "const char" firstChar
.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
Token for font in which text is to be drawn or measured.  Must have been
returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
.AP "const char" *string in
Text to be measured or displayed.  Need not be null terminated.  Any







|


|

|

|
|







10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
.SH NAME
Tk_MeasureChars, Tk_TextWidth, Tk_DrawChars, Tk_UnderlineChars \- routines to measure and display simple single-line strings.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_MeasureChars\fR(\fItkfont, string, numBytes, maxPixels, flags, lengthPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_TextWidth\fR(\fItkfont, string, numBytes\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DrawChars\fR(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, numBytes, x, y\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_UnderlineChars\fR(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte, lastByte\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "const char" firstChar
.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
Token for font in which text is to be drawn or measured.  Must have been
returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
.AP "const char" *string in
Text to be measured or displayed.  Need not be null terminated.  Any
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
.AP int flags in
Various flag bits OR-ed together: \fBTK_PARTIAL_OK\fR means include a character
as long as any part of it fits in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR;
otherwise, a character must fit completely to be considered.
\fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR means stop on a word boundary, if possible.  If
\fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set, it means return at least one character even if no
characters could fit in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR.  If
\fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set and \fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR is also set, it means that if
not even one word fits on the line, return the first few letters of the
word that did fit; if not even one letter of the word fit, then the first
letter will still be returned.
.AP int *lengthPtr out
Filled with the number of pixels occupied by the number of characters
returned as the result of \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR.
.AP Display *display in
Display on which to draw.







|
|







44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
.AP int flags in
Various flag bits OR-ed together: \fBTK_PARTIAL_OK\fR means include a character
as long as any part of it fits in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR;
otherwise, a character must fit completely to be considered.
\fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR means stop on a word boundary, if possible.  If
\fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set, it means return at least one character even if no
characters could fit in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR.  If
\fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set and \fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR is also set, it means
that if not even one word fits on the line, return the first few letters of the
word that did fit; if not even one letter of the word fit, then the first
letter will still be returned.
.AP int *lengthPtr out
Filled with the number of pixels occupied by the number of characters
returned as the result of \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR.
.AP Display *display in
Display on which to draw.

Changes to doc/MoveToplev.3.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_MoveToplevelWindow \- Adjust the position of a top-level window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow(\fItkwin, x, y\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for top-level window to move.
.AP int x in
New x-coordinate for the top-left pixel of \fItkwin\fR's border, or the
top-left pixel of the decorative border supplied for \fItkwin\fR by the







|
>







10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.BS
.SH NAME
Tk_MoveToplevelWindow \- Adjust the position of a top-level window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow\fR(\fItkwin, x, y\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for top-level window to move.
.AP int x in
New x-coordinate for the top-left pixel of \fItkwin\fR's border, or the
top-left pixel of the decorative border supplied for \fItkwin\fR by the

Changes to doc/Name.3.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
\fBTk_Name\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
char *
\fBTk_PathName\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_NameToWindow\fR(\fIinterp, pathName, tkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *pathName
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP "const char" *pathName in







>







18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
\fBTk_Name\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
char *
\fBTk_PathName\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_NameToWindow\fR(\fIinterp, pathName, tkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *pathName
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
Interpreter to use for error reporting.
.AP "const char" *pathName in

Changes to doc/NameOfImg.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fIimageModel\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ImageModel imageModel
.AP Tk_ImageModel imageModel in
Token for image, which was passed to image manager's \fIcreateProc\fR when
the image was created.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fIimageModel\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ImageModel imageModel
.AP Tk_ImageModel imageModel in
Token for image, which was passed to image manager's \fIcreateProc\fR when
the image was created.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION

Changes to doc/OwnSelect.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_OwnSelection \- make a window the owner of the primary selection
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_OwnSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection, proc, clientData\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_LostSelProc clientData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window that is to become new selection owner.
.AP Atom selection in
The name of the selection to be owned, such as XA_PRIMARY.
.AP Tk_LostSelProc *proc in







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
Tk_OwnSelection \- make a window the owner of the primary selection
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_OwnSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection, proc, clientData\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_LostSelProc clientData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window that is to become new selection owner.
.AP Atom selection in
The name of the selection to be owned, such as XA_PRIMARY.
.AP Tk_LostSelProc *proc in

Changes to doc/ParseArgv.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_ParseArgv \- process command-line options
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for returning error messages.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window to use when arguments specify Tk options.  If NULL, then
no Tk options will be processed.







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Tk_ParseArgv \- process command-line options
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter to use for returning error messages.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Window to use when arguments specify Tk options.  If NULL, then
no Tk options will be processed.
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
.QW "the matching argument"
in the descriptions below.  As part of the processing,
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR may also use the next argument in \fIargv\fR
after the matching argument, which is called
.QW "the following argument" .
The legal values for \fItype\fR, and the processing
that they cause, are as follows:
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_END\fR
Marks the end of the table.  The last entry in \fIargTable\fR
must have this type;  all of its other fields are ignored and it
will never match any arguments.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_CONSTANT\fR
\fISrc\fR is treated as an integer and \fIdst\fR is treated
as a pointer to an integer.  \fISrc\fR is stored at \fI*dst\fR.
The matching argument is discarded.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_INT\fR
The following argument must contain an
integer string in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g.
.QW 0
and
.QW 0x
prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal
numbers, respectively).  \fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to an
integer;  the following argument is converted to an integer value
and stored at \fI*dst\fR.  \fISrc\fR is ignored.  The matching
and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_FLOAT\fR
The following argument must contain a floating-point number in
the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR.
\fIDst\fR is treated as the address of a double-precision
floating point value;  the following argument is converted to a
double-precision value and stored at \fI*dst\fR.  The matching
and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR
In this form, \fIdst\fR is treated as a pointer to a (char *);
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR a pointer to the following
argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from
\fIargv\fR.  \fISrc\fR is ignored.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_UID\fR
This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR, except that the argument
is turned into a Tk_Uid by calling \fBTk_GetUid\fR.
\fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to a
Tk_Uid; \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR the Tk_Uid
corresponding to the following
argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from
\fIargv\fR.  \fISrc\fR is ignored.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR
This form causes a Tk option to be set (as if the \fBoption\fR
command had been invoked).  The \fIsrc\fR field is treated as a
pointer to a string giving the value of an option, and \fIdst\fR
is treated as a pointer to the name of the option.  The matching
argument is discarded.  If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument
specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist).
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE\fR
This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR, except that the
value of the option is taken from the following argument instead
of from \fIsrc\fR.  \fIDst\fR is used as the name of the option.
\fISrc\fR is ignored.  The matching and following arguments
are discarded.  If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument
specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist).
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE\fR
In this case the following argument is taken as the name of a Tk
option and the argument after that is taken as the value for that
option.  Both \fIsrc\fR and \fIdst\fR are ignored.  All three
arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR.  If \fItkwin\fR is NULL,
then argument
specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist).
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR
When this kind of option is encountered, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR uses the
\fIhelp\fR fields of \fIargTable\fR to format a message describing
all the valid arguments.  The message is placed in interpreter
\fIinterp\fR's result
and \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.  When this happens, the
caller normally prints the help message and aborts.  If the \fIkey\fR
field of a \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR specifier is NULL, then the specifier will
never match any arguments;  in this case the specifier simply provides
extra documentation, which will be included when some other
\fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR entry causes help information to be returned.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR
This option is used by programs or commands that allow the last
several of their options to be the name and/or options for some
other program.  If a \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR argument is found, then
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR does not process any
of the remaining arguments;  it returns them all at
the beginning of \fIargv\fR (along with any other unprocessed arguments).
In addition, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR treats \fIdst\fR as the address of an
integer value, and stores at \fI*dst\fR the index of the first of the
\fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options in the returned \fIargv\fR.  This allows the
program to distinguish the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options from other
unprocessed options that preceded the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_FUNC\fR
For this kind of argument, \fIsrc\fR is treated as the address of
a procedure, which is invoked to process the following argument.
The procedure should have the following structure:
.RS
.CS
int
\fIfunc\fR(\fIdst\fR, \fIkey\fR, \fInextArg\fR)







<
|



<
|



<
|










<
|






<
|




<
|







<
|






<
|






<
|






<
|










<
|











<
|







110
111
112
113
114
115
116

117
118
119
120

121
122
123
124

125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135

136
137
138
139
140
141
142

143
144
145
146
147

148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155

156
157
158
159
160
161
162

163
164
165
166
167
168
169

170
171
172
173
174
175
176

177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187

188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199

200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
.QW "the matching argument"
in the descriptions below.  As part of the processing,
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR may also use the next argument in \fIargv\fR
after the matching argument, which is called
.QW "the following argument" .
The legal values for \fItype\fR, and the processing
that they cause, are as follows:

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_END\fR
Marks the end of the table.  The last entry in \fIargTable\fR
must have this type;  all of its other fields are ignored and it
will never match any arguments.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_CONSTANT\fR
\fISrc\fR is treated as an integer and \fIdst\fR is treated
as a pointer to an integer.  \fISrc\fR is stored at \fI*dst\fR.
The matching argument is discarded.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_INT\fR
The following argument must contain an
integer string in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g.
.QW 0
and
.QW 0x
prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal
numbers, respectively).  \fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to an
integer;  the following argument is converted to an integer value
and stored at \fI*dst\fR.  \fISrc\fR is ignored.  The matching
and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_FLOAT\fR
The following argument must contain a floating-point number in
the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR.
\fIDst\fR is treated as the address of a double-precision
floating point value;  the following argument is converted to a
double-precision value and stored at \fI*dst\fR.  The matching
and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR
In this form, \fIdst\fR is treated as a pointer to a (char *);
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR a pointer to the following
argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from
\fIargv\fR.  \fISrc\fR is ignored.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_UID\fR
This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR, except that the argument
is turned into a Tk_Uid by calling \fBTk_GetUid\fR.
\fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to a
Tk_Uid; \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR the Tk_Uid
corresponding to the following
argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from
\fIargv\fR.  \fISrc\fR is ignored.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR
This form causes a Tk option to be set (as if the \fBoption\fR
command had been invoked).  The \fIsrc\fR field is treated as a
pointer to a string giving the value of an option, and \fIdst\fR
is treated as a pointer to the name of the option.  The matching
argument is discarded.  If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument
specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist).

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE\fR
This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR, except that the
value of the option is taken from the following argument instead
of from \fIsrc\fR.  \fIDst\fR is used as the name of the option.
\fISrc\fR is ignored.  The matching and following arguments
are discarded.  If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument
specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist).

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE\fR
In this case the following argument is taken as the name of a Tk
option and the argument after that is taken as the value for that
option.  Both \fIsrc\fR and \fIdst\fR are ignored.  All three
arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR.  If \fItkwin\fR is NULL,
then argument
specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist).

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR
When this kind of option is encountered, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR uses the
\fIhelp\fR fields of \fIargTable\fR to format a message describing
all the valid arguments.  The message is placed in interpreter
\fIinterp\fR's result
and \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.  When this happens, the
caller normally prints the help message and aborts.  If the \fIkey\fR
field of a \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR specifier is NULL, then the specifier will
never match any arguments;  in this case the specifier simply provides
extra documentation, which will be included when some other
\fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR entry causes help information to be returned.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR
This option is used by programs or commands that allow the last
several of their options to be the name and/or options for some
other program.  If a \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR argument is found, then
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR does not process any
of the remaining arguments;  it returns them all at
the beginning of \fIargv\fR (along with any other unprocessed arguments).
In addition, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR treats \fIdst\fR as the address of an
integer value, and stores at \fI*dst\fR the index of the first of the
\fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options in the returned \fIargv\fR.  This allows the
program to distinguish the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options from other
unprocessed options that preceded the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_FUNC\fR
For this kind of argument, \fIsrc\fR is treated as the address of
a procedure, which is invoked to process the following argument.
The procedure should have the following structure:
.RS
.CS
int
\fIfunc\fR(\fIdst\fR, \fIkey\fR, \fInextArg\fR)
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
(or NULL if there are not any more arguments left in \fIargv\fR).
If \fIfunc\fR uses \fInextArg\fR (so that
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR should discard it), then it should return 1.  Otherwise it
should return 0 and \fBTkParseArgv\fR will process the following
argument in the normal fashion.  In either event the matching argument
is discarded.
.RE
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_GENFUNC\fR
This form provides a more general procedural escape.  It treats
\fIsrc\fR as the address of a procedure, and passes that procedure
all of the remaining arguments.  The procedure should have the following
form:
.RS
.CS
int







<
|







217
218
219
220
221
222
223

224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
(or NULL if there are not any more arguments left in \fIargv\fR).
If \fIfunc\fR uses \fInextArg\fR (so that
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR should discard it), then it should return 1.  Otherwise it
should return 0 and \fBTkParseArgv\fR will process the following
argument in the normal fashion.  In either event the matching argument
is discarded.
.RE

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_GENFUNC\fR
This form provides a more general procedural escape.  It treats
\fIsrc\fR as the address of a procedure, and passes that procedure
all of the remaining arguments.  The procedure should have the following
form:
.RS
.CS
int
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will process them.  If \fIgenfunc\fR encounters
an error then it should leave an error message in interpreter
\fIinterp\fR's result,
in the usual Tcl fashion, and return \-1;  when this happens
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will abort its processing and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
.RE
.SS "FLAGS"
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR normally treats \fIargv[0]\fR as a program
or command name, and returns it to the caller just as if it
had not matched \fIargTable\fR.  If this flag is given, then
\fIargv[0]\fR is not given special treatment.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV\fR
Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR accepts unique abbreviations for
\fIkey\fR values in \fIargTable\fR.  If this flag is given then
only exact matches will be acceptable.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_NO_LEFTOVERS\fR
Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns unrecognized arguments to the
caller.  If this bit is set in \fIflags\fR then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR
will return an error if it encounters any argument that does not
match \fIargTable\fR.  The only exception to this rule is \fIargv[0]\fR,
which will be returned to the caller with no errors as
long as \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR is not specified.
.TP
\fBTK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS\fR
Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR searches an internal table of
standard argument specifiers in addition to \fIargTable\fR.  If
this bit is set in \fIflags\fR, then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will
use only \fIargTable\fR and not its default table.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Here is an example definition of an \fIargTable\fR and







<
|




<
|



<
|






<
|







250
251
252
253
254
255
256

257
258
259
260
261

262
263
264
265

266
267
268
269
270
271
272

273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will process them.  If \fIgenfunc\fR encounters
an error then it should leave an error message in interpreter
\fIinterp\fR's result,
in the usual Tcl fashion, and return \-1;  when this happens
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will abort its processing and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
.RE
.SS "FLAGS"

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR
\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR normally treats \fIargv[0]\fR as a program
or command name, and returns it to the caller just as if it
had not matched \fIargTable\fR.  If this flag is given, then
\fIargv[0]\fR is not given special treatment.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV\fR
Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR accepts unique abbreviations for
\fIkey\fR values in \fIargTable\fR.  If this flag is given then
only exact matches will be acceptable.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_NO_LEFTOVERS\fR
Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns unrecognized arguments to the
caller.  If this bit is set in \fIflags\fR then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR
will return an error if it encounters any argument that does not
match \fIargTable\fR.  The only exception to this rule is \fIargv[0]\fR,
which will be returned to the caller with no errors as
long as \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR is not specified.

.IP \fBTK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS\fR
Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR searches an internal table of
standard argument specifiers in addition to \fIargTable\fR.  If
this bit is set in \fIflags\fR, then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will
use only \fIargTable\fR and not its default table.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Here is an example definition of an \fIargTable\fR and
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
char *fileName = defaultFileName;
Boolean exec = FALSE;

/*
 * Define option descriptions.
 */
Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = {
    {"\-X", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, &debugFlag,
        "Turn on debugging printfs"},
    {"\-N", TK_ARGV_INT, NULL, &numReps,
        "Number of repetitions"},
    {"\-of", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, &fileName,
        "Name of file for output"},
    {"x", TK_ARGV_REST, NULL, &exec,
        "File to exec, followed by any arguments (must be last argument)."},
    {NULL, TK_ARGV_END, NULL, NULL,
        NULL}
};

main(argc, argv)
    int argc;
    char *argv[];
{
    \&...

    if (Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, &argc, argv, argTable, 0) != TCL_OK) {
        fprintf(stderr, "%s\en", Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
        exit(1);
    }

    /*
     * Remainder of the program.
     */
}
.CE
.PP
Note that default values can be assigned to variables named in
\fIargTable\fR:  the variables will only be overwritten if the
particular arguments are present in \fIargv\fR.
Here are some example command lines and their effects.
.CS
prog \-N 200 infile        # just sets the numReps variable to 200
prog \-of out200 infile    # sets fileName to reference "out200"
prog \-XN 10 infile        # sets the debug flag, also sets numReps
.CE
In all of the above examples, \fIargc\fR will be set by \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR to 2,
\fIargv\fR[0] will be
.QW prog ,
\fIargv\fR[1] will be
.QW infile ,
and \fIargv\fR[2] will be NULL.
.SH KEYWORDS
arguments, command line, options







|

|

|







<
<
|



















|
|
|









292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310


311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
char *fileName = defaultFileName;
Boolean exec = FALSE;

/*
 * Define option descriptions.
 */
Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = {
    {"-X", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, &debugFlag,
        "Turn on debugging printfs"},
    {"-N", TK_ARGV_INT, NULL, &numReps,
        "Number of repetitions"},
    {"-of", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, &fileName,
        "Name of file for output"},
    {"x", TK_ARGV_REST, NULL, &exec,
        "File to exec, followed by any arguments (must be last argument)."},
    {NULL, TK_ARGV_END, NULL, NULL,
        NULL}
};



int main(int argc, char *argv[])
{
    \&...

    if (Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, &argc, argv, argTable, 0) != TCL_OK) {
        fprintf(stderr, "%s\en", Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
        exit(1);
    }

    /*
     * Remainder of the program.
     */
}
.CE
.PP
Note that default values can be assigned to variables named in
\fIargTable\fR:  the variables will only be overwritten if the
particular arguments are present in \fIargv\fR.
Here are some example command lines and their effects.
.CS
prog -N 200 infile        # just sets the numReps variable to 200
prog -of out200 infile    # sets fileName to reference "out200"
prog -XN 10 infile        # sets the debug flag, also sets numReps
.CE
In all of the above examples, \fIargc\fR will be set by \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR to 2,
\fIargv\fR[0] will be
.QW prog ,
\fIargv\fR[1] will be
.QW infile ,
and \fIargv\fR[2] will be NULL.
.SH KEYWORDS
arguments, command line, options

Changes to doc/QWinEvent.3.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR(\fIdisplay, collapse\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr, position\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_QueuePosition position
.AP Display *display  in
Display for which to control motion event collapsing.
.AP int collapse in
Indicates whether motion events should be collapsed or not.
.AP XEvent *eventPtr  in







>







13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR(\fIdisplay, collapse\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr, position\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_QueuePosition position
.AP Display *display  in
Display for which to control motion event collapsing.
.AP int collapse in
Indicates whether motion events should be collapsed or not.
.AP XEvent *eventPtr  in

Changes to doc/Restack.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_RestackWindow \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_RestackWindow\fR(\fItkwin, aboveBelow, other\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window aboveBelow
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window to restack.
.AP int aboveBelow in
Indicates new position of \fItkwin\fR relative to \fIother\fR;
must be \fBAbove\fR or \fBBelow\fR.







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Tk_RestackWindow \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_RestackWindow\fR(\fItkwin, aboveBelow, other\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window aboveBelow
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window to restack.
.AP int aboveBelow in
Indicates new position of \fItkwin\fR relative to \fIother\fR;
must be \fBAbove\fR or \fBBelow\fR.

Changes to doc/RestrictEv.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_RestrictEvents \- filter and selectively delay X events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_RestrictProc *
\fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR(\fIproc, arg, prevArgPtr\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_RestrictProc **prevArgPtr
.AP Tk_RestrictProc *proc in
Predicate procedure to call to filter incoming X events.
NULL means do not restrict events at all.
.AP void *arg in
Arbitrary argument to pass to \fIproc\fR.







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Tk_RestrictEvents \- filter and selectively delay X events
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_RestrictProc *
\fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR(\fIproc, arg, prevArgPtr\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_RestrictProc **prevArgPtr
.AP Tk_RestrictProc *proc in
Predicate procedure to call to filter incoming X events.
NULL means do not restrict events at all.
.AP void *arg in
Arbitrary argument to pass to \fIproc\fR.

Changes to doc/SetAppName.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_SetAppName \- Set the name of an application for 'send' commands
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_SetAppName\fR(\fItkwin, name\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window parent
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in application.  Used only to select a particular
application.
.AP "const char" *name in
Name under which to register the application.







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Tk_SetAppName \- Set the name of an application for 'send' commands
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_SetAppName\fR(\fItkwin, name\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window parent
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window in application.  Used only to select a particular
application.
.AP "const char" *name in
Name under which to register the application.

Changes to doc/SetCaret.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Tk_SetCaretPos \- set the display caret location
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_SetCaretPos\fR(\fItkwin, x, y, height\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP int x in
Window-relative x coordinate.
.AP int y in
Window-relative y coordinate.







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_SetCaretPos \- set the display caret location
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_SetCaretPos\fR(\fItkwin, x, y, height\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP int x in
Window-relative x coordinate.
.AP int y in
Window-relative y coordinate.

Changes to doc/SetClass.3.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_SetClass\fR(\fItkwin, class\fR)
.sp
Tk_Uid
\fBTk_Class\fR(\fItkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window parent
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP char *class in
New class name for window.
.BE







>







14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_SetClass\fR(\fItkwin, class\fR)
.sp
Tk_Uid
\fBTk_Class\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window parent
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP char *class in
New class name for window.
.BE

Changes to doc/SetClassProcs.3.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
.SH NAME
Tk_SetClassProcs \- register widget specific procedures
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR(\fItkwin, procs, instanceData\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ClassProc instanceData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window to modify.
.AP "const Tk_ClassProcs" *procs in
Pointer to data structure containing widget specific procedures.
The data structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR must be static:







>







10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.SH NAME
Tk_SetClassProcs \- register widget specific procedures
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR(\fItkwin, procs, instanceData\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_ClassProc instanceData
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window to modify.
.AP "const Tk_ClassProcs" *procs in
Pointer to data structure containing widget specific procedures.
The data structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR must be static:

Changes to doc/SetGrid.3.

13
14
15
16
17
18
19

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_SetGrid\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR(\fItkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window heightInc
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP int reqWidth in
Width in grid units that corresponds to the pixel dimension \fItkwin\fR
has requested via \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR.







>







13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
\fBTk_SetGrid\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window heightInc
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP int reqWidth in
Width in grid units that corresponds to the pixel dimension \fItkwin\fR
has requested via \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR.

Changes to doc/SetOptions.3.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

38
39
40
41
42
43
44
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateOptionTable, Tk_DeleteOptionTable, Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, Tk_FreeSavedOptions, Tk_RestoreSavedOptions, Tk_GetOptionValue,  Tk_GetOptionInfo, Tk_FreeConfigOptions \- process configuration options
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_OptionTable
\fBTk_CreateOptionTable(\fIinterp, templatePtr\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteOptionTable(\fIoptionTable\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_InitOptions(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_SetOptions(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr, maskPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeSavedOptions(\fIsavedPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions(\fIsavedPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_GetOptionValue(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_GetOptionInfo(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions(\fIrecordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_SavedOptions "*const objv[]" in/out
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
A Tcl interpreter.  Most procedures use this only for returning error
messages; if it is NULL then no error messages are returned.  For
\fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR the value cannot be NULL; it gives the
interpreter in which the option table will be used.







|

|


|


|

|

|


|


|

|
>







10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
.SH NAME
Tk_CreateOptionTable, Tk_DeleteOptionTable, Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, Tk_FreeSavedOptions, Tk_RestoreSavedOptions, Tk_GetOptionValue,  Tk_GetOptionInfo, Tk_FreeConfigOptions \- process configuration options
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_OptionTable
\fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR(\fIinterp, templatePtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_DeleteOptionTable\fR(\fIoptionTable\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_InitOptions\fR(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_SetOptions\fR(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr, maskPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR(\fIsavedPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR(\fIsavedPtr\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR(\fIrecordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_SavedOptions "*const objv[]" in/out
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
A Tcl interpreter.  Most procedures use this only for returning error
messages; if it is NULL then no error messages are returned.  For
\fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR the value cannot be NULL; it gives the
interpreter in which the option table will be used.
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
.QW widget
will be used to refer to the object whose options are being managed; in
practice the object may not actually be a widget.  The term
.QW "widget record"
is used to refer to the C-level structure in
which information about a particular widget or object is stored.
.PP
Note: the easiest way to learn how to use these procedures is to
look at a working example.  In Tk, the simplest example is the code
that implements the button family of widgets, which is in \fBtkButton.c\fR.
Other examples are in \fBtkSquare.c\fR and \fBtkMenu.c\fR.
.PP
In order to use these procedures, the code that implements the widget
must contain a static array of Tk_OptionSpec structures. This is a
template that describes the various options supported by that class of







|







95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
.QW widget
will be used to refer to the object whose options are being managed; in
practice the object may not actually be a widget.  The term
.QW "widget record"
is used to refer to the C-level structure in
which information about a particular widget or object is stored.
.PP
Note that the easiest way to learn how to use these procedures is to
look at a working example.  In Tk, the simplest example is the code
that implements the button family of widgets, which is in \fBtkButton.c\fR.
Other examples are in \fBtkSquare.c\fR and \fBtkMenu.c\fR.
.PP
In order to use these procedures, the code that implements the widget
must contain a static array of Tk_OptionSpec structures. This is a
template that describes the various options supported by that class of
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336

337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426

427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437

438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
\fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR then the internal form is an integer.  If the
\fIobjOffset\fR or \fIinternalOffset\fR field is negative then the
value is not stored in that form.  At least one of the offsets must be
greater than or equal to zero.
.PP
The \fIflags\fR field consists of one or more bits ORed together. The
following flags are supported:
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
If this bit is set for an option then an empty string will be accepted as
the value for the option and the resulting internal form will be a NULL
pointer, a zero value, or \fBNone\fR, depending on the type of the option.
If the flag is not set then empty strings will result in errors.
\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR is typically used to allow a
feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to
\fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor.
Not all option types support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; for those that do, there is an explicit indication of that fact
in the descriptions below.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR
If this bit is set for an option then no default value will be set in
\fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. Neither the option database, nor any
system default value, nor \fIoptionTable\fR are used to give a default
value to this option. Instead it is assumed that the caller has already
supplied a default value in the widget code.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR\fR
If this value is set for an option, then it indicates the the
internalOffset points to an enum variable in stead of an int variable.
Only useful in combination with \fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR,
\fBTK_OPTION_BOOLEAN\fR, \fBTK_OPTION_ANCHOR\fR, \fBTK_OPTION_JUSTIFY\fR,
or \fBTK_OPTION_ANCHOR\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_VAR(type)\fR
If this value is set for an option, then it indicates the the
internalOffset points to a \fItype\fR variable in stead of an int variable.
Only useful in combination with \fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR or
\fBTK_OPTION_BOOLEAN\fR, or as \fBTK_OPTION_VAR(Tcl_Size)\fR
with \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR

.PP
The \fItype\fR field of each Tk_OptionSpec structure determines
how to parse the value of that configuration option. The
legal value for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are
described below.  If the type requires a \fItkwin\fR value to be
passed into procedures like \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, or if it uses
the \fIclientData\fR field of the Tk_OptionSpec, then it is indicated
explicitly; if not mentioned, the type requires neither \fItkwin\fR
nor \fIclientData\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_ANCHOR\fR
The value must be a standard anchor position such as \fBne\fR or
\fBcenter\fR.  The internal form is a Tk_Anchor value like the ones
returned by \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; if the empty string is specified as the value for the option,
the integer relief value is set to \fBTK_ANCHOR_NULL\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_BITMAP\fR
The value must be a standard Tk bitmap name. The internal form is a
Pixmap token like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_BOOLEAN\fR
The value must be a standard boolean value such as \fBtrue\fR or
\fBno\fR.  The internal form is an integer with value 0 or 1.  Note: if the
\fIobjOffset\fR field is not used then information about the original value
of this option will be lost.  This option type supports the
\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal
representation is set to -1.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_BORDER\fR
The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR.
The internal form is a Tk_3DBorder token like the ones returned
by \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR
The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR.
The internal form is an (XColor *) token like the ones returned by
\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_CURSOR\fR
The value must be a standard cursor name such as \fBcross\fR or \fB@foo\fR.
The internal form is a Tk_Cursor token like the ones returned by
\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and when the option is set the cursor
for the window is changed by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR.  This
option type also supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_CUSTOM\fR
This option allows applications to define new option types.  The
clientData field of the entry points to a structure defining the new
option type.  See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_DOUBLE\fR
The string value must be a floating-point number in
the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR.  The internal form is a C
\fBdouble\fR value.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to NaN.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_END\fR
Marks the end of the template.  There must be a Tk_OptionSpec structure
with \fItype\fR \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR at the end of each template.  If the
\fIclientData\fR field of this structure is not NULL, then it points to
an additional array of Tk_OptionSpec's, which is itself terminated by
another \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR entry.  Templates may be chained arbitrarily
deeply.  This feature allows common options to be shared by several
widget classes.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_FONT\fR
The value must be a standard font name such as \fBTimes 16\fR.
The internal form is a Tk_Font handle like the ones returned by
\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR
The string value must be an integer in the format accepted by
\fBstrtol\fR (e.g. \fB0\fR and \fB0x\fR prefixes may be used to
specify octal or hexadecimal numbers, respectively).  The internal
form is a C \fBint\fR value.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to INT_MIN.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_INDEX\fR
The string value must be an index in the format accepted by \fBTcl_GetIntForIndex()\fR

or the empty string.  The internal form is a C \fBint\fR value. If the string
starts with \fB-\fR, the internal representation will be set to INT_MIN. If the
string has the form \fBend-???\fR, then the result will be a negative number:
\fB-1\fR stands for \fBend\fR, \fB-2\fR stands for \fBend-1\fR and so on.
This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag;
if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to INT_MIN.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_JUSTIFY\fR
The value must be a standard justification value such as \fBleft\fR.
The internal form is a Tk_Justify like the values returned by
\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR

flag; if the empty string is specified as the value for the option,
the integer relief value is set to \fBTK_JUSTIFY_NULL\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR
The value must specify a screen distance such as \fB2i\fR or \fB6.4\fR.
The internal form is an integer value giving a
distance in pixels, like the values returned by
\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR.  Note: if the \fIobjOffset\fR field is not
used then information about the original value of this option will be lost.
See \fBOBJOFFSET VS. INTERNALOFFSET\fR below for details.  This option
type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the
internal representation is set to INT_MIN.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_RELIEF\fR
The value must be standard relief such as \fBraised\fR.
The internal form is an integer relief value such as
\fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to
\fBTK_RELIEF_NULL\fR.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR
The value may be any string.  The internal form is a (char *) pointer
that points to a dynamically allocated copy of the value.
This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR
For this type, \fIclientData\fR is a pointer to an array of strings
suitable for passing to \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR.  The value must
be one of the strings in the table, or a unique abbreviation of
one of the strings.  The internal form is an integer giving the index
into the table of the matching string, like the return value
from \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR.  This option type supports the
\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal
representation is set to -1.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_SYNONYM\fR
This type is used to provide alternative names for an option (for
example, \fB\-bg\fR is often used as a synonym for \fB\-background\fR).
The \fBclientData\fR field is a string that gives the name of another
option in the same table.  Whenever the synonym option is used, the
information from the other option will be used instead.
.TP
\fBTK_OPTION_WINDOW\fR
The value must be a window path name.  The internal form is a
\fBTk_Window\fR token for the window.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR (in order to identify the application),
and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
.SH "STORAGE MANAGEMENT ISSUES"
.PP







<
|










<
|





<
|





<
|



|

>









|
|


|
|
|
<
|




<
|

|
|
|


<
|





<
|





<
|







<
|



<
|




<
|







<
|





<
|


|
|

<
|
|
>

|




<
|


|
>


<
|



|
|



<
|





<
|



<
|








<
|





<
|







298
299
300
301
302
303
304

305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315

316
317
318
319
320
321

322
323
324
325
326
327

328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350

351
352
353
354
355

356
357
358
359
360
361
362

363
364
365
366
367
368

369
370
371
372
373
374

375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382

383
384
385
386

387
388
389
390
391

392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399

400
401
402
403
404
405

406
407
408
409
410
411

412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420

421
422
423
424
425
426
427

428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436

437
438
439
440
441
442

443
444
445
446

447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455

456
457
458
459
460
461

462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
\fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR then the internal form is an integer.  If the
\fIobjOffset\fR or \fIinternalOffset\fR field is negative then the
value is not stored in that form.  At least one of the offsets must be
greater than or equal to zero.
.PP
The \fIflags\fR field consists of one or more bits ORed together. The
following flags are supported:

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
If this bit is set for an option then an empty string will be accepted as
the value for the option and the resulting internal form will be a NULL
pointer, a zero value, or \fBNone\fR, depending on the type of the option.
If the flag is not set then empty strings will result in errors.
\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR is typically used to allow a
feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to
\fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor.
Not all option types support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; for those that do, there is an explicit indication of that fact
in the descriptions below.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR
If this bit is set for an option then no default value will be set in
\fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. Neither the option database, nor any
system default value, nor \fIoptionTable\fR are used to give a default
value to this option. Instead it is assumed that the caller has already
supplied a default value in the widget code.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR\fR
If this value is set for an option, then it indicates the the
internalOffset points to an enum variable in stead of an int variable.
Only useful in combination with \fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR,
\fBTK_OPTION_BOOLEAN\fR, \fBTK_OPTION_ANCHOR\fR, \fBTK_OPTION_JUSTIFY\fR,
or \fBTK_OPTION_ANCHOR\fR.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_VAR(\fItype\fB)\fR
If this value is set for an option, then it indicates the the
internalOffset points to a \fItype\fR variable in stead of an int variable.
Only useful in combination with \fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR or
\fBTK_OPTION_BOOLEAN\fR, or as \fBTK_OPTION_VAR(int)\fR
with \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR
.RS
.PP
The \fItype\fR field of each Tk_OptionSpec structure determines
how to parse the value of that configuration option. The
legal value for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are
described below.  If the type requires a \fItkwin\fR value to be
passed into procedures like \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, or if it uses
the \fIclientData\fR field of the Tk_OptionSpec, then it is indicated
explicitly; if not mentioned, the type requires neither \fItkwin\fR
nor \fIclientData\fR.
.RE
.IP \fBTK_OPTION_ANCHOR\fR
The value must be a standard anchor position such as \fBne\fR or
\fBcenter\fR.  The internal form is a Tk_Anchor value like the ones
returned by \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR.  This option type supports the
\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if the empty string is specified as the
value for the option, the integer relief value is set to \fBTK_ANCHOR_NULL\fR.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_BITMAP\fR
The value must be a standard Tk bitmap name. The internal form is a
Pixmap token like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_BOOLEAN\fR
The value must be a standard boolean value such as \fBtrue\fR or
\fBno\fR.  The internal form is an integer with value 0 or 1.  Note that if
the \fIobjOffset\fR field is not used, information about the original
value of this option will be lost.  This option type supports the
\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal
representation is set to -1.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_BORDER\fR
The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR.
The internal form is a Tk_3DBorder token like the ones returned
by \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR
The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR.
The internal form is an (XColor *) token like the ones returned by
\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_CURSOR\fR
The value must be a standard cursor name such as \fBcross\fR or \fB@foo\fR.
The internal form is a Tk_Cursor token like the ones returned by
\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and when the option is set the cursor
for the window is changed by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR.  This
option type also supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_CUSTOM\fR
This option allows applications to define new option types.  The
clientData field of the entry points to a structure defining the new
option type.  See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_DOUBLE\fR
The string value must be a floating-point number in
the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR.  The internal form is a C
\fBdouble\fR value.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to NaN.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR
Marks the end of the template.  There must be a Tk_OptionSpec structure
with \fItype\fR \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR at the end of each template.  If the
\fIclientData\fR field of this structure is not NULL, then it points to
an additional array of Tk_OptionSpec's, which is itself terminated by
another \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR entry.  Templates may be chained arbitrarily
deeply.  This feature allows common options to be shared by several
widget classes.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_FONT\fR
The value must be a standard font name such as \fBTimes 16\fR.
The internal form is a Tk_Font handle like the ones returned by
\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR
The string value must be an integer in the format accepted by
\fBstrtol\fR (e.g. \fB0\fR and \fB0x\fR prefixes may be used to
specify octal or hexadecimal numbers, respectively).  The internal form is
a C \fBint\fR value.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to INT_MIN.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_INDEX\fR
The string value must be an index in the format accepted by
\fBTcl_GetIntForIndex()\fR
or the empty string.  The internal form is a C \fBint\fR value. If the string
starts with \fB\-\fR, the internal representation will be set to INT_MIN. If the
string has the form \fBend-???\fR, then the result will be a negative number:
\fB-1\fR stands for \fBend\fR, \fB-2\fR stands for \fBend-1\fR and so on.
This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag;
if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to INT_MIN.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_JUSTIFY\fR
The value must be a standard justification value such as \fBleft\fR.
The internal form is a Tk_Justify like the values returned by
\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR.  This option type supports the
\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; if the empty string is specified as the value for the option,
the integer relief value is set to \fBTK_JUSTIFY_NULL\fR.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR
The value must specify a screen distance such as \fB2i\fR or \fB6.4\fR.
The internal form is an integer value giving a
distance in pixels, like the values returned by
\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR.  Note that if the \fIobjOffset\fR field is not
used, information about the original value of this option will be lost.
See \fBOBJOFFSET VS. INTERNALOFFSET\fR below for details.  This option
type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the
internal representation is set to INT_MIN.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_RELIEF\fR
The value must be standard relief such as \fBraised\fR.
The internal form is an integer relief value such as
\fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to
\fBTK_RELIEF_NULL\fR.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR
The value may be any string.  The internal form is a (char *) pointer
that points to a dynamically allocated copy of the value.
This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR
For this type, \fIclientData\fR is a pointer to an array of strings
suitable for passing to \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR.  The value must
be one of the strings in the table, or a unique abbreviation of
one of the strings.  The internal form is an integer giving the index
into the table of the matching string, like the return value
from \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR.  This option type supports the
\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal
representation is set to -1.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_SYNONYM\fR
This type is used to provide alternative names for an option (for
example, \fB\-bg\fR is often used as a synonym for \fB\-background\fR).
The \fBclientData\fR field is a string that gives the name of another
option in the same table.  Whenever the synonym option is used, the
information from the other option will be used instead.

.IP \fBTK_OPTION_WINDOW\fR
The value must be a window path name.  The internal form is a
\fBTk_Window\fR token for the window.
This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR (in order to identify the application),
and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
.SH "STORAGE MANAGEMENT ISSUES"
.PP
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
the original screen-independent value. Thus for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options
it is better to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field.  In this case the original
value of the option is retained in the object and can be returned when
the option is retrieved.  In most cases it is convenient to use the
\fIinternalOffset\fR field as well, so that the integer value is
immediately available for use in the widget code (alternatively,
\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR can be used to extract the integer value from
the object whenever it is needed).  Note: the problem of losing information
on retrievals exists only for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options.
.PP
The second reason to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field is in order to
implement new types of options not supported by these procedures.
To implement a new type of option, you can use \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR as
the type in the Tk_OptionSpec structure and set the \fIobjOffset\fR field
but not the \fIinternalOffset\fR field.  Then, after calling
\fBTk_SetOptions\fR, convert the object to internal form yourself.







|
|







505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
the original screen-independent value. Thus for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options
it is better to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field.  In this case the original
value of the option is retained in the object and can be returned when
the option is retrieved.  In most cases it is convenient to use the
\fIinternalOffset\fR field as well, so that the integer value is
immediately available for use in the widget code (alternatively,
\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR can be used to extract the integer value from
the object whenever it is needed).  Note that the problem of losing
information on retrievals exists only for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options.
.PP
The second reason to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field is in order to
implement new types of options not supported by these procedures.
To implement a new type of option, you can use \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR as
the type in the Tk_OptionSpec structure and set the \fIobjOffset\fR field
but not the \fIinternalOffset\fR field.  Then, after calling
\fBTk_SetOptions\fR, convert the object to internal form yourself.
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
may be NULL, indicating that no function should be called for those
operations.
.PP
The \fIsetProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR to
convert a Tcl_Obj into an internal representation and store the
resulting value in the widget record.  The arguments are:
.RS
.TP
\fIclientData\fR
A copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption
structure.
.TP
\fIinterp\fR
A pointer to a Tcl interpreter, used for error reporting.
.TP
\fITkwin\fR
A copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR
.TP
\fIvaluePtr\fR
A pointer to a reference to a Tcl_Obj describing the new value for the
option; it could have been specified explicitly in the call to
\fBTk_SetOptions\fR or it could come from the option database or a
default.  If the objOffset for the option is non-negative (the option
value is stored as a (Tcl_Obj *) in the widget record), the Tcl_Obj
pointer referenced by \fIvaluePtr\fR is the pointer that will be
stored at the objOffset for the option.  \fISetProc\fR may modify the
value if necessary; for example, \fIsetProc\fR may change the value to
NULL to support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
.TP
\fIrecordPtr\fR
A pointer to the start of the widget record to modify.
.TP
\fIinternalOffset\fR
Offset in bytes from the start of the widget record to the location
where the internal representation of the option value is to be placed.
.TP
\fIsaveInternalPtr\fR
A pointer to storage allocated in a Tk_SavedOptions structure for the
internal representation of the original option value.  Before setting
the option to its new value, \fIsetProc\fR should set the value
referenced by \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR to the original value of the
option in order to support \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR.
.TP
\fIflags\fR
A copy of the \fIflags\fR field in the Tk_OptionSpec structure for the
option
.RE
.PP
\fISetProc\fR returns a standard Tcl result: \fBTCL_OK\fR to indicate successful
processing, or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR to indicate a failure of any kind.  An error
message may be left in the Tcl interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR in







<
|


<
|

<
|

<
|









<
|

<
|


<
|





<
|







575
576
577
578
579
580
581

582
583
584

585
586

587
588

589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598

599
600

601
602
603

604
605
606
607
608
609

610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
may be NULL, indicating that no function should be called for those
operations.
.PP
The \fIsetProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR to
convert a Tcl_Obj into an internal representation and store the
resulting value in the widget record.  The arguments are:
.RS

.IP \fIclientData\fR
A copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption
structure.

.IP \fIinterp\fR
A pointer to a Tcl interpreter, used for error reporting.

.IP \fITkwin\fR
A copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR

.IP \fIvaluePtr\fR
A pointer to a reference to a Tcl_Obj describing the new value for the
option; it could have been specified explicitly in the call to
\fBTk_SetOptions\fR or it could come from the option database or a
default.  If the objOffset for the option is non-negative (the option
value is stored as a (Tcl_Obj *) in the widget record), the Tcl_Obj
pointer referenced by \fIvaluePtr\fR is the pointer that will be
stored at the objOffset for the option.  \fISetProc\fR may modify the
value if necessary; for example, \fIsetProc\fR may change the value to
NULL to support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.

.IP \fIrecordPtr\fR
A pointer to the start of the widget record to modify.

.IP \fIinternalOffset\fR
Offset in bytes from the start of the widget record to the location
where the internal representation of the option value is to be placed.

.IP \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR
A pointer to storage allocated in a Tk_SavedOptions structure for the
internal representation of the original option value.  Before setting
the option to its new value, \fIsetProc\fR should set the value
referenced by \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR to the original value of the
option in order to support \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR.

.IP \fIflags\fR
A copy of the \fIflags\fR field in the Tk_OptionSpec structure for the
option
.RE
.PP
\fISetProc\fR returns a standard Tcl result: \fBTCL_OK\fR to indicate successful
processing, or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR to indicate a failure of any kind.  An error
message may be left in the Tcl interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR in

Changes to doc/SetVisual.3.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_SetWindowVisual \- change visual characteristics of window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR(\fItkwin, visual, depth, colormap\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_Window int" colormap
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP Visual *visual in
New visual type to use for \fItkwin\fR.
.AP "int" depth in







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Tk_SetWindowVisual \- change visual characteristics of window
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR(\fItkwin, visual, depth, colormap\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS "Tk_Window int" colormap
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP Visual *visual in
New visual type to use for \fItkwin\fR.
.AP "int" depth in
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
The safest thing is to call \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR immediately
after calling \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR.
If \fItkwin\fR has already been created before \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR
is called then it returns 0 and does not make any changes;  otherwise
it returns 1 to signify that the operation
completed successfully.
.PP
Note:  \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR should not be called if you just want
to change a window's colormap without changing its visual or depth;
call \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR instead.
.SH KEYWORDS
colormap, depth, visual







|




40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
The safest thing is to call \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR immediately
after calling \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR.
If \fItkwin\fR has already been created before \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR
is called then it returns 0 and does not make any changes;  otherwise
it returns 1 to signify that the operation
completed successfully.
.PP
Note that \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR should not be called if you just want
to change a window's colormap without changing its visual or depth;
call \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR instead.
.SH KEYWORDS
colormap, depth, visual

Changes to doc/StrictMotif.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Tk_StrictMotif \- Return value of tk_strictMotif variable
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_StrictMotif\fR(\fItkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_StrictMotif \- Return value of tk_strictMotif variable
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_StrictMotif\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP

Changes to doc/TextLayout.3.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41

42
43
44
45
46
47
48
.SH NAME
Tk_ComputeTextLayout, Tk_FreeTextLayout, Tk_DrawTextLayout, Tk_UnderlineTextLayout, Tk_PointToChar, Tk_CharBbox, Tk_DistanceToTextLayout, Tk_IntersectTextLayout, Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript \- routines to measure and display single-font, multi-line, justified text.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_TextLayout
\fBTk_ComputeTextLayout(\fItkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_FreeTextLayout(\fIlayout\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_DrawTextLayout(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_UnderlineTextLayout(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_PointToChar(\fIlayout, x, y\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_CharBbox(\fIlayout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_DistanceToTextLayout(\fIlayout, x, y\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_IntersectTextLayout(\fIlayout, x, y, width, height\fB)\fR
.sp
void
\fBTk_TextLayoutToPostscript(\fIinterp, layout\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_TextLayout "*xPtr, *yPtr"
.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
Font to use when constructing and displaying a text layout.  The
\fItkfont\fR must remain valid for the lifetime of the text layout.  Must
have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
.AP "const char" *string in







|

<
|

<
|

<
|


|


|


|


|

<
|
>







10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20

21
22

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
.SH NAME
Tk_ComputeTextLayout, Tk_FreeTextLayout, Tk_DrawTextLayout, Tk_UnderlineTextLayout, Tk_PointToChar, Tk_CharBbox, Tk_DistanceToTextLayout, Tk_IntersectTextLayout, Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript \- routines to measure and display single-font, multi-line, justified text.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_TextLayout
\fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR(\fItkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_FreeTextLayout\fR(\fIlayout\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_DrawTextLayout\fR(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_UnderlineTextLayout\fR(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_PointToChar\fR(\fIlayout, x, y\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_CharBbox\fR(\fIlayout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_DistanceToTextLayout\fR(\fIlayout, x, y\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_IntersectTextLayout\fR(\fIlayout, x, y, width, height\fR)
.sp

\fBTk_TextLayoutToPostscript\fR(\fIinterp, layout\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_TextLayout "*xPtr, *yPtr"
.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
Font to use when constructing and displaying a text layout.  The
\fItkfont\fR must remain valid for the lifetime of the text layout.  Must
have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
.AP "const char" *string in

Changes to doc/TkInitStubs.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Tk_InitStubs \- initialize the Tk stubs mechanism
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_InitStubs\fR(\fIinterp, version, exact\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *interp in
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Tcl interpreter handle.
.AP char *version in
A version string consisting of one or more decimal numbers
separated by dots.







>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tk_InitStubs \- initialize the Tk stubs mechanism
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
const char *
\fBTk_InitStubs\fR(\fIinterp, version, exact\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *interp in
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Tcl interpreter handle.
.AP char *version in
A version string consisting of one or more decimal numbers
separated by dots.

Changes to doc/Tk_Init.3.

43
44
45
46
47
48
49

50
51
52

53
54
55
56
57
58

59
60
61

62
63
64
65

66
67
68

69
70
71

72
73
74

75
76
77

78
79
80
81

82
83
84
85
its command-line arguments).
.PP
\fBTk_SafeInit\fR is identical to \fBTk_Init\fR except that it removes
all Tk commands that are considered unsafe.  Those commands and the
reasons for their exclusion are:
.TP
\fBbell\fR

Continuous ringing of the bell is a nuisance.
.TP
\fBclipboard\fR

A malicious script could replace the contents of the clipboard with
the string
.QW "\fBrm \-r *\fR"
and lead to surprises when the contents of the clipboard are pasted.
.TP
\fBgrab\fR

Grab can be used to block the user from using any other applications.
.TP
\fBmenu\fR

Menus can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input from
the user.
.TP
\fBselection\fR

See clipboard.
.TP
\fBsend\fR

Send can be used to cause unsafe interpreters to execute commands.
.TP
\fBtk\fR

The tk command recreates the send command, which is unsafe.
.TP
\fBtkwait\fR

Tkwait can block the containing process forever
.TP
\fBtoplevel\fR

Toplevels can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input
from the user.
.TP
\fBwm\fR

If toplevels are ever allowed, wm can be used to remove decorations,
move windows around, etc.
.SH KEYWORDS
safe, application, initialization, load, main window







>



>






>



>




>



>



>



>



>




>




43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
its command-line arguments).
.PP
\fBTk_SafeInit\fR is identical to \fBTk_Init\fR except that it removes
all Tk commands that are considered unsafe.  Those commands and the
reasons for their exclusion are:
.TP
\fBbell\fR
.
Continuous ringing of the bell is a nuisance.
.TP
\fBclipboard\fR
.
A malicious script could replace the contents of the clipboard with
the string
.QW "\fBrm \-r *\fR"
and lead to surprises when the contents of the clipboard are pasted.
.TP
\fBgrab\fR
.
Grab can be used to block the user from using any other applications.
.TP
\fBmenu\fR
.
Menus can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input from
the user.
.TP
\fBselection\fR
.
See clipboard.
.TP
\fBsend\fR
.
Send can be used to cause unsafe interpreters to execute commands.
.TP
\fBtk\fR
.
The tk command recreates the send command, which is unsafe.
.TP
\fBtkwait\fR
.
Tkwait can block the containing process forever
.TP
\fBtoplevel\fR
.
Toplevels can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input
from the user.
.TP
\fBwm\fR
.
If toplevels are ever allowed, wm can be used to remove decorations,
move windows around, etc.
.SH KEYWORDS
safe, application, initialization, load, main window

Changes to doc/WinUtil.3.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
.SH NAME
Tk_GetOtherWindow, Tk_MakeContainer, Tk_MakeWindow, Tk_UseWindow \- window utility functions
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_GetOtherWindow(\fItkwin\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_MakeContainer(\fItkwin\fB)\fR
.sp
\fBTk_MakeWindow(\fItkwin, parent\fB)\fR
.sp
int
\fBTk_UseWindow(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS XSetWindowAttributes borderWidth
.AP Tcl_Interp * interp in
Interpreter associated with the application.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP Window parent in







|

|

|


|
>







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
.SH NAME
Tk_GetOtherWindow, Tk_MakeContainer, Tk_MakeWindow, Tk_UseWindow \- window utility functions
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
.sp
Tk_Window
\fBTk_GetOtherWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_MakeContainer\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
\fBTk_MakeWindow\fR(\fItkwin, parent\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTk_UseWindow\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS XSetWindowAttributes borderWidth
.AP Tcl_Interp * interp in
Interpreter associated with the application.
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.AP Window parent in

Changes to doc/WindowId.3.

99
100
101
102
103
104
105

106
107
108
109
110
111
112
\fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Interp *
\fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_NewWindowObj\fR(\fItkwin\fR)

.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP







>







99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
\fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Interp *
\fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Obj *
\fBTk_NewWindowObj\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tk_Window tkwin
.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
Token for window.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
The width and height information refers to the interior size
of the window, not including any border.  \fBTk_Changes\fR
returns a pointer to a structure containing all of the above
information plus a few other fields.  \fBTk_Attributes\fR
returns a pointer to an XSetWindowAttributes structure describing
all of the attributes of the \fItkwin\fR's window, such as background
pixmap, event mask, and so on (Tk keeps track of all this information
as it is changed by the application).  Note: it is essential that
applications use Tk procedures like \fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR instead
of X procedures like \fBXResizeWindow\fR, so that Tk can keep its
data structures up-to-date.
.PP
\fBTk_IsContainer\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR
is a container, and that some other application may be embedding
itself inside \fItkwin\fR.







|







144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
The width and height information refers to the interior size
of the window, not including any border.  \fBTk_Changes\fR
returns a pointer to a structure containing all of the above
information plus a few other fields.  \fBTk_Attributes\fR
returns a pointer to an XSetWindowAttributes structure describing
all of the attributes of the \fItkwin\fR's window, such as background
pixmap, event mask, and so on (Tk keeps track of all this information
as it is changed by the application).  Note that it is essential that
applications use Tk procedures like \fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR instead
of X procedures like \fBXResizeWindow\fR, so that Tk can keep its
data structures up-to-date.
.PP
\fBTk_IsContainer\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR
is a container, and that some other application may be embedding
itself inside \fItkwin\fR.

Changes to doc/bind.n.

145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152

153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
times, and also place a time and space requirement on the sequence: for a
sequence of events to match a \fBDouble\fR, \fBTriple\fR or \fBQuadruple\fR
pattern, all of the events must occur close together in time and without
substantial mouse motion in between.  For example, \fB<Double\-Button\-1>\fR
is equivalent to \fB<Button\-1><Button\-1>\fR with the extra time and space
requirement.
.PP
The \fBCommand\fR, \fBOption\fR, \fBNum\fR and \fBFn\fRmodifiers are equivalents

of \fBMod1\fR up to \fBMod4\fR, they correspond to Macintosh-specific modifier keys.
.PP
The \fBExtended\fR modifier is, at present, specific to Windows.  It
appears on events that are associated with the keys on the
.QW "extended keyboard" .
On a US keyboard, the extended keys include the \fBAlt\fR
and \fBControl\fR keys at the right of the keyboard, the cursor keys
in the cluster to the left of the numeric pad, the \fBNumLock\fR key,







|
>
|







145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
times, and also place a time and space requirement on the sequence: for a
sequence of events to match a \fBDouble\fR, \fBTriple\fR or \fBQuadruple\fR
pattern, all of the events must occur close together in time and without
substantial mouse motion in between.  For example, \fB<Double\-Button\-1>\fR
is equivalent to \fB<Button\-1><Button\-1>\fR with the extra time and space
requirement.
.PP
The \fBCommand\fR, \fBOption\fR, \fBNum\fR and \fBFn\fRmodifiers are
equivalents of \fBMod1\fR up to \fBMod4\fR; they correspond to
Macintosh-specific modifier keys.
.PP
The \fBExtended\fR modifier is, at present, specific to Windows.  It
appears on events that are associated with the keys on the
.QW "extended keyboard" .
On a US keyboard, the extended keys include the \fBAlt\fR
and \fBControl\fR keys at the right of the keyboard, the cursor keys
in the cluster to the left of the numeric pad, the \fBNumLock\fR key,
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
appended scripts, is terminated but Tk will continue processing
binding scripts associated with other \fItag\fR's.
If the \fBbreak\fR command is invoked within a binding script,
then that script terminates and no other scripts will be invoked
for the event.
.PP
Within a script called from the binding script, \fBreturn\fR
\fB-code ok\fR may be used to continue processing (including
.QW +
appended scripts), or \fBreturn\fR \fB-code break\fR may be used to
stop processing all other binding scripts.
.PP
If more than one binding matches a particular event and they
have the same \fItag\fR, then the most specific binding
is chosen and its script is evaluated.
The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of
several matching sequences is more specific:







|

|







646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
appended scripts, is terminated but Tk will continue processing
binding scripts associated with other \fItag\fR's.
If the \fBbreak\fR command is invoked within a binding script,
then that script terminates and no other scripts will be invoked
for the event.
.PP
Within a script called from the binding script, \fBreturn\fR
\fB\-code ok\fR may be used to continue processing (including
.QW +
appended scripts), or \fBreturn\fR \fB\-code break\fR may be used to
stop processing all other binding scripts.
.PP
If more than one binding matches a particular event and they
have the same \fItag\fR, then the most specific binding
is chosen and its script is evaluated.
The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of
several matching sequences is more specific:
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
The \fBbgerror\fR command will be executed at global level
(outside the context of any Tcl procedure).
.SH "EXAMPLES"
.PP
Arrange for a string describing the motion of the mouse to be printed
out when the mouse is double-clicked:
.CS
\fBbind\fR . <Double\-1> {
    puts "hi from (%x,%y)"
}
.CE
.PP
A little GUI that displays what the keysym name of the last key
pressed is:
.CS
set keysym "Press any key"
pack [label .l \-textvariable keysym \-padx 2m \-pady 1m]
\fBbind\fR . <Key> {
    set keysym "You pressed %K"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
bgerror(n), bindtags(n), event(n), focus(n), grab(n), keysyms(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
binding, event
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|








|











736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
The \fBbgerror\fR command will be executed at global level
(outside the context of any Tcl procedure).
.SH "EXAMPLES"
.PP
Arrange for a string describing the motion of the mouse to be printed
out when the mouse is double-clicked:
.CS
\fBbind\fR . <Double-1> {
    puts "hi from (%x,%y)"
}
.CE
.PP
A little GUI that displays what the keysym name of the last key
pressed is:
.CS
set keysym "Press any key"
pack [label .l -textvariable keysym -padx 2m -pady 1m]
\fBbind\fR . <Key> {
    set keysym "You pressed %K"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
bgerror(n), bindtags(n), event(n), focus(n), grab(n), keysyms(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
binding, event
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/bitmap.n.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
bitmap \- Images that display two colors
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBimage create bitmap \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?

\fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
A bitmap is an image whose pixels can display either of two colors
or be transparent.







|







11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
bitmap \- Images that display two colors
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBimage create bitmap \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?

\fIimageName \fBcget\fI option\fR
\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
A bitmap is an image whose pixels can display either of two colors
or be transparent.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41

42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

58
59
60
61
62
63
64

65
66
67
68
69

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97

98
99
100
101
102
103
104

105
106
107
108
109
110
111
the source data is one and the background color if the source
data is zero.
.SH "CREATING BITMAPS"
.PP
Like all images, bitmaps are created using the \fBimage create\fR
command.
Bitmaps support the following \fIoptions\fR:

.TP
\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
.
Specifies a background color for the image in any of the standard
ways accepted by Tk.  If this option is set to an empty string
then the background pixels will be transparent.  This effect
is achieved by using the source bitmap as the mask bitmap, ignoring
any \fB\-maskdata\fR or \fB\-maskfile\fR options.

.TP
\fB\-data \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies the contents of the source bitmap as a string.
The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
If both the \fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified,
the \fB\-data\fR option takes precedence.

.TP
\fB\-file \fIname\fR
.
\fIname\fR gives the name of a file whose contents define the
source bitmap.
The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
by the \fBbitmap\fR program).

.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
.
Specifies a foreground color for the image in any of the standard
ways accepted by Tk.

.TP
\fB\-maskdata \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies the contents of the mask as a string.
The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
If both the \fB\-maskdata\fR and \fB\-maskfile\fR options are specified,
the \fB\-maskdata\fR option takes precedence.

.TP
\fB\-maskfile \fIname\fR
.
\fIname\fR gives the name of a file whose contents define the
mask.
The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
.SH "IMAGE COMMAND"
.PP
When a bitmap image is created, Tk also creates a new command
whose name is the same as the image.
This command may be used to invoke various operations
on the image.
It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIimageName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for bitmap images:

.TP
\fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBimage create\fR \fBbitmap\fR command.

.TP
\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options for the image.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIimageName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified







>








>








>







>





>








>




















>

|





>







35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
the source data is one and the background color if the source
data is zero.
.SH "CREATING BITMAPS"
.PP
Like all images, bitmaps are created using the \fBimage create\fR
command.
Bitmaps support the following \fIoptions\fR:
.\" OPTION: -background
.TP
\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
.
Specifies a background color for the image in any of the standard
ways accepted by Tk.  If this option is set to an empty string
then the background pixels will be transparent.  This effect
is achieved by using the source bitmap as the mask bitmap, ignoring
any \fB\-maskdata\fR or \fB\-maskfile\fR options.
.\" OPTION: -data
.TP
\fB\-data \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies the contents of the source bitmap as a string.
The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
If both the \fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified,
the \fB\-data\fR option takes precedence.
.\" OPTION: -file
.TP
\fB\-file \fIname\fR
.
\fIname\fR gives the name of a file whose contents define the
source bitmap.
The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
.\" OPTION: -foreground
.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
.
Specifies a foreground color for the image in any of the standard
ways accepted by Tk.
.\" OPTION: -maskdata
.TP
\fB\-maskdata \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies the contents of the mask as a string.
The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
If both the \fB\-maskdata\fR and \fB\-maskfile\fR options are specified,
the \fB\-maskdata\fR option takes precedence.
.\" OPTION: -maskfile
.TP
\fB\-maskfile \fIname\fR
.
\fIname\fR gives the name of a file whose contents define the
mask.
The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
.SH "IMAGE COMMAND"
.PP
When a bitmap image is created, Tk also creates a new command
whose name is the same as the image.
This command may be used to invoke various operations
on the image.
It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIimageName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for bitmap images:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIimageName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBimage create\fR \fBbitmap\fR command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options for the image.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIimageName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified

Changes to doc/busy.n.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45

46
47
48
49
50
51
52
.TH busy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
busy \- Make Tk widgets busy, temporarily blocking user interactions
.SH SYNOPSIS

\fBtk busy\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.sp
\fBtk busy busywindow \fIwindow\fR
.sp
\fBtk busy hold\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.sp
\fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.sp
\fBtk busy forget\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow \fR?...
.sp
\fBtk busy current\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
.sp
\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk busy\fR command provides a simple means to block mouse pointer events
from Tk widgets, while overriding the widget's cursor with a configurable busy
cursor. Note this command does not prevent keyboard events from being sent to
the widgets made busy.







>
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<

<

>







26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

35

36

37

38

39

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
.TH busy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
busy \- Make Tk widgets busy, temporarily blocking user interactions
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBtk busy\fI window \fR?\fIoptions\fR?

\fBtk busy busywindow \fIwindow\fR

\fBtk busy hold\fI window \fR?\fIoptions\fR?

\fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...

\fBtk busy forget\fI window \fR?\fIwindow \fR?...

\fBtk busy current\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?

\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk busy\fR command provides a simple means to block mouse pointer events
from Tk widgets, while overriding the widget's cursor with a configurable busy
cursor. Note this command does not prevent keyboard events from being sent to
the widgets made busy.
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131

132
133
134
135
136
137

138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145

146
147
148
149
150
151
152
\fBtk busy\fR forget .top
.CE
.PP
The busy window has a configurable cursor. You can change the busy cursor
using the \fBconfigure\fR operation.
.PP
.CS
\fBtk busy\fR configure .top \-cursor "watch"
.CE
.PP
Destroying the widget will also clean up any resources allocated by the \fBtk
busy\fR command.
.PP
.SH OPERATIONS
.PP
The following operations are available for the \fBtk busy\fR command:
.TP
\fBtk busy \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.
Shortcut for \fBtk busy hold\fR command.

.TP
\fBtk busy busywindow \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the pathname of the busy window (i.e. the transparent window
shielding the window appearing busy) created by the \fBtk busy hold\fR
command for \fIwindow\fR, or the empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not busy.

.TP
\fBtk busy cget \fIwindow\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Queries the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for \fIwindow\fR.
\fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made busy by the
\fBhold\fR operation. The command returns the present value of the specified
\fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBhold\fR operation.

.TP
\fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.
Queries or modifies the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for
\fIwindow\fR. \fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made
busy by the \fBhold\fR operation.  If no options are specified, a list
describing all of the available options for \fIwindow\fR (see







|












>






>

|






>







108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
\fBtk busy\fR forget .top
.CE
.PP
The busy window has a configurable cursor. You can change the busy cursor
using the \fBconfigure\fR operation.
.PP
.CS
\fBtk busy\fR configure .top -cursor "watch"
.CE
.PP
Destroying the widget will also clean up any resources allocated by the \fBtk
busy\fR command.
.PP
.SH OPERATIONS
.PP
The following operations are available for the \fBtk busy\fR command:
.TP
\fBtk busy \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.
Shortcut for \fBtk busy hold\fR command.
.\" METHOD: busywindow
.TP
\fBtk busy busywindow \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the pathname of the busy window (i.e. the transparent window
shielding the window appearing busy) created by the \fBtk busy hold\fR
command for \fIwindow\fR, or the empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not busy.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fBtk busy cget \fIwindow option\fR
.
Queries the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for \fIwindow\fR.
\fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made busy by the
\fBhold\fR operation. The command returns the present value of the specified
\fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBhold\fR operation.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.
Queries or modifies the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for
\fIwindow\fR. \fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made
busy by the \fBhold\fR operation.  If no options are specified, a list
describing all of the available options for \fIwindow\fR (see
165
166
167
168
169
170
171

172
173
174
175
176
177

178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185

186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199

200
201
202
203
204
205
206

207
208
209
210
211
212
213
specified for it by either \fBoption\fR command:
.PP
.CS
option add *frame.busyCursor gumby
option add *Frame.BusyCursor gumby
.CE
.RE

.TP
\fBtk busy current \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
.
Returns the pathnames of all widgets that are currently busy. If a
\fIpattern\fR is given, only the path names of busy widgets matching
\fIpattern\fR are returned.

.TP
\fBtk busy forget \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindow\fR?...
.
Releases resources allocated by the \fBtk busy\fR command for \fIwindow\fR,
including the transparent window. User events will again be received by
\fIwindow\fR. Resources are also released when \fIwindow\fR is destroyed.
\fIWindow\fR must be the name of a widget specified in the \fBhold\fR
operation, otherwise an error is reported.

.TP
\fBtk busy hold \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.
Makes the specified \fIwindow\fR (and its descendants in the Tk window
hierarchy) appear busy. \fIWindow\fR must be a valid path name of a Tk widget.
A transparent window is put in front of the specified window. This transparent
window is mapped the next time idle tasks are processed, and the specified
window and its descendants will be blocked from user interactions. Normally
\fBupdate\fR should be called immediately afterward to insure that the hold
operation is in effect before the application starts its processing. The
command returns the pathname of the busy window that was created (i.e. the
transparent window shielding the window appearing busy). The following
configuration options are valid:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-cursor \fIcursorName\fR
.
Specifies the cursor to be displayed when the widget is made busy.
\fICursorName\fR can be in any form accepted by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The
default cursor is \fBwait\fR on Windows and \fBwatch\fR on other platforms.
.RE

.TP
\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the status of a widget \fIwindow\fR. If \fIwindow\fR presently can not
receive user interactions, \fB1\fR is returned, otherwise \fB0\fR.
.SH "EVENT HANDLING"
.SS BINDINGS







>






>








>














>







>







164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
specified for it by either \fBoption\fR command:
.PP
.CS
option add *frame.busyCursor gumby
option add *Frame.BusyCursor gumby
.CE
.RE
.\" METHOD: current
.TP
\fBtk busy current \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
.
Returns the pathnames of all widgets that are currently busy. If a
\fIpattern\fR is given, only the path names of busy widgets matching
\fIpattern\fR are returned.
.\" METHOD: forget
.TP
\fBtk busy forget \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindow\fR?...
.
Releases resources allocated by the \fBtk busy\fR command for \fIwindow\fR,
including the transparent window. User events will again be received by
\fIwindow\fR. Resources are also released when \fIwindow\fR is destroyed.
\fIWindow\fR must be the name of a widget specified in the \fBhold\fR
operation, otherwise an error is reported.
.\" METHOD: hold
.TP
\fBtk busy hold \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.
Makes the specified \fIwindow\fR (and its descendants in the Tk window
hierarchy) appear busy. \fIWindow\fR must be a valid path name of a Tk widget.
A transparent window is put in front of the specified window. This transparent
window is mapped the next time idle tasks are processed, and the specified
window and its descendants will be blocked from user interactions. Normally
\fBupdate\fR should be called immediately afterward to insure that the hold
operation is in effect before the application starts its processing. The
command returns the pathname of the busy window that was created (i.e. the
transparent window shielding the window appearing busy). The following
configuration options are valid:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -cursor
.TP
\fB\-cursor \fIcursorName\fR
.
Specifies the cursor to be displayed when the widget is made busy.
\fICursorName\fR can be in any form accepted by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The
default cursor is \fBwait\fR on Windows and \fBwatch\fR on other platforms.
.RE
.\" METHOD: status
.TP
\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the status of a widget \fIwindow\fR. If \fIwindow\fR presently can not
receive user interactions, \fB1\fR is returned, otherwise \fB0\fR.
.SH "EVENT HANDLING"
.SS BINDINGS

Changes to doc/button.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH button n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
button \- Create and manipulate 'button' action widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBbutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-font	\-relief
\-activeforeground	\-foreground	\-repeatdelay
\-anchor	\-highlightbackground	\-repeatinterval
\-background	\-highlightcolor	\-takefocus
\-bitmap	\-highlightthickness	\-text
\-borderwidth	\-image	\-textvariable







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH button n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
button \- Create and manipulate 'button' action widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBbutton\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-font	\-relief
\-activeforeground	\-foreground	\-repeatdelay
\-anchor	\-highlightbackground	\-repeatinterval
\-background	\-highlightcolor	\-takefocus
\-bitmap	\-highlightthickness	\-text
\-borderwidth	\-image	\-textvariable
110
111
112
113
114
115
116

117
118

119
120
121
122

123
124

125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136

137
138

139
140
141
142
143

144
145

146
147
148
149
150
151
152
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for button widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR

Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBflash\fR

Flash the button.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the button
several times, alternating between the configured activebackground
and background colors.  At the end of the flash the button is left
in the same normal/active state as when the command was invoked.
This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR

Invoke the Tcl command associated with the button, if there is one.
The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
empty string if there is no command associated with the button.
This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
.PP
Tk automatically creates class bindings for buttons that give them







>

|
>




>


>












>


>





>


>







110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for button widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: flash
.TP
\fIpathName \fBflash\fR
.
Flash the button.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the button
several times, alternating between the configured activebackground
and background colors.  At the end of the flash the button is left
in the same normal/active state as when the command was invoked.
This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
.\" METHOD: invoke
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR
.
Invoke the Tcl command associated with the button, if there is one.
The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
empty string if there is no command associated with the button.
This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
.PP
Tk automatically creates class bindings for buttons that give them
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
This is the classic Tk
.QW "Hello, World!"
demonstration:
.PP
.CS
\fBbutton\fR .b \-text "Hello, World!" \-command exit
pack .b
.CE
.PP
This example demonstrates how to handle button accelerators:
.PP
.CS
\fBbutton\fR .b1 \-text Hello \-underline 0
\fBbutton\fR .b2 \-text World \-underline 0
bind . <Key\-h> {.b1 flash; .b1 invoke}
bind . <Key\-w> {.b2 flash; .b2 invoke}
pack .b1 .b2
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk::button(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
button, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|






|
|
|
|









192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
This is the classic Tk
.QW "Hello, World!"
demonstration:
.PP
.CS
\fBbutton\fR .b -text "Hello, World!" -command exit
pack .b
.CE
.PP
This example demonstrates how to handle button accelerators:
.PP
.CS
\fBbutton\fR .b1 -text Hello -underline 0
\fBbutton\fR .b2 -text World -underline 0
bind . <Key-h> {.b1 flash; .b1 invoke}
bind . <Key-w> {.b2 flash; .b2 invoke}
pack .b1 .b2
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk::button(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
button, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/canvas.n.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
.TH canvas n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
canvas \- Create and manipulate 'canvas' hypergraphics drawing surface widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBcanvas\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-background	\-borderwidth	\-cursor
\-highlightbackground	\-highlightcolor	\-highlightthickness
\-insertbackground	\-insertborderwidth	\-insertofftime
\-insertontime	\-insertwidth	\-relief
\-selectbackground	\-selectborderwidth	\-selectforeground
\-takefocus	\-xscrollcommand	\-yscrollcommand







|







9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
.TH canvas n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
canvas \- Create and manipulate 'canvas' hypergraphics drawing surface widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBcanvas\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-background	\-borderwidth	\-cursor
\-highlightbackground	\-highlightcolor	\-highlightthickness
\-insertbackground	\-insertborderwidth	\-insertofftime
\-insertontime	\-insertwidth	\-relief
\-selectbackground	\-selectborderwidth	\-selectforeground
\-takefocus	\-xscrollcommand	\-yscrollcommand
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
support as many of these forms as practical.
Note that it is possible to refer to the character just after
the last one in the text item; this is necessary for such
tasks as inserting new text at the end of the item.
Lines and Polygons do not support the insertion cursor
and the selection. Their indices are supposed to be even
always, because coordinates always appear in pairs.
.TP 10
\fInumber\fR
.
A decimal number giving the position of the desired character
within the text item.
0 refers to the first character, 1 to the next character, and
so on. If indexes are odd for lines and polygons, they will be
automatically decremented by one.
A number less than 0 is treated as if it were zero, and a
number greater than the length of the text item is treated
as if it were equal to the length of the text item. For
polygons, numbers less than 0 or greater than the length
of the coordinate list will be adjusted by adding or subtracting
the length until the result is between zero and the length,
inclusive.
.TP 10
\fBend\fR
.
Refers to the character or coordinate just after the last one
in the item (same as the number of characters or coordinates
in the item).
.TP 10
\fBinsert\fR
.
Refers to the character just before which the insertion cursor
is drawn in this item. Not valid for lines and polygons.
.TP 10
\fBsel.first\fR
.
Refers to the first selected character in the item.
If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal.
.TP 10
\fBsel.last\fR
.
Refers to the last selected character in the item.
If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal.
.TP 10
\fB@\fIx,y\fR
.
Refers to the character or coordinate at the point given by \fIx\fR and
\fIy\fR, where \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified in the coordinate
system of the canvas.
If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lie outside the coordinates covered by the
text item, then they refer to the first or last character in the
line that is closest to the given point.
.SH "DASH PATTERNS"







<
|
<












<
|
<



<
|
<


<
|
<


<
|
<


<
|
<







252
253
254
255
256
257
258

259

260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271

272

273
274
275

276

277
278

279

280
281

282

283
284

285

286
287
288
289
290
291
292
support as many of these forms as practical.
Note that it is possible to refer to the character just after
the last one in the text item; this is necessary for such
tasks as inserting new text at the end of the item.
Lines and Polygons do not support the insertion cursor
and the selection. Their indices are supposed to be even
always, because coordinates always appear in pairs.

.IP \fInumber\fR 10

A decimal number giving the position of the desired character
within the text item.
0 refers to the first character, 1 to the next character, and
so on. If indexes are odd for lines and polygons, they will be
automatically decremented by one.
A number less than 0 is treated as if it were zero, and a
number greater than the length of the text item is treated
as if it were equal to the length of the text item. For
polygons, numbers less than 0 or greater than the length
of the coordinate list will be adjusted by adding or subtracting
the length until the result is between zero and the length,
inclusive.

.IP \fBend\fR 10

Refers to the character or coordinate just after the last one
in the item (same as the number of characters or coordinates
in the item).

.IP \fBinsert\fR 10

Refers to the character just before which the insertion cursor
is drawn in this item. Not valid for lines and polygons.

.IP \fBsel.first\fR 10

Refers to the first selected character in the item.
If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal.

.IP \fBsel.last\fR 10

Refers to the last selected character in the item.
If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal.

.IP \fB@\fIx,y\fR 10

Refers to the character or coordinate at the point given by \fIx\fR and
\fIy\fR, where \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified in the coordinate
system of the canvas.
If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lie outside the coordinates covered by the
text item, then they refer to the first or last character in the
line that is closest to the given point.
.SH "DASH PATTERNS"
349
350
351
352
353
354
355

356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427

428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444

445
446
447
448
449
450
451
operations on the widget. It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.
The following widget commands are possible for canvas widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBaddtag \fItag searchSpec \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
For each item that meets the constraints specified by
\fIsearchSpec\fR and the \fIarg\fRs, add
\fItag\fR to the list of tags associated with the item if it
is not already present on that list.
It is possible that no items will satisfy the constraints
given by \fIsearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fRs, in which case the
command has no effect.
This command returns an empty string as result.
\fISearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fR's may take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fBabove \fItagOrId\fR
.
Selects the item just after (above) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR
in the display list.
If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the last (topmost)
of these items in the display list is used.
.TP
\fBall\fR
.
Selects all the items in the canvas.
.TP
\fBbelow \fItagOrId\fR
.
Selects the item just before (below) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR
in the display list.
If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the first (lowest)
of these items in the display list is used.
.TP
\fBclosest \fIx y \fR?\fIhalo\fR? ?\fIstart\fR?
.
Selects the item closest to the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.
If more than one item is at the same closest distance (e.g. two
items overlap the point), then the top-most of these items (the
last one in the display list) is used.
If \fIhalo\fR is specified, then it must be a non-negative
value.
Any item closer than \fIhalo\fR to the point is considered to
overlap it.
The \fIstart\fR argument may be used to step circularly through
all the closest items.
If \fIstart\fR is specified, it names an item using a tag or id
(if by tag, it selects the first item in the display list with
the given tag).
Instead of selecting the topmost closest item, this form will
select the topmost closest item that is below \fIstart\fR in
the display list; if no such item exists, then the selection
behaves as if the \fIstart\fR argument had not been specified.
.TP
\fBenclosed\fR \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR
.
Selects all the items completely enclosed within the rectangular
region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR.
\fIX1\fR must be no greater than \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be
no greater than \fIy2\fR.
.TP
\fBoverlapping\fR \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR
.
Selects all the items that overlap or are enclosed within the
rectangular region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR,
and \fIy2\fR.
\fIX1\fR must be no greater than \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be
no greater than \fIy2\fR.
.TP
\fBwithtag \fItagOrId\fR
.
Selects all the items given by \fItagOrId\fR.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox \fItagOrId\fR ?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR?
.
Returns a list with four elements giving an approximate bounding box
for all the items named by the \fItagOrId\fR arguments.
The list has the form
.QW "\fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR"
such that the drawn
areas of all the named elements are within the region bounded by
\fIx1\fR on the left, \fIx2\fR on the right, \fIy1\fR on the top,
and \fIy2\fR on the bottom.
The return value may overestimate the actual bounding box by
a few pixels.
If no items match any of the \fItagOrId\fR arguments or if the
matching items have empty bounding boxes (i.e. they have nothing
to display)
then an empty string is returned.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBbind \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR?
.
This command associates \fIcommand\fR with all the items given by
\fItagOrId\fR such that whenever the event sequence given by
\fIsequence\fR occurs for one of the items the command will
be invoked.







>














<
|
<




<
|
<

<
|
<




<
|
<

















<
|
<




<
|
<





<
|
<


>

















>







337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358

359

360
361
362
363

364

365

366

367
368
369
370

371

372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388

389

390
391
392
393

394

395
396
397
398
399

400

401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
operations on the widget. It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.
The following widget commands are possible for canvas widgets:
.\" METHOD: addtag
.TP
\fIpathName \fBaddtag \fItag searchSpec \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
For each item that meets the constraints specified by
\fIsearchSpec\fR and the \fIarg\fRs, add
\fItag\fR to the list of tags associated with the item if it
is not already present on that list.
It is possible that no items will satisfy the constraints
given by \fIsearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fRs, in which case the
command has no effect.
This command returns an empty string as result.
\fISearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fR's may take any of the following
forms:
.RS

.IP "\fBabove \fItagOrId\fR"

Selects the item just after (above) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR
in the display list.
If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the last (topmost)
of these items in the display list is used.

.IP \fBall\fR

Selects all the items in the canvas.

.IP "\fBbelow \fItagOrId\fR"

Selects the item just before (below) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR
in the display list.
If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the first (lowest)
of these items in the display list is used.

.IP "\fBclosest \fIx y \fR?\fIhalo\fR? ?\fIstart\fR?"

Selects the item closest to the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.
If more than one item is at the same closest distance (e.g. two
items overlap the point), then the top-most of these items (the
last one in the display list) is used.
If \fIhalo\fR is specified, then it must be a non-negative
value.
Any item closer than \fIhalo\fR to the point is considered to
overlap it.
The \fIstart\fR argument may be used to step circularly through
all the closest items.
If \fIstart\fR is specified, it names an item using a tag or id
(if by tag, it selects the first item in the display list with
the given tag).
Instead of selecting the topmost closest item, this form will
select the topmost closest item that is below \fIstart\fR in
the display list; if no such item exists, then the selection
behaves as if the \fIstart\fR argument had not been specified.

.IP "\fBenclosed\fI x1 y1 x2 y2\fR"

Selects all the items completely enclosed within the rectangular
region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR.
\fIX1\fR must be no greater than \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be
no greater than \fIy2\fR.

.IP "\fBoverlapping\fI x1 y1 x2 y2\fR"

Selects all the items that overlap or are enclosed within the
rectangular region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR,
and \fIy2\fR.
\fIX1\fR must be no greater than \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be
no greater than \fIy2\fR.

.IP "\fBwithtag \fItagOrId\fR"

Selects all the items given by \fItagOrId\fR.
.RE
.\" METHOD: bbox
.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox \fItagOrId\fR ?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR?
.
Returns a list with four elements giving an approximate bounding box
for all the items named by the \fItagOrId\fR arguments.
The list has the form
.QW "\fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR"
such that the drawn
areas of all the named elements are within the region bounded by
\fIx1\fR on the left, \fIx2\fR on the right, \fIy1\fR on the top,
and \fIy2\fR on the bottom.
The return value may overestimate the actual bounding box by
a few pixels.
If no items match any of the \fItagOrId\fR arguments or if the
matching items have empty bounding boxes (i.e. they have nothing
to display)
then an empty string is returned.
.\" METHOD: bind
.TP
\fIpathName \fBbind \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR?
.
This command associates \fIcommand\fR with all the items given by
\fItagOrId\fR such that whenever the event sequence given by
\fIsequence\fR occurs for one of the items the command will
be invoked.
499
500
501
502
503
504
505

506
507
508
509
510
511
512

513
514
515
516
517
518
519

520
521
522
523
524
525
526

527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541

542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563

564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576

577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588

589
590
591
592
593

594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603

604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612

613
614
615
616
617
618
619
.PP
If bindings have been created for a canvas window using the \fBbind\fR
command, then they are invoked in addition to bindings created for
the canvas's items using the \fBbind\fR widget command.
The bindings for items will be invoked before any of the bindings
for the window as a whole.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcanvasx \fIscreenx\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR?
.
Given a window x-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreenx\fR, this command returns
the canvas x-coordinate that is displayed at that location.
If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is
rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcanvasy \fIscreeny\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR?
.
Given a window y-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreeny\fR this command returns
the canvas y-coordinate that is displayed at that location.
If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is
rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName\fR \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIx0 y0 ...\fR?
.TP
\fIpathName\fR \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIcoordList\fR?
.
Query or modify the coordinates that define an item.
If no coordinates are specified, this command returns a list
whose elements are the coordinates of the item named by
\fItagOrId\fR.
If coordinates are specified, then they replace the current
coordinates for the named item.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then
the first one in the display list is used.
.RS
.PP
Note that for rectangles, ovals and arcs the returned list of coordinates
has a fixed order, namely the left, top, right and bottom coordinates,
which may not be the order originally given. Also the coordinates are always
returned in screen units with no units (that is, in pixels). So if the
original coordinates were specified for instance in centimeters or inches,
the returned values will nevertheless be in pixels.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype x y \fR?\fIx y ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype coordList \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Create a new item in \fIpathName\fR of type \fItype\fR.
The exact format of the arguments after \fItype\fR depends
on \fItype\fR, but usually they consist of the coordinates for
one or more points, followed by specifications for zero or
more item options.
See the subsections on individual item types below for more
on the syntax of this command.
This command returns the id for the new item.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdchars \fItagOrId first \fR?\fIlast\fR?
.
For each item given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the characters, or coordinates,
in the range given by \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive.
If some of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support
indexing operations then they ignore this operation.
Text items interpret \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR as indices to a character,
line and polygon items interpret them as indices to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
Indices are described in \fBINDICES\fR above.
If \fIlast\fR is omitted, it defaults to \fIfirst\fR.
This command returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fR?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR?
.
Delete each of the items given by each \fItagOrId\fR, and return
an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdtag \fItagOrId \fR?\fItagToDelete\fR?
.
For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the
tag given by \fItagToDelete\fR from the list of those
associated with the item.
If an item does not have the tag \fItagToDelete\fR then
the item is unaffected by the command.
If \fItagToDelete\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fItagOrId\fR.
This command returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBfind \fIsearchCommand \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command returns a list consisting of all the items that
meet the constraints specified by \fIsearchCommand\fR and
\fIarg\fR's.
\fISearchCommand\fR and \fIargs\fR have any of the forms
accepted by the \fBaddtag\fR command.
The items are returned in stacking order, with the lowest item first.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBfocus \fR?\fItagOrId\fR?
.
Set the keyboard focus for the canvas widget to the item given by
\fItagOrId\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to several items, then the focus is set
to the first such item in the display list that supports the







>







>







>

|





>















>

|

|


















>













>












>





>










>









>







476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
.PP
If bindings have been created for a canvas window using the \fBbind\fR
command, then they are invoked in addition to bindings created for
the canvas's items using the \fBbind\fR widget command.
The bindings for items will be invoked before any of the bindings
for the window as a whole.
.RE
.\" METHOD: canvasx
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcanvasx \fIscreenx\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR?
.
Given a window x-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreenx\fR, this command returns
the canvas x-coordinate that is displayed at that location.
If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is
rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units.
.\" METHOD: canvasy
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcanvasy \fIscreeny\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR?
.
Given a window y-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreeny\fR this command returns
the canvas y-coordinate that is displayed at that location.
If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is
rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: coords
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIx0 y0 ...\fR?
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIcoordList\fR?
.
Query or modify the coordinates that define an item.
If no coordinates are specified, this command returns a list
whose elements are the coordinates of the item named by
\fItagOrId\fR.
If coordinates are specified, then they replace the current
coordinates for the named item.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then
the first one in the display list is used.
.RS
.PP
Note that for rectangles, ovals and arcs the returned list of coordinates
has a fixed order, namely the left, top, right and bottom coordinates,
which may not be the order originally given. Also the coordinates are always
returned in screen units with no units (that is, in pixels). So if the
original coordinates were specified for instance in centimeters or inches,
the returned values will nevertheless be in pixels.
.RE
.\" METHOD: create
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype x y \fR?\fIx y ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype coordList \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Create a new item in \fIpathName\fR of type \fItype\fR.
The exact format of the arguments after \fItype\fR depends
on \fItype\fR, but usually they consist of the coordinates for
one or more points, followed by specifications for zero or
more item options.
See the subsections on individual item types below for more
on the syntax of this command.
This command returns the id for the new item.
.\" METHOD: dchars
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdchars \fItagOrId first \fR?\fIlast\fR?
.
For each item given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the characters, or coordinates,
in the range given by \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive.
If some of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support
indexing operations then they ignore this operation.
Text items interpret \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR as indices to a character,
line and polygon items interpret them as indices to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
Indices are described in \fBINDICES\fR above.
If \fIlast\fR is omitted, it defaults to \fIfirst\fR.
This command returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: delete
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fR?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR?
.
Delete each of the items given by each \fItagOrId\fR, and return
an empty string.
.\" METHOD: dtag
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdtag \fItagOrId \fR?\fItagToDelete\fR?
.
For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the
tag given by \fItagToDelete\fR from the list of those
associated with the item.
If an item does not have the tag \fItagToDelete\fR then
the item is unaffected by the command.
If \fItagToDelete\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fItagOrId\fR.
This command returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: find
.TP
\fIpathName \fBfind \fIsearchCommand \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command returns a list consisting of all the items that
meet the constraints specified by \fIsearchCommand\fR and
\fIarg\fR's.
\fISearchCommand\fR and \fIargs\fR have any of the forms
accepted by the \fBaddtag\fR command.
The items are returned in stacking order, with the lowest item first.
.\" METHOD: focus
.TP
\fIpathName \fBfocus \fR?\fItagOrId\fR?
.
Set the keyboard focus for the canvas widget to the item given by
\fItagOrId\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to several items, then the focus is set
to the first such item in the display list that supports the
635
636
637
638
639
640
641

642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650

651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659


660
661
662
663

664


665
666
667
668
669

670
671
672



673
674
675
676
677

678


679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686

687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700

701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710


711
712

713


714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724

725
726
727
728
729
730
731
a given item does not actually have the input focus unless (a)
its canvas is the focus window and (b) the item is the focus item
within the canvas.
In most cases it is advisable to follow the \fBfocus\fR widget
command with the \fBfocus\fR command to set the focus window to
the canvas (if it was not there already).
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBgettags\fR \fItagOrId\fR
.
Return a list whose elements are the tags associated with the
item given by \fItagOrId\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the tags
are returned from the first such item in the display list.
If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items, or if the item
contains no tags, then an empty string is returned.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBicursor \fItagOrId index\fR
.
Set the position of the insertion cursor for the item(s) given by \fItagOrId\fR
to just before the character whose position is given by \fIindex\fR.
If some or all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support
an insertion cursor then this command has no effect on them.
See \fBINDICES\fR above for a description of the
legal forms for \fIindex\fR.


Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if
that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget
command, above), but the cursor position may
be set even when the item does not have the focus.

This command returns an empty string.


.TP
\fIpathName \fBimage \fIimagename\fR ?\fIsubsample\fR? ?\fIzoom\fR?
.
Draw the canvas into the Tk photo image named \fIimagename\fR. If a \fB-scrollregion\fR
has been defined then this will be the boundaries of the canvas region drawn and the

final size of the photo image. Otherwise the widget width and height with an origin
of 0,0 will be the size of the canvas region drawn and the final size of the photo
image. Optionally an integer \fIsubsample\fR factor may be given and the photo image



will be reduced in size. In addition to the \fIsubsample\fR an integer \fIzoom\fR
factor can also be given and the photo image will be enlarged. The image background
will be filled with the canvas background colour. The canvas widget does not need to
be mapped for this widget command to work, but at least one of it's ancestors must be
mapped.

This command returns an empty string.


.TP
\fIpathName \fBimove \fItagOrId index x y\fR
.
This command causes the \fIindex\fR'th coordinate of each of the items
indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be relocated to the location (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR).
Each item interprets \fIindex\fR independently according to the rules
described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, only line
and polygon items may have their coordinates relocated this way.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex \fItagOrId index\fR
.
This command returns a decimal string giving the numerical index
within \fItagOrId\fR corresponding to \fIindex\fR.
\fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of the desired position
as described in \fBINDICES\fR above.
Text items interpret \fIindex\fR as an index to a character,
line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
The return value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and the number
of characters, or coordinates, within the item, inclusive.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then the index
is processed in the first of these items that supports indexing
operations (in display list order).

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fItagOrId beforeThis string\fR
.
For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, if the item supports
text or coordinate, insertion then \fIstring\fR is inserted into the item's
text just before the character, or coordinate, whose index is \fIbeforeThis\fR.
Text items interpret \fIbeforeThis\fR as an index to a character,
line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
For lines and polygons the \fIstring\fR must be a valid coordinate
sequence.


See \fBINDICES\fR above for information about the forms allowed
for \fIbeforeThis\fR.

This command returns an empty string.


.TP
\fIpathName \fBitemcget\fR \fItagOrId\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option for the
item given by \fItagOrId\fR whose name is \fIoption\fR.
This command is similar to the \fBcget\fR widget command except that
it applies to a particular item rather than the widget as a whole.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcreate\fR
widget command when the item was created.
If \fItagOrId\fR is a tag that refers to more than one item,
the first (lowest) such item is used.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
This command is similar to the \fBconfigure\fR widget command except
that it modifies item-specific options for the items given by
\fItagOrId\fR instead of modifying options for the overall
canvas widget.







>

|







>









>
>
|



>

>
>



|
|
>
|
|
|
>
>
>
|
|
|
|
|
>

>
>








>














>










>
>


>

>
>

|









>







623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
a given item does not actually have the input focus unless (a)
its canvas is the focus window and (b) the item is the focus item
within the canvas.
In most cases it is advisable to follow the \fBfocus\fR widget
command with the \fBfocus\fR command to set the focus window to
the canvas (if it was not there already).
.RE
.\" METHOD: gettags
.TP
\fIpathName \fBgettags\fI tagOrId\fR
.
Return a list whose elements are the tags associated with the
item given by \fItagOrId\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the tags
are returned from the first such item in the display list.
If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items, or if the item
contains no tags, then an empty string is returned.
.\" METHOD: icursor
.TP
\fIpathName \fBicursor \fItagOrId index\fR
.
Set the position of the insertion cursor for the item(s) given by \fItagOrId\fR
to just before the character whose position is given by \fIindex\fR.
If some or all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support
an insertion cursor then this command has no effect on them.
See \fBINDICES\fR above for a description of the
legal forms for \fIindex\fR.
.RS
.PP
Note that the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if
that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget
command, above), but the cursor position may
be set even when the item does not have the focus.
.PP
This command returns an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: image
.TP
\fIpathName \fBimage \fIimagename\fR ?\fIsubsample\fR? ?\fIzoom\fR?
.
Draw the canvas into the Tk photo image named \fIimagename\fR.
If a \fB\-scrollregion\fR has been defined then this will be the boundaries
of the canvas region drawn and the final size of the photo image. Otherwise
the widget width and height with an origin of 0,0 will be the size of the
canvas region drawn and the final size of the photo image. Optionally an
integer \fIsubsample\fR factor may be given and the photo image
will be reduced in size.
.RS
.PP
In addition to the \fIsubsample\fR an integer \fIzoom\fR factor can also
be given and the photo image will be enlarged. The image background will
be filled with the canvas background colour. The canvas widget does not
need to be mapped for this widget command to work, but at least one of
it's ancestors must be mapped.
.PP
This command returns an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: imove
.TP
\fIpathName \fBimove \fItagOrId index x y\fR
.
This command causes the \fIindex\fR'th coordinate of each of the items
indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be relocated to the location (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR).
Each item interprets \fIindex\fR independently according to the rules
described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, only line
and polygon items may have their coordinates relocated this way.
.\" METHOD: index
.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex \fItagOrId index\fR
.
This command returns a decimal string giving the numerical index
within \fItagOrId\fR corresponding to \fIindex\fR.
\fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of the desired position
as described in \fBINDICES\fR above.
Text items interpret \fIindex\fR as an index to a character,
line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
The return value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and the number
of characters, or coordinates, within the item, inclusive.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then the index
is processed in the first of these items that supports indexing
operations (in display list order).
.\" METHOD: insert
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fItagOrId beforeThis string\fR
.
For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, if the item supports
text or coordinate, insertion then \fIstring\fR is inserted into the item's
text just before the character, or coordinate, whose index is \fIbeforeThis\fR.
Text items interpret \fIbeforeThis\fR as an index to a character,
line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
For lines and polygons the \fIstring\fR must be a valid coordinate
sequence.
.RS
.PP
See \fBINDICES\fR above for information about the forms allowed
for \fIbeforeThis\fR.
.PP
This command returns an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: itemcget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBitemcget\fI tagOrId option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option for the
item given by \fItagOrId\fR whose name is \fIoption\fR.
This command is similar to the \fBcget\fR widget command except that
it applies to a particular item rather than the widget as a whole.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcreate\fR
widget command when the item was created.
If \fItagOrId\fR is a tag that refers to more than one item,
the first (lowest) such item is used.
.\" METHOD: itemconfigure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
This command is similar to the \fBconfigure\fR widget command except
that it modifies item-specific options for the items given by
\fItagOrId\fR instead of modifying options for the overall
canvas widget.
740
741
742
743
744
745
746

747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761

762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769

770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781

782
783
784
785
786
787
788
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s) in
each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR; in
this case the command returns an empty string.
The \fIoption\fRs and \fIvalue\fRs are the same as those permissible
in the \fBcreate\fR widget command when the item(s) were created;
see the sections describing individual item types below for details
on the legal options.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBlower \fItagOrId \fR?\fIbelowThis\fR?
.
Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position
in the display list just before the item given by \fIbelowThis\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved
but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed.
\fIBelowThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one
item then the first (lowest) of these items in the display list is used
as the destination location for the moved items.
Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always
obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is
determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the
\fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases.
This command returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBmove \fItagOrId xAmount yAmount\fR
.
Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate
space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point
associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of
each point associated with the item.
This command returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBmoveto \fItagOrId xPos yPos\fR
.
Move the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate
space so that the first coordinate pair (the upper-left corner of the
bounding box) of the first item (the lowest in the display list) with
tag \fItagOrId\fR is located at
position (\fIxPos\fR,\fIyPos\fR). \fIxPos\fR and \fIyPos\fR may be
the empty string, in which case the corresponding coordinate
will be unchanged. All items matching
\fItagOrId\fR remain in the same positions relative to each other.
This command returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBpostscript \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
.
Generate a Postscript representation for part or all of the canvas.
If the \fB\-file\fR option is specified then the Postscript is written
to a file and an empty string is returned; otherwise the Postscript
is returned as the result of the command.







>










|




>








>












>







750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s) in
each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR; in
this case the command returns an empty string.
The \fIoption\fRs and \fIvalue\fRs are the same as those permissible
in the \fBcreate\fR widget command when the item(s) were created;
see the sections describing individual item types below for details
on the legal options.
.\" METHOD: lower
.TP
\fIpathName \fBlower \fItagOrId \fR?\fIbelowThis\fR?
.
Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position
in the display list just before the item given by \fIbelowThis\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved
but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed.
\fIBelowThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one
item then the first (lowest) of these items in the display list is used
as the destination location for the moved items.
Note that this command has no effect on window items. Window items always
obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is
determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the
\fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases.
This command returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: move
.TP
\fIpathName \fBmove \fItagOrId xAmount yAmount\fR
.
Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate
space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point
associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of
each point associated with the item.
This command returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: moveto
.TP
\fIpathName \fBmoveto \fItagOrId xPos yPos\fR
.
Move the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate
space so that the first coordinate pair (the upper-left corner of the
bounding box) of the first item (the lowest in the display list) with
tag \fItagOrId\fR is located at
position (\fIxPos\fR,\fIyPos\fR). \fIxPos\fR and \fIyPos\fR may be
the empty string, in which case the corresponding coordinate
will be unchanged. All items matching
\fItagOrId\fR remain in the same positions relative to each other.
This command returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: postscript
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpostscript \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
.
Generate a Postscript representation for part or all of the canvas.
If the \fB\-file\fR option is specified then the Postscript is written
to a file and an empty string is returned; otherwise the Postscript
is returned as the result of the command.
801
802
803
804
805
806
807

808
809
810
811
812
813
814

815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827


828
829
830


831
832
833
834
835
836
837

838
839
840
841
842
843
844

845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860


861
862
863


864
865
866
867
868

869
870
871
872
873
874


875
876
877


878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889

890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899

900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907

908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915

916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926

927
928
929
930
931

932
933
934
935
936
937
938

939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946

947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964

965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975

976
977
978
979
980
981
982
either invoke the \fBupdate\fR command to wait for the canvas window
to reach its final size, or else use the \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR
options to specify the area of the canvas to print.
The \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR argument pairs provide additional
information to control the generation of Postscript. The following
options are supported:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-channel \fIchannelName\fR
.
Specifies the name of the channel to which to write the Postscript.
If this option and the \fB\-file\fR option are
not specified then the Postscript is returned as the
result of the command.

.TP
\fB\-colormap \fIvarName\fR
.
\fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable
that specifies a color mapping to use in the Postscript.
Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of Postscript
code to set a particular color value (e.g.
.QW "\fB1.0 1.0 0.0 setrgbcolor\fR" ).
When outputting color information in the Postscript, Tk checks
to see if there is an element of \fIvarName\fR with the same
name as the color.
If so, Tk uses the value of the element as the Postscript command
to set the color.


If this option has not been specified, or if there is no entry
in \fIvarName\fR for a given color, then Tk uses the red, green,
and blue intensities from the X color.


.TP
\fB\-colormode \fImode\fR
.
Specifies how to output color information. \fIMode\fR must be either
\fBcolor\fR (for full color output), \fBgray\fR (convert all colors
to their gray-scale equivalents) or \fBmono\fR (convert all colors
to black or white).

.TP
\fB\-file \fIfileName\fR
.
Specifies the name of the file in which to write the Postscript.
If this option and the \fB\-channel\fR option are
not specified then the Postscript is returned as the
result of the command.

.TP
\fB\-fontmap \fIvarName\fR
.
\fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable
that specifies a font mapping to use in the Postscript.
Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of a Tcl list with
two elements, which are the name and point size of a Postscript font.
When outputting Postscript commands for a particular font, Tk
checks to see if \fIvarName\fR contains an element with the same
name as the font.
If there is such an element, then the font information contained in
that element is used in the Postscript.
Otherwise Tk attempts to guess what Postscript font to use.
Tk's guesses generally only work for well-known fonts such as
Times and Helvetica and Courier, and only if the X font name does not
omit any dashes up through the point size.


For example, \fB\-*\-Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal\-\-*\-120\-*\fR will work but
\fB*Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal*120*\fR will not; Tk needs the dashes to
parse the font name).


.TP
\fB\-height \fIsize\fR
.
Specifies the height of the area of the canvas to print.
Defaults to the height of the canvas window.

.TP
\fB\-pageanchor \fIanchor\fR
.
Specifies which point of the printed area of the canvas should appear over
the positioning point on the page (which is given by the \fB\-pagex\fR
and \fB\-pagey\fR options).


For example, \fB\-pageanchor n\fR means that the top center of the
area of the canvas being printed (as it appears in the canvas window)
should be over the positioning point. Defaults to \fBcenter\fR.


.TP
\fB\-pageheight \fIsize\fR
.
Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so
that the printed area is \fIsize\fR high on the Postscript page.
\fISize\fR consists of a floating-point number followed by
\fBc\fR for centimeters, \fBi\fR for inches, \fBm\fR for millimeters,
or \fBp\fR or nothing for printer's points (1/72 inch).
Defaults to the height of the printed area on the screen.
If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then
the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling
is not implemented).

.TP
\fB\-pagewidth \fIsize\fR
.
Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so
that the printed area is \fIsize\fR wide on the Postscript page.
\fISize\fR has the same form as for \fB\-pageheight\fR.
Defaults to the width of the printed area on the screen.
If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then
the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling
is not implemented).

.TP
\fB\-pagex \fIposition\fR
.
\fIPosition\fR gives the x-coordinate of the positioning point on
the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR.
Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagey\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options
to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page.
Defaults to the center of the page.

.TP
\fB\-pagey \fIposition\fR
.
\fIPosition\fR gives the y-coordinate of the positioning point on
the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR.
Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagex\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options
to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page.
Defaults to the center of the page.

.TP
\fB\-rotate \fIboolean\fR
.
\fIBoolean\fR specifies whether the printed area is to be rotated 90
degrees.
In non-rotated output the x-axis of the printed area runs along
the short dimension of the page
.PQ portrait " orientation" ;
in rotated output the x-axis runs along the long dimension of the page
.PQ landscape " orientation" .
Defaults to non-rotated.

.TP
\fB\-width \fIsize\fR
.
Specifies the width of the area of the canvas to print.
Defaults to the width of the canvas window.

.TP
\fB\-x \fIposition\fR
.
Specifies the x-coordinate of the left edge of the area of the
canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window
coordinates.
Defaults to the coordinate of the left edge of the window.

.TP
\fB\-y \fIposition\fR
.
Specifies the y-coordinate of the top edge of the area of the
canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window
coordinates.
Defaults to the coordinate of the top edge of the window.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBraise \fItagOrId \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR?
.
Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position
in the display list just after the item given by \fIaboveThis\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved
but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed.
\fIAboveThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one
item then the last (topmost) of these items in the display list is used
as the destination location for the moved items.
This command returns an empty string.
.RS
.PP
Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always
obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is
determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the
\fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBrchars \fItagOrId first last string\fR
.
This command causes the text or coordinates between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR
for each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be replaced by
\fIstring\fR. Each item interprets \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR independently
according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard
set of items, text items support this operation by altering their text as
directed, and line and polygon items support this operation by altering their
coordinate list (in which case \fIstring\fR should be a list of coordinates to
use as a replacement). The other items ignore this operation.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBrotate \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin angle\fR
.VS "8.7, TIP164"
Rotate the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas
coordinate space.
\fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the rotation
operation and \fIangle\fR identifies the amount to rotate the coordinates







>







>













>
>



>
>







>







>
















>
>



>
>





>






>
>



>
>












>










>








>








>











>





>







>








>













|




>











>







815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
either invoke the \fBupdate\fR command to wait for the canvas window
to reach its final size, or else use the \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR
options to specify the area of the canvas to print.
The \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR argument pairs provide additional
information to control the generation of Postscript. The following
options are supported:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -channel
.TP
\fB\-channel \fIchannelName\fR
.
Specifies the name of the channel to which to write the Postscript.
If this option and the \fB\-file\fR option are
not specified then the Postscript is returned as the
result of the command.
.\" OPTION: -colormap
.TP
\fB\-colormap \fIvarName\fR
.
\fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable
that specifies a color mapping to use in the Postscript.
Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of Postscript
code to set a particular color value (e.g.
.QW "\fB1.0 1.0 0.0 setrgbcolor\fR" ).
When outputting color information in the Postscript, Tk checks
to see if there is an element of \fIvarName\fR with the same
name as the color.
If so, Tk uses the value of the element as the Postscript command
to set the color.
.RS
.PP
If this option has not been specified, or if there is no entry
in \fIvarName\fR for a given color, then Tk uses the red, green,
and blue intensities from the X color.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -colormode
.TP
\fB\-colormode \fImode\fR
.
Specifies how to output color information. \fIMode\fR must be either
\fBcolor\fR (for full color output), \fBgray\fR (convert all colors
to their gray-scale equivalents) or \fBmono\fR (convert all colors
to black or white).
.\" OPTION: -file
.TP
\fB\-file \fIfileName\fR
.
Specifies the name of the file in which to write the Postscript.
If this option and the \fB\-channel\fR option are
not specified then the Postscript is returned as the
result of the command.
.\" OPTION: -fontmap
.TP
\fB\-fontmap \fIvarName\fR
.
\fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable
that specifies a font mapping to use in the Postscript.
Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of a Tcl list with
two elements, which are the name and point size of a Postscript font.
When outputting Postscript commands for a particular font, Tk
checks to see if \fIvarName\fR contains an element with the same
name as the font.
If there is such an element, then the font information contained in
that element is used in the Postscript.
Otherwise Tk attempts to guess what Postscript font to use.
Tk's guesses generally only work for well-known fonts such as
Times and Helvetica and Courier, and only if the X font name does not
omit any dashes up through the point size.
.RS
.PP
For example, \fB\-*\-Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal\-\-*\-120\-*\fR will work but
\fB*Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal*120*\fR will not; Tk needs the dashes to
parse the font name).
.RE
.\" OPTION: -height
.TP
\fB\-height \fIsize\fR
.
Specifies the height of the area of the canvas to print.
Defaults to the height of the canvas window.
.\" OPTION: -pageanchor
.TP
\fB\-pageanchor \fIanchor\fR
.
Specifies which point of the printed area of the canvas should appear over
the positioning point on the page (which is given by the \fB\-pagex\fR
and \fB\-pagey\fR options).
.RS
.PP
For example, \fB\-pageanchor n\fR means that the top center of the
area of the canvas being printed (as it appears in the canvas window)
should be over the positioning point. Defaults to \fBcenter\fR.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -pageheight
.TP
\fB\-pageheight \fIsize\fR
.
Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so
that the printed area is \fIsize\fR high on the Postscript page.
\fISize\fR consists of a floating-point number followed by
\fBc\fR for centimeters, \fBi\fR for inches, \fBm\fR for millimeters,
or \fBp\fR or nothing for printer's points (1/72 inch).
Defaults to the height of the printed area on the screen.
If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then
the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling
is not implemented).
.\" OPTION: -pagewidth
.TP
\fB\-pagewidth \fIsize\fR
.
Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so
that the printed area is \fIsize\fR wide on the Postscript page.
\fISize\fR has the same form as for \fB\-pageheight\fR.
Defaults to the width of the printed area on the screen.
If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then
the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling
is not implemented).
.\" OPTION: -pagex
.TP
\fB\-pagex \fIposition\fR
.
\fIPosition\fR gives the x-coordinate of the positioning point on
the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR.
Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagey\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options
to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page.
Defaults to the center of the page.
.\" OPTION: -pagey
.TP
\fB\-pagey \fIposition\fR
.
\fIPosition\fR gives the y-coordinate of the positioning point on
the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR.
Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagex\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options
to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page.
Defaults to the center of the page.
.\" OPTION: -rotate
.TP
\fB\-rotate \fIboolean\fR
.
\fIBoolean\fR specifies whether the printed area is to be rotated 90
degrees.
In non-rotated output the x-axis of the printed area runs along
the short dimension of the page
.PQ portrait " orientation" ;
in rotated output the x-axis runs along the long dimension of the page
.PQ landscape " orientation" .
Defaults to non-rotated.
.\" OPTION: -width
.TP
\fB\-width \fIsize\fR
.
Specifies the width of the area of the canvas to print.
Defaults to the width of the canvas window.
.\" OPTION: -x
.TP
\fB\-x \fIposition\fR
.
Specifies the x-coordinate of the left edge of the area of the
canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window
coordinates.
Defaults to the coordinate of the left edge of the window.
.\" OPTION: -y
.TP
\fB\-y \fIposition\fR
.
Specifies the y-coordinate of the top edge of the area of the
canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window
coordinates.
Defaults to the coordinate of the top edge of the window.
.RE
.\" METHOD: raise
.TP
\fIpathName \fBraise \fItagOrId \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR?
.
Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position
in the display list just after the item given by \fIaboveThis\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved
but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed.
\fIAboveThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one
item then the last (topmost) of these items in the display list is used
as the destination location for the moved items.
This command returns an empty string.
.RS
.PP
Note this this command has no effect on window items. Window items always
obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is
determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the
\fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases.
.RE
.\" METHOD: rchars
.TP
\fIpathName \fBrchars \fItagOrId first last string\fR
.
This command causes the text or coordinates between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR
for each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be replaced by
\fIstring\fR. Each item interprets \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR independently
according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard
set of items, text items support this operation by altering their text as
directed, and line and polygon items support this operation by altering their
coordinate list (in which case \fIstring\fR should be a list of coordinates to
use as a replacement). The other items ignore this operation.
.\" METHOD: rotate
.TP
\fIpathName \fBrotate \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin angle\fR
.VS "8.7, TIP164"
Rotate the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas
coordinate space.
\fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the rotation
operation and \fIangle\fR identifies the amount to rotate the coordinates
990
991
992
993
994
995
996

997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
points, and the \fBarc\fR, \fBoval\fR and \fBrectangle\fR types rotate about a
computed center point instead of moving the bounding box coordinates directly.
.PP
Some items (currently \fBarc\fR and\fB text\fR) have angles in their options;
this command \fIdoes not\fR affect those options.
.RE
.VE "8.7, TIP164"

.TP
\fIpathName \fBscale \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin xScale yScale\fR
.
Rescale the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas
coordinate space.
\fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the scaling
operation and \fIxScale\fR and \fIyScale\fR identify the scale







>







1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
points, and the \fBarc\fR, \fBoval\fR and \fBrectangle\fR types rotate about a
computed center point instead of moving the bounding box coordinates directly.
.PP
Some items (currently \fBarc\fR and\fB text\fR) have angles in their options;
this command \fIdoes not\fR affect those options.
.RE
.VE "8.7, TIP164"
.\" METHOD: scale
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscale \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin xScale yScale\fR
.
Rescale the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas
coordinate space.
\fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the scaling
operation and \fIxScale\fR and \fIyScale\fR identify the scale
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017

1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
This command returns an empty string.
.RS
.PP
Note that some items have only a single pair of coordinates (e.g., text,
images and windows) and so scaling of them by this command can only move them
around.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR
.
This command is used to implement scanning on canvases. It has
two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR
.







>

|







1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
This command returns an empty string.
.RS
.PP
Note that some items have only a single pair of coordinates (e.g., text,
images and windows) and so scaling of them by this command can only move them
around.
.RE
.\" METHOD: scan
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan\fI option args\fR
.
This command is used to implement scanning on canvases. It has
two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR
.
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044

1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
It then adjusts the view by \fIgain\fR times the
difference in coordinates, where \fIgain\fR defaults to 10.
This command is typically associated
with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
dragging the canvas at high speed through its window. The return
value is an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBselect \fIoption\fR ?\fItagOrId arg\fR?
.
Manipulates the selection in one of several ways, depending on
\fIoption\fR.
The command may take any of the forms described below.
In all of the descriptions below, \fItagOrId\fR must refer to







>







1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
It then adjusts the view by \fIgain\fR times the
difference in coordinates, where \fIgain\fR defaults to 10.
This command is typically associated
with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
dragging the canvas at high speed through its window. The return
value is an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: select
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselect \fIoption\fR ?\fItagOrId arg\fR?
.
Manipulates the selection in one of several ways, depending on
\fIoption\fR.
The command may take any of the forms described below.
In all of the descriptions below, \fItagOrId\fR must refer to
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110

1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119

1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect adjust\fR
or \fBselect from\fR command for this widget.
If the selection anchor point for the widget is not currently in
\fItagOrId\fR, then it is set to the same character given
by \fIindex\fR.
Returns an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBtype\fI tagOrId\fR
.
Returns the type of the item given by \fItagOrId\fR, such as
\fBrectangle\fR or \fBtext\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the type
of the first item in the display list is returned.
If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items at all then
an empty string is returned.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
information displayed in the canvas's window.
It can take any of the following forms:
.RS







>









>







1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect adjust\fR
or \fBselect from\fR command for this widget.
If the selection anchor point for the widget is not currently in
\fItagOrId\fR, then it is set to the same character given
by \fIindex\fR.
Returns an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: type
.TP
\fIpathName \fBtype\fI tagOrId\fR
.
Returns the type of the item given by \fItagOrId\fR, such as
\fBrectangle\fR or \fBtext\fR.
If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the type
of the first item in the display list is returned.
If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items at all then
an empty string is returned.
.\" METHOD: xview
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
information displayed in the canvas's window.
It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162

1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
If \fInumber\fR is negative then information farther to the left
becomes visible; if it is positive then information farther to the right
becomes visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units
of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero,
or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fByview ?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
information displayed in the canvas's window.
It can take any of the following forms:
.RS







>







1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
If \fInumber\fR is negative then information farther to the left
becomes visible; if it is positive then information farther to the right
becomes visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units
of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero,
or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise.
.RE
.\" METHOD: yview
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview ?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
information displayed in the canvas's window.
It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222

1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232

1233
1234

1235
1236

1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244

1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251

1252
1253

1254
1255

1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266

1267
1268

1269
1270

1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278

1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292

1293
1294

1295
1296

1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310

1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316

1317
1318

1319
1320

1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334

1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340

1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346

1347
1348

1349
1350

1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368

1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
At present, text, line and polygon items provide this support.
For lines and polygons the indexing facility is used to manipulate
the coordinates of the item.
.SS "COMMON ITEM OPTIONS"
.PP
Many items share a common set of options. These options are
explained here, and then referred to be each widget type for brevity.

.TP
\fB\-anchor \fIanchorPos\fR
.
\fIAnchorPos\fR tells how to position the item relative to the
positioning point for the item; it may have any of the forms
accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. For example, if \fIanchorPos\fR
is \fBcenter\fR then the item is centered on the point; if
\fIanchorPos\fR is \fBn\fR then the item will be drawn so that
its top center point is at the positioning point.
This option defaults to \fBcenter\fR.

.TP
\fB\-dash \fIpattern\fR

.TP
\fB\-activedash \fIpattern\fR

.TP
\fB\-disableddash \fIpattern\fR
.
This option specifies dash patterns for the normal, active
state, and disabled state of an item.
\fIpattern\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetDash\fR.
If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline.
See \fBDASH PATTERNS\fR for more information.

.TP
\fB\-dashoffset \fIoffset\fR
.
The starting \fIoffset\fR in pixels into the pattern provided by the
\fB\-dash\fR option. \fB\-dashoffset\fR is ignored if there is no
\fB\-dash\fR pattern. The \fIoffset\fR may have any of the forms described
in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.

.TP
\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR

.TP
\fB\-activefill \fIcolor\fR

.TP
\fB\-disabledfill \fIcolor\fR
.
Specifies the color to be used to fill item's area.
in its normal, active, and disabled states.
The even-odd fill rule is used.
\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
For the line item, it specifies the color of the line drawn.
For the text item, it specifies the foreground color of the text.
If \fIcolor\fR is an empty string (the default for all canvas items
except line and text), then the item will not be filled.

.TP
\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR

.TP
\fB\-activeoutline \fIcolor\fR

.TP
\fB\-disabledoutline \fIcolor\fR
.
This option specifies the color that should be used to draw the
outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
If \fIcolor\fR is specified as an empty string then no outline is drawn
for the item.

.TP
\fB\-offset \fIoffset\fR
.
Specifies the offset of stipples. The offset value can be of the form
\fBx,y\fR or \fIside\fR, where side can be \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR,
\fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. In the
first case the origin is the origin of the toplevel of the current window.
For the canvas itself and canvas objects the origin is the canvas origin,
but putting \fB#\fR in front of the coordinate pair indicates using the
toplevel origin instead. For canvas objects, the \fB\-offset\fR option is
used for stippling as well. For the line and polygon canvas items you can
also specify an index as argument, which connects the stipple origin to one
of the coordinate points of the line/polygon. Note that stipple offsets are
\fIonly supported on X11\fR; they are silently ignored on other platforms.

.TP
\fB\-outlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR

.TP
\fB\-activeoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR

.TP
\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR
.
This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to draw the
outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states.
Indicates that the outline for the item should be drawn with a stipple pattern;
\fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
If the \fB\-outline\fR option has not been specified then this option
has no effect.
If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn
in a solid fashion.
\fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not
use X11 as their drawing API.\fR

.TP
\fB\-outlineoffset \fIoffset\fR
.
Specifies the offset of the stipple pattern used for outlines, in the same way
that the \fB\-outline\fR option controls fill stipples. (See the
\fB\-outline\fR option for a description of the syntax of \fIoffset\fR.)

.TP
\fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR

.TP
\fB\-activestipple \fIbitmap\fR

.TP
\fB\-disabledstipple \fIbitmap\fR
.
This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill
the item in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
If the \fB\-fill\fR option has not been specified then this option
has no effect.
If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then filling is done
in a solid fashion.
For the text item, it affects the actual text.
\fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not
use X11 as their drawing API.\fR

.TP
\fB\-state \fIstate\fR
.
This allows an item to override the canvas widget's global \fIstate\fR
option. It takes the same values:
\fInormal\fR, \fIdisabled\fR or \fIhidden\fR.

.TP
\fB\-tags \fItagList\fR
.
Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
\fITagList\fR consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
existing tags for the item. \fITagList\fR may be an empty list.

.TP
\fB\-width \fIoutlineWidth\fR

.TP
\fB\-activewidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR

.TP
\fB\-disabledwidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR
.
Specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around
the item's region, in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIoutlineWidth\fR may be in any of the forms described in the
\fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
If the \fB\-outline\fR option has been specified as an empty string then
this option has no effect. This option defaults to 1.0.
For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the
arc's region.
.SH "STANDARD ITEM TYPES"
.SS "ARC ITEMS"
.PP
Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions.
An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified
by either the \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR options or the \fB\-height\fR option)
and displayed in one of several ways (specified by the \fB\-style\fR option).

Arcs are created with widget commands of the following form:
.CS
\fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
\fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.CE
The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give
the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a







>










>


>


>



|




>







>


>


>



|







>


>


>



|




>














>


>


>



|










>






>


>


>



|










>






>






>


>


>



|












|
|
>







1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
At present, text, line and polygon items provide this support.
For lines and polygons the indexing facility is used to manipulate
the coordinates of the item.
.SS "COMMON ITEM OPTIONS"
.PP
Many items share a common set of options. These options are
explained here, and then referred to be each widget type for brevity.
.\" OPTION: -anchor
.TP
\fB\-anchor \fIanchorPos\fR
.
\fIAnchorPos\fR tells how to position the item relative to the
positioning point for the item; it may have any of the forms
accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. For example, if \fIanchorPos\fR
is \fBcenter\fR then the item is centered on the point; if
\fIanchorPos\fR is \fBn\fR then the item will be drawn so that
its top center point is at the positioning point.
This option defaults to \fBcenter\fR.
.\" OPTION: -dash
.TP
\fB\-dash \fIpattern\fR
.\" OPTION: -activedash
.TP
\fB\-activedash \fIpattern\fR
.\" OPTION: -disableddash
.TP
\fB\-disableddash \fIpattern\fR
.
These options specify dash patterns for the normal, active
state, and disabled state of an item.
\fIpattern\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetDash\fR.
If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline.
See \fBDASH PATTERNS\fR for more information.
.\" OPTION: -dashoffset
.TP
\fB\-dashoffset \fIoffset\fR
.
The starting \fIoffset\fR in pixels into the pattern provided by the
\fB\-dash\fR option. \fB\-dashoffset\fR is ignored if there is no
\fB\-dash\fR pattern. The \fIoffset\fR may have any of the forms described
in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
.\" OPTION: -fill
.TP
\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
.\" OPTION: -activefill
.TP
\fB\-activefill \fIcolor\fR
.\" OPTION: -disabledfill
.TP
\fB\-disabledfill \fIcolor\fR
.
These options specify the color to be used to fill item's area.
in its normal, active, and disabled states.
The even-odd fill rule is used.
\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
For the line item, it specifies the color of the line drawn.
For the text item, it specifies the foreground color of the text.
If \fIcolor\fR is an empty string (the default for all canvas items
except line and text), then the item will not be filled.
.\" OPTION: -outline
.TP
\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
.\" OPTION: -activeoutline
.TP
\fB\-activeoutline \fIcolor\fR
.\" OPTION: -disabledoutline
.TP
\fB\-disabledoutline \fIcolor\fR
.
These options specify the color that should be used to draw the
outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
If \fIcolor\fR is specified as an empty string then no outline is drawn
for the item.
.\" OPTION: -offset
.TP
\fB\-offset \fIoffset\fR
.
Specifies the offset of stipples. The offset value can be of the form
\fBx,y\fR or \fIside\fR, where side can be \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR,
\fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. In the
first case the origin is the origin of the toplevel of the current window.
For the canvas itself and canvas objects the origin is the canvas origin,
but putting \fB#\fR in front of the coordinate pair indicates using the
toplevel origin instead. For canvas objects, the \fB\-offset\fR option is
used for stippling as well. For the line and polygon canvas items you can
also specify an index as argument, which connects the stipple origin to one
of the coordinate points of the line/polygon. Note that stipple offsets are
\fIonly supported on X11\fR; they are silently ignored on other platforms.
.\" OPTION: -outlinestipple
.TP
\fB\-outlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR
.\" OPTION: -activeoutlinestipple
.TP
\fB\-activeoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR
.\" OPTION: -disabledoutlinestipple
.TP
\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR
.
These options specify stipple patterns that should be used to draw the
outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states.
Indicates that the outline for the item should be drawn with a stipple pattern;
\fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
If the \fB\-outline\fR option has not been specified then this option
has no effect.
If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn
in a solid fashion.
\fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not
use X11 as their drawing API.\fR
.\" OPTION: -outlineoffset
.TP
\fB\-outlineoffset \fIoffset\fR
.
Specifies the offset of the stipple pattern used for outlines, in the same way
that the \fB\-outline\fR option controls fill stipples. (See the
\fB\-outline\fR option for a description of the syntax of \fIoffset\fR.)
.\" OPTION: -stipple
.TP
\fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR
.\" OPTION: -activestipple
.TP
\fB\-activestipple \fIbitmap\fR
.\" OPTION: -disabledstipple
.TP
\fB\-disabledstipple \fIbitmap\fR
.
These options specify stipple patterns that should be used to fill
the item in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
If the \fB\-fill\fR option has not been specified then this option
has no effect.
If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then filling is done
in a solid fashion.
For the text item, it affects the actual text.
\fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not
use X11 as their drawing API.\fR
.\" OPTION: -state
.TP
\fB\-state \fIstate\fR
.
This allows an item to override the canvas widget's global \fIstate\fR
option. It takes the same values:
\fInormal\fR, \fIdisabled\fR or \fIhidden\fR.
.\" OPTION: -tags
.TP
\fB\-tags \fItagList\fR
.
Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
\fITagList\fR consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
existing tags for the item. \fITagList\fR may be an empty list.
.\" OPTION: -width
.TP
\fB\-width \fIoutlineWidth\fR
.\" OPTION: -activewidth
.TP
\fB\-activewidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR
.\" OPTION: -disabledwidth
.TP
\fB\-disabledwidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR
.
These options specify the width of the outline to be drawn around
the item's region, in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIoutlineWidth\fR may be in any of the forms described in the
\fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
If the \fB\-outline\fR option has been specified as an empty string then
this option has no effect. This option defaults to 1.0.
For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the
arc's region.
.SH "STANDARD ITEM TYPES"
.SS "ARC ITEMS"
.PP
Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions.
An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified
by either the \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR options or the \fB\-height\fR
option) and displayed in one of several ways (specified by the \fB\-style\fR
option).
Arcs are created with widget commands of the following form:
.CS
\fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
\fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.CE
The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give
the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403

1404
1405

1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411

1412
1413

1414
1415
1416
1417

1418
1419

1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for arcs:

.TP
\fB\-extent \fIdegrees\fR

Specifies the size of the angular range occupied by the arc.
The arc's range extends for \fIdegrees\fR degrees counter-clockwise
from the starting angle given by the \fB\-start\fR option.
\fIDegrees\fR may be negative.
If it is greater than 360 or less than \-360, then \fIdegrees\fR
modulo 360 is used as the extent.

.TP
\fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR

Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the
arc.
\fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise
from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative.

.TP
\fB\-height \fIdistance\fR

Provides a shortcut for creating a circular arc segment by defining the
distance of the mid-point of the arc from its chord. When this option
is used the coordinates are interpreted as the start and end coordinates
of the chord, and the options \fB\-start\fR and \fB-extent\fR are ignored.
The value of \fIdistance\fR has the following meaning:
.RS
.PP
.RS
\fIdistance\fR > 0 creates a clockwise arc
.br
\fIdistance\fR < 0 creates an counter-clockwise arc







>


>






>


>




>


>



|







1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for arcs:
.\" OPTION: -extent
.TP
\fB\-extent \fIdegrees\fR
.
Specifies the size of the angular range occupied by the arc.
The arc's range extends for \fIdegrees\fR degrees counter-clockwise
from the starting angle given by the \fB\-start\fR option.
\fIDegrees\fR may be negative.
If it is greater than 360 or less than \-360, then \fIdegrees\fR
modulo 360 is used as the extent.
.\" OPTION: -start
.TP
\fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR
.
Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the
arc.
\fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise
from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative.
.\" OPTION: -height
.TP
\fB\-height \fIdistance\fR
.
Provides a shortcut for creating a circular arc segment by defining the
distance of the mid-point of the arc from its chord. When this option
is used the coordinates are interpreted as the start and end coordinates
of the chord, and the options \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR are ignored.
The value of \fIdistance\fR has the following meaning:
.RS
.PP
.RS
\fIdistance\fR > 0 creates a clockwise arc
.br
\fIdistance\fR < 0 creates an counter-clockwise arc
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445

1446
1447

1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
.RE
.PP
choosing the minus sign for the minor arc and the plus sign for the major arc.
.PP
Note that \fBitemcget \-height\fR always returns 0 so that introspection code
can be kept simple.
.RE

.TP
\fB\-style \fItype\fR

Specifies how to draw the arc. If \fItype\fR is \fBpieslice\fR
(the default) then the arc's region is defined by a section
of the oval's perimeter plus two line segments, one between the center
of the oval and each end of the perimeter section.
If \fItype\fR is \fBchord\fR then the arc's region is defined
by a section of the oval's perimeter plus a single line segment
connecting the two end points of the perimeter section.







>


>







1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
.RE
.PP
choosing the minus sign for the minor arc and the plus sign for the major arc.
.PP
Note that \fBitemcget \-height\fR always returns 0 so that introspection code
can be kept simple.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -style
.TP
\fB\-style \fItype\fR
.
Specifies how to draw the arc. If \fItype\fR is \fBpieslice\fR
(the default) then the arc's region is defined by a section
of the oval's perimeter plus two line segments, one between the center
of the oval and each end of the perimeter section.
If \fItype\fR is \fBchord\fR then the arc's region is defined
by a section of the oval's perimeter plus a single line segment
connecting the two end points of the perimeter section.
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484

1485
1486

1487
1488

1489
1490

1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497

1498
1499

1500
1501

1502
1503

1504
1505
1506

1507
1508

1509
1510

1511
1512

1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
The following standard options are supported by bitmaps:
.DS
.ta 3i
\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-state\fR
\fB\-tags\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for bitmaps:

.TP
\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR

.TP
\fB\-activebackground \fIcolor\fR

.TP
\fB\-disabledbackground \fIcolor\fR

Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's
.QW 0
valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as an empty
string, then nothing is displayed where the bitmap pixels are 0; this
produces a transparent effect.

.TP
\fB\-bitmap \fIbitmap\fR

.TP
\fB\-activebitmap \fIbitmap\fR

.TP
\fB\-disabledbitmap \fIbitmap\fR

Specifies the bitmaps to display in the item in its normal, active and
disabled states.
\fIBitmap\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.

.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR

.TP
\fB\-activeforeground \fIcolor\fR

.TP
\fB\-disabledforeground \fIcolor\fR

Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's
.QW 1
valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
.SS "IMAGE ITEMS"
.PP
Items of type \fBimage\fR are used to display images on a
canvas.







>


>


>


>







>


>


>


>
|
|

>


>


>


>
|







1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
The following standard options are supported by bitmaps:
.DS
.ta 3i
\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-state\fR
\fB\-tags\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for bitmaps:
.\" OPTION: -background
.TP
\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
.\" OPTION: -activebackground
.TP
\fB\-activebackground \fIcolor\fR
.\" OPTION: -disabledbackground
.TP
\fB\-disabledbackground \fIcolor\fR
.
Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's
.QW 0
valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as an empty
string, then nothing is displayed where the bitmap pixels are 0; this
produces a transparent effect.
.\" OPTION: -bitmap
.TP
\fB\-bitmap \fIbitmap\fR
.\" OPTION: -activebitmap
.TP
\fB\-activebitmap \fIbitmap\fR
.\" OPTION: -disabledbitmap
.TP
\fB\-disabledbitmap \fIbitmap\fR
.
These options specify the bitmaps to display in the item in its normal,
active and disabled states.
\fIBitmap\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
.\" OPTION: -foreground
.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
.\" OPTION: -activeforeground
.TP
\fB\-activeforeground \fIcolor\fR
.\" OPTION: -disabledforeground
.TP
\fB\-disabledforeground \fIcolor\fR
.
These options specify the color to use for each of the bitmap's
.QW 1
valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states.
\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
.SS "IMAGE ITEMS"
.PP
Items of type \fBimage\fR are used to display images on a
canvas.
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542

1543
1544

1545
1546

1547
1548

1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
The following standard options are supported by images:
.DS
.ta 3i
\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-state\fR
\fB\-tags\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for images:

.TP
\fB\-image \fIname\fR

.TP
\fB\-activeimage \fIname\fR

.TP
\fB\-disabledimage \fIname\fR

Specifies the name of the images to display in the item in is normal,
active and disabled states.
This image must have been created previously with the
\fBimage create\fR command.
.SS "LINE ITEMS"
.PP
Items of type \fBline\fR appear on the display as one or more connected







>


>


>


>







1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
The following standard options are supported by images:
.DS
.ta 3i
\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-state\fR
\fB\-tags\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for images:
.\" OPTION: -image
.TP
\fB\-image \fIname\fR
.\" OPTION: -activeimage
.TP
\fB\-activeimage \fIname\fR
.\" OPTION: -disabledimage
.TP
\fB\-disabledimage \fIname\fR
.
Specifies the name of the images to display in the item in is normal,
active and disabled states.
This image must have been created previously with the
\fBimage create\fR command.
.SS "LINE ITEMS"
.PP
Items of type \fBline\fR appear on the display as one or more connected
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587

1588
1589

1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602

1603
1604

1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617

1618
1619

1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625

1626
1627

1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634

1635
1636

1637
1638
1639
1640

1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656

1657
1658

1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
\fB\-disabledfill\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for lines:

.TP
\fB\-arrow \fIwhere\fR

Indicates whether or not arrowheads are to be drawn at one or both
ends of the line.
\fIWhere\fR must have one of the values \fBnone\fR (for no arrowheads),
\fBfirst\fR (for an arrowhead at the first point of the line),
\fBlast\fR (for an arrowhead at the last point of the line), or
\fBboth\fR (for arrowheads at both ends).
This option defaults to \fBnone\fR.
When requested to draw an arrowhead, Tk internally adjusts the corresponding
line end point so that the rendered line ends at the neck of the arrowhead
rather than at its tip so that the line doesn't extend past the edge of the
arrowhead. This may trigger a \fBLeave\fR event if the mouse is hovering this
line end. Conversely, when removing an arrowhead Tk adjusts the corresponding
line point the other way round, which may trigger an \fBEnter\fR event.

.TP
\fB\-arrowshape \fIshape\fR

This option indicates how to draw arrowheads.
The \fIshape\fR argument must be a list with three elements, each
specifying a distance in any of the forms described in
the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
The first element of the list gives the distance along the line
from the neck of the arrowhead to its tip.
The second element gives the distance along the line from the
trailing points of the arrowhead to the tip, and the third
element gives the distance from the outside edge of the line to the
trailing points.
If this option is not specified then Tk picks a
.QW reasonable
shape.

.TP
\fB\-capstyle \fIstyle\fR

Specifies the ways in which caps are to be drawn at the endpoints
of the line.
\fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR
(\fBbutt\fR, \fBprojecting\fR, or \fBround\fR).
If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBbutt\fR.
Where arrowheads are drawn the cap style is ignored.

.TP
\fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR

Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices
of the line.
\fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR
(\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR).
If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR.
If the line only contains two points then this option is
irrelevant.

.TP
\fB\-smooth \fIsmoothMethod\fR

\fIsmoothMethod\fR must have one of the forms accepted by
\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR or a line smoothing method.
Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are
supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR), but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean

false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean
truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing.
If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the line
should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline
is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second
and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within
a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment.
If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the line
should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is
such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair
thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other
coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight
line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points
equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is a
control point and not a knot point, the point is repeated (one or two
times) so that it also becomes a knot point.

.TP
\fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR

Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline
will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This
option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR.
.SS "OVAL ITEMS"
.PP
Items of type \fBoval\fR appear as circular or oval regions on
the display. Each oval may have an outline, a fill, or







>


>













>


>













>


>






>


>







>


>



|
>
















>


>







1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
\fB\-disabledfill\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for lines:
.\" OPTION: -arrow
.TP
\fB\-arrow \fIwhere\fR
.
Indicates whether or not arrowheads are to be drawn at one or both
ends of the line.
\fIWhere\fR must have one of the values \fBnone\fR (for no arrowheads),
\fBfirst\fR (for an arrowhead at the first point of the line),
\fBlast\fR (for an arrowhead at the last point of the line), or
\fBboth\fR (for arrowheads at both ends).
This option defaults to \fBnone\fR.
When requested to draw an arrowhead, Tk internally adjusts the corresponding
line end point so that the rendered line ends at the neck of the arrowhead
rather than at its tip so that the line doesn't extend past the edge of the
arrowhead. This may trigger a \fBLeave\fR event if the mouse is hovering this
line end. Conversely, when removing an arrowhead Tk adjusts the corresponding
line point the other way round, which may trigger an \fBEnter\fR event.
.\" OPTION: -arrowshape
.TP
\fB\-arrowshape \fIshape\fR
.
This option indicates how to draw arrowheads.
The \fIshape\fR argument must be a list with three elements, each
specifying a distance in any of the forms described in
the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
The first element of the list gives the distance along the line
from the neck of the arrowhead to its tip.
The second element gives the distance along the line from the
trailing points of the arrowhead to the tip, and the third
element gives the distance from the outside edge of the line to the
trailing points.
If this option is not specified then Tk picks a
.QW reasonable
shape.
.\" OPTION: -capstyle
.TP
\fB\-capstyle \fIstyle\fR
.
Specifies the ways in which caps are to be drawn at the endpoints
of the line.
\fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR
(\fBbutt\fR, \fBprojecting\fR, or \fBround\fR).
If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBbutt\fR.
Where arrowheads are drawn the cap style is ignored.
.\" OPTION: -joinstyle
.TP
\fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR
.
Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices
of the line.
\fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR
(\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR).
If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR.
If the line only contains two points then this option is
irrelevant.
.\" OPTION: -smooth
.TP
\fB\-smooth \fIsmoothMethod\fR
.
\fIsmoothMethod\fR must have one of the forms accepted by
\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR or a line smoothing method.
Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are
supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR),
but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean
false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean
truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing.
If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the line
should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline
is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second
and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within
a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment.
If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the line
should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is
such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair
thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other
coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight
line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points
equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is a
control point and not a knot point, the point is repeated (one or two
times) so that it also becomes a knot point.
.\" OPTION: -splinesteps
.TP
\fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline
will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This
option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR.
.SS "OVAL ITEMS"
.PP
Items of type \fBoval\fR appear as circular or oval regions on
the display. Each oval may have an outline, a fill, or
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
Polygon items support coordinate indexing operations using the \fBdchars\fR,
\fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR widget commands.
Polygons are created with widget commands of the following form:
.CS
\fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIx1 y1 ... xn yn \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
\fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.CE
The arguments \fIx1\fR through \fIyn\fR or \fIcoordList\fR specify the coordinates for
three or more points that define a polygon.
The first point should not be repeated as the last to
close the shape; Tk will automatically close the periphery between
the first and last points.
After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's







|
|







1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
Polygon items support coordinate indexing operations using the \fBdchars\fR,
\fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR widget commands.
Polygons are created with widget commands of the following form:
.CS
\fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIx1 y1 ... xn yn \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
\fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.CE
The arguments \fIx1\fR through \fIyn\fR or \fIcoordList\fR specify the
coordinates for three or more points that define a polygon.
The first point should not be repeated as the last to
close the shape; Tk will automatically close the periphery between
the first and last points.
After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744

1745
1746

1747
1748
1749
1750
1751

1752
1753

1754
1755
1756

1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773

1774
1775

1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for polygons:

.TP
\fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR

Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices
of the outline.
\fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR
(\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR).
If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR.

.TP
\fB\-smooth \fIboolean\fR

\fIBoolean\fR must have one of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR
or a line smoothing method. Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are
supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR), but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean

false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean
truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing.
If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the polygon
should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline
is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second
and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within
a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment.
If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the polygon
should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is
such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair
thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other
coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight
line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points
equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is not the
second point of a pair of control points, the point is repeated (one or two
times) so that it also becomes the second point of a pair of control
points (the associated knot point will be the first control point).

.TP
\fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR

Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline
will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This
option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR.
.PP
Polygon items are different from other items such as rectangles, ovals
and arcs in that interior points are considered to be
.QW inside







>


>





>


>


|
>

















>


>







1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for polygons:
.\" OPTION: -joinstyle
.TP
\fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR
.
Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices
of the outline.
\fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR
(\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR).
If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR.
.\" OPTION: -smooth
.TP
\fB\-smooth \fIboolean\fR
.
\fIBoolean\fR must have one of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR
or a line smoothing method. Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are
supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR),
but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean
false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean
truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing.
If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the polygon
should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline
is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second
and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within
a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment.
If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the polygon
should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is
such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair
thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other
coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight
line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points
equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is not the
second point of a pair of control points, the point is repeated (one or two
times) so that it also becomes the second point of a pair of control
points (the associated knot point will be the first control point).
.\" OPTION: -splinesteps
.TP
\fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline
will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This
option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR.
.PP
Polygon items are different from other items such as rectangles, ovals
and arcs in that interior points are considered to be
.QW inside
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865

1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873

1874
1875

1876
1877
1878
1879

1880
1881

1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887

1888
1889

1890
1891
1892
1893
1894

1895
1896

1897
1898
1899
1900
1901

1902
1903

1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-fill\fR
\fB\-activefill\fR	\fB\-disabledfill\fR
\fB\-stipple\fR	\fB\-activestipple\fR
\fB\-disabledstipple\fR	\fB\-state\fR
\fB\-tags\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for text items:

.TP
\fB\-angle \fIrotationDegrees\fR
.
\fIRotationDegrees\fR tells how many degrees to rotate the text anticlockwise
about the positioning point for the text; it may have any floating-point value
from 0.0 to 360.0. For example, if \fIrotationDegrees\fR is \fB90\fR, then the
text will be drawn vertically from bottom to top.
This option defaults to \fB0.0\fR.

.TP
\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR

Specifies the font to use for the text item.
\fIFontName\fR may be any string acceptable to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
If this option is not specified, it defaults to a system-dependent
font.

.TP
\fB\-justify \fIhow\fR

Specifies how to justify the text within its bounding region.
\fIHow\fR must be one of the values \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR,
or \fBcenter\fR.
This option will only matter if the text is displayed as multiple
lines.
If the option is omitted, it defaults to \fBleft\fR.

.TP
\fB\-text \fIstring\fR

\fIString\fR specifies the characters to be displayed in the text item.
Newline characters cause line breaks.
The characters in the item may also be changed with the
\fBinsert\fR and \fBdelete\fR widget commands.
This option defaults to an empty string.

.TP
\fB\-underline \fI\fR

Specifies the integer index of a character within the text to be
underlined. 0 corresponds to the first character of the text
displayed, 1 to the next character, and so on. \-1 means that no
underline should be drawn (if the whole text item is to be underlined,
the appropriate font should be used instead).

.TP
\fB\-width \fIlineLength\fR

Specifies a maximum line length for the text, in any of the forms
described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
If this option is zero (the default) the text is broken into
lines only at newline characters.
However, if this option is non-zero then any line that would
be longer than \fIlineLength\fR is broken just before a space
character to make the line shorter than \fIlineLength\fR; the







>








>


>




>


>






>


>





>

|
>





>


>







1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-fill\fR
\fB\-activefill\fR	\fB\-disabledfill\fR
\fB\-stipple\fR	\fB\-activestipple\fR
\fB\-disabledstipple\fR	\fB\-state\fR
\fB\-tags\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for text items:
.\" OPTION: -angle
.TP
\fB\-angle \fIrotationDegrees\fR
.
\fIRotationDegrees\fR tells how many degrees to rotate the text anticlockwise
about the positioning point for the text; it may have any floating-point value
from 0.0 to 360.0. For example, if \fIrotationDegrees\fR is \fB90\fR, then the
text will be drawn vertically from bottom to top.
This option defaults to \fB0.0\fR.
.\" OPTION: -font
.TP
\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR
.
Specifies the font to use for the text item.
\fIFontName\fR may be any string acceptable to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
If this option is not specified, it defaults to a system-dependent
font.
.\" OPTION: -justify
.TP
\fB\-justify \fIhow\fR
.
Specifies how to justify the text within its bounding region.
\fIHow\fR must be one of the values \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR,
or \fBcenter\fR.
This option will only matter if the text is displayed as multiple
lines.
If the option is omitted, it defaults to \fBleft\fR.
.\" OPTION: -text
.TP
\fB\-text \fIstring\fR
.
\fIString\fR specifies the characters to be displayed in the text item.
Newline characters cause line breaks.
The characters in the item may also be changed with the
\fBinsert\fR and \fBdelete\fR widget commands.
This option defaults to an empty string.
.\" OPTION: -underline
.TP
\fB\-underline \fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the integer index of a character within the text to be
underlined. 0 corresponds to the first character of the text
displayed, 1 to the next character, and so on. \-1 means that no
underline should be drawn (if the whole text item is to be underlined,
the appropriate font should be used instead).
.\" OPTION: -width
.TP
\fB\-width \fIlineLength\fR
.
Specifies a maximum line length for the text, in any of the forms
described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
If this option is zero (the default) the text is broken into
lines only at newline characters.
However, if this option is non-zero then any line that would
be longer than \fIlineLength\fR is broken just before a space
character to make the line shorter than \fIlineLength\fR; the
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941

1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949

1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957

1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
The following standard options are supported by window items:
.DS
.ta 3i
\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-state\fR
\fB\-tags\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for window items:

.TP
\fB\-height \fIpixels\fR
.
Specifies the height to assign to the item's window.
\fIPixels\fR may have any of the
forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero,
then the window is given whatever height it requests internally.

.TP
\fB\-width \fIpixels\fR
.
Specifies the width to assign to the item's window.
\fIPixels\fR may have any of the
forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero,
then the window is given whatever width it requests internally.

.TP
\fB\-window \fIpathName\fR
.
Specifies the window to associate with this item.
The window specified by \fIpathName\fR must either be a child of
the canvas widget or a child of some ancestor of the canvas widget.
\fIPathName\fR may not refer to a top-level window.
.PP
Note: due to restrictions in the ways that windows are managed, it is not
possible to draw other graphical items (such as lines and images) on top
of window items. A window item always obscures any graphics that
overlap it, regardless of their order in the display list. Also note that
window items, unlike other canvas items, are not clipped for display by their
containing canvas's border, and are instead clipped by the parent widget of
the window specified by the \fB\-window\fR option; when the parent widget is
the canvas, this means that the window item can overlap the canvas's border.







>








>








>








|







2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
The following standard options are supported by window items:
.DS
.ta 3i
\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-state\fR
\fB\-tags\fR
.DE
The following extra options are supported for window items:
.\" OPTION: -height
.TP
\fB\-height \fIpixels\fR
.
Specifies the height to assign to the item's window.
\fIPixels\fR may have any of the
forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero,
then the window is given whatever height it requests internally.
.\" OPTION: -width
.TP
\fB\-width \fIpixels\fR
.
Specifies the width to assign to the item's window.
\fIPixels\fR may have any of the
forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero,
then the window is given whatever width it requests internally.
.\" OPTION: -window
.TP
\fB\-window \fIpathName\fR
.
Specifies the window to associate with this item.
The window specified by \fIpathName\fR must either be a child of
the canvas widget or a child of some ancestor of the canvas widget.
\fIPathName\fR may not refer to a top-level window.
.PP
Note that, due to restrictions in the ways that windows are managed, it is not
possible to draw other graphical items (such as lines and images) on top
of window items. A window item always obscures any graphics that
overlap it, regardless of their order in the display list. Also note that
window items, unlike other canvas items, are not clipped for display by their
containing canvas's border, and are instead clipped by the parent widget of
the window specified by the \fB\-window\fR option; when the parent widget is
the canvas, this means that the window item can overlap the canvas's border.

Changes to doc/checkbutton.n.

193
194
195
196
197
198
199

200
201

202
203
204
205

206
207

208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219

220
221

222
223
224

225
226

227
228
229
230
231

232
233

234
235
236
237
238
239

240
241

242
243
244

245
246

247
248
249
250
251
252
253
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for checkbutton widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR

Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcheckbutton\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcheckbutton\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdeselect\fR

Deselects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its
.QW off
value.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBflash\fR

Flashes the checkbutton.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the checkbutton
several times, alternating between active and normal colors.  At
the end of the flash the checkbutton is left in the same normal/active
state as when the command was invoked.
This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR

Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the checkbutton
with the mouse: toggle the selection state of the button and invoke
the Tcl command associated with the checkbutton, if there is one.
The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
empty string if there is no command associated with the checkbutton.
This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBselect\fR

Selects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its
.QW on
value.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBtoggle\fR

Toggles the selection state of the button, redisplaying it and
modifying its associated variable to reflect the new state.
.SH BINDINGS
.PP
Tk automatically creates class bindings for checkbuttons that give them
the following default behavior:
.IP [1]







>

|
>




>


>












>


>



>


>





>


>






>


>



>


>







193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for checkbutton widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcheckbutton\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcheckbutton\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: deselect
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdeselect\fR
.
Deselects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its
.QW off
value.
.\" METHOD: flash
.TP
\fIpathName \fBflash\fR
.
Flashes the checkbutton.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the checkbutton
several times, alternating between active and normal colors.  At
the end of the flash the checkbutton is left in the same normal/active
state as when the command was invoked.
This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
.\" METHOD: invoke
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR
.
Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the checkbutton
with the mouse: toggle the selection state of the button and invoke
the Tcl command associated with the checkbutton, if there is one.
The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
empty string if there is no command associated with the checkbutton.
This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
.\" METHOD: select
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselect\fR
.
Selects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its
.QW on
value.
.\" METHOD: toggle
.TP
\fIpathName \fBtoggle\fR
.
Toggles the selection state of the button, redisplaying it and
modifying its associated variable to reflect the new state.
.SH BINDINGS
.PP
Tk automatically creates class bindings for checkbuttons that give them
the following default behavior:
.IP [1]
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
The behavior of checkbuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
This example shows a group of uncoupled checkbuttons.
.PP
.CS
labelframe .lbl \-text "Steps:"
\fBcheckbutton\fR .c1 \-text Lights  \-variable lights
\fBcheckbutton\fR .c2 \-text Cameras \-variable cameras
\fBcheckbutton\fR .c3 \-text Action! \-variable action
pack .c1 .c2 .c3 \-in .lbl
pack .lbl
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
button(n), options(n), radiobutton(n), ttk::checkbutton(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
checkbutton, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
|
|
|
|









287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
The behavior of checkbuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
This example shows a group of uncoupled checkbuttons.
.PP
.CS
labelframe .lbl -text "Steps:"
\fBcheckbutton\fR .c1 -text Lights  -variable lights
\fBcheckbutton\fR .c2 -text Cameras -variable cameras
\fBcheckbutton\fR .c3 -text Action! -variable action
pack .c1 .c2 .c3 -in .lbl
pack .lbl
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
button(n), options(n), radiobutton(n), ttk::checkbutton(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
checkbutton, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/chooseColor.n.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

21
22

23
24
25

26
27

28
29

30
31

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
\fBtk_chooseColor \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The procedure \fBtk_chooseColor\fR pops up a dialog box for the
user to select a color. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
possible as command line arguments:

.TP
\fB\-initialcolor\fR \fIcolor\fR

Specifies the color to display in the color dialog when it pops
up. \fIcolor\fR must be in a form acceptable to the \fBTk_GetColor\fR
function.

.TP
\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR

Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the color dialog. The color
dialog is displayed on top of its parent window.

.TP
\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR

Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
.LP
If the user selects a color, \fBtk_chooseColor\fR will return the
name of the color in a form acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  If the
user cancels the operation, both commands will return the empty
string.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
button .b \-bg [tk_chooseColor \-initialcolor gray \-title "Choose color"]
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
color, color selection, dialog
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







>

|
>



>

|
>


>

|
>










|






14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
\fBtk_chooseColor \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The procedure \fBtk_chooseColor\fR pops up a dialog box for the
user to select a color. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
possible as command line arguments:
.\" OPTION: -initialcolor
.TP
\fB\-initialcolor\fI color\fR
.
Specifies the color to display in the color dialog when it pops
up. \fIcolor\fR must be in a form acceptable to the \fBTk_GetColor\fR
function.
.\" OPTION: -parent
.TP
\fB\-parent\fI window\fR
.
Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the color dialog. The color
dialog is displayed on top of its parent window.
.\" OPTION: -title
.TP
\fB\-title\fI titleString\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
.LP
If the user selects a color, \fBtk_chooseColor\fR will return the
name of the color in a form acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  If the
user cancels the operation, both commands will return the empty
string.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
button .b -bg [tk_chooseColor -initialcolor gray -title "Choose color"]
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
color, color selection, dialog
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/chooseDirectory.n.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20

21
22
23
24
25

26
27

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

36
37

38
39

40
41

42
43
44

45
46

47
48
49

50
51

52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
\fBtk_chooseDirectory \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The procedure \fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR pops up a dialog box for the
user to select a directory. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
possible as command line arguments:

.TP
\fB\-command\fR \fIstring\fR

Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the
dialog after having selected an item. This callback is not called if the
user cancelled the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR
followed by a space and the value selected by the user in the dialog. This
is only available on Mac OS X.

.TP
\fB\-initialdir\fR \fIdirname\fR

Specifies that the directories in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed
when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified,
the initial directory defaults to the current working directory
on non-Windows systems and on Windows systems prior to Vista.
On Vista and later systems, the initial directory defaults to the last
user-selected directory for the application. If the
parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
relative path to an absolute path.

.TP
\fB\-message\fR \fIstring\fR

Specifies a message to include in the client area of the dialog.
This is only available on Mac OS X.

.TP
\fB\-mustexist\fR \fIboolean\fR

Specifies whether the user may specify non-existent directories.  If
this parameter is true, then the user may only select directories that
already exist.  The default value is \fIfalse\fR.

.TP
\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR

Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the dialog. The dialog
is displayed on top of its parent window. On Mac OS X, this
turns the file dialog into a sheet attached to the parent window.

.TP
\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR

Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
set dir [\fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR \e
        \-initialdir ~ \-title "Choose a directory"]
if {$dir eq ""} {
   label .l \-text "No directory selected"
} else {
   label .l \-text "Selected $dir"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
tk_getOpenFile(n), tk_getSaveFile(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
directory, selection, dialog, platform-specific
'\" Local Variables:







>

|
>





>

|
>








>

|
>


>

|
>



>

|
>



>

|
>






|

|

|







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
\fBtk_chooseDirectory \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The procedure \fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR pops up a dialog box for the
user to select a directory. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
possible as command line arguments:
.\" OPTION: -command
.TP
\fB\-command\fI string\fR
.
Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the
dialog after having selected an item. This callback is not called if the
user cancelled the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR
followed by a space and the value selected by the user in the dialog. This
is only available on Mac OS X.
.\" OPTION: -initialdir
.TP
\fB\-initialdir\fI dirname\fR
.
Specifies that the directories in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed
when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified,
the initial directory defaults to the current working directory
on non-Windows systems and on Windows systems prior to Vista.
On Vista and later systems, the initial directory defaults to the last
user-selected directory for the application. If the
parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
relative path to an absolute path.
.\" OPTION: -message
.TP
\fB\-message\fI string\fR
.
Specifies a message to include in the client area of the dialog.
This is only available on Mac OS X.
.\" OPTION: -mustexist
.TP
\fB\-mustexist\fI boolean\fR
.
Specifies whether the user may specify non-existent directories.  If
this parameter is true, then the user may only select directories that
already exist.  The default value is \fIfalse\fR.
.\" OPTION: -parent
.TP
\fB\-parent\fI window\fR
.
Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the dialog. The dialog
is displayed on top of its parent window. On Mac OS X, this
turns the file dialog into a sheet attached to the parent window.
.\" OPTION: -title
.TP
\fB\-title\fI titleString\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
set dir [\fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR \e
        -initialdir ~ -title "Choose a directory"]
if {$dir eq ""} {
   label .l -text "No directory selected"
} else {
   label .l -text "Selected $dir"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
tk_getOpenFile(n), tk_getSaveFile(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
directory, selection, dialog, platform-specific
'\" Local Variables:

Changes to doc/clipboard.n.

23
24
25
26
27
28
29

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
be called, followed by a sequence of one or more calls to \fBclipboard
append\fR.  To ensure that the clipboard is updated atomically, all
appends should be completed before returning to the event loop.
.PP
The first argument to \fBclipboard\fR determines the format of the
rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command.  The following
forms are currently supported:

.TP
\fBclipboard append\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-format\fR \fIformat\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIdata\fR
.
Appends \fIdata\fR to the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's
display in the form given by \fItype\fR with the representation given
by \fIformat\fR and claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's
display.
.RS
.PP







>

|







23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
be called, followed by a sequence of one or more calls to \fBclipboard
append\fR.  To ensure that the clipboard is updated atomically, all
appends should be completed before returning to the event loop.
.PP
The first argument to \fBclipboard\fR determines the format of the
rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command.  The following
forms are currently supported:
.\" METHOD: append
.TP
\fBclipboard append\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fI window\fR? ?\fB\-format\fI format\fR? ?\fB\-type\fI type\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIdata\fR
.
Appends \fIdata\fR to the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's
display in the form given by \fItype\fR with the representation given
by \fIformat\fR and claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's
display.
.RS
.PP
67
68
69
70
71
72
73

74
75
76
77
78
79
80

81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
irrelevant.
.PP
A \fB\-\|\-\fR argument may be specified to mark the end of options:  the
next argument will always be used as \fIdata\fR.
This feature may be convenient if, for example, \fIdata\fR starts
with a \fB\-\fR.
.RE

.TP
\fBclipboard clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR?
.
Claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display and removes
any previous contents.  \fIWindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fBclipboard get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR?
.
Retrieve data from the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display.
\fIWindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
\fIType\fR specifies the form in which
the data is to be returned and should be an atom name such as \fBSTRING\fR
or \fBFILE_NAME\fR.  \fIType\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.  This command is







>

|





>

|







68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
irrelevant.
.PP
A \fB\-\|\-\fR argument may be specified to mark the end of options:  the
next argument will always be used as \fIdata\fR.
This feature may be convenient if, for example, \fIdata\fR starts
with a \fB\-\fR.
.RE
.\" METHOD: clear
.TP
\fBclipboard clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fI window\fR?
.
Claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display and removes
any previous contents.  \fIWindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: get
.TP
\fBclipboard get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fI window\fR? ?\fB\-type\fI type\fR?
.
Retrieve data from the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display.
\fIWindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
\fIType\fR specifies the form in which
the data is to be returned and should be an atom name such as \fBSTRING\fR
or \fBFILE_NAME\fR.  \fIType\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.  This command is
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
# it produces a script that recreates the item(s) when executed
proc getItemConfig {canvas tag} {
   set script {}
   foreach item [$canvas find withtag $tag] {
      append script {$canvas create } [$canvas type $item]
      append script { } [$canvas coords $item] { }
      foreach config [$canvas itemconf $item] {
         lassign $config name \- \- \- value
         append script [list $name $value] { }
      }
      append script \en
   }
   return [string trim $script]
}

# Set up a binding on a canvas to cut and paste an item
set c [canvas .c]
pack $c
$c create text 150 30 \-text "cut and paste me"
bind $c <<Cut>> {
   \fBclipboard clear\fR
   \fBclipboard append \-type\fR TkCanvasItem \e
         [getItemConfig %W current]
   # Delete because this is cut, not copy.
   %W delete current
}
bind $c <<Paste>> {
   catch {
      set canvas %W
      eval [\fBclipboard get \-type\fR TkCanvasItem]
   }
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
interp(n), selection(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
clear, format, clipboard, append, selection, type
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|










|


|







|










121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
# it produces a script that recreates the item(s) when executed
proc getItemConfig {canvas tag} {
   set script {}
   foreach item [$canvas find withtag $tag] {
      append script {$canvas create } [$canvas type $item]
      append script { } [$canvas coords $item] { }
      foreach config [$canvas itemconf $item] {
         lassign $config name - - - value
         append script [list $name $value] { }
      }
      append script \en
   }
   return [string trim $script]
}

# Set up a binding on a canvas to cut and paste an item
set c [canvas .c]
pack $c
$c create text 150 30 -text "cut and paste me"
bind $c <<Cut>> {
   \fBclipboard clear\fR
   \fBclipboard append -type\fR TkCanvasItem \e
         [getItemConfig %W current]
   # Delete because this is cut, not copy.
   %W delete current
}
bind $c <<Paste>> {
   catch {
      set canvas %W
      eval [\fBclipboard get -type\fR TkCanvasItem]
   }
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
interp(n), selection(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
clear, format, clipboard, append, selection, type
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/colors.n.

892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
systemTextBackgroundColor
systemTextColor
.DE
.RE
.
The numbered systemWindowBackgroundColors below
are used in the \fBttk::notebook\fR and \fBttk::labelframe\fR widgets
to provide a contrasting background.  Each numbered color constrasts
with its predecessor.
.RS
.DS
systemWindowBackgroundColor
systemWindowBackgroundColor1
systemWindowBackgroundColor2
systemWindowBackgroundColor3
systemWindowBackgroundColor4
systemWindowBackgroundColor5
systemWindowBackgroundColor6
systemWindowBackgroundColor7
.DE
.RE
.TP

\fBWindows\fR
.
On Windows, the following additional system colors are available
(note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme):
.RS
.DS
.ta 6c







|














<







892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913

914
915
916
917
918
919
920
systemTextBackgroundColor
systemTextColor
.DE
.RE
.
The numbered systemWindowBackgroundColors below
are used in the \fBttk::notebook\fR and \fBttk::labelframe\fR widgets
to provide a contrasting background.  Each numbered color contrasts
with its predecessor.
.RS
.DS
systemWindowBackgroundColor
systemWindowBackgroundColor1
systemWindowBackgroundColor2
systemWindowBackgroundColor3
systemWindowBackgroundColor4
systemWindowBackgroundColor5
systemWindowBackgroundColor6
systemWindowBackgroundColor7
.DE
.RE
.TP

\fBWindows\fR
.
On Windows, the following additional system colors are available
(note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme):
.RS
.DS
.ta 6c

Changes to doc/console.n.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

34

35
36

37
38
39

40
41

42
43

44
45

46
47

48
49

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60

61
62

63
64

65
66

67
68
69
70
71
72
73
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH console n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
console \- Control the console on systems without a real console
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBconsole\fR \fIsubcommand\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The console window is a replacement for a real console to allow input
and output on the standard I/O channels on platforms that do not have
a real console.  It is implemented as a separate interpreter with the
Tk toolkit loaded, and control over this interpreter is given through
the \fBconsole\fR command.  The behaviour of the console window is
defined mainly through the contents of the \fIconsole.tcl\fR file in
the Tk library. Except for TkAqua, this command is not available when
Tk is loaded into a tclsh interpreter with
.QW "\fBpackage require tk\fR" ,
as a conventional terminal is expected to be present in that case.
In TkAqua, this command is disabled when there is a startup script
and stdin is \fB/dev/null\fR (as is the case e.g. when a bundled application
embedding Tk is started by the macOS Launcher).  To enable the command
in that case, define the environment variable \fBTK_CONSOLE\fR.  This can be
done by modifying the Info.plist file by adding the LSEnvironment key
to the main dict and setting its value to be a dict with the key \fBTK_CONSOLE\fR.

.PP

.TP
\fBconsole eval \fIscript\fR

Evaluate the \fIscript\fR argument as a Tcl script in the console
interpreter.  The normal interpreter is accessed through the
\fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter.

.TP
\fBconsole hide\fR

Hide the console window from view.  Precisely equivalent to
withdrawing the \fB.\fR window in the console interpreter.

.TP
\fBconsole show\fR

Display the console window.  Precisely equivalent to deiconifying the
\fB.\fR window in the console interpreter.

.TP
\fBconsole title \fR?\fIstring\fR?

Query or modify the title of the console window.  If \fIstring\fR is
not specified, queries the title of the console window, and sets the
title of the console window to \fIstring\fR otherwise.  Precisely
equivalent to using the \fBwm title\fR command in the console
interpreter.
.SH "ACCESS TO THE MAIN INTERPRETER"
.PP
The \fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter allows
scripts to be evaluated in the main interpreter.  It supports two
subcommands: \fBeval\fR and \fBrecord\fR.
.PP

.TP
\fBconsoleinterp eval \fIscript\fR

Evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level in the main
interpreter.

.TP
\fBconsoleinterp record \fIscript\fR

Records and evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level
in the main interpreter as if \fIscript\fR had been typed in at the
console.
.SH "ADDITIONAL TRAP CALLS"
.PP
There are several additional commands in the console interpreter that
are called in response to activity in the main interpreter.













|











|






|
>

>


>



>


>


>


>


>


>











>


>


>


>







1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH console n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
console \- Control the console on systems without a real console
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBconsole\fI subcommand\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The console window is a replacement for a real console to allow input
and output on the standard I/O channels on platforms that do not have
a real console.  It is implemented as a separate interpreter with the
Tk toolkit loaded, and control over this interpreter is given through
the \fBconsole\fR command.  The behaviour of the console window is
defined mainly through the contents of the \fIconsole.tcl\fR file in
the Tk library. Except for TkAqua, this command is not available when
Tk is loaded into a tclsh interpreter with
.QW "\fBpackage require Tk\fR" ,
as a conventional terminal is expected to be present in that case.
In TkAqua, this command is disabled when there is a startup script
and stdin is \fB/dev/null\fR (as is the case e.g. when a bundled application
embedding Tk is started by the macOS Launcher).  To enable the command
in that case, define the environment variable \fBTK_CONSOLE\fR.  This can be
done by modifying the Info.plist file by adding the LSEnvironment key
to the main dict and setting its value to be a dict with the key
\fBTK_CONSOLE\fR.
.PP
.\" METHOD: eval
.TP
\fBconsole eval \fIscript\fR
.
Evaluate the \fIscript\fR argument as a Tcl script in the console
interpreter.  The normal interpreter is accessed through the
\fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter.
.\" METHOD: hide
.TP
\fBconsole hide\fR
.
Hide the console window from view.  Precisely equivalent to
withdrawing the \fB.\fR window in the console interpreter.
.\" METHOD: show
.TP
\fBconsole show\fR
.
Display the console window.  Precisely equivalent to deiconifying the
\fB.\fR window in the console interpreter.
.\" METHOD: title
.TP
\fBconsole title \fR?\fIstring\fR?
.
Query or modify the title of the console window.  If \fIstring\fR is
not specified, queries the title of the console window, and sets the
title of the console window to \fIstring\fR otherwise.  Precisely
equivalent to using the \fBwm title\fR command in the console
interpreter.
.SH "ACCESS TO THE MAIN INTERPRETER"
.PP
The \fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter allows
scripts to be evaluated in the main interpreter.  It supports two
subcommands: \fBeval\fR and \fBrecord\fR.
.PP
.\" METHOD: eval
.TP
\fBconsoleinterp eval \fIscript\fR
.
Evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level in the main
interpreter.
.\" METHOD: record
.TP
\fBconsoleinterp record \fIscript\fR
.
Records and evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level
in the main interpreter as if \fIscript\fR had been typed in at the
console.
.SH "ADDITIONAL TRAP CALLS"
.PP
There are several additional commands in the console interpreter that
are called in response to activity in the main interpreter.

Changes to doc/cursors.n.

97
98
99
100
101
102
103

104
105
106
107
108
109
110
xterm
.CE
.PP
The \fBnone\fR cursor can be specified to eliminate the cursor.
.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
.TP
\fBWindows\fR

On Windows systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors:
.RS
.CS
arrow
center_ptr
crosshair
fleur







>







97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
xterm
.CE
.PP
The \fBnone\fR cursor can be specified to eliminate the cursor.
.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
.TP
\fBWindows\fR
.
On Windows systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors:
.RS
.CS
arrow
center_ptr
crosshair
fleur
127
128
129
130
131
132
133

134
135
136
137
138
139
140
size_we
uparrow
wait
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fBMac OS X\fR

On Mac OS X systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors:
.RS
.CS
arrow
top_left_arrow
left_ptr
cross







>







128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
size_we
uparrow
wait
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fBMac OS X\fR
.
On Mac OS X systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors:
.RS
.CS
arrow
top_left_arrow
left_ptr
cross

Changes to doc/dialog.n.

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
\fBtk_dialog \fIwindow title text bitmap default string string ...\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This procedure is part of the Tk script library.
It is largely \fIdeprecated\fR by the \fBtk_messageBox\fR.
Its arguments describe a dialog box:
.TP
\fIwindow\fR
Name of top-level window to use for dialog.  Any existing window
by this name is destroyed.
.TP
\fItitle\fR
Text to appear in the window manager's title bar for the dialog.
.TP
\fItext\fR
Message to appear in the top portion of the dialog box.
.TP
\fIbitmap\fR
If non-empty, specifies a bitmap (in a form suitable for Tk_GetBitmap)
to display in the top portion of
the dialog, to the left of the text.
If this is an empty string then no bitmap is displayed in the dialog.
.TP
\fIdefault\fR
If this is an integer greater than or equal to zero, then it gives
the index of the button that is to be the default button for the dialog
(0 for the leftmost button, and so on).
If less than zero or an empty string then there will not be any default
button.
.TP
\fIstring\fR
There will be one button for each of these arguments.
Each \fIstring\fR specifies text to display in a button,
in order from left to right.
.PP
After creating a dialog box, \fBtk_dialog\fR waits for the user to
select one of the buttons either by clicking on the button with the
mouse or by typing return to invoke the default button (if any).







<
|


<
|

<
|

<
|




<
|





<
|







15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23
24

25
26

27
28

29
30
31
32
33

34
35
36
37
38
39

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
\fBtk_dialog \fIwindow title text bitmap default string string ...\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This procedure is part of the Tk script library.
It is largely \fIdeprecated\fR by the \fBtk_messageBox\fR.
Its arguments describe a dialog box:

.IP \fIwindow\fR
Name of top-level window to use for dialog.  Any existing window
by this name is destroyed.

.IP \fItitle\fR
Text to appear in the window manager's title bar for the dialog.

.IP \fItext\fR
Message to appear in the top portion of the dialog box.

.IP \fIbitmap\fR
If non-empty, specifies a bitmap (in a form suitable for Tk_GetBitmap)
to display in the top portion of
the dialog, to the left of the text.
If this is an empty string then no bitmap is displayed in the dialog.

.IP \fIdefault\fR
If this is an integer greater than or equal to zero, then it gives
the index of the button that is to be the default button for the dialog
(0 for the leftmost button, and so on).
If less than zero or an empty string then there will not be any default
button.

.IP \fIstring\fR
There will be one button for each of these arguments.
Each \fIstring\fR specifies text to display in a button,
in order from left to right.
.PP
After creating a dialog box, \fBtk_dialog\fR waits for the user to
select one of the buttons either by clicking on the button with the
mouse or by typing return to invoke the default button (if any).

Changes to doc/entry.n.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
.TH entry n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
entry \- Create and manipulate 'entry' one-line text entry widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBentry\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-background	\-highlightthickness	\-selectbackground
\-borderwidth	\-insertbackground	\-selectborderwidth
\-cursor	\-insertborderwidth	\-selectforeground
\-exportselection	\-insertofftime	\-takefocus
\-font	\-insertontime	\-textvariable
\-foreground	\-insertwidth	\-xscrollcommand







|







9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
.TH entry n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
entry \- Create and manipulate 'entry' one-line text entry widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBentry\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-background	\-highlightthickness	\-selectbackground
\-borderwidth	\-insertbackground	\-selectborderwidth
\-cursor	\-insertborderwidth	\-selectforeground
\-exportselection	\-insertofftime	\-takefocus
\-font	\-insertontime	\-textvariable
\-foreground	\-insertwidth	\-xscrollcommand
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
\fB\-invalidcommand\fR encounters an error in its script while evaluating or
\fB\-validatecommand\fR does not return a valid Tcl boolean value.  The
\fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the
entry widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the
\fB\-invalidcommand\fR.  Such editions will override the one that was being
validated.  If you wish to edit the entry widget (for example set it to {})
during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should
include the command
.CS
after idle {%W config \-validate %v}
.CE
in the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR (whichever one you
were editing the entry widget from).  It is also recommended to not set an
associated \fB\-textvariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the
entry widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP







|

|







172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
\fB\-invalidcommand\fR encounters an error in its script while evaluating or
\fB\-validatecommand\fR does not return a valid Tcl boolean value.  The
\fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the
entry widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the
\fB\-invalidcommand\fR.  Such editions will override the one that was being
validated.  If you wish to edit the entry widget (for example set it to {})
during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should
include the command:
.CS
after idle {%W config -validate %v}
.CE
in the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR (whichever one you
were editing the entry widget from).  It is also recommended to not set an
associated \fB\-textvariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the
entry widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP
197
198
199
200
201
202
203

204
205
206
207

208
209
210
211

212
213
214
215
216

217
218
219
220

221
222
223
224

225
226
227
228
229

230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247

248
249

250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257

258
259

260
261
262
263

264
265

266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277

278
279

280
281
282
283
284
285
286

287
288

289

290
291

292
293

294
295

296

297
298

299
300

301
302

303
304
305
306
307

308
309
310
311
312
313

314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321

322
323

324
325
326
327
328

329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339

340
341
342
343
344

345
346
347
348
349

350
351
352
353

354
355
356
357
358
359
360

361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373

374
375

376
377
378
379

380
381

382
383
384
385
386
387

388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397

398
399
400
401

402
403
404
405
406

407
408
409
410
411
412
413
.SS INDICES
.PP
Many of the widget commands for entries take one or more indices as
arguments.  An index specifies a particular character in the entry's
string, in any of the following ways:
.TP 12
\fInumber\fR

Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
to the first character in the string.
.TP 12
\fBanchor\fR

Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
\fBselect from\fR and \fBselect adjust\fR widget commands.
.TP 12
\fBend\fR

Indicates the character just after the last one in the entry's string.
This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length
of the entry's string.
.TP 12
\fBinsert\fR

Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the
insertion cursor.
.TP 12
\fBsel.first\fR

Indicates the first character in the selection.  It is an error to
use this form if the selection is not in the entry window.
.TP 12
\fBsel.last\fR

Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection.
It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the
entry window.
.TP 12
\fB@\fInumber\fR

In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the
entry's window;  the character spanning that x-coordinate is used.
For example,
.QW \fB@0\fR
indicates the left-most character in the window.
.LP
Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g.
.QW \fBe\fR
or
.QW \fBsel.f\fR .
In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the
nearest legal value.
Indexes support the same simple interpretation as
for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index
arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR.
.SS SUBCOMMANDS
.PP
The following commands are possible for entry widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR

Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the
character given by \fIindex\fR.
The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of
the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character
(in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give
the width and height of the character, in pixels.
The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area
of the window.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR

Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?

Delete one or more elements of the entry.
\fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and
\fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last
one to delete.
If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1,
i.e. a single character is deleted.
This command returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR

Returns the entry's string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR

Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character
given by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR

Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR

Insert the characters of \fIstring\fR just before the character
indicated by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR

This command is used to implement scanning on entries.  It has
two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx\fR

Records \fIx\fR and the current view in the entry window;  used in
conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands.  Typically this
command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget.  It
returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx\fR

This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR argument
and the \fIx\fR argument to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for
the widget.  It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the
difference in x-coordinates.  This command is typically associated
with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
dragging the entry at high speed through the window.  The return
value is an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR

This command is used to adjust the selection within an entry.  It
has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection adjust \fIindex\fR

Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by
\fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR
(i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR).  The other
end of the selection is made the anchor point for future
\fBselect to\fR commands.  If the selection
is not currently in the entry, then a new selection is created to
include the characters between \fIindex\fR and the most recent
selection anchor point, inclusive.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR

Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget.  If the
selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection from \fIindex\fR

Set the selection anchor point to just before the character
given by \fIindex\fR.  Does not change the selection.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection present\fR

Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the entry,
0 if nothing is selected.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart\fR \fIend\fR

Sets the selection to include the characters starting with
the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just
before \fIend\fR.
If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an
earlier one, then the entry's selection is cleared.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection to \fIindex\fR

If \fIindex\fR is before the anchor point, set the selection
to the characters from \fIindex\fR up to but not including
the anchor point.
If \fIindex\fR is the same as the anchor point, do nothing.
If \fIindex\fR is after the anchor point, set the selection
to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including
\fIindex\fR.
The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect from\fR
or \fBselect adjust\fR command in this widget.
If the selection is not in this widget then a new selection is
created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget.
Returns an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR

This command is used to force an evaluation of the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
independent of the conditions specified by the \fB\-validate\fR option.
This is done by temporarily setting the \fB\-validate\fR option to \fBall\fR.
It returns 0 or 1.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR

This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR

Returns a list containing two elements.
Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
20% of the entry's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
option.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR \fIindex\fR

Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR
is displayed at the left edge of the window.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR

Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR

This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer or a float, but if it is a float then
it is converted to an integer, rounded away from 0.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation
of one of these.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.







>




>




>





>




>




>





>


















>


>








>

|
>




>


>












>


>







>


>

>


>


>


>

>


>


>

|
>





>






>








>


>





>











>





>





>



|
>







>













>


>




>


>






>









|
>




>





>







197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
.SS INDICES
.PP
Many of the widget commands for entries take one or more indices as
arguments.  An index specifies a particular character in the entry's
string, in any of the following ways:
.TP 12
\fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
to the first character in the string.
.TP 12
\fBanchor\fR
.
Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
\fBselect from\fR and \fBselect adjust\fR widget commands.
.TP 12
\fBend\fR
.
Indicates the character just after the last one in the entry's string.
This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length
of the entry's string.
.TP 12
\fBinsert\fR
.
Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the
insertion cursor.
.TP 12
\fBsel.first\fR
.
Indicates the first character in the selection.  It is an error to
use this form if the selection is not in the entry window.
.TP 12
\fBsel.last\fR
.
Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection.
It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the
entry window.
.TP 12
\fB@\fInumber\fR
.
In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the
entry's window;  the character spanning that x-coordinate is used.
For example,
.QW \fB@0\fR
indicates the left-most character in the window.
.LP
Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g.
.QW \fBe\fR
or
.QW \fBsel.f\fR .
In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the
nearest legal value.
Indexes support the same simple interpretation as
for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index
arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR.
.SS SUBCOMMANDS
.PP
The following commands are possible for entry widgets:
.\" METHOD: bbox
.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the
character given by \fIindex\fR.
The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of
the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character
(in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give
the width and height of the character, in pixels.
The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area
of the window.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: delete
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
.
Delete one or more elements of the entry.
\fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and
\fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last
one to delete.
If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1,
i.e. a single character is deleted.
This command returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: get
.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR
.
Returns the entry's string.
.\" METHOD: icursor
.TP
\fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR
.
Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character
given by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: index
.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR
.
Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR.
.\" METHOD: insert
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR
.
Insert the characters of \fIstring\fR just before the character
indicated by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: scan
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan\fI option args\fR
.
This command is used to implement scanning on entries.  It has
two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx\fR
.
Records \fIx\fR and the current view in the entry window;  used in
conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands.  Typically this
command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget.  It
returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx\fR
.
This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR argument
and the \fIx\fR argument to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for
the widget.  It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the
difference in x-coordinates.  This command is typically associated
with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
dragging the entry at high speed through the window.  The return
value is an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: selection
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR
.
This command is used to adjust the selection within an entry.  It
has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection adjust \fIindex\fR
.
Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by
\fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR
(i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR).  The other
end of the selection is made the anchor point for future
\fBselect to\fR commands.  If the selection
is not currently in the entry, then a new selection is created to
include the characters between \fIindex\fR and the most recent
selection anchor point, inclusive.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR
.
Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget.  If the
selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection from \fIindex\fR
.
Set the selection anchor point to just before the character
given by \fIindex\fR.  Does not change the selection.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection present\fR
.
Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the entry,
0 if nothing is selected.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart end\fR
.
Sets the selection to include the characters starting with
the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just
before \fIend\fR.
If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an
earlier one, then the entry's selection is cleared.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection to \fIindex\fR
.
If \fIindex\fR is before the anchor point, set the selection
to the characters from \fIindex\fR up to but not including
the anchor point.
If \fIindex\fR is the same as the anchor point, do nothing.
If \fIindex\fR is after the anchor point, set the selection
to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including
\fIindex\fR.
The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect from\fR
or \fBselect adjust\fR command in this widget.
If the selection is not in this widget then a new selection is
created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget.
Returns an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: validate
.TP
\fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR
.
This command is used to force an evaluation of the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
independent of the conditions specified by the \fB\-validate\fR option.
This is done by temporarily setting the \fB\-validate\fR option to \fBall\fR.
It returns 0 or 1.
.\" METHOD: xview
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
.
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
.
Returns a list containing two elements.
Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
20% of the entry's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
option.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fI index\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR
is displayed at the left edge of the window.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer or a float, but if it is a float then
it is converted to an integer, rounded away from 0.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation
of one of these.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.

Changes to doc/event.n.

16
17
18
19
20
21
22

23
24

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

34
35

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45

46
47

48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

68
69

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87

88
89

90
91
92
93

94
95

96
97
98
99

100
101

102
103
104
105

106
107

108
109
110

111
112

113
114
115

116
117

118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126

127
128

129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142

143
144

145
146
147
148

149
150

151
152
153

154
155

156
157
158
159

160
161

162
163
164
165
166
167

168
169

170
171
172
173
174
175

176
177

178
179
180
181

182
183

184
185
186
187

188
189

190
191
192
193
194
195

196
197

198
199
200
201
202

203
204

205
206
207
208
209
210

211
212

213
214
215

216
217

218
219
220

221
222

223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231

232
233

234
235
236
237
238

239
240

241
242
243
244
245
246
247

248
249

250
251
252
253
254

255
256

257
258
259
260

261
262

263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280

281
282

283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292

293
294

295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314

315
316
317
318
319
320
321

322
323
324
325

326
327
328
329

330
331
332
333

334
335
336
337

338
339
340
341

342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355

356
357
358
359
360
361

362
363
364
365
366
367

368
369
370
371

372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381

382
383
384

385
386
387

388
389
390
391
392
393
394
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBevent\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with
window system events, such as defining virtual events and synthesizing
events.  The command has several different forms, determined by the
first argument.  The following forms are currently supported:

.TP
\fBevent add <<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fI sequence \fR?\fIsequence ...\fR?

Associates the virtual event \fIvirtual\fR with the physical
event sequence(s) given by the \fIsequence\fR arguments, so that
the virtual event will trigger whenever any one of the \fIsequence\fRs
occurs.
\fIVirtual\fR may be any string value and \fIsequence\fR may have
any of the values allowed for the \fIsequence\fR argument to the
\fBbind\fR command.
If \fIvirtual\fR is already defined, the new physical event sequences
add to the existing sequences for the event.

.TP
\fBevent delete <<\fIvirtual\fB>> \fR?\fIsequence\fR \fIsequence ...\fR?

Deletes each of the \fIsequence\fRs from those associated with
the virtual event given by \fIvirtual\fR.
\fIVirtual\fR may be any string value and \fIsequence\fR may have
any of the values allowed for the \fIsequence\fR argument to the
\fBbind\fR command.
Any \fIsequence\fRs not currently associated with \fIvirtual\fR
are ignored.
If no \fIsequence\fR argument is provided, all physical event sequences
are removed for \fIvirtual\fR, so that the virtual event will not
trigger anymore.

.TP
\fBevent generate \fIwindow event \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?

Generates a window event and arranges for it to be processed just as if
it had come from the window system.
\fIWindow\fR gives the path name of the window for which the event
will be generated; it may also be an identifier (such as returned by
\fBwinfo id\fR) as long as it is for a window in the current application.
\fIEvent\fR provides a basic description of
the event, such as \fB<Shift-Button-2>\fR or \fB<<Paste>>\fR.
If \fIWindow\fR is empty the whole screen is meant, and coordinates
are relative to the screen.
\fIEvent\fR may have any of the forms allowed for the \fIsequence\fR
argument of the \fBbind\fR command except that it must consist
of a single event pattern, not a sequence.
\fIOption-value\fR pairs may be used to specify additional
attributes of the event, such as the x and y mouse position;  see
\fBEVENT FIELDS\fR below.  If the \fB\-when\fR option is not specified, the
event is processed immediately:  all of the handlers for the event
will complete before the \fBevent generate\fR command returns.
If the \fB\-when\fR option is specified then it determines when the
event is processed.  Certain events, such as key events, require
that the window has focus to receive the event properly.

.TP
\fBevent info \fR?\fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR?

Returns information about virtual events.
If the \fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR argument is omitted, the return value
is a list of all the virtual events that are currently defined.
If \fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR is specified then the return value is
a list whose elements are the physical event sequences currently
defined for the given virtual event;  if the virtual event is
not defined then an empty string is returned.
.RS
.PP
Note that virtual events that are not bound to physical event
sequences are \fInot\fR returned by \fBevent info\fR.
.RE
.SH "EVENT FIELDS"
.PP
The following options are supported for the \fBevent generate\fR
command.  These correspond to the
.QW %
expansions allowed in binding scripts for the \fBbind\fR command.

.TP
\fB\-above\fI window\fR

\fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIabove\fR field for the event,
either as a window path name or as an integer window id.
Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%a\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-borderwidth\fI size\fR

\fISize\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the
\fIborder_width\fR field for the event.
Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%B\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-button\fI number\fR

\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIdetail\fR field
for a \fBButton\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, overriding
any button  number provided in the base \fIevent\fR argument.
Corresponds to the \fB%b\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-count\fI number\fR

\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIcount\fR field
for the event.  Valid for \fBExpose\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%c\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-data\fI string\fR

\fIString\fR may be any value; it specifies the \fIuser_data\fR field
for the event.  Only valid for virtual events.  Corresponds to the
\fB%d\fR substitution for virtual events in binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-delta\fI number\fR

\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIdelta\fR field
for the \fBMouseWheel\fR event.  The \fIdelta\fR refers to the
direction and magnitude the mouse wheel was rotated.  Note the value
is not a screen distance but are units of motion in the mouse wheel.
Typically these values are multiples of 120.  For example, 120 should
scroll the text widget up 4 lines and \-240 would scroll the text
widget down 8 lines.  Of course, other widgets may define different
behaviors for mouse wheel motion.  This field corresponds to the
\fB%D\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-detail\fI detail\fR

\fIDetail\fR specifies the \fIdetail\fR field for the event
and must be one of the following:
.RS
.DS
.ta 6c
\fBNotifyAncestor\fR	\fBNotifyNonlinearVirtual\fR
\fBNotifyDetailNone\fR	\fBNotifyPointer\fR
\fBNotifyInferior\fR	\fBNotifyPointerRoot\fR
\fBNotifyNonlinear\fR	\fBNotifyVirtual\fR
.DE
Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR and
\fBFocusOut\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%d\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.RE

.TP
\fB\-focus\fI boolean\fR

\fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies the \fIfocus\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%f\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-height\fI size\fR

\fISize\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIheight\fR
field for the event.  Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%h\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-keycode\fI number\fR

\fINumber\fR  must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIkeycode\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%k\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-keysym\fI name\fR

\fIName\fR must be the name of a valid keysym, such as \fBg\fR,
\fBspace\fR, or \fBReturn\fR;  its corresponding
keycode value is used as the \fIkeycode\fR field for event, overriding
any detail specified in the base \fIevent\fR argument.
Valid for \fBKey\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%K\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-mode\fI notify\fR

\fINotify\fR specifies the \fImode\fR field for the event and must be
one of \fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or
\fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR.
Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, and
\fBFocusOut\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%m\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-override\fI boolean\fR

\fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies the
\fIoverride_redirect\fR field for the event.
Valid for \fBMap\fR, \fBReparent\fR, and \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%o\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-place\fI where\fR

\fIWhere\fR specifies the \fIplace\fR field for the event;  it must be
either \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR.
Valid for \fBCirculate\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%p\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-root\fI window\fR

\fIWindow\fR must be either a window path name or an integer window
identifier;  it specifies the \fIroot\fR field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
events.
Corresponds to the \fB%R\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-rootx\fI coord\fR

\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIx_root\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
events.  Corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-rooty\fI coord\fR

\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIy_root\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
events.
Corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-sendevent\fI boolean\fR

\fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies the \fIsend_event\fR
field for the event.  Valid for all events.  Corresponds to the
\fB%E\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-serial\fI number\fR

\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIserial\fR field
for the event.  Valid for all events.
Corresponds to the \fB%#\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-state\fI state\fR

\fIState\fR specifies the \fIstate\fR field for the event.
For \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtons\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events
it must be an integer value.
For \fBVisibility\fR events it must be one of \fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR,
\fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR, or \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR.
This option overrides any modifiers such as \fBMeta\fR or \fBControl\fR
specified in the base \fIevent\fR.
Corresponds to the \fB%s\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-subwindow\fI window\fR

\fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIsubwindow\fR field for the event, either
as a path name for a Tk widget or as an integer window identifier.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events.
Similar to \fB%S\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-time\fI integer\fR

\fIInteger\fR must be an integer value;  it specifies the \fItime\fR field
for the event. Additonally the special value \fBcurrent\fR is allowed,
this value will be substituted by the current event time.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBMotion\fR,
and \fBProperty\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%t\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-warp\fI boolean\fR

\fIboolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies whether
the screen pointer should be warped as well.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events.  The pointer will
only warp to a window if it is mapped.

.TP
\fB\-width\fI size\fR

\fISize\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIwidth\fR field
for the event.
Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%w\fR substitution for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-when\fI when\fR

\fIWhen\fR determines when the event will be processed;  it must have one
of the following values:
.RS
.IP \fBnow\fR 10
Process the event immediately, before the command returns.
This also happens if the \fB\-when\fR option is omitted.
.IP \fBtail\fR 10
Place the event on Tcl's event queue behind any events already
queued for this application.
.IP \fBhead\fR 10
Place the event at the front of Tcl's event queue, so that it
will be handled before any other events already queued.
.IP \fBmark\fR 10
Place the event at the front of Tcl's event queue but behind any
other events already queued with \fB\-when mark\fR.
This option is useful when generating a series of events that should
be processed in order but at the front of the queue.
.RE

.TP
\fB\-x\fI coord\fR

\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIx\fR field
for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR,
\fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR
events.
Corresponds to the \fB%x\fR substitution for binding scripts.
If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the
screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution
for binding scripts.

.TP
\fB\-y\fI coord\fR

\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIy\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR,
\fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR
events.
Corresponds to the \fB%y\fR substitution for binding scripts.
If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the
screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution
for binding scripts.
.PP
Any options that are not specified when generating an event are filled
with the value 0, except for \fIserial\fR, which is filled with the
next X event serial number.
.SH "PREDEFINED VIRTUAL EVENTS"
.PP
Tk defines the following virtual events for the purposes of
notification:
.TP
\fB<<AltUnderlined>>\fR

This is sent to widget to notify it that the letter it has underlined
(as an accelerator indicator) with the \fB\-underline\fR option has
been pressed in combination with the Alt key. The usual response to
this is to either focus into the widget (or some related widget) or to
invoke the widget.
.TP
\fB<<Invoke>>\fR

This can be sent to some widgets (e.g. button, listbox, menu) as an
alternative to <space>.
.TP
\fB<<ListboxSelect>>\fR

This is sent to a listbox when the set of selected item(s) in the
listbox is updated.
.TP
\fB<<MenuSelect>>\fR

This is sent to a menu when the currently selected item in the menu
changes. It is intended for use with context-sensitive help systems.
.TP
\fB<<Modified>>\fR

This is sent to a text widget when the contents of the widget are
changed.
.TP
\fB<<Selection>>\fR

This is sent to a text widget when the selection in the widget is
changed.
.TP
\fB<<ThemeChanged>>\fR

This is sent to all widgets when the ttk theme changed. The ttk
widgets listen to this event and redisplay themselves when it fires.
The legacy widgets ignore this event.
.TP
\fB<<TkWorldChanged>>\fR
.
This event is sent to all widgets when a font is changed, for example,
by the use of [font configure].  The user_data field (%d) will have the
value "FontChanged".  For other system wide changes, this event will
be sent to all widgets, and the user_data field will indicate the
cause of the change.  NOTE: all tk and ttk widgets already handle this
event internally.
.TP
\fB<<TraverseIn>>\fR

This is sent to a widget when the focus enters the widget because of a
user-driven
.QW "tab to widget"
action.
.TP
\fB<<TraverseOut>>\fR

This is sent to a widget when the focus leaves the widget because of a
user-driven
.QW "tab to widget"
action.
.TP
\fB<<UndoStack>>\fR

This is sent to a text widget when its undo stack or redo stack becomes
empty or unempty.
.TP
\fB<<WidgetViewSync>>\fR

This is sent to a text widget when its internal data become obsolete,
and again when these internal data are back in sync with the widget
view. The detail field (%d substitution) is either true (when the
widget is in sync) or false (when it is not).
.PP
Tk defines the following virtual events for the purposes of unifying
bindings across multiple platforms. Users expect them to behave in the
following way:
.TP
\fB<<Clear>>\fR

Delete the currently selected widget contents.
.TP
\fB<<Copy>>\fR

Copy the currently selected widget contents to the clipboard.
.TP
\fB<<Cut>>\fR

Move the currently selected widget contents to the clipboard.
.TP
\fB<<LineEnd>>\fR
.
Move to the end of the line in the current widget while deselecting any
selected contents.
.TP







>


>









>

|
>










>


>




















>


>


















>


>




>


>




>


>




>


>



>


>



>


>









>


>














>


>




>


>



>


>




>


>






>


>






>


>




>


>




>


>






>


>





>


>






>


>



>


>



>


>









>


>





>


>

|





>


>





>


>




>


>


















>


>










>


>




















>







>




>




>




>




>




>














>






>






>




>










>



>



>







16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBevent\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with
window system events, such as defining virtual events and synthesizing
events.  The command has several different forms, determined by the
first argument.  The following forms are currently supported:
.\" METHOD: add
.TP
\fBevent add <<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fI sequence \fR?\fIsequence ...\fR?
.
Associates the virtual event \fIvirtual\fR with the physical
event sequence(s) given by the \fIsequence\fR arguments, so that
the virtual event will trigger whenever any one of the \fIsequence\fRs
occurs.
\fIVirtual\fR may be any string value and \fIsequence\fR may have
any of the values allowed for the \fIsequence\fR argument to the
\fBbind\fR command.
If \fIvirtual\fR is already defined, the new physical event sequences
add to the existing sequences for the event.
.\" METHOD: delete
.TP
\fBevent delete <<\fIvirtual\fB>> \fR?\fIsequence sequence ...\fR?
.
Deletes each of the \fIsequence\fRs from those associated with
the virtual event given by \fIvirtual\fR.
\fIVirtual\fR may be any string value and \fIsequence\fR may have
any of the values allowed for the \fIsequence\fR argument to the
\fBbind\fR command.
Any \fIsequence\fRs not currently associated with \fIvirtual\fR
are ignored.
If no \fIsequence\fR argument is provided, all physical event sequences
are removed for \fIvirtual\fR, so that the virtual event will not
trigger anymore.
.\" METHOD: generate
.TP
\fBevent generate \fIwindow event \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
.
Generates a window event and arranges for it to be processed just as if
it had come from the window system.
\fIWindow\fR gives the path name of the window for which the event
will be generated; it may also be an identifier (such as returned by
\fBwinfo id\fR) as long as it is for a window in the current application.
\fIEvent\fR provides a basic description of
the event, such as \fB<Shift-Button-2>\fR or \fB<<Paste>>\fR.
If \fIWindow\fR is empty the whole screen is meant, and coordinates
are relative to the screen.
\fIEvent\fR may have any of the forms allowed for the \fIsequence\fR
argument of the \fBbind\fR command except that it must consist
of a single event pattern, not a sequence.
\fIOption-value\fR pairs may be used to specify additional
attributes of the event, such as the x and y mouse position;  see
\fBEVENT FIELDS\fR below.  If the \fB\-when\fR option is not specified, the
event is processed immediately:  all of the handlers for the event
will complete before the \fBevent generate\fR command returns.
If the \fB\-when\fR option is specified then it determines when the
event is processed.  Certain events, such as key events, require
that the window has focus to receive the event properly.
.\" METHOD: info
.TP
\fBevent info \fR?\fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR?
.
Returns information about virtual events.
If the \fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR argument is omitted, the return value
is a list of all the virtual events that are currently defined.
If \fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR is specified then the return value is
a list whose elements are the physical event sequences currently
defined for the given virtual event;  if the virtual event is
not defined then an empty string is returned.
.RS
.PP
Note that virtual events that are not bound to physical event
sequences are \fInot\fR returned by \fBevent info\fR.
.RE
.SH "EVENT FIELDS"
.PP
The following options are supported for the \fBevent generate\fR
command.  These correspond to the
.QW %
expansions allowed in binding scripts for the \fBbind\fR command.
.\" OPTION: -above
.TP
\fB\-above\fI window\fR
.
\fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIabove\fR field for the event,
either as a window path name or as an integer window id.
Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%a\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -borderwidth
.TP
\fB\-borderwidth\fI size\fR
.
\fISize\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the
\fIborder_width\fR field for the event.
Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%B\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -button
.TP
\fB\-button\fI number\fR
.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIdetail\fR field
for a \fBButton\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, overriding
any button  number provided in the base \fIevent\fR argument.
Corresponds to the \fB%b\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -count
.TP
\fB\-count\fI number\fR
.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIcount\fR field
for the event.  Valid for \fBExpose\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%c\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -data
.TP
\fB\-data\fI string\fR
.
\fIString\fR may be any value; it specifies the \fIuser_data\fR field
for the event.  Only valid for virtual events.  Corresponds to the
\fB%d\fR substitution for virtual events in binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -delta
.TP
\fB\-delta\fI number\fR
.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIdelta\fR field
for the \fBMouseWheel\fR event.  The \fIdelta\fR refers to the
direction and magnitude the mouse wheel was rotated.  Note the value
is not a screen distance but are units of motion in the mouse wheel.
Typically these values are multiples of 120.  For example, 120 should
scroll the text widget up 4 lines and \-240 would scroll the text
widget down 8 lines.  Of course, other widgets may define different
behaviors for mouse wheel motion.  This field corresponds to the
\fB%D\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -detail
.TP
\fB\-detail\fI detail\fR
.
\fIDetail\fR specifies the \fIdetail\fR field for the event
and must be one of the following:
.RS
.DS
.ta 6c
\fBNotifyAncestor\fR	\fBNotifyNonlinearVirtual\fR
\fBNotifyDetailNone\fR	\fBNotifyPointer\fR
\fBNotifyInferior\fR	\fBNotifyPointerRoot\fR
\fBNotifyNonlinear\fR	\fBNotifyVirtual\fR
.DE
Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR and
\fBFocusOut\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%d\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -focus
.TP
\fB\-focus\fI boolean\fR
.
\fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies the \fIfocus\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%f\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -height
.TP
\fB\-height\fI size\fR
.
\fISize\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIheight\fR
field for the event.  Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%h\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -keycode
.TP
\fB\-keycode\fI number\fR
.
\fINumber\fR  must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIkeycode\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%k\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -keysym
.TP
\fB\-keysym\fI name\fR
.
\fIName\fR must be the name of a valid keysym, such as \fBg\fR,
\fBspace\fR, or \fBReturn\fR;  its corresponding
keycode value is used as the \fIkeycode\fR field for event, overriding
any detail specified in the base \fIevent\fR argument.
Valid for \fBKey\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%K\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -mode
.TP
\fB\-mode\fI notify\fR
.
\fINotify\fR specifies the \fImode\fR field for the event and must be
one of \fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or
\fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR.
Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, and
\fBFocusOut\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%m\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -override
.TP
\fB\-override\fI boolean\fR
.
\fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies the
\fIoverride_redirect\fR field for the event.
Valid for \fBMap\fR, \fBReparent\fR, and \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%o\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -place
.TP
\fB\-place\fI where\fR
.
\fIWhere\fR specifies the \fIplace\fR field for the event;  it must be
either \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR.
Valid for \fBCirculate\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%p\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -root
.TP
\fB\-root\fI window\fR
.
\fIWindow\fR must be either a window path name or an integer window
identifier;  it specifies the \fIroot\fR field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
events.
Corresponds to the \fB%R\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -rootx
.TP
\fB\-rootx\fI coord\fR
.
\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIx_root\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
events.  Corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -rooty
.TP
\fB\-rooty\fI coord\fR
.
\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIy_root\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
events.
Corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -sendevent
.TP
\fB\-sendevent\fI boolean\fR
.
\fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies the \fIsend_event\fR
field for the event.  Valid for all events.  Corresponds to the
\fB%E\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -serial
.TP
\fB\-serial\fI number\fR
.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIserial\fR field
for the event.  Valid for all events.
Corresponds to the \fB%#\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -state
.TP
\fB\-state\fI state\fR
.
\fIState\fR specifies the \fIstate\fR field for the event.
For \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtons\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events
it must be an integer value.
For \fBVisibility\fR events it must be one of \fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR,
\fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR, or \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR.
This option overrides any modifiers such as \fBMeta\fR or \fBControl\fR
specified in the base \fIevent\fR.
Corresponds to the \fB%s\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -subwindow
.TP
\fB\-subwindow\fI window\fR
.
\fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIsubwindow\fR field for the event, either
as a path name for a Tk widget or as an integer window identifier.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events.
Similar to \fB%S\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -time
.TP
\fB\-time\fI integer\fR
.
\fIInteger\fR must be an integer value;  it specifies the \fItime\fR field
for the event. Additionally, the special value \fBcurrent\fR is allowed;
this value will be substituted by the current event time.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBMotion\fR,
and \fBProperty\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%t\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -warp
.TP
\fB\-warp\fI boolean\fR
.
\fIboolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies whether
the screen pointer should be warped as well.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events.  The pointer will
only warp to a window if it is mapped.
.\" OPTION: -width
.TP
\fB\-width\fI size\fR
.
\fISize\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIwidth\fR field
for the event.
Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
Corresponds to the \fB%w\fR substitution for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -when
.TP
\fB\-when\fI when\fR
.
\fIWhen\fR determines when the event will be processed;  it must have one
of the following values:
.RS
.IP \fBnow\fR 10
Process the event immediately, before the command returns.
This also happens if the \fB\-when\fR option is omitted.
.IP \fBtail\fR 10
Place the event on Tcl's event queue behind any events already
queued for this application.
.IP \fBhead\fR 10
Place the event at the front of Tcl's event queue, so that it
will be handled before any other events already queued.
.IP \fBmark\fR 10
Place the event at the front of Tcl's event queue but behind any
other events already queued with \fB\-when mark\fR.
This option is useful when generating a series of events that should
be processed in order but at the front of the queue.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -x
.TP
\fB\-x\fI coord\fR
.
\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIx\fR field
for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR,
\fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR
events.
Corresponds to the \fB%x\fR substitution for binding scripts.
If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the
screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution
for binding scripts.
.\" OPTION: -y
.TP
\fB\-y\fI coord\fR
.
\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIy\fR
field for the event.
Valid for \fBKey\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButton\fR,
\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR,
\fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR
events.
Corresponds to the \fB%y\fR substitution for binding scripts.
If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the
screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution
for binding scripts.
.PP
Any options that are not specified when generating an event are filled
with the value 0, except for \fIserial\fR, which is filled with the
next X event serial number.
.SH "PREDEFINED VIRTUAL EVENTS"
.PP
Tk defines the following virtual events for the purposes of
notification:
.TP
\fB<<AltUnderlined>>\fR
.
This is sent to widget to notify it that the letter it has underlined
(as an accelerator indicator) with the \fB\-underline\fR option has
been pressed in combination with the Alt key. The usual response to
this is to either focus into the widget (or some related widget) or to
invoke the widget.
.TP
\fB<<Invoke>>\fR
.
This can be sent to some widgets (e.g. button, listbox, menu) as an
alternative to <space>.
.TP
\fB<<ListboxSelect>>\fR
.
This is sent to a listbox when the set of selected item(s) in the
listbox is updated.
.TP
\fB<<MenuSelect>>\fR
.
This is sent to a menu when the currently selected item in the menu
changes. It is intended for use with context-sensitive help systems.
.TP
\fB<<Modified>>\fR
.
This is sent to a text widget when the contents of the widget are
changed.
.TP
\fB<<Selection>>\fR
.
This is sent to a text widget when the selection in the widget is
changed.
.TP
\fB<<ThemeChanged>>\fR
.
This is sent to all widgets when the ttk theme changed. The ttk
widgets listen to this event and redisplay themselves when it fires.
The legacy widgets ignore this event.
.TP
\fB<<TkWorldChanged>>\fR
.
This event is sent to all widgets when a font is changed, for example,
by the use of [font configure].  The user_data field (%d) will have the
value "FontChanged".  For other system wide changes, this event will
be sent to all widgets, and the user_data field will indicate the
cause of the change.  NOTE: all tk and ttk widgets already handle this
event internally.
.TP
\fB<<TraverseIn>>\fR
.
This is sent to a widget when the focus enters the widget because of a
user-driven
.QW "tab to widget"
action.
.TP
\fB<<TraverseOut>>\fR
.
This is sent to a widget when the focus leaves the widget because of a
user-driven
.QW "tab to widget"
action.
.TP
\fB<<UndoStack>>\fR
.
This is sent to a text widget when its undo stack or redo stack becomes
empty or unempty.
.TP
\fB<<WidgetViewSync>>\fR
.
This is sent to a text widget when its internal data become obsolete,
and again when these internal data are back in sync with the widget
view. The detail field (%d substitution) is either true (when the
widget is in sync) or false (when it is not).
.PP
Tk defines the following virtual events for the purposes of unifying
bindings across multiple platforms. Users expect them to behave in the
following way:
.TP
\fB<<Clear>>\fR
.
Delete the currently selected widget contents.
.TP
\fB<<Copy>>\fR
.
Copy the currently selected widget contents to the clipboard.
.TP
\fB<<Cut>>\fR
.
Move the currently selected widget contents to the clipboard.
.TP
\fB<<LineEnd>>\fR
.
Move to the end of the line in the current widget while deselecting any
selected contents.
.TP
414
415
416
417
418
419
420

421
422
423
424

425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443

444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451

452
453
454
455
456
457
458
.TP
\fB<<NextWord>>\fR
.
Move to the next group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget
while deselecting any selected contents.
.TP
\fB<<Paste>>\fR

Replace the currently selected widget contents with the contents of
the clipboard.
.TP
\fB<<PasteSelection>>\fR

Insert the contents of the selection at the mouse location. (This
event has meaningful \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR substitutions).
.TP
\fB<<PrevChar>>\fR
.
Move to the previous item (i.e., visible character) in the current widget
while deselecting any selected contents.
.TP
\fB<<PrevLine>>\fR
.
Move to the previous line in the current widget while deselecting any selected
contents.
.TP
\fB<<PrevPara>>\fR
.
Move to the previous paragraph in the current widget while deselecting any
selected contents.
.TP
\fB<<PrevWindow>>\fR

Traverse to the previous window.
.TP
\fB<<PrevWord>>\fR
.
Move to the previous group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget
while deselecting any selected contents.
.TP
\fB<<Redo>>\fR

Redo one undone action.
.TP
\fB<<SelectAll>>\fR
.
Set the range of selected contents to the complete widget.
.TP
\fB<<SelectLineEnd>>\fR







>




>



















>








>







490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
.TP
\fB<<NextWord>>\fR
.
Move to the next group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget
while deselecting any selected contents.
.TP
\fB<<Paste>>\fR
.
Replace the currently selected widget contents with the contents of
the clipboard.
.TP
\fB<<PasteSelection>>\fR
.
Insert the contents of the selection at the mouse location. (This
event has meaningful \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR substitutions).
.TP
\fB<<PrevChar>>\fR
.
Move to the previous item (i.e., visible character) in the current widget
while deselecting any selected contents.
.TP
\fB<<PrevLine>>\fR
.
Move to the previous line in the current widget while deselecting any selected
contents.
.TP
\fB<<PrevPara>>\fR
.
Move to the previous paragraph in the current widget while deselecting any
selected contents.
.TP
\fB<<PrevWindow>>\fR
.
Traverse to the previous window.
.TP
\fB<<PrevWord>>\fR
.
Move to the previous group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget
while deselecting any selected contents.
.TP
\fB<<Redo>>\fR
.
Redo one undone action.
.TP
\fB<<SelectAll>>\fR
.
Set the range of selected contents to the complete widget.
.TP
\fB<<SelectLineEnd>>\fR

Changes to doc/focus.n.

51
52
53
54
55
56
57

58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65

66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75

76
77
78
79
80

81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89

90
91
92
93
94
95
96
implement a focus order among the windows of a top-level;  they
are used in the default bindings for Tab and Shift-Tab, among other
things.
.PP
The \fBfocus\fR command can take any of the following forms:
.TP
\fBfocus\fR

Returns the path name of the focus window on the display containing
the application's main window,  or an empty string if no window in
this application has the focus on that display.   Note:  it is
better to specify the display explicitly using \fB\-displayof\fR
(see below) so that the code will work in applications using multiple
displays.
.TP
\fBfocus \fIwindow\fR

If the application currently has the input focus on \fIwindow\fR's
display, this command resets the input focus for \fIwindow\fR's display
to \fIwindow\fR and returns an empty string.
If the application does not currently have the input focus on
\fIwindow\fR's display, \fIwindow\fR will be remembered as the focus
for its top-level;  the next time the focus arrives at the top-level,
Tk will redirect it to \fIwindow\fR.
If \fIwindow\fR is an empty string then the command does nothing.
.TP
\fBfocus \-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR

Returns the name of the focus window on the display containing \fIwindow\fR.
If the focus window for \fIwindow\fR's display is not in this
application, the return value is an empty string.
.TP
\fBfocus \-force \fIwindow\fR

Sets the focus of \fIwindow\fR's display to \fIwindow\fR, even if
the application does not currently have the input focus for the display.
This command should be used sparingly, if at all.
In normal usage, an application should not claim the focus for
itself;  instead, it should wait for the window manager to give it
the focus.
If \fIwindow\fR is an empty string then the command does nothing.
.TP
\fBfocus \-lastfor\fR \fIwindow\fR

Returns the name of the most recent window to have the input focus
among all the windows in the same top-level as \fIwindow\fR.
If no window in that top-level has ever had the input focus, or
if the most recent focus window has been deleted, then the name
of the top-level is returned.  The return value is the window that
will receive the input focus the next time the window manager gives
the focus to the top-level.







>








>









|
>





>








|
>







51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
implement a focus order among the windows of a top-level;  they
are used in the default bindings for Tab and Shift-Tab, among other
things.
.PP
The \fBfocus\fR command can take any of the following forms:
.TP
\fBfocus\fR
.
Returns the path name of the focus window on the display containing
the application's main window,  or an empty string if no window in
this application has the focus on that display.   Note:  it is
better to specify the display explicitly using \fB\-displayof\fR
(see below) so that the code will work in applications using multiple
displays.
.TP
\fBfocus \fIwindow\fR
.
If the application currently has the input focus on \fIwindow\fR's
display, this command resets the input focus for \fIwindow\fR's display
to \fIwindow\fR and returns an empty string.
If the application does not currently have the input focus on
\fIwindow\fR's display, \fIwindow\fR will be remembered as the focus
for its top-level;  the next time the focus arrives at the top-level,
Tk will redirect it to \fIwindow\fR.
If \fIwindow\fR is an empty string then the command does nothing.
.TP
\fBfocus \-displayof \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the name of the focus window on the display containing \fIwindow\fR.
If the focus window for \fIwindow\fR's display is not in this
application, the return value is an empty string.
.TP
\fBfocus \-force \fIwindow\fR
.
Sets the focus of \fIwindow\fR's display to \fIwindow\fR, even if
the application does not currently have the input focus for the display.
This command should be used sparingly, if at all.
In normal usage, an application should not claim the focus for
itself;  instead, it should wait for the window manager to give it
the focus.
If \fIwindow\fR is an empty string then the command does nothing.
.TP
\fBfocus \-lastfor \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the name of the most recent window to have the input focus
among all the windows in the same top-level as \fIwindow\fR.
If no window in that top-level has ever had the input focus, or
if the most recent focus window has been deleted, then the name
of the top-level is returned.  The return value is the window that
will receive the input focus the next time the window manager gives
the focus to the top-level.
105
106
107
108
109
110
111

112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
the fact that the X focus is on the top-level is invisible unless
you use C code to query the X server directly.
.SH "EXAMPLE"
.PP
To make a window that only participates in the focus traversal ring
when a variable is set, add the following bindings to the widgets
\fIbefore\fR and \fIafter\fR it in that focus ring:

.CS
button .before \-text "Before"
button .middle \-text "Middle"
button .after  \-text "After"
checkbutton .flag \-variable traverseToMiddle \-takefocus 0
pack .flag \-side left
pack .before .middle .after
bind .before <Tab> {
   if {!$traverseToMiddle} {
      \fBfocus\fR .after
      break
   }
}
bind .after <Shift\-Tab> {
   if {!$traverseToMiddle} {
      \fBfocus\fR .before
      break
   }
}
\fBfocus\fR .before
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
events, focus, keyboard, top-level, window manager
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







>

|
|
|
|
|







|












110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
the fact that the X focus is on the top-level is invisible unless
you use C code to query the X server directly.
.SH "EXAMPLE"
.PP
To make a window that only participates in the focus traversal ring
when a variable is set, add the following bindings to the widgets
\fIbefore\fR and \fIafter\fR it in that focus ring:
.PP
.CS
button .before -text "Before"
button .middle -text "Middle"
button .after  -text "After"
checkbutton .flag -variable traverseToMiddle -takefocus 0
pack .flag -side left
pack .before .middle .after
bind .before <Tab> {
   if {!$traverseToMiddle} {
      \fBfocus\fR .after
      break
   }
}
bind .after <Shift-Tab> {
   if {!$traverseToMiddle} {
      \fBfocus\fR .before
      break
   }
}
\fBfocus\fR .before
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
events, focus, keyboard, top-level, window manager
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/focusNext.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

15
16
17
18
19

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.TH tk_focusNext n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_focusNext, tk_focusPrev, tk_focusFollowsMouse \- Utility procedures for managing the input focus.
.SH SYNOPSIS

\fBtk_focusNext \fIwindow\fR
.sp
\fBtk_focusPrev \fIwindow\fR
.sp
\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBtk_focusNext\fR is a utility procedure used for keyboard traversal.
It returns the
.QW next
window after \fIwindow\fR in focus order. The focus order is determined by







>

<

<

>







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.TH tk_focusNext n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_focusNext, tk_focusPrev, tk_focusFollowsMouse \- Utility procedures for managing the input focus.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBtk_focusNext \fIwindow\fR

\fBtk_focusPrev \fIwindow\fR

\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBtk_focusNext\fR is a utility procedure used for keyboard traversal.
It returns the
.QW next
window after \fIwindow\fR in focus order. The focus order is determined by
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR changes the focus model for the application
to an implicit one where the window under the mouse gets the focus.
After this procedure is called, whenever the mouse enters a window
Tk will automatically give it the input focus.
The \fBfocus\fR command may be used to move the focus to a window
other than the one under the mouse, but as soon as the mouse moves
into a new window the focus will jump to that window.

Note: at present there is no built-in support for returning the
application to an explicit focus model;  to do this you will have
to write a script that deletes the bindings created by
\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR.
.SH KEYWORDS
focus, keyboard traversal, top-level
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







>
|








45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR changes the focus model for the application
to an implicit one where the window under the mouse gets the focus.
After this procedure is called, whenever the mouse enters a window
Tk will automatically give it the input focus.
The \fBfocus\fR command may be used to move the focus to a window
other than the one under the mouse, but as soon as the mouse moves
into a new window the focus will jump to that window.
.PP
Note that at present there is no built-in support for returning the
application to an explicit focus model;  to do this you will have
to write a script that deletes the bindings created by
\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR.
.SH KEYWORDS
focus, keyboard traversal, top-level
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/font.n.

16
17
18
19
20
21
22

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60

61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78

79
80
81
82
83
84

85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98

99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109

110
111

112
113
114
115
116
117
118
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBfont\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with
fonts, such as defining named fonts and inspecting the actual attributes of
a font.  The command has several different forms, determined by the
first argument.  The following forms are currently supported:

.TP
\fBfont actual \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fIchar\fR?
.
Returns information about the actual attributes that are obtained when
\fIfont\fR is used on \fIwindow\fR's display; the actual attributes obtained
may differ from the attributes requested due to platform-dependent
limitations, such as the availability of font families and point sizes.
\fIfont\fR is a font description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below.  If the
\fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window.  If
\fIoption\fR is specified, returns the value of that attribute; if it is
omitted, the return value is a list of all the attributes and their values.
See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible attributes.  If the
\fIchar\fR argument is supplied, it must be a single character. The font
attributes returned will be those of the specific font used to render
that character, which will be different from the base font if the base
font does not contain the given character.  If \fIchar\fR may be a hyphen, it
should be preceded by \fB\-\|\-\fR to distinguish it from a misspelled
\fIoption\fR.

.TP
\fBfont configure \fIfontname\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the desired attributes for the named font called
\fIfontname\fR.  If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing
all the options and their values for \fIfontname\fR.  If a single \fIoption\fR
is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then returns the current value of that
attribute.  If one or more \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs are specified,
then the command modifies the given named font to have the given values; in
this case, all widgets using that font will redisplay themselves using the
new attributes for the font.  See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the
possible attributes.
.RS
.PP
Note that on Aqua/Mac OS X, the system fonts (see
\fBPLATFORM SPECIFIC FONTS\fR below) may not be actually altered because they
are implemented by the system theme. To achieve the effect of modification,
use \fBfont actual\fR to get their configuration and \fBfont create\fR to
synthesize a copy of the font which can be modified.
.RE

.TP
\fBfont create\fR ?\fIfontname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Creates a new named font and returns its name.  \fIfontname\fR specifies the
name for the font; if it is omitted, then Tk generates a new name of the
form \fBfont\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is an integer.  There may be any number
of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, which provide the desired attributes for
the new named font.  See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible
attributes.

.TP
\fBfont delete\fR \fIfontname\fR ?\fIfontname ...\fR?
.
Delete the specified named fonts.  If there are widgets using the named font,
the named font will not actually be deleted until all the instances are
released.  Those widgets will continue to display using the last known values
for the named font.  If a deleted named font is subsequently recreated with
another call to \fBfont create\fR, the widgets will use the new named font
and redisplay themselves using the new attributes of that font.

.TP
\fBfont families\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR?
.
The return value is a list of the case-insensitive names of all font families
that exist on \fIwindow\fR's display.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is
omitted, it defaults to the main window.

.TP
\fBfont measure \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fItext\fR
.
Measures the amount of space the string \fItext\fR would use in the given
\fIfont\fR when displayed in \fIwindow\fR.  \fIfont\fR is a font description;
see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is
omitted, it
defaults to the main window.  The return value is the total width in pixels
of \fItext\fR, not including the extra pixels used by highly exaggerated
characters such as cursive
.QW f .
If the string contains newlines or tabs,
those characters are not expanded or treated specially when measuring the
string.

.TP
\fBfont metrics \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIoption\fR?
.
Returns information about the metrics (the font-specific data), for
\fIfont\fR when it is used on \fIwindow\fR's display.  \fIfont\fR is a font
description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below.  If the \fIwindow\fR
argument is
omitted, it defaults to the main window.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
returns the value of that metric; if it is omitted, the return value is a
list of all the metrics and their values.  See \fBFONT METRICS\fR
below for a list of the possible metrics.

.TP
\fBfont names\fR

The return value is a list of all the named fonts that are currently defined.
.SH "FONT DESCRIPTIONS"
.PP
The following formats are accepted as a font description anywhere
\fIfont\fR is specified as an argument above; these same forms are also
permitted when specifying the \fB\-font\fR option for widgets.
.TP







>


















>




















>









>

|







>






>














>











>


>







16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBfont\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with
fonts, such as defining named fonts and inspecting the actual attributes of
a font.  The command has several different forms, determined by the
first argument.  The following forms are currently supported:
.\" METHOD: actual
.TP
\fBfont actual \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fIchar\fR?
.
Returns information about the actual attributes that are obtained when
\fIfont\fR is used on \fIwindow\fR's display; the actual attributes obtained
may differ from the attributes requested due to platform-dependent
limitations, such as the availability of font families and point sizes.
\fIfont\fR is a font description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below.  If the
\fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window.  If
\fIoption\fR is specified, returns the value of that attribute; if it is
omitted, the return value is a list of all the attributes and their values.
See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible attributes.  If the
\fIchar\fR argument is supplied, it must be a single character. The font
attributes returned will be those of the specific font used to render
that character, which will be different from the base font if the base
font does not contain the given character.  If \fIchar\fR may be a hyphen, it
should be preceded by \fB\-\|\-\fR to distinguish it from a misspelled
\fIoption\fR.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fBfont configure \fIfontname\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the desired attributes for the named font called
\fIfontname\fR.  If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing
all the options and their values for \fIfontname\fR.  If a single \fIoption\fR
is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then returns the current value of that
attribute.  If one or more \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs are specified,
then the command modifies the given named font to have the given values; in
this case, all widgets using that font will redisplay themselves using the
new attributes for the font.  See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the
possible attributes.
.RS
.PP
Note that on Aqua/Mac OS X, the system fonts (see
\fBPLATFORM SPECIFIC FONTS\fR below) may not be actually altered because they
are implemented by the system theme. To achieve the effect of modification,
use \fBfont actual\fR to get their configuration and \fBfont create\fR to
synthesize a copy of the font which can be modified.
.RE
.\" METHOD: create
.TP
\fBfont create\fR ?\fIfontname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Creates a new named font and returns its name.  \fIfontname\fR specifies the
name for the font; if it is omitted, then Tk generates a new name of the
form \fBfont\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is an integer.  There may be any number
of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, which provide the desired attributes for
the new named font.  See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible
attributes.
.\" METHOD: delete
.TP
\fBfont delete\fI fontname\fR ?\fIfontname ...\fR?
.
Delete the specified named fonts.  If there are widgets using the named font,
the named font will not actually be deleted until all the instances are
released.  Those widgets will continue to display using the last known values
for the named font.  If a deleted named font is subsequently recreated with
another call to \fBfont create\fR, the widgets will use the new named font
and redisplay themselves using the new attributes of that font.
.\" METHOD: families
.TP
\fBfont families\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR?
.
The return value is a list of the case-insensitive names of all font families
that exist on \fIwindow\fR's display.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is
omitted, it defaults to the main window.
.\" METHOD: measure
.TP
\fBfont measure \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fItext\fR
.
Measures the amount of space the string \fItext\fR would use in the given
\fIfont\fR when displayed in \fIwindow\fR.  \fIfont\fR is a font description;
see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is
omitted, it
defaults to the main window.  The return value is the total width in pixels
of \fItext\fR, not including the extra pixels used by highly exaggerated
characters such as cursive
.QW f .
If the string contains newlines or tabs,
those characters are not expanded or treated specially when measuring the
string.
.\" METHOD: metrics
.TP
\fBfont metrics \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIoption\fR?
.
Returns information about the metrics (the font-specific data), for
\fIfont\fR when it is used on \fIwindow\fR's display.  \fIfont\fR is a font
description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below.  If the \fIwindow\fR
argument is
omitted, it defaults to the main window.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
returns the value of that metric; if it is omitted, the return value is a
list of all the metrics and their values.  See \fBFONT METRICS\fR
below for a list of the possible metrics.
.\" METHOD: names
.TP
\fBfont names\fR
.
The return value is a list of all the named fonts that are currently defined.
.SH "FONT DESCRIPTIONS"
.PP
The following formats are accepted as a font description anywhere
\fIfont\fR is specified as an argument above; these same forms are also
permitted when specifying the \fB\-font\fR option for widgets.
.TP
196
197
198
199
200
201
202

203
204
205
206
207

208
209
210
211
212

213
214
215
216
217
218
219

220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237

238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253

254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272

273
274
275
276
277
278
279

280
281

282
283
284
285
286
287

288
289

290
291

292
293

294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345

346
347
348

349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359

360
361
362
363
364
365
366
font.  In the following definitions, the
.QW baseline
of a font is the
horizontal line where the bottom of most letters line up; certain letters,
such as lower-case
.QW g
stick below the baseline.

.TP
\fB\-ascent        \0\fR
.
The amount in pixels that the tallest letter sticks up above the baseline of
the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font.

.TP
\fB\-descent       \0\fR
.
The largest amount in pixels that any letter sticks down below the baseline
of the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font.

.TP
\fB\-linespace\fR
.
Returns how far apart vertically in pixels two lines of text using the same
font should be placed so that none of the characters in one line overlap any
of the characters in the other line.  This is generally the sum of the ascent
above the baseline line plus the descent below the baseline.

.TP
\fB\-fixed          \0\fR
.
Returns a boolean flag that is
.QW \fB1\fR
if this is a fixed-width font,
where each normal character is the same width as all the other
characters, or is
.QW \fB0\fR
if this is a proportionally-spaced font, where
individual characters have different widths.  The widths of control
characters, tab characters, and other non-printing characters are not
included when calculating this value.
.SH "FONT OPTIONS"
.PP
The following options are supported on all platforms, and are used when
constructing a named font or when specifying a font using style [5] as
above:

.TP
\fB\-family \fIname\fR
.
The case-insensitive font family name.  Tk guarantees to support the font
families named \fBCourier\fR (a monospaced
.QW typewriter
font), \fBTimes\fR (a serifed
.QW newspaper
font), and \fBHelvetica\fR (a sans-serif
.QW European
font).  The most closely matching native font family will
automatically be substituted when one of the above font families is used.
The \fIname\fR may also be the name of a native, platform-specific font
family; in that case it will work as desired on one platform but may not
display correctly on other platforms.  If the family is unspecified or
unrecognized, a platform-specific default font will be chosen.

.TP
\fB\-size \fIsize\fR
.
The desired size of the font.  If the \fIsize\fR argument is a positive
number, it is interpreted as a size in points.  If \fIsize\fR is a negative
number, its absolute value is interpreted as a size in pixels.  If a
font cannot be displayed at the specified size, a nearby size will be
chosen.  If \fIsize\fR is unspecified or zero, a platform-dependent default
size will be chosen.
.RS
.PP
Sizes should normally be specified in points so the application will remain
the same ruler size on the screen, even when changing screen resolutions or
moving scripts across platforms.  However, specifying pixels is useful in
certain circumstances such as when a piece of text must line up with respect
to a fixed-size bitmap.  The mapping between points and pixels is set when
the application starts, based on properties of the installed monitor, but it
can be overridden by calling the \fBtk scaling\fR command.
.RE

.TP
\fB\-weight \fIweight\fR
.
The nominal thickness of the characters in the font.  The value
\fBnormal\fR specifies a normal weight font, while \fBbold\fR specifies a
bold font.  The closest available weight to the one specified will
be chosen.  The default weight is \fBnormal\fR.

.TP
\fB\-slant \fIslant\fR

The amount the characters in the font are slanted away from the
vertical.  Valid values for slant are \fBroman\fR and \fBitalic\fR.
A roman font is the normal, upright appearance of a font, while
an italic font is one that is tilted some number of degrees from upright.
The closest available slant to the one specified will be chosen.
The default slant is \fBroman\fR.

.TP
\fB\-underline \fIboolean\fR

The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether characters in this
font should be underlined.  The default value for underline is \fBfalse\fR.

.TP
\fB\-overstrike \fIboolean\fR

The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether a horizontal line should
be drawn through the middle of characters in this font.  The default value
for overstrike is \fBfalse\fR.
.SH "STANDARD FONTS"
.PP
The following named fonts are supported on all systems, and default to values
that match appropriate system defaults.
.TP
\fBTkDefaultFont\fR
.
This font is the default for all GUI items not otherwise specified.
.TP
\fBTkTextFont\fR
.
This font should be used for user text in entry widgets, listboxes etc.
.TP
\fBTkFixedFont\fR
.
This font is the standard fixed-width font.
.TP
\fBTkMenuFont\fR
.
This font is used for menu items.
.TP
\fBTkHeadingFont\fR
.
This font should be used for column headings in lists and tables.
.TP
\fBTkCaptionFont\fR
.
This font should be used for window and dialog caption bars.
.TP
\fBTkSmallCaptionFont\fR
.
This font should be used for captions on contained windows or tool dialogs.
.TP
\fBTkIconFont\fR
.
This font should be used for icon captions.
.TP
\fBTkTooltipFont\fR
.
This font should be used for tooltip windows (transient information windows).
.LP
It is \fInot\fR advised to change these fonts, as they may be modified by Tk
itself in response to system changes. Instead, make a copy of the font and
modify that.
.SH "PLATFORM SPECIFIC FONTS"
.PP
The following system fonts are supported:
.TP
\fBX Windows\fR

All valid X font names, including those listed by xlsfonts(1), are available.
.TP
\fBMS Windows\fR

The following fonts are supported, and are mapped to the user's
style defaults.
.RS
.DS
.ta 3c 6c
\fBsystem\fR	\fBansi\fR	\fBdevice\fR
\fBsystemfixed\fR	\fBansifixed\fR	\fBoemfixed\fR
.DE
.RE
.TP
\fBMac OS X\fR

The following fonts are supported, and are mapped to the user's
style defaults.
.RS
.DS
.ta 3c 6c
\fBsystem\fR	\fBapplication\fR	\fBmenu\fR
.DE







>

|



>

|



>







>

|
















>
















>



















>







>


>






>


>


>


>







<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<










>



>











>







205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322

323

324

325

326

327

328

329

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
font.  In the following definitions, the
.QW baseline
of a font is the
horizontal line where the bottom of most letters line up; certain letters,
such as lower-case
.QW g
stick below the baseline.
.\" OPTION: -ascent
.TP
\fB\-ascent\fR
.
The amount in pixels that the tallest letter sticks up above the baseline of
the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font.
.\" OPTION: -descent
.TP
\fB\-descent\fR
.
The largest amount in pixels that any letter sticks down below the baseline
of the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font.
.\" OPTION: -linespace
.TP
\fB\-linespace\fR
.
Returns how far apart vertically in pixels two lines of text using the same
font should be placed so that none of the characters in one line overlap any
of the characters in the other line.  This is generally the sum of the ascent
above the baseline line plus the descent below the baseline.
.\" OPTION: -fixed
.TP
\fB\-fixed\fR
.
Returns a boolean flag that is
.QW \fB1\fR
if this is a fixed-width font,
where each normal character is the same width as all the other
characters, or is
.QW \fB0\fR
if this is a proportionally-spaced font, where
individual characters have different widths.  The widths of control
characters, tab characters, and other non-printing characters are not
included when calculating this value.
.SH "FONT OPTIONS"
.PP
The following options are supported on all platforms, and are used when
constructing a named font or when specifying a font using style [5] as
above:
.\" OPTION: -family
.TP
\fB\-family \fIname\fR
.
The case-insensitive font family name.  Tk guarantees to support the font
families named \fBCourier\fR (a monospaced
.QW typewriter
font), \fBTimes\fR (a serifed
.QW newspaper
font), and \fBHelvetica\fR (a sans-serif
.QW European
font).  The most closely matching native font family will
automatically be substituted when one of the above font families is used.
The \fIname\fR may also be the name of a native, platform-specific font
family; in that case it will work as desired on one platform but may not
display correctly on other platforms.  If the family is unspecified or
unrecognized, a platform-specific default font will be chosen.
.\" OPTION: -size
.TP
\fB\-size \fIsize\fR
.
The desired size of the font.  If the \fIsize\fR argument is a positive
number, it is interpreted as a size in points.  If \fIsize\fR is a negative
number, its absolute value is interpreted as a size in pixels.  If a
font cannot be displayed at the specified size, a nearby size will be
chosen.  If \fIsize\fR is unspecified or zero, a platform-dependent default
size will be chosen.
.RS
.PP
Sizes should normally be specified in points so the application will remain
the same ruler size on the screen, even when changing screen resolutions or
moving scripts across platforms.  However, specifying pixels is useful in
certain circumstances such as when a piece of text must line up with respect
to a fixed-size bitmap.  The mapping between points and pixels is set when
the application starts, based on properties of the installed monitor, but it
can be overridden by calling the \fBtk scaling\fR command.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -weight
.TP
\fB\-weight \fIweight\fR
.
The nominal thickness of the characters in the font.  The value
\fBnormal\fR specifies a normal weight font, while \fBbold\fR specifies a
bold font.  The closest available weight to the one specified will
be chosen.  The default weight is \fBnormal\fR.
.\" OPTION: -slant
.TP
\fB\-slant \fIslant\fR
.
The amount the characters in the font are slanted away from the
vertical.  Valid values for slant are \fBroman\fR and \fBitalic\fR.
A roman font is the normal, upright appearance of a font, while
an italic font is one that is tilted some number of degrees from upright.
The closest available slant to the one specified will be chosen.
The default slant is \fBroman\fR.
.\" OPTION: -underline
.TP
\fB\-underline \fIboolean\fR
.
The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether characters in this
font should be underlined.  The default value for underline is \fBfalse\fR.
.\" OPTION: -overstrike
.TP
\fB\-overstrike \fIboolean\fR
.
The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether a horizontal line should
be drawn through the middle of characters in this font.  The default value
for overstrike is \fBfalse\fR.
.SH "STANDARD FONTS"
.PP
The following named fonts are supported on all systems, and default to values
that match appropriate system defaults.

.IP \fBTkDefaultFont\fR

This font is the default for all GUI items not otherwise specified.

.IP \fBTkTextFont\fR

This font should be used for user text in entry widgets, listboxes etc.

.IP \fBTkFixedFont\fR

This font is the standard fixed-width font.

.IP \fBTkMenuFont\fR

This font is used for menu items.

.IP \fBTkHeadingFont\fR

This font should be used for column headings in lists and tables.

.IP \fBTkCaptionFont\fR

This font should be used for window and dialog caption bars.

.IP \fBTkSmallCaptionFont\fR

This font should be used for captions on contained windows or tool dialogs.

.IP \fBTkIconFont\fR

This font should be used for icon captions.

.IP \fBTkTooltipFont\fR

This font should be used for tooltip windows (transient information windows).
.LP
It is \fInot\fR advised to change these fonts, as they may be modified by Tk
itself in response to system changes. Instead, make a copy of the font and
modify that.
.SH "PLATFORM SPECIFIC FONTS"
.PP
The following system fonts are supported:
.TP
\fBX Windows\fR
.
All valid X font names, including those listed by xlsfonts(1), are available.
.TP
\fBMS Windows\fR
.
The following fonts are supported, and are mapped to the user's
style defaults.
.RS
.DS
.ta 3c 6c
\fBsystem\fR	\fBansi\fR	\fBdevice\fR
\fBsystemfixed\fR	\fBansifixed\fR	\fBoemfixed\fR
.DE
.RE
.TP
\fBMac OS X\fR
.
The following fonts are supported, and are mapped to the user's
style defaults.
.RS
.DS
.ta 3c 6c
\fBsystem\fR	\fBapplication\fR	\fBmenu\fR
.DE
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
.DE
.RE
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Fill a text widget with lots of font demonstrators, one for every font
family installed on your system:
.CS
pack [text .t \-wrap none] \-fill both \-expand 1
set count 0
set tabwidth 0
foreach family [lsort \-dictionary [\fBfont families\fR]] {
    .t tag configure f[incr count] \-font [list $family 10]
    .t insert end ${family}:\\t {} \e
            "This is a simple sampler\en" f$count
    set w [\fBfont measure\fR [.t cget \-font] ${family}:]
    if {$w+5 > $tabwidth} {
        set tabwidth [expr {$w+5}]
        .t configure \-tabs $tabwidth
    }
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
options(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
font
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|


|
|
|

|
|
|
|










389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
.DE
.RE
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Fill a text widget with lots of font demonstrators, one for every font
family installed on your system:
.CS
pack [text .t -wrap none] -fill both -expand 1
set count 0
set tabwidth 0
foreach family [lsort -dictionary [\fBfont families\fR]] {
    .t tag configure f[incr count] -font [list $family 10]
    .t insert end ${family}:\et {} \e
            "This is a simple sampler\en" f$count
    set w [\fBfont measure\fR [.t cget -font] ${family}:]
    if {$w + 5 > $tabwidth} {
        set tabwidth [expr {$w + 5}]
        .t configure -tabs $tabwidth
    }
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
options(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
font
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/fontchooser.n.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

33
34
35
36
37

38
39
40
41
42

43
44
45
46
47
48
49

50
51

52
53
54

55
56

57
58

59
60

61
62
63
64
65

66
67

68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76

77
78

79
80
81
82
83
84
85

86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93

94
95
96
97
98
99
100
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2008 Daniel A. Steffen <[email protected]>
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH fontchooser n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
fontchooser \- control font selection dialog
.SH SYNOPSIS

\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR ?\fI\-option value ...\fR?
.sp
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR
.sp
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBhide\fR

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command controls the Tk font selection dialog. It uses
the native platform font selection dialog where available, or a dialog
implemented in Tcl otherwise.
.PP
Unlike most of the other Tk dialog commands, \fBtk fontchooser\fR does not
return an immediate result, as on some platforms (Mac OS X) the standard font
dialog is modeless while on others (Windows) it is modal. To accommodate this
difference, all user interaction with the dialog will be communicated to the
caller via callbacks or virtual events.
.PP
The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command can have one of the following forms:

.TP
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure \fR?\fI\-option value ...\fR?
.
Set or query one or more of the configurations options below (analogous to Tk
widget configuration).

.TP
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR
.
Show the font selection dialog. Depending on the platform, may return
immediately or only once the dialog has been withdrawn.

.TP
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBhide\fR
.
Hide the font selection dialog if it is visible and cause any pending
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR command to return.
.PP
.SH "CONFIGURATION OPTIONS"

.TP
\fB\-parent\fR

Specifies/returns the logical parent window of the font selection dialog
(similar to the \fB\-parent\fR option to other dialogs). The font selection
dialog is hidden if it is visible when the parent window is destroyed.

.TP
\fB\-title\fR

Specifies/returns the title of the dialog. Has no effect on platforms where the
font selection dialog does not support titles.

.TP
\fB\-font\fR

Specifies/returns the font that is currently selected in the dialog if it is
visible, or that will be initially selected when the dialog is shown (if
supported by the platform). Can be set to the empty string to indicate that no
font should be selected. Fonts can be specified in any form given by the "FONT
DESCRIPTION" section in the \fBfont\fR manual page.

.TP
\fB\-command\fR

Specifies/returns the command prefix to be called when a font selection has
been made by the user. The command prefix is evaluated at the global level
after having the specification of the selected font appended. On platforms
where the font selection dialog offers the user control of further font
attributes (such as color), additional key/value pairs may be appended before
evaluation. Can be set to the empty string to indicate that no callback should
be invoked. Fonts are specified by a list of form [3] of the "FONT DESCRIPTION"
section in the \fBfont\fR manual page (i.e. a list of the form
\fI{family size style ?style ...?}\fR).

.TP
\fB\-visible\fR

Read-only option that returns a boolean indicating whether the font selection
dialog is currently visible. Attempting to set this option results in an error.

.PP
.SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS"
.TP
\fB<<TkFontchooserVisibility>>\fR

Sent to the dialog parent whenever the visibility of the font selection dialog
changes, both as a result of user action (e.g. disposing of the dialog via
OK/Cancel button or close box) and of the \fBtk fontchooser\fR
\fBshow\fR/\fBhide\fR commands being called. Binding scripts can determine the
current visibility of the dialog by querying the \fB\-visible\fR configuration
option.
.TP
\fB<<TkFontchooserFontChanged>>\fR

Sent to the dialog parent whenever the font selection dialog is visible and the
selected font changes, both as a result of user action and of the \fB\-font\fR
configuration option being set. Binding scripts can determine the currently
selected font by querying the \fB\-font\fR configuration option.
.PP
.SH NOTES
.PP













>

<

<

>














>





>





>







>


>



>


>


>


>





>


>









>


>







>








>







1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2008 Daniel A. Steffen <[email protected]>
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH fontchooser n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
fontchooser \- control font selection dialog
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR ?\fI\-option value ...\fR?

\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR

\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBhide\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command controls the Tk font selection dialog. It uses
the native platform font selection dialog where available, or a dialog
implemented in Tcl otherwise.
.PP
Unlike most of the other Tk dialog commands, \fBtk fontchooser\fR does not
return an immediate result, as on some platforms (Mac OS X) the standard font
dialog is modeless while on others (Windows) it is modal. To accommodate this
difference, all user interaction with the dialog will be communicated to the
caller via callbacks or virtual events.
.PP
The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command can have one of the following forms:
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure \fR?\fI\-option value ...\fR?
.
Set or query one or more of the configurations options below (analogous to Tk
widget configuration).
.\" METHOD: show
.TP
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR
.
Show the font selection dialog. Depending on the platform, may return
immediately or only once the dialog has been withdrawn.
.\" METHOD: hide
.TP
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBhide\fR
.
Hide the font selection dialog if it is visible and cause any pending
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR command to return.
.PP
.SH "CONFIGURATION OPTIONS"
.\" OPTION: -parent
.TP
\fB\-parent\fR
.
Specifies/returns the logical parent window of the font selection dialog
(similar to the \fB\-parent\fR option to other dialogs). The font selection
dialog is hidden if it is visible when the parent window is destroyed.
.\" OPTION: -title
.TP
\fB\-title\fR
.
Specifies/returns the title of the dialog. Has no effect on platforms where the
font selection dialog does not support titles.
.\" OPTION: -font
.TP
\fB\-font\fR
.
Specifies/returns the font that is currently selected in the dialog if it is
visible, or that will be initially selected when the dialog is shown (if
supported by the platform). Can be set to the empty string to indicate that no
font should be selected. Fonts can be specified in any form given by the "FONT
DESCRIPTION" section in the \fBfont\fR manual page.
.\" OPTION: -command
.TP
\fB\-command\fR
.
Specifies/returns the command prefix to be called when a font selection has
been made by the user. The command prefix is evaluated at the global level
after having the specification of the selected font appended. On platforms
where the font selection dialog offers the user control of further font
attributes (such as color), additional key/value pairs may be appended before
evaluation. Can be set to the empty string to indicate that no callback should
be invoked. Fonts are specified by a list of form [3] of the "FONT DESCRIPTION"
section in the \fBfont\fR manual page (i.e. a list of the form
\fI{family size style ?style ...?}\fR).
.\" OPTION: -visible
.TP
\fB\-visible\fR
.
Read-only option that returns a boolean indicating whether the font selection
dialog is currently visible. Attempting to set this option results in an error.

.PP
.SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS"
.TP
\fB<<TkFontchooserVisibility>>\fR
.
Sent to the dialog parent whenever the visibility of the font selection dialog
changes, both as a result of user action (e.g. disposing of the dialog via
OK/Cancel button or close box) and of the \fBtk fontchooser\fR
\fBshow\fR/\fBhide\fR commands being called. Binding scripts can determine the
current visibility of the dialog by querying the \fB\-visible\fR configuration
option.
.TP
\fB<<TkFontchooserFontChanged>>\fR
.
Sent to the dialog parent whenever the font selection dialog is visible and the
selected font changes, both as a result of user action and of the \fB\-font\fR
configuration option being set. Binding scripts can determine the currently
selected font by querying the \fB\-font\fR configuration option.
.PP
.SH NOTES
.PP
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
to ensure its selected font matches the new value of the named font.
.PP
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
proc fontchooserDemo {} {
    wm title . "Font Chooser Demo"
    \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR \-parent .
    button .b \-command fontchooserToggle \-takefocus 0
    fontchooserVisibility .b
    bind . \fB<<TkFontchooserVisibility>>\fR \\
            [list fontchooserVisibility .b]
    foreach w {.t1 .t2} {
        text $w \-width 20 \-height 4 \-borderwidth 1 \-relief solid
        bind $w <FocusIn> [list fontchooserFocus $w]
        $w insert end "Text Widget $w"
    }
    .t1 configure \-font {Courier 14}
    .t2 configure \-font {Times 16}
    pack .b .t1 .t2; focus .t1
}
proc fontchooserToggle {} {
    \fBtk fontchooser\fR [expr {
            [\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR \-visible] ?
            "\fBhide\fR" : "\fBshow\fR"}]
}
proc fontchooserVisibility {w} {
    $w configure \-text [expr {
            [\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR \-visible] ?
            "Hide Font Dialog" : "Show Font Dialog"}]
}
proc fontchooserFocus {w} {
    \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR \-font [$w cget \-font] \\
            \-command [list fontchooserFontSelection $w]
}
proc fontchooserFontSelection {w font args} {
    $w configure \-font [font actual $font]
}
fontchooserDemo
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
font(n), tk(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
dialog, font, font selection, font chooser, font panel
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
|

|


|



|
|




|



|
|



|
|


|










150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
to ensure its selected font matches the new value of the named font.
.PP
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
proc fontchooserDemo {} {
    wm title . "Font Chooser Demo"
    \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR -parent .
    button .b -command fontchooserToggle -takefocus 0
    fontchooserVisibility .b
    bind . \fB<<TkFontchooserVisibility>>\fR \e
            [list fontchooserVisibility .b]
    foreach w {.t1 .t2} {
        text $w -width 20 -height 4 -borderwidth 1 -relief solid
        bind $w <FocusIn> [list fontchooserFocus $w]
        $w insert end "Text Widget $w"
    }
    .t1 configure -font {Courier 14}
    .t2 configure -font {Times 16}
    pack .b .t1 .t2; focus .t1
}
proc fontchooserToggle {} {
    \fBtk fontchooser\fR [expr {
            [\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR -visible] ?
            "\fBhide\fR" : "\fBshow\fR"}]
}
proc fontchooserVisibility {w} {
    $w configure -text [expr {
            [\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR -visible] ?
            "Hide Font Dialog" : "Show Font Dialog"}]
}
proc fontchooserFocus {w} {
    \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR -font [$w cget -font] \e
            -command [list fontchooserFontSelection $w]
}
proc fontchooserFontSelection {w font args} {
    $w configure -font [font actual $font]
}
fontchooserDemo
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
font(n), tk(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
dialog, font, font selection, font chooser, font panel
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/frame.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH frame n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
frame \- Create and manipulate 'frame' simple container widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBframe\fR \fIpathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-borderwidth	\-highlightcolor	\-pady
\-cursor	\-highlightthickness	\-relief
\-highlightbackground	\-padx	\-takefocus
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-background background Background







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH frame n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
frame \- Create and manipulate 'frame' simple container widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBframe\fI pathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-borderwidth	\-highlightcolor	\-pady
\-cursor	\-highlightthickness	\-relief
\-highlightbackground	\-padx	\-takefocus
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-background background Background
123
124
125
126
127
128
129

130
131
132
133
134
135
136

137
138
139
140
141
142
143
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
.PP
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the frame widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for frame widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBframe\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified







>

|





>







123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
.PP
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the frame widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for frame widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBframe\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified

Changes to doc/getOpenFile.n.

30
31
32
33
34
35
36

37
38

39
40
41
42
43

44
45

46
47
48
49

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70

71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81

82
83
84
85

86
87
88
89
90

91
92
93
94

95
96
97
98
99
100

101
102
103
104
105

106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
The \fBtk_getSaveFile\fR command is usually associated with the \fBSave
as\fR command in the \fBFile\fR menu. If the user enters a file that
already exists, the dialog box prompts the user for confirmation
whether the existing file should be overwritten or not.
.PP
The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line
arguments to these two commands:

.TP
\fB\-command\fR \fIstring\fR

Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the
dialog after having selected an item. This callback is not called if the
user cancelled the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR
followed by a space and the value selected by the user in the dialog. This
is only available on Mac OS X.

.TP
\fB\-confirmoverwrite\fR \fIboolean\fR

Configures how the Save dialog reacts when the selected file already
exists, and saving would overwrite it.  A true value requests a
confirmation dialog be presented to the user.  A false value requests
that the overwrite take place without confirmation.  Default value is true.

.TP
\fB\-defaultextension\fR \fIextension\fR
.
Specifies a string that will be appended to the filename if the user
enters a filename without an extension. The default value is the empty
string, which means no extension will be appended to the filename in
any case. This option is ignored on Mac OS X, which
does not require extensions to filenames,
and the UNIX implementation guesses reasonable values for this from
the \fB\-filetypes\fR option when this is not supplied.

.TP
\fB\-filetypes\fR \fIfilePatternList\fR
.
If a \fBFile types\fR listbox exists in the file dialog on the particular
platform, this option gives the \fIfiletype\fRs in this listbox. When
the user choose a filetype in the listbox, only the files of that type
are listed. If this option is unspecified, or if it is set to the
empty list, or if the \fBFile types\fR listbox is not supported by the
particular platform then all files are listed regardless of their
types. See the section \fBSPECIFYING FILE PATTERNS\fR below for a
discussion on the contents of \fIfilePatternList\fR.

.TP
\fB\-initialdir\fR \fIdirectory\fR
.
Specifies that the files in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed
when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified,
the initial directory defaults to the current working directory
on non-Windows systems and on Windows systems prior to Vista.
On Vista and later systems, the initial directory defaults to the last
user-selected directory for the application. If the
parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
relative path to an absolute path.

.TP
\fB\-initialfile\fR \fIfilename\fR
.
Specifies a filename to be displayed in the dialog when it pops up.

.TP
\fB\-message\fR \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies a message to include in the client area of the dialog.
This is only available on Mac OS X.

.TP
\fB\-multiple\fR \fIboolean\fR
.
Allows the user to choose multiple files from the Open dialog.

.TP
\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR
.
Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the file dialog. The file
dialog is displayed on top of its parent window. On Mac OS X, this
turns the file dialog into a sheet attached to the parent window.

.TP
\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
option is not specified, then a default title is displayed.

.TP
\fB\-typevariable\fR \fIvariableName\fR
.
The global variable \fIvariableName\fR is used to preselect which filter is
used from \fIfilterList\fR when the dialog box is opened and is
updated when the dialog box is closed, to the last selected
filter. The variable is read once at the beginning to select the
appropriate filter. If the variable does not exist, or its value does
not match any filter typename, or is empty (\fB{}\fR), the dialog box







>

|
>





>

|
>




>

|








>

|









>

|









>

|


>

|



>

|


>

|




>

|



>

|







30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
The \fBtk_getSaveFile\fR command is usually associated with the \fBSave
as\fR command in the \fBFile\fR menu. If the user enters a file that
already exists, the dialog box prompts the user for confirmation
whether the existing file should be overwritten or not.
.PP
The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line
arguments to these two commands:
.\" OPTION: -command
.TP
\fB\-command\fI string\fR
.
Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the
dialog after having selected an item. This callback is not called if the
user cancelled the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR
followed by a space and the value selected by the user in the dialog. This
is only available on Mac OS X.
.\" OPTION: -confirmoverwrite
.TP
\fB\-confirmoverwrite\fI boolean\fR
.
Configures how the Save dialog reacts when the selected file already
exists, and saving would overwrite it.  A true value requests a
confirmation dialog be presented to the user.  A false value requests
that the overwrite take place without confirmation.  Default value is true.
.\" OPTION: -defaultextension
.TP
\fB\-defaultextension\fI extension\fR
.
Specifies a string that will be appended to the filename if the user
enters a filename without an extension. The default value is the empty
string, which means no extension will be appended to the filename in
any case. This option is ignored on Mac OS X, which
does not require extensions to filenames,
and the UNIX implementation guesses reasonable values for this from
the \fB\-filetypes\fR option when this is not supplied.
.\" OPTION: -filetypes
.TP
\fB\-filetypes\fI filePatternList\fR
.
If a \fBFile types\fR listbox exists in the file dialog on the particular
platform, this option gives the \fIfiletype\fRs in this listbox. When
the user choose a filetype in the listbox, only the files of that type
are listed. If this option is unspecified, or if it is set to the
empty list, or if the \fBFile types\fR listbox is not supported by the
particular platform then all files are listed regardless of their
types. See the section \fBSPECIFYING FILE PATTERNS\fR below for a
discussion on the contents of \fIfilePatternList\fR.
.\" OPTION: -initialdir
.TP
\fB\-initialdir\fI directory\fR
.
Specifies that the files in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed
when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified,
the initial directory defaults to the current working directory
on non-Windows systems and on Windows systems prior to Vista.
On Vista and later systems, the initial directory defaults to the last
user-selected directory for the application. If the
parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
relative path to an absolute path.
.\" OPTION: -initialfile
.TP
\fB\-initialfile\fI filename\fR
.
Specifies a filename to be displayed in the dialog when it pops up.
.\" OPTION: -message
.TP
\fB\-message\fI string\fR
.
Specifies a message to include in the client area of the dialog.
This is only available on Mac OS X.
.\" OPTION: -multiple
.TP
\fB\-multiple\fI boolean\fR
.
Allows the user to choose multiple files from the Open dialog.
.\" OPTION: -parent
.TP
\fB\-parent\fI window\fR
.
Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the file dialog. The file
dialog is displayed on top of its parent window. On Mac OS X, this
turns the file dialog into a sheet attached to the parent window.
.\" OPTION: -title
.TP
\fB\-title\fI titleString\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
option is not specified, then a default title is displayed.
.\" OPTION: -typevariable
.TP
\fB\-typevariable\fI variableName\fR
.
The global variable \fIvariableName\fR is used to preselect which filter is
used from \fIfilterList\fR when the dialog box is opened and is
updated when the dialog box is closed, to the last selected
filter. The variable is read once at the beginning to select the
appropriate filter. If the variable does not exist, or its value does
not match any filter typename, or is empty (\fB{}\fR), the dialog box
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
    {{Text Files}       {.txt}        }
    {{TCL Scripts}      {.tcl}        }
    {{C Source Files}   {.c}      TEXT}
    {{GIF Files}        {.gif}        }
    {{GIF Files}        {}        GIFF}
    {{All Files}        *             }
}
set filename [\fBtk_getOpenFile\fR \-filetypes $types]

if {$filename ne ""} {
    # Open the file ...
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
tk_chooseDirectory
.SH KEYWORDS
file selection dialog
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|












201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
    {{Text Files}       {.txt}        }
    {{TCL Scripts}      {.tcl}        }
    {{C Source Files}   {.c}      TEXT}
    {{GIF Files}        {.gif}        }
    {{GIF Files}        {}        GIFF}
    {{All Files}        *             }
}
set filename [\fBtk_getOpenFile\fR -filetypes $types]

if {$filename ne ""} {
    # Open the file ...
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
tk_chooseDirectory
.SH KEYWORDS
file selection dialog
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/grab.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.TH grab n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree
.SH SYNOPSIS

\fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR
.sp
\fBgrab \fIoption \fR?\fIarg \fR...?

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This command implements simple pointer and keyboard grabs for Tk.
Tk's grabs are different than the grabs
described in the Xlib documentation.
When a grab is set for a particular window, Tk restricts all pointer







>

<

>







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.TH grab n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR

\fBgrab \fIoption \fR?\fIarg \fR...?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This command implements simple pointer and keyboard grabs for Tk.
Tk's grabs are different than the grabs
described in the Xlib documentation.
When a grab is set for a particular window, Tk restricts all pointer
79
80
81
82
83
84
85

86

87
88

89
90
91
92
93
94

95
96

97
98

99
100

101
102
103
104
105
106
107

108
109

110
111
112
113
114
115
116
It is possible for different applications on a single display to have
simultaneous local grabs, but only one application can have a global
grab on a given display at once.
.PP
The \fBgrab\fR command can take any of the following forms:
.TP
\fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR

Same as \fBgrab set\fR, described below.

.TP
\fBgrab current \fR?\fIwindow\fR?

If \fIwindow\fR is specified, returns the name of the current grab
window in this application for \fIwindow\fR's display, or an empty
string if there is no such window.
If \fIwindow\fR is omitted, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the windows grabbed by this application for all displays,
or an empty string if the application has no grabs.

.TP
\fBgrab release \fIwindow\fR

Releases the grab on \fIwindow\fR if there is one, otherwise does
nothing.  Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fBgrab set \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR

Sets a grab on \fIwindow\fR.  If \fB\-global\fR is specified then the
grab is global, otherwise it is local.
If a grab was already in effect for this application on
\fIwindow\fR's display then it is automatically released.
If there is already a grab on \fIwindow\fR and it has the same
global/local form as the requested grab, then the command
does nothing.  Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fBgrab status \fIwindow\fR

Returns \fBnone\fR if no grab is currently set on \fIwindow\fR,
\fBlocal\fR if a local grab is set on \fIwindow\fR, and
\fBglobal\fR if a global grab is set.
.SH WARNING
.PP
It is very easy to use global grabs to render a display completely
unusable (e.g. by setting a grab on a widget which does not respond to







>

>


>






>


>


>


>







>


>







80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
It is possible for different applications on a single display to have
simultaneous local grabs, but only one application can have a global
grab on a given display at once.
.PP
The \fBgrab\fR command can take any of the following forms:
.TP
\fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR
.
Same as \fBgrab set\fR, described below.
.\" METHOD: current
.TP
\fBgrab current \fR?\fIwindow\fR?
.
If \fIwindow\fR is specified, returns the name of the current grab
window in this application for \fIwindow\fR's display, or an empty
string if there is no such window.
If \fIwindow\fR is omitted, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the windows grabbed by this application for all displays,
or an empty string if the application has no grabs.
.\" METHOD: release
.TP
\fBgrab release \fIwindow\fR
.
Releases the grab on \fIwindow\fR if there is one, otherwise does
nothing.  Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: set
.TP
\fBgrab set \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR
.
Sets a grab on \fIwindow\fR.  If \fB\-global\fR is specified then the
grab is global, otherwise it is local.
If a grab was already in effect for this application on
\fIwindow\fR's display then it is automatically released.
If there is already a grab on \fIwindow\fR and it has the same
global/local form as the requested grab, then the command
does nothing.  Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: status
.TP
\fBgrab status \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns \fBnone\fR if no grab is currently set on \fIwindow\fR,
\fBlocal\fR if a local grab is set on \fIwindow\fR, and
\fBglobal\fR if a global grab is set.
.SH WARNING
.PP
It is very easy to use global grabs to render a display completely
unusable (e.g. by setting a grab on a widget which does not respond to
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
processes, this restriction does not exist.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Set a grab so that only one button may be clicked out of a group.  The
other buttons are unresponsive to the mouse until the middle button is
clicked.
.CS
pack [button .b1 \-text "Click me! #1" \-command {destroy .b1}]
pack [button .b2 \-text "Click me! #2" \-command {destroy .b2}]
pack [button .b3 \-text "Click me! #3" \-command {destroy .b3}]
\fBgrab\fR .b2
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
busy(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
grab, keyboard events, pointer events, window
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
|
|









142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
processes, this restriction does not exist.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Set a grab so that only one button may be clicked out of a group.  The
other buttons are unresponsive to the mouse until the middle button is
clicked.
.CS
pack [button .b1 -text "Click me! #1" -command {destroy .b1}]
pack [button .b2 -text "Click me! #2" -command {destroy .b2}]
pack [button .b3 -text "Click me! #3" -command {destroy .b3}]
\fBgrab\fR .b2
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
busy(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
grab, keyboard events, pointer events, window
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/grid.n.

24
25
26
27
28
29
30

31
32
33
34
35
36

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
\fBgrid \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
If the first argument to \fBgrid\fR is suitable as the first window
argument to \fBgrid configure\fR, either a window name (any value
starting with \fB.\fR) or one of the characters \fBx\fR or \fB^\fR
(see the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR section below), then the command is
processed in the same way as \fBgrid configure\fR.

.TP
\fBgrid anchor \fIwindow\fR ?\fIanchor\fR?
.
The anchor value controls how to place the grid within the container window
when no row/column has any weight.  See \fBTHE GRID ALGORITHM\fR below
for further details.  The default \fIanchor\fR is \fInw\fR.

.TP
\fBgrid bbox \fIwindow\fR ?\fIcolumn row\fR? ?\fIcolumn2 row2\fR?
.
With no arguments,
the bounding box (in pixels) of the grid is returned.
The return value consists of 4 integers.  The first two are the pixel
offset from the container window (x then y) of the top-left corner of the
grid, and the second two integers are the width and height of the grid,
also in pixels.  If a single \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR is specified on
the command line, then the bounding box for that cell is returned, where the
top left cell is numbered from zero.  If both \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR
arguments are specified, then the bounding box spanning the rows and columns
indicated is returned.

.TP
\fBgrid columnconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR?
.
Query or set the column properties of the \fIindex\fR column of the
geometry container, \fIwindow\fR.
The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR
and \fB\-pad\fR.







>






>













>







24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
\fBgrid \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
If the first argument to \fBgrid\fR is suitable as the first window
argument to \fBgrid configure\fR, either a window name (any value
starting with \fB.\fR) or one of the characters \fBx\fR or \fB^\fR
(see the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR section below), then the command is
processed in the same way as \fBgrid configure\fR.
.\" METHOD: anchor
.TP
\fBgrid anchor \fIwindow\fR ?\fIanchor\fR?
.
The anchor value controls how to place the grid within the container window
when no row/column has any weight.  See \fBTHE GRID ALGORITHM\fR below
for further details.  The default \fIanchor\fR is \fInw\fR.
.\" METHOD: bbox
.TP
\fBgrid bbox \fIwindow\fR ?\fIcolumn row\fR? ?\fIcolumn2 row2\fR?
.
With no arguments,
the bounding box (in pixels) of the grid is returned.
The return value consists of 4 integers.  The first two are the pixel
offset from the container window (x then y) of the top-left corner of the
grid, and the second two integers are the width and height of the grid,
also in pixels.  If a single \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR is specified on
the command line, then the bounding box for that cell is returned, where the
top left cell is numbered from zero.  If both \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR
arguments are specified, then the bounding box spanning the rows and columns
indicated is returned.
.\" METHOD: columnconfigure
.TP
\fBgrid columnconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR?
.
Query or set the column properties of the \fIindex\fR column of the
geometry container, \fIwindow\fR.
The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR
and \fB\-pad\fR.
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86

87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98

99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110

111
112
113
114
115
116
117

118
119
120
121
122
123

124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131

132
133
134
135
136
137
138

139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147

148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156

157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164

165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172

173
174
175
176
177
178
179
The \fB\-pad\fR option specifies the number of screen units that will be
added to the largest window contained completely in that column when the
grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window.
If only an option is specified, with no value,
the current value of that option is returned.
If only the container window and index is specified, all the current settings
are returned in a list of
.QW "\-option value"
pairs.

.TP
\fBgrid configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
The arguments consist of the names of one or more content windows
followed by pairs of arguments that specify how
to manage the content.
The characters \fB\-\fR,  \fBx\fR and \fB^\fR,
can be specified instead of a window name to alter the default
location of a \fIwindow\fR, as described in the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR
section, below.
The following options are supported:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-column \fIn\fR
.
Insert the window so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth column in the grid.
Column numbers start with 0.  If this option is not supplied, then the
window is arranged just to the right of previous window specified on this
call to \fBgrid\fR, or column
.QW 0
if it is the first window.  For each
\fBx\fR that immediately precedes the \fIwindow\fR, the column position
is incremented by one.  Thus the \fBx\fR represents a blank column
for this row in the grid.

.TP
\fB\-columnspan \fIn\fR
.
Insert the window so that it occupies \fIn\fR columns in the grid.
The default is one column, unless the window name is followed by a
\fB\-\fR, in which case the columnspan is incremented once for each immediately
following \fB\-\fR.

.TP
\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR
.
Insert the window(s) in the container
window given by \fIcontainer\fR.  The default is the first window's
parent window.

.TP
\fB\-ipadx \fIamount\fR
.
The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal internal padding to
leave on each side of the content.  This is space is added
inside the content border.
The \fIamount\fR must be a valid screen distance, such as \fB2\fR or \fB.5c\fR.
It defaults to 0.

.TP
\fB\-ipady \fIamount\fR
.
The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical internal padding to
leave on the top and bottom of the content.
This space is added inside the content border.
The \fIamount\fR  defaults to 0.

.TP
\fB\-padx \fIamount\fR
.
The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal external padding to
leave on each side of the content, in screen units.
\fIAmount\fR may be a list
of two values to specify padding for left and right separately.
The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0.
This space is added outside the content border.

.TP
\fB\-pady \fIamount\fR
.
The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical external padding to
leave on the top and bottom of the content, in screen units.
\fIAmount\fR may be a list
of two values to specify padding for top and bottom separately.
The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0.
This space is added outside the content border.

.TP
\fB\-row \fIn\fR
.
Insert the content so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth row in the grid.
Row numbers start with 0.  If this option is not supplied, then the
content is arranged on the same row as the previous content specified on this
call to \fBgrid\fR, or the next row after the highest occupied row
if this is the first content.

.TP
\fB\-rowspan \fIn\fR
.
Insert the content so that it occupies \fIn\fR rows in the grid.
The default is one row.  If the next \fBgrid\fR command contains
\fB^\fR characters instead of \fIcontent\fR that line up with the columns
of this \fIcontent\fR, then the \fBrowspan\fR of this \fIcontent\fR is
extended by one.

.TP
\fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR
.
If a content's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this
option may be used to position (or stretch) the content within its cell.
\fIStyle\fR  is a string that contains zero or more of the characters
\fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR.







|

>












>












>







>






>








>







>









>









>








>








>







81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
The \fB\-pad\fR option specifies the number of screen units that will be
added to the largest window contained completely in that column when the
grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window.
If only an option is specified, with no value,
the current value of that option is returned.
If only the container window and index is specified, all the current settings
are returned in a list of
.QW "\fI\-option value\fR"
pairs.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fBgrid configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
The arguments consist of the names of one or more content windows
followed by pairs of arguments that specify how
to manage the content.
The characters \fB\-\fR,  \fBx\fR and \fB^\fR,
can be specified instead of a window name to alter the default
location of a \fIwindow\fR, as described in the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR
section, below.
The following options are supported:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -column
.TP
\fB\-column \fIn\fR
.
Insert the window so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth column in the grid.
Column numbers start with 0.  If this option is not supplied, then the
window is arranged just to the right of previous window specified on this
call to \fBgrid\fR, or column
.QW 0
if it is the first window.  For each
\fBx\fR that immediately precedes the \fIwindow\fR, the column position
is incremented by one.  Thus the \fBx\fR represents a blank column
for this row in the grid.
.\" OPTION: -columnspan
.TP
\fB\-columnspan \fIn\fR
.
Insert the window so that it occupies \fIn\fR columns in the grid.
The default is one column, unless the window name is followed by a
\fB\-\fR, in which case the columnspan is incremented once for each immediately
following \fB\-\fR.
.\" OPTION: -in
.TP
\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR
.
Insert the window(s) in the container
window given by \fIcontainer\fR.  The default is the first window's
parent window.
.\" OPTION: -ipadx
.TP
\fB\-ipadx \fIamount\fR
.
The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal internal padding to
leave on each side of the content.  This is space is added
inside the content border.
The \fIamount\fR must be a valid screen distance, such as \fB2\fR or \fB.5c\fR.
It defaults to 0.
.\" OPTION: -ipady
.TP
\fB\-ipady \fIamount\fR
.
The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical internal padding to
leave on the top and bottom of the content.
This space is added inside the content border.
The \fIamount\fR  defaults to 0.
.\" OPTION: -padx
.TP
\fB\-padx \fIamount\fR
.
The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal external padding to
leave on each side of the content, in screen units.
\fIAmount\fR may be a list
of two values to specify padding for left and right separately.
The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0.
This space is added outside the content border.
.\" OPTION: -pady
.TP
\fB\-pady \fIamount\fR
.
The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical external padding to
leave on the top and bottom of the content, in screen units.
\fIAmount\fR may be a list
of two values to specify padding for top and bottom separately.
The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0.
This space is added outside the content border.
.\" OPTION: -row
.TP
\fB\-row \fIn\fR
.
Insert the content so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth row in the grid.
Row numbers start with 0.  If this option is not supplied, then the
content is arranged on the same row as the previous content specified on this
call to \fBgrid\fR, or the next row after the highest occupied row
if this is the first content.
.\" OPTION: -rowspan
.TP
\fB\-rowspan \fIn\fR
.
Insert the content so that it occupies \fIn\fR rows in the grid.
The default is one row.  If the next \fBgrid\fR command contains
\fB^\fR characters instead of \fIcontent\fR that line up with the columns
of this \fIcontent\fR, then the \fBrowspan\fR of this \fIcontent\fR is
extended by one.
.\" OPTION: -sticky
.TP
\fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR
.
If a content's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this
option may be used to position (or stretch) the content within its cell.
\fIStyle\fR  is a string that contains zero or more of the characters
\fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR.
189
190
191
192
193
194
195










196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212

213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221

222
223
224
225
226
227
228

229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240


241


242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
.QW "" ,
which causes the content to be centered in its cavity, at its requested size.
.LP
If any of the content is already managed by the geometry manager
then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather
than receiving default values.
.RE










.TP
\fBgrid forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR?
.
Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its
container and unmaps their windows.
The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the
window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial
default settings are used.
.RS
.PP
.VS "TIP 518"
If the last content window of the container becomes unmanaged, this will also send
the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the container; the container
may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change.
.VE "TIP 518"
.RE

.TP
\fBgrid info \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
the content given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that
might be specified to \fBgrid configure\fR.
The first two elements of the list are
.QW "\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR"
where \fIcontainer\fR is the windows's container window.

.TP
\fBgrid location \fIwindow x y\fR
.
Given  \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR values in screen units relative to the container window,
the column and row number at that \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR location is returned.
For locations that are above or to the left of the grid, \fB\-1\fR is
returned.

.TP
\fBgrid propagate \fIwindow\fR ?\fIboolean\fR?
.
If \fIboolean\fR has a true boolean value such as \fB1\fR or \fBon\fR
then propagation is enabled for \fIwindow\fR, which must be a window
name (see \fBGEOMETRY PROPAGATION\fR below).
If \fIboolean\fR has a false boolean value then propagation is
disabled for \fIwindow\fR.
In either of these cases an empty string is returned.
If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or
\fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled
for \fIwindow\fR.


Propagation is enabled by default.


.TP
\fBgrid rowconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR?
.
Query or set the row properties of the \fIindex\fR row of the
geometry container, \fIwindow\fR.
The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR
and \fB\-pad\fR.
If one or more options are provided, then \fIindex\fR may be given as
a list of row indices to which the configuration options will operate on.
Indices may be integers, window names or the keyword \fIall\fR. For \fIall\fR
the options apply to all rows currently occupied by content windows. For
a window name, that window must be a content window of this container and the options
apply to all rows currently occupied by the container window.
The \fB\-minsize\fR option sets the minimum size, in screen units,
that will be permitted for this row.
The \fB\-weight\fR option (an integer value)
sets the relative weight for apportioning
any extra spaces among
rows.
A weight of zero (0) indicates the row will not deviate from its requested







>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>












|
|



>









>



|
|
|
|
>












>
>

>
>










|
|
|







203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
.QW "" ,
which causes the content to be centered in its cavity, at its requested size.
.LP
If any of the content is already managed by the geometry manager
then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather
than receiving default values.
.RE
.\" METHOD: content
.TP
\fBgrid content \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?
.
If no options are supplied, a list of all of the content in \fIwindow\fR
is returned, most recently managed first.
\fIOption\fR can be either \fB\-row\fR or \fB\-column\fR which
causes only the content in the row (or column) specified by \fIvalue\fR
to be returned.
.\" METHOD: forget
.TP
\fBgrid forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR?
.
Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its
container and unmaps their windows.
The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the
window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial
default settings are used.
.RS
.PP
.VS "TIP 518"
If the last content window of the container becomes unmanaged, this will also
send the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the container; the container
may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change.
.VE "TIP 518"
.RE
.\" METHOD: info
.TP
\fBgrid info \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
the content given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that
might be specified to \fBgrid configure\fR.
The first two elements of the list are
.QW "\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR"
where \fIcontainer\fR is the windows's container window.
.\" METHOD: location
.TP
\fBgrid location \fIwindow x y\fR
.
Given  \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR values in screen units relative to the container
window, the column and row number at that \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR location is
returned. For locations that are above or to the left of the grid, \fB\-1\fR
is returned.
.\" METHOD: propagate
.TP
\fBgrid propagate \fIwindow\fR ?\fIboolean\fR?
.
If \fIboolean\fR has a true boolean value such as \fB1\fR or \fBon\fR
then propagation is enabled for \fIwindow\fR, which must be a window
name (see \fBGEOMETRY PROPAGATION\fR below).
If \fIboolean\fR has a false boolean value then propagation is
disabled for \fIwindow\fR.
In either of these cases an empty string is returned.
If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or
\fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled
for \fIwindow\fR.
.RS
.PP
Propagation is enabled by default.
.RE
.\" METHOD: rowconfigure
.TP
\fBgrid rowconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR?
.
Query or set the row properties of the \fIindex\fR row of the
geometry container, \fIwindow\fR.
The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR
and \fB\-pad\fR.
If one or more options are provided, then \fIindex\fR may be given as
a list of row indices to which the configuration options will operate on.
Indices may be integers, window names or the keyword \fIall\fR. For \fIall\fR
the options apply to all rows currently occupied by content windows. For a
window name, that window must be a content window of this container and the
options apply to all rows currently occupied by the container window.
The \fB\-minsize\fR option sets the minimum size, in screen units,
that will be permitted for this row.
The \fB\-weight\fR option (an integer value)
sets the relative weight for apportioning
any extra spaces among
rows.
A weight of zero (0) indicates the row will not deviate from its requested
272
273
274
275
276
277
278

279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295

296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window.
If only an option is specified, with no value,
the current value of that option is returned.
If only the container window and index is specified, all the current settings
are returned in a list of
.QW "-option value"
pairs.

.TP
\fBgrid remove \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR?
.
Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its
container and unmaps their windows.
The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
However, the configuration options for that window are remembered,
so that if the content window is managed once more by the grid
geometry manager, the previous values are retained.
.RS
.PP
.VS "TIP 518"
If the last content window of the container becomes unmanaged, this will also send
the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the container; the container
may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change.
.VE "TIP 518"
.RE

.TP
\fBgrid size \fIcontainer\fR
.
Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for \fIcontainer\fR.
The size is determined either by the \fIcontent\fR occupying the largest
row or column, or the largest column or row with a \fB\-minsize\fR,
\fB\-weight\fR, or \fB\-pad\fR that is non-zero.
.TP
\fBgrid content \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?
.
If no options are supplied, a list of all of the content in \fIwindow\fR
is returned, most recently managed first.
\fIOption\fR can be either \fB\-row\fR or \fB\-column\fR which
causes only the content in the row (or column) specified by \fIvalue\fR
to be returned.
.TP
\fBgrid slaves \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?
.
Synonym for \fBgrid content \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?.
.SH "RELATIVE PLACEMENT"
.PP
The \fBgrid\fR command contains a limited set of capabilities that
permit layouts to be created without specifying the row and column
information for each content.  This permits content to be rearranged,
added, or removed without the need to explicitly specify row and
column information.
When no column or row information is specified for a \fIcontent\fR,
default values are chosen for
\fB\-column\fR, \fB\-row\fR, \fB\-columnspan\fR and \fB\-rowspan\fR
at the time the \fIcontent\fR is managed. The values are chosen
based upon the current layout of the grid, the position of the \fIcontent\fR
relative to other \fIcontent\fRs in the same grid command, and the presence
of the characters \fB\-\fR, \fBx\fR, and \fB^\fR in \fBgrid\fR
command where \fIcontent\fR names are normally expected.
.RS
.TP
\fB\-\fR
.
This increases the \fB\-columnspan\fR of the \fIcontent\fR to the left.  Several
\fB\-\fR's in a row will successively increase the number of columns spanned. A \fB\-\fR
may not follow a \fB^\fR or a \fBx\fR, nor may it be the first \fIcontent\fR
argument to \fBgrid configure\fR.
.TP
\fBx\fR
.
This leaves an empty column between the \fIcontent\fR on the left and
the \fIcontent\fR on the right.
.TP
\fB^\fR
.
This extends the \fB\-rowspan\fR of the \fIcontent\fR above the \fB^\fR's
in the grid.  The number of \fB^\fR's in a row must match the number of
columns spanned by the \fIcontent\fR above it.
.RE
.SH "THE GRID ALGORITHM"
.PP
The grid geometry manager lays out its content in three steps.
In the first step, the minimum size needed to fit all of the content
is computed, then (if propagation is turned on), a request is made
of the container window to become that size.
In the second step, the requested size is compared against the actual size
of the container.  If the sizes are different, then spaces is added to or taken
away from the layout as needed.
For the final step, each content is positioned in its row(s) and column(s)
based on the setting of its \fIsticky\fR flag.
.PP
To compute the minimum size of a layout, the grid geometry manager
first looks at all content whose \fB\-columnspan\fR and \fB\-rowspan\fR values are one,
and computes the nominal size of each row or column to be either the
\fIminsize\fR for that row or column, or the sum of the \fIpad\fRding
plus the size of the largest content, whichever is greater.  After that
the rows or columns in each uniform group adapt to each other.  Then
the content whose row-spans or column-spans are greater than one are
examined.  If a group of rows or columns need to be increased in size
in order to accommodate these content, then extra space is added to each







>












|
|
|


>







<
<
|
<
<
<
<
<




















<
|
<

|
|
|
<
|
<


<
|
<
















|
|







303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335


336





337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356

357

358
359
360
361

362

363
364

365

366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window.
If only an option is specified, with no value,
the current value of that option is returned.
If only the container window and index is specified, all the current settings
are returned in a list of
.QW "-option value"
pairs.
.\" METHOD: remove
.TP
\fBgrid remove \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR?
.
Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its
container and unmaps their windows.
The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
However, the configuration options for that window are remembered,
so that if the content window is managed once more by the grid
geometry manager, the previous values are retained.
.RS
.PP
.VS "TIP 518"
If the last content window of the container becomes unmanaged, this will also
send the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the container; the
container may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change.
.VE "TIP 518"
.RE
.\" METHOD: size
.TP
\fBgrid size \fIcontainer\fR
.
Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for \fIcontainer\fR.
The size is determined either by the \fIcontent\fR occupying the largest
row or column, or the largest column or row with a \fB\-minsize\fR,
\fB\-weight\fR, or \fB\-pad\fR that is non-zero.


.\" METHOD: slaves





.TP
\fBgrid slaves \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?
.
Synonym for \fBgrid content \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?.
.SH "RELATIVE PLACEMENT"
.PP
The \fBgrid\fR command contains a limited set of capabilities that
permit layouts to be created without specifying the row and column
information for each content.  This permits content to be rearranged,
added, or removed without the need to explicitly specify row and
column information.
When no column or row information is specified for a \fIcontent\fR,
default values are chosen for
\fB\-column\fR, \fB\-row\fR, \fB\-columnspan\fR and \fB\-rowspan\fR
at the time the \fIcontent\fR is managed. The values are chosen
based upon the current layout of the grid, the position of the \fIcontent\fR
relative to other \fIcontent\fRs in the same grid command, and the presence
of the characters \fB\-\fR, \fBx\fR, and \fB^\fR in \fBgrid\fR
command where \fIcontent\fR names are normally expected.
.RS

.IP \fB\-\fR

This increases the \fB\-columnspan\fR of the \fIcontent\fR to the left.  Several
\fB\-\fR's in a row will successively increase the number of columns spanned.
A \fB\-\fR may not follow a \fB^\fR or a \fBx\fR, nor may it be the first
\fIcontent\fR argument to \fBgrid configure\fR.

.IP \fBx\fR

This leaves an empty column between the \fIcontent\fR on the left and
the \fIcontent\fR on the right.

.IP \fB^\fR

This extends the \fB\-rowspan\fR of the \fIcontent\fR above the \fB^\fR's
in the grid.  The number of \fB^\fR's in a row must match the number of
columns spanned by the \fIcontent\fR above it.
.RE
.SH "THE GRID ALGORITHM"
.PP
The grid geometry manager lays out its content in three steps.
In the first step, the minimum size needed to fit all of the content
is computed, then (if propagation is turned on), a request is made
of the container window to become that size.
In the second step, the requested size is compared against the actual size
of the container.  If the sizes are different, then spaces is added to or taken
away from the layout as needed.
For the final step, each content is positioned in its row(s) and column(s)
based on the setting of its \fIsticky\fR flag.
.PP
To compute the minimum size of a layout, the grid geometry manager first looks
at all content whose \fB\-columnspan\fR and \fB\-rowspan\fR values are one,
and computes the nominal size of each row or column to be either the
\fIminsize\fR for that row or column, or the sum of the \fIpad\fRding
plus the size of the largest content, whichever is greater.  After that
the rows or columns in each uniform group adapt to each other.  Then
the content whose row-spans or column-spans are greater than one are
examined.  If a group of rows or columns need to be increased in size
in order to accommodate these content, then extra space is added to each
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
A toplevel window containing a text widget and two scrollbars:
.PP
.CS
# Make the widgets
toplevel .t
text .t.txt \-wrap none \-xscroll {.t.h set} \-yscroll {.t.v set}
scrollbar .t.v \-orient vertical   \-command {.t.txt yview}
scrollbar .t.h \-orient horizontal \-command {.t.txt xview}

# Lay them out
\fBgrid\fR .t.txt .t.v \-sticky nsew
\fBgrid\fR .t.h        \-sticky nsew

# Tell the text widget to take all the extra room
\fBgrid rowconfigure\fR    .t .t.txt \-weight 1
\fBgrid columnconfigure\fR .t .t.txt \-weight 1
.CE
.PP
Three widgets of equal width, despite their different
.QW natural
widths:
.PP
.CS
button .b \-text "Foo"
entry .e \-textvariable foo ; set foo "Hello World!"
label .l \-text "This is a fairly long piece of text"

\fBgrid\fR .b .e .l \-sticky ew
\fBgrid columnconfigure\fR . "all" \-uniform allTheSame
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
pack(n), place(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
geometry manager, location, grid, cell, propagation, size, pack
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
|
|


|
|


|
|







|
|
|

|
|








457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
A toplevel window containing a text widget and two scrollbars:
.PP
.CS
# Make the widgets
toplevel .t
text .t.txt -wrap none -xscroll {.t.h set} -yscroll {.t.v set}
scrollbar .t.v -orient vertical   -command {.t.txt yview}
scrollbar .t.h -orient horizontal -command {.t.txt xview}

# Lay them out
\fBgrid\fR .t.txt .t.v -sticky nsew
\fBgrid\fR .t.h        -sticky nsew

# Tell the text widget to take all the extra room
\fBgrid rowconfigure\fR    .t .t.txt -weight 1
\fBgrid columnconfigure\fR .t .t.txt -weight 1
.CE
.PP
Three widgets of equal width, despite their different
.QW natural
widths:
.PP
.CS
button .b -text "Foo"
entry .e -textvariable foo ; set foo "Hello World!"
label .l -text "This is a fairly long piece of text"

\fBgrid\fR .b .e .l -sticky ew
\fBgrid columnconfigure\fR . "all" -uniform allTheSame
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
pack(n), place(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
geometry manager, location, grid, cell, propagation, size, pack
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/image.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

41
42

43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52

53
54

55
56

57
58

59
60

61
62

63

64
65

66
67

68
69

70
71
72

73
74

75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
.TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
image \- Create and manipulate images
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBimage\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBimage\fR command is used to create, delete, and query images.
It can take several different forms, depending on the
\fIoption\fR argument.  The legal forms are:

.TP
\fBimage create \fItype \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?

Creates a new image and a command with the same name and returns its name.
\fItype\fR specifies the type of the image, which must be one of
the types currently defined (e.g., \fBbitmap\fR).
\fIname\fR specifies the name for the image;  if it is omitted then
Tk picks a name of the form \fBimage\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is
an integer.
There may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs,
which provide configuration options for the new image.
The legal set of options is defined separately for each image
type;  see below for details on the options for built-in image types.
If an image already exists by the given name then it is replaced
with the new image and any instances of that image will redisplay
with the new contents.
It is important to note that the image command will silently overwrite any
procedure that may currently be defined by the given name, so choose the
name wisely.  It is recommended to use a separate namespace for image names
(e.g., \fB::img::logo\fR, \fB::img::large\fR).

.TP
\fBimage delete \fR?\fIname name\fR ...?

Deletes each of the named images and returns an empty string.
If there are instances of the images displayed in widgets,
the images will not actually be deleted until all of the instances
are released.
However, the association between the instances and the image
manager will be dropped.
Existing instances will retain their sizes but redisplay as
empty areas.
If a deleted image is recreated with another call to \fBimage create\fR,
the existing instances will use the new image.

.TP
\fBimage height \fIname\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the height of image \fIname\fR
in pixels.

.TP
\fBimage inuse \fIname\fR

Returns a boolean value indicating whether or not the image given by
\fIname\fR is in use by any widgets.

.TP
\fBimage names\fR

Returns a list containing the names of all existing images.

.TP
\fBimage type \fIname\fR

Returns the type of image \fIname\fR (the value of the \fItype\fR
argument to \fBimage create\fR when the image was created).

.TP
\fBimage types\fR

Returns a list whose elements are all of the valid image types
(i.e., all of the values that may be supplied for the \fItype\fR
argument to \fBimage create\fR).

.TP
\fBimage width \fIname\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the width of image \fIname\fR
in pixels.
.PP
Additional operations (e.g. writing the image to a file) may be
available as subcommands of the image instance command. See the manual
page for the particular image type for details.
.SH "BUILT-IN IMAGE TYPES"
.PP
The following image types are defined by Tk so they will be available
in any Tk application.
Individual applications or extensions may define additional types.
.TP
\fBbitmap\fR
Each pixel in the image displays a foreground color, a background
color, or nothing.
See the \fBbitmap\fR manual entry for more information.
.TP
\fBphoto\fR
Displays a variety of full-color images, using dithering to
approximate colors on displays with limited color capabilities.
See the \fBphoto\fR manual entry for more information.
.TP
\fBnsimage\fR
This type is only available in the Aqua platform.  It is a full-color
image which may be created from a named system image.  It has options
designed to facilitate the use of these images in buttons.  An
\fBnsimage\fR can be based on an a \fItemplate image\fR, which is an
anti-aliased 2-color image format that automatically interchanges
black and white in response to changes between the light and dark
modes on macOS.  An \fBnsimage\fR can also generate an alternate







|






>


>

















>


>










>


>


>


>


>


>

>


>


>


>



>


>











<
|



<
|



<
|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101

102
103
104
105

106
107
108
109

110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
.TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
image \- Create and manipulate images
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBimage\fI option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBimage\fR command is used to create, delete, and query images.
It can take several different forms, depending on the
\fIoption\fR argument.  The legal forms are:
.\" METHOD: create
.TP
\fBimage create \fItype \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Creates a new image and a command with the same name and returns its name.
\fItype\fR specifies the type of the image, which must be one of
the types currently defined (e.g., \fBbitmap\fR).
\fIname\fR specifies the name for the image;  if it is omitted then
Tk picks a name of the form \fBimage\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is
an integer.
There may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs,
which provide configuration options for the new image.
The legal set of options is defined separately for each image
type;  see below for details on the options for built-in image types.
If an image already exists by the given name then it is replaced
with the new image and any instances of that image will redisplay
with the new contents.
It is important to note that the image command will silently overwrite any
procedure that may currently be defined by the given name, so choose the
name wisely.  It is recommended to use a separate namespace for image names
(e.g., \fB::img::logo\fR, \fB::img::large\fR).
.\" METHOD: delete
.TP
\fBimage delete \fR?\fIname name\fR ...?
.
Deletes each of the named images and returns an empty string.
If there are instances of the images displayed in widgets,
the images will not actually be deleted until all of the instances
are released.
However, the association between the instances and the image
manager will be dropped.
Existing instances will retain their sizes but redisplay as
empty areas.
If a deleted image is recreated with another call to \fBimage create\fR,
the existing instances will use the new image.
.\" METHOD: height
.TP
\fBimage height \fIname\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the height of image \fIname\fR
in pixels.
.\" METHOD: inuse
.TP
\fBimage inuse \fIname\fR
.
Returns a boolean value indicating whether or not the image given by
\fIname\fR is in use by any widgets.
.\" METHOD: names
.TP
\fBimage names\fR
.
Returns a list containing the names of all existing images.
.\" METHOD: type
.TP
\fBimage type \fIname\fR
.
Returns the type of image \fIname\fR (the value of the \fItype\fR
argument to \fBimage create\fR when the image was created).
.\" METHOD: types
.TP
\fBimage types\fR
.
Returns a list whose elements are all of the valid image types
(i.e., all of the values that may be supplied for the \fItype\fR
argument to \fBimage create\fR).
.\" METHOD: width
.TP
\fBimage width \fIname\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the width of image \fIname\fR
in pixels.
.PP
Additional operations (e.g. writing the image to a file) may be
available as subcommands of the image instance command. See the manual
page for the particular image type for details.
.SH "BUILT-IN IMAGE TYPES"
.PP
The following image types are defined by Tk so they will be available
in any Tk application.
Individual applications or extensions may define additional types.

.IP \fBbitmap\fR
Each pixel in the image displays a foreground color, a background
color, or nothing.
See the \fBbitmap\fR manual entry for more information.

.IP \fBphoto\fR
Displays a variety of full-color images, using dithering to
approximate colors on displays with limited color capabilities.
See the \fBphoto\fR manual entry for more information.

.IP \fBnsimage\fR
This type is only available in the Aqua platform.  It is a full-color
image which may be created from a named system image.  It has options
designed to facilitate the use of these images in buttons.  An
\fBnsimage\fR can be based on an a \fItemplate image\fR, which is an
anti-aliased 2-color image format that automatically interchanges
black and white in response to changes between the light and dark
modes on macOS.  An \fBnsimage\fR can also generate an alternate

Changes to doc/label.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH label n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
label \- Create and manipulate 'label' non-interactive text or image widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlabel\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH label n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
label \- Create and manipulate 'label' non-interactive text or image widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlabel\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable
76
77
78
79
80
81
82

83
84

85
86
87
88

89
90

91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for label widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR

Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR
command.
.SH BINDINGS
.PP
When a new label is created, it has no default event bindings:
labels are not intended to be interactive.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
# Make the widgets
\fBlabel\fR .t \-text "This widget is at the top"    \-bg red
\fBlabel\fR .b \-text "This widget is at the bottom" \-bg green
\fBlabel\fR .l \-text "Left\enHand\enSide"
\fBlabel\fR .r \-text "Right\enHand\enSide"
text .mid
\&.mid insert end "This layout is like Java's BorderLayout"
# Lay them out
pack .t   \-side top    \-fill x
pack .b   \-side bottom \-fill x
pack .l   \-side left   \-fill y
pack .r   \-side right  \-fill y
pack .mid \-expand 1    \-fill both
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
labelframe(n), button(n), ttk::label(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
label, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







>

|
>




>


>




















|
|
|
|



|
|
|
|
|








76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for label widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR
command.
.SH BINDINGS
.PP
When a new label is created, it has no default event bindings:
labels are not intended to be interactive.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
# Make the widgets
\fBlabel\fR .t -text "This widget is at the top"    -bg red
\fBlabel\fR .b -text "This widget is at the bottom" -bg green
\fBlabel\fR .l -text "Left\enHand\enSide"
\fBlabel\fR .r -text "Right\enHand\enSide"
text .mid
\&.mid insert end "This layout is like Java's BorderLayout"
# Lay them out
pack .t   -side top    -fill x
pack .b   -side bottom -fill x
pack .l   -side left   -fill y
pack .r   -side right  -fill y
pack .mid -expand 1    -fill both
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
labelframe(n), button(n), ttk::label(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
label, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/labelframe.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH labelframe n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
labelframe \- Create and manipulate 'labelframe' labelled container widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlabelframe\fR \fIpathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-borderwidth	\-highlightbackground	\-pady
\-cursor	\-highlightcolor	\-relief
\-font	\-highlightthickness	\-takefocus
\-foreground	\-padx	\-text
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH labelframe n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
labelframe \- Create and manipulate 'labelframe' labelled container widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlabelframe\fI pathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-borderwidth	\-highlightbackground	\-pady
\-cursor	\-highlightcolor	\-relief
\-font	\-highlightthickness	\-takefocus
\-foreground	\-padx	\-text
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
97
98
99
100
101
102
103

104
105

106
107
108
109

110
111

112
113
114
115
116
117
118
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the labelframe widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for frame widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR

Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabelframe\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If







>

|
>




>


>







97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the labelframe widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for frame widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabelframe\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
This shows how to build part of a GUI for a hamburger vendor. The
\fBlabelframe\fR widgets are used to organize the available choices by
the kinds of things that the choices are being made over.
.PP
.CS
grid [\fBlabelframe\fR .burger \-text "Burger"] \e
     [\fBlabelframe\fR .bun    \-text "Bun"] \-sticky news
grid [\fBlabelframe\fR .cheese \-text "Cheese Option"] \e
     [\fBlabelframe\fR .pickle \-text "Pickle Option"] \-sticky news
foreach {type name val} {
    burger Beef    beef
    burger Lamb    lamb
    burger Vegetarian beans

    bun    Plain   white
    bun    Sesame  seeds







|
|
|
|







132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
This shows how to build part of a GUI for a hamburger vendor. The
\fBlabelframe\fR widgets are used to organize the available choices by
the kinds of things that the choices are being made over.
.PP
.CS
grid [\fBlabelframe\fR .burger -text "Burger"] \e
     [\fBlabelframe\fR .bun    -text "Bun"] -sticky news
grid [\fBlabelframe\fR .cheese -text "Cheese Option"] \e
     [\fBlabelframe\fR .pickle -text "Pickle Option"] -sticky news
foreach {type name val} {
    burger Beef    beef
    burger Lamb    lamb
    burger Vegetarian beans

    bun    Plain   white
    bun    Sesame  seeds
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
    cheese "Monterey Jack" jack

    pickle None    none
    pickle Gherkins gherkins
    pickle Onions  onion
    pickle Chili   chili
} {
    set w [radiobutton .$type.$val \-text $name \-anchor w \e
            \-variable $type \-value $val]
    pack $w \-side top \-fill x
}
set burger beef
set bun    white
set cheese none
set pickle none
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
frame(n), label(n), ttk::labelframe(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
labelframe, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
|
|













157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
    cheese "Monterey Jack" jack

    pickle None    none
    pickle Gherkins gherkins
    pickle Onions  onion
    pickle Chili   chili
} {
    set w [radiobutton .$type.$val -text $name -anchor w \e
            -variable $type -value $val]
    pack $w -side top -fill x
}
set burger beef
set bun    white
set cheese none
set pickle none
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
frame(n), label(n), ttk::labelframe(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
labelframe, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/listbox.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH listbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
listbox \- Create and manipulate 'listbox' item list widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlistbox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-background	\-borderwidth	\-cursor
\-disabledforeground	\-exportselection	\-font
\-foreground	\-highlightbackground	\-highlightcolor
\-highlightthickness	\-justify	\-relief
\-selectbackground	\-selectborderwidth	\-selectforeground
\-setgrid	\-takefocus	\-xscrollcommand







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH listbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
listbox \- Create and manipulate 'listbox' item list widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlistbox\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-background	\-borderwidth	\-cursor
\-disabledforeground	\-exportselection	\-font
\-foreground	\-highlightbackground	\-highlightcolor
\-highlightthickness	\-justify	\-relief
\-selectbackground	\-selectborderwidth	\-selectforeground
\-setgrid	\-takefocus	\-xscrollcommand
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146

147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155

156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170

171
172
173
174
175
176
177

178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192

193
194
195
196
197
198
199

200
201
202
203
204
205
206

207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217

218
219
220
221
222
223

224
225
226
227
228
229
230

231
232
233
234
235
236

237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251

252
253
254
255
256

257
258
259
260
261

262
263
264
265
266
267

268
269
270
271
272
273
274

275
276
277
278
279

280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
They also support scanning, as described below.
.SH "INDICES"
.PP
Many of the widget commands for listboxes take one or more indices
as arguments.
An index specifies a particular element of the listbox, in any of
the following ways:
.TP 12
\fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the element as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
to the first element in the listbox.
.TP 12
\fBactive\fR
.
Indicates the element that has the location cursor.  This element
will be displayed as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the listbox
has the keyboard focus, and it is specified with the \fBactivate\fR
widget command.
.TP 12
\fBanchor\fR
.
Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
\fBselection anchor\fR widget command.
.TP 12
\fBend\fR
.
Indicates the end of the listbox.
For most commands this refers to the last element in the listbox,
but for a few commands such as \fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR
it refers to the element just after the last one.
.TP 12
\fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR
Indicates the element that covers the point in the listbox window
specified by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates).  If no
element covers that point, then the closest element to that
point is used.
.LP
Indexes support the same simple interpretation as
for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index
arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR.
In the widget command descriptions below, arguments named \fIindex\fR,
\fIfirst\fR, and \fIlast\fR always contain text indices in one of
the above forms.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP
The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
command may be used to invoke various
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for listbox widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBactivate\fR \fIindex\fR
.
Sets the active element to the one indicated by \fIindex\fR.
If \fIindex\fR is outside the range of elements in the listbox
then the closest element is activated.
The active element is drawn as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the
widget has the input focus, and its index may be retrieved with the
index \fBactive\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox\fR \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of
the text in the element given by \fIindex\fR.
The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates
of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the text
(specified in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two
elements give the width and height of the area, in pixels.
If no part of the element given by \fIindex\fR is visible on the
screen,
or if \fIindex\fR refers to a non-existent element,
then the result is an empty string;  if the element is
partially visible, the result gives the full area of the element,
including any parts that are not visible.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcurselection\fR
.
Returns a list containing the numerical indices of
all of the elements in the listbox that are currently selected.
If there are no elements selected in the listbox then an empty
string is returned.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
.
Deletes one or more elements of the listbox.  \fIFirst\fR and \fIlast\fR
are indices specifying the first and last elements in the range
to delete.  If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to
\fIfirst\fR, i.e. a single element is deleted.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBget \fIfirst\fR ?\fIlast\fR?
.
If \fIlast\fR is omitted, returns the contents of the listbox
element indicated by \fIfirst\fR,
or an empty string if \fIfirst\fR refers to a non-existent element.
If \fIlast\fR is specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the listbox elements between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR,
inclusive.
Both \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may have any of the standard
forms for indices.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the integer index value that corresponds to \fIindex\fR.
If \fIindex\fR is \fBend\fR the return value is a count of the number
of elements in the listbox (not the index of the last element).

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR?
.
Inserts zero or more new elements in the list just before the
element given by \fIindex\fR.  If \fIindex\fR is specified as
\fBend\fR then the new elements are added to the end of the
list.  Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBitemcget \fIindex option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the item configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted
by the \fBitemconfigure\fR command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fIindex\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of an item in the listbox.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for the item (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string. The following options
are currently supported for items:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the
item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.

.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the
item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.

.TP
\fB\-selectbackground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIcolor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the
item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTk_GetColor\fR.

.TP
\fB\-selectforeground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIcolor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the
item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTk_GetColor\fR.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBnearest \fIy\fR
.
Given a y-coordinate within the listbox window, this command returns
the index of the (visible) listbox element nearest to that y-coordinate.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR
.
This command is used to implement scanning on listboxes.  It has
two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR
.







<
|
<


<
|
<




<
|
<


<
|
<




<
|




|


















>

|







>

|













>

|





>















>







>







>











>






>







>






>















>





>





>






>







>





>

|







91
92
93
94
95
96
97

98

99
100

101

102
103
104
105

106

107
108

109

110
111
112
113

114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
They also support scanning, as described below.
.SH "INDICES"
.PP
Many of the widget commands for listboxes take one or more indices
as arguments.
An index specifies a particular element of the listbox, in any of
the following ways:

.IP \fInumber\fR 12

Specifies the element as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
to the first element in the listbox.

.IP \fBactive\fR 12

Indicates the element that has the location cursor.  This element
will be displayed as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the listbox
has the keyboard focus, and it is specified with the \fBactivate\fR
widget command.

.IP \fBanchor\fR 12

Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
\fBselection anchor\fR widget command.

.IP \fBend\fR 12

Indicates the end of the listbox.
For most commands this refers to the last element in the listbox,
but for a few commands such as \fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR
it refers to the element just after the last one.

.IP \fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR 12
Indicates the element that covers the point in the listbox window
specified by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates).  If no
element covers that point, then the closest element to that
point is used.
.PP
Indexes support the same simple interpretation as
for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index
arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR.
In the widget command descriptions below, arguments named \fIindex\fR,
\fIfirst\fR, and \fIlast\fR always contain text indices in one of
the above forms.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP
The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
command may be used to invoke various
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for listbox widgets:
.\" METHOD: activate
.TP
\fIpathName \fBactivate\fI index\fR
.
Sets the active element to the one indicated by \fIindex\fR.
If \fIindex\fR is outside the range of elements in the listbox
then the closest element is activated.
The active element is drawn as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the
widget has the input focus, and its index may be retrieved with the
index \fBactive\fR.
.\" METHOD: bbox
.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox\fI index\fR
.
Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of
the text in the element given by \fIindex\fR.
The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates
of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the text
(specified in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two
elements give the width and height of the area, in pixels.
If no part of the element given by \fIindex\fR is visible on the
screen,
or if \fIindex\fR refers to a non-existent element,
then the result is an empty string;  if the element is
partially visible, the result gives the full area of the element,
including any parts that are not visible.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: curselection
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcurselection\fR
.
Returns a list containing the numerical indices of
all of the elements in the listbox that are currently selected.
If there are no elements selected in the listbox then an empty
string is returned.
.\" METHOD: delete
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
.
Deletes one or more elements of the listbox.  \fIFirst\fR and \fIlast\fR
are indices specifying the first and last elements in the range
to delete.  If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to
\fIfirst\fR, i.e. a single element is deleted.
.\" METHOD: get
.TP
\fIpathName \fBget \fIfirst\fR ?\fIlast\fR?
.
If \fIlast\fR is omitted, returns the contents of the listbox
element indicated by \fIfirst\fR,
or an empty string if \fIfirst\fR refers to a non-existent element.
If \fIlast\fR is specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the listbox elements between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR,
inclusive.
Both \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may have any of the standard
forms for indices.
.\" METHOD: index
.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the integer index value that corresponds to \fIindex\fR.
If \fIindex\fR is \fBend\fR the return value is a count of the number
of elements in the listbox (not the index of the last element).
.\" METHOD: insert
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR?
.
Inserts zero or more new elements in the list just before the
element given by \fIindex\fR.  If \fIindex\fR is specified as
\fBend\fR then the new elements are added to the end of the
list.  Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: itemcget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBitemcget \fIindex option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the item configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted
by the \fBitemconfigure\fR command.
.\" METHOD: itemconfigure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fIindex\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of an item in the listbox.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for the item (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string. The following options
are currently supported for items:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -background
.TP
\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the
item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
.\" OPTION: -foreground
.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the
item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
.\" OPTION: -selectbackground
.TP
\fB\-selectbackground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIcolor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the
item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTk_GetColor\fR.
.\" OPTION: -selectforeground
.TP
\fB\-selectforeground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIcolor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the
item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTk_GetColor\fR.
.RE
.\" METHOD: nearest
.TP
\fIpathName \fBnearest \fIy\fR
.
Given a y-coordinate within the listbox window, this command returns
the index of the (visible) listbox element nearest to that y-coordinate.
.\" METHOD: scan
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan\fI option args\fR
.
This command is used to implement scanning on listboxes.  It has
two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR
.
298
299
300
301
302
303
304

305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313

314
315
316
317
318
319
320
\fBscan mark\fR command for the widget.
It then adjusts the view by 10 times the
difference in coordinates.  This command is typically associated
with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
dragging the list at high speed through the window.  The return
value is an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBsee \fIindex\fR
.
Adjust the view in the listbox so that the element given by \fIindex\fR
is visible.
If the element is already visible then the command has no effect;
if the element is near one edge of the window then the listbox
scrolls to bring the element into view at the edge;  otherwise
the listbox scrolls to center the element.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR
.
This command is used to adjust the selection within a listbox.  It
has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP







>









>







306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
\fBscan mark\fR command for the widget.
It then adjusts the view by 10 times the
difference in coordinates.  This command is typically associated
with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
dragging the list at high speed through the window.  The return
value is an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: see
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsee \fIindex\fR
.
Adjust the view in the listbox so that the element given by \fIindex\fR
is visible.
If the element is already visible then the command has no effect;
if the element is near one edge of the window then the listbox
scrolls to bring the element into view at the edge;  otherwise
the listbox scrolls to center the element.
.\" METHOD: selection
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR
.
This command is used to adjust the selection within a listbox.  It
has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
342
343
344
345
346
347
348

349
350
351
352
353

354
355
356
357
358
359
360
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection set \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
.
Selects all of the elements in the range between
\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive, without affecting
the selection state of elements outside that range.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBsize\fR
.
Returns a decimal string indicating the total number of elements
in the listbox.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fR?\fIargs\fR
.
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
information in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS







>





>







352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection set \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
.
Selects all of the elements in the range between
\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive, without affecting
the selection state of elements outside that range.
.RE
.\" METHOD: size
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsize\fR
.
Returns a decimal string indicating the total number of elements
in the listbox.
.\" METHOD: xview
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fR?\fIargs\fR
.
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
information in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
395
396
397
398
399
400
401

402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410

411
412
413
414
415
416
417
If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
become visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character)
on the display.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
text in the widget's window.
It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview\fR

Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real fractions
between 0 and 1.
The first element gives the position of the listbox element at the
top of the window, relative to the listbox as a whole (0.5 means
it is halfway through the listbox, for example).
The second element gives the position of the listbox element just after
the last one in the window, relative to the listbox as a whole.







>









>







407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
become visible.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character)
on the display.
.RE
.\" METHOD: yview
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
text in the widget's window.
It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview\fR
.
Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real fractions
between 0 and 1.
The first element gives the position of the listbox element at the
top of the window, relative to the listbox as a whole (0.5 means
it is halfway through the listbox, for example).
The second element gives the position of the listbox element just after
the last one in the window, relative to the listbox as a whole.

Changes to doc/loadTk.n.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH "Safe Tk" n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
safe::loadTk \- Load Tk into a safe interpreter.
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBsafe::loadTk \fIchild\fR ?\fB\-use\fR \fIwindowId\fR? ?\fB\-display\fR \fIdisplayName\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Safe Tk is based on Safe Tcl, which provides a mechanism that allows
restricted and mediated access to auto-loading and packages for safe
interpreters.  Safe Tk adds the ability to configure the interpreter for safe
Tk operations and load Tk into safe interpreters.
.PP
The \fBsafe::loadTk\fR command initializes the required data structures in
the named safe interpreter and then loads Tk into it.  The interpreter must
have been created with \fBsafe::interpCreate\fR or have been initialized
with \fBsafe::interpInit\fR.  The command returns the name of the safe
interpreter.  If \fB\-use\fR is specified, the window identified by the
specified system dependent identifier \fIwindowId\fR is used to contain the
.QW .
window of the safe interpreter; it can be any valid id, eventually referencing
a window belonging to another application. As a convenience, if the window you
plan to use is a Tk Window of the application you can use the window name
(e.g.,
.QW \fB.x.y\fR )
instead of its window Id (e.g., from \fBwinfo id\fR \fB.x.y\fR).
When \fB\-use\fR is not specified, a new toplevel window is created for the
.QW .
window of the safe interpreter. On X11 if you want the embedded window to use
another display than the default one, specify it with \fB\-display\fR.  See
the \fBSECURITY ISSUES\fR section below for implementation details.
.SH "SECURITY ISSUES"
.PP
Please read the \fBsafe\fR manual page for Tcl to learn about the basic
security considerations for Safe Tcl.
.PP
\fBsafe::loadTk\fR adds the value of \fBtk_library\fR taken from the parent
interpreter to the virtual access path of the safe interpreter so that
auto-loading will work in the safe interpreter.
.PP
Tk initialization is now safe with respect to not trusting the child's state
for startup. \fBsafe::loadTk\fR registers the child's name so when the Tk
initialization (\fBTk_SafeInit\fR) is called and in turn calls the parent's
\fBsafe::InitTk\fR it will return the desired \fBargv\fR equivalent
(\fB\-use\fR \fIwindowId\fR, correct \fB\-display\fR, etc.)
.PP
When \fB\-use\fR is not used, the new toplevel created is specially decorated
so the user is always aware that the user interface presented comes from a
potentially unsafe code and can easily delete the corresponding interpreter.
.PP
On X11, conflicting \fB\-use\fR and \fB\-display\fR are likely to generate a
fatal X error.













|




















|


















|







1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH "Safe Tk" n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
safe::loadTk \- Load Tk into a safe interpreter.
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBsafe::loadTk \fIchild\fR ?\fB\-use\fI windowId\fR? ?\fB\-display\fI displayName\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Safe Tk is based on Safe Tcl, which provides a mechanism that allows
restricted and mediated access to auto-loading and packages for safe
interpreters.  Safe Tk adds the ability to configure the interpreter for safe
Tk operations and load Tk into safe interpreters.
.PP
The \fBsafe::loadTk\fR command initializes the required data structures in
the named safe interpreter and then loads Tk into it.  The interpreter must
have been created with \fBsafe::interpCreate\fR or have been initialized
with \fBsafe::interpInit\fR.  The command returns the name of the safe
interpreter.  If \fB\-use\fR is specified, the window identified by the
specified system dependent identifier \fIwindowId\fR is used to contain the
.QW .
window of the safe interpreter; it can be any valid id, eventually referencing
a window belonging to another application. As a convenience, if the window you
plan to use is a Tk Window of the application you can use the window name
(e.g.,
.QW \fB.x.y\fR )
instead of its window Id (e.g., from \fBwinfo id\fI .x.y\fR).
When \fB\-use\fR is not specified, a new toplevel window is created for the
.QW .
window of the safe interpreter. On X11 if you want the embedded window to use
another display than the default one, specify it with \fB\-display\fR.  See
the \fBSECURITY ISSUES\fR section below for implementation details.
.SH "SECURITY ISSUES"
.PP
Please read the \fBsafe\fR manual page for Tcl to learn about the basic
security considerations for Safe Tcl.
.PP
\fBsafe::loadTk\fR adds the value of \fBtk_library\fR taken from the parent
interpreter to the virtual access path of the safe interpreter so that
auto-loading will work in the safe interpreter.
.PP
Tk initialization is now safe with respect to not trusting the child's state
for startup. \fBsafe::loadTk\fR registers the child's name so when the Tk
initialization (\fBTk_SafeInit\fR) is called and in turn calls the parent's
\fBsafe::InitTk\fR it will return the desired \fBargv\fR equivalent
(\fB\-use\fI windowId\fR, correct \fB\-display\fR, etc.)
.PP
When \fB\-use\fR is not used, the new toplevel created is specially decorated
so the user is always aware that the user interface presented comes from a
potentially unsafe code and can easily delete the corresponding interpreter.
.PP
On X11, conflicting \fB\-use\fR and \fB\-display\fR are likely to generate a
fatal X error.

Changes to doc/menu.n.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
menu, tk_menuSetFocus \- Create and manipulate 'menu' widgets and menubars
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBmenu\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
\fBtk_menuSetFocus\fR \fIpathName\fR

.SO
\-activebackground	\-borderwidth	\-foreground
\-activeborderwidth	\-cursor	\-relief
\-activeforeground	\-disabledforeground	\-takefocus
\-background	\-font	\-activerelief
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"







|
|
>







9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
menu, tk_menuSetFocus \- Create and manipulate 'menu' widgets and menubars
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBmenu\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
\fBtk_menuSetFocus\fI pathName\fR
.fi
.SO
\-activebackground	\-borderwidth	\-foreground
\-activeborderwidth	\-cursor	\-relief
\-activeforeground	\-disabledforeground	\-takefocus
\-background	\-font	\-activerelief
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378

379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387

388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400

401
402
403
404
405
406
407

408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416

417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431

432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439

440
441
442
443
444
445
446

447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459

460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467

468
469
470
471
472

473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482

483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494

495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508

509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517

518
519
520
521
522
523
524

525
526
527
528
529
530
531

532
533
534
535
536

537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544

545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555

556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572

573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581

582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593

594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601

602
603
604
605
606

607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616

617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624

625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633

634
635
636
637
638
639
640

641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652

653
654
655
656
657
658

659
660
661
662
663

664
665
666
667
668
669

670
671
672
673
674
675

676
677
678
679
680

681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688

689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698

699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715

716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725

726
727
728
729
730
731
732

733
734
735
736
737
738
739
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.
.PP
Many of the widget commands for a menu take as one argument an
indicator of which entry of the menu to operate on. These
indicators are called \fIindex\fRes and may be specified in
any of the following forms:
.TP 12
\fBactive\fR
.
Indicates the entry that is currently active.  If no entry is
active then this form is equivalent to \fB{}\fR.  This form may
not be abbreviated.
.TP 12
\fBend\fR
.
Indicates the bottommost entry in the menu.  If there are no
entries in the menu then this form is equivalent to \fB{}\fR.
This form may not be abbreviated.
.TP 12
\fBlast\fR
.
Same as \fBend\fR.
.TP 12
\fB{}\fR
.
Indicates
.QW "no entry at all" ;
this is used most commonly with
the \fBactivate\fR option to deactivate all the entries in the
menu.  In most cases the specification of \fB{}\fR causes
nothing to happen in the widget command.
.TP 12
\fBnone\fR
.
Same as \fB{}\fR
This form is deprecated and may not be abbreviated.
.TP 12
\fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR
.
Indicates the entry that covers the point in the menu's window specified
by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates).
If no entry covers that point, then this form is equivalent to \fB{}\fR.
If only a single number is specified, it is treated as the y-coordinate.
.TP 12
\fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the entry numerically, where 0 corresponds
to the top-most entry of the menu, 1 to the entry below it, and
so on.
.TP 12
\fIid\fR
.
If the index does not satisfy one of the above forms then the menu is
searched for an entry with the specified id.
.TP 12
\fIpattern\fR
.
If all of the above methods for finding an entry fail, this
form is used.  \fIPattern\fR is pattern-matched against the label of
each entry in the menu, in order from the top down, until a
matching entry is found.  The rules of \fBstring match\fR
are used.
.PP
If the index could match more than one of the above forms, then
the form earlier in the above list takes precedence.
Indexes support the same simple interpretation as
for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index
arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR.
.PP
The following widget commands are possible for menu widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBactivate \fIindex\fR
.
Change the state of the entry indicated by \fIindex\fR to \fBactive\fR
and redisplay it using its active colors.
Any previously-active entry is deactivated.  If \fIindex\fR
is specified as \fB{}\fR or \fBnone\fR, or if the specified entry is
disabled, then the menu ends up with no active entry.
Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBadd \fItype \fR?\fIid\fR? ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
.
Add a new entry to the bottom of the menu.  The new entry's type
is given by \fItype\fR and must be one of \fBcascade\fR,
\fBcheckbutton\fR, \fBcommand\fR, \fBradiobutton\fR, or \fBseparator\fR,
or a unique abbreviation of one of the above.
If the \fIid\fR argument is specified, it is used as the entry identifier;
\fIid\fR must not already exist in the menu. Otherwise, a new unique
identifier is generated.
If additional arguments are present, they specify the options listed in the
\fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR section below.
The \fBadd\fR widget command returns the id of the new entry.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenu\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBclone \fInewPathname\fR ?\fIcloneType\fR?
.
Makes a clone of the current menu named \fInewPathName\fR. This clone
is a menu in its own right, but any changes to the clone are
propagated to the original menu and vice versa. \fIcloneType\fR can be
\fBnormal\fR, \fBmenubar\fR, or \fBtearoff\fR. Should not normally be
called outside of the Tk library. See the \fBCLONES\fR section for
more information.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenu\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2\fR?
.
Delete all of the menu entries between \fIindex1\fR and
\fIindex2\fR inclusive.
If \fIindex2\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fIindex1\fR.
Attempts to delete a tear-off menu entry are ignored (instead, you
should change the \fB\-tearoff\fR option to remove the tear-off entry).

.TP
\fIpathName \fBentrycget \fIindex option\fR
.
Returns the current value of a configuration option for
the entry given by \fIindex\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the names described in the
\fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR section below.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBentryconfigure \fIindex \fR?\fIoptions...\fR?
.
This command is similar to the \fBconfigure\fR command, except that
it applies to the options for an individual entry, whereas \fBconfigure\fR
applies to the options for the menu as a whole.
\fIOptions\fR may have any of the values described in the
\fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR
section below.  If \fIoptions\fR are specified, options are
modified as indicated in the command and the command returns an empty string.
If no \fIoptions\fR are specified, returns a list describing
the current options for entry \fIindex\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).

.TP
\fIpathName \fBid \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the id of the menu entry given by \fIindex\fR.
This is the identifier that was assigned to the entry when it was created
using the \fBadd\fR or \fBinsert\fR widget command.
Returns an empty string for the tear-off entry, or if \fIindex\fR is
equivalent to \fB{}\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR, or
\fB{}\fR if \fIindex\fR was specified as \fB{}\fR or \fBnone\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex type \fR?\fIid\fR? ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
.
Same as the \fBadd\fR widget command except that it inserts the new
entry just before the entry given by \fIindex\fR, instead of appending
to the end of the menu.  The \fItype\fR, \fIid\fR, \fIoption\fR, and
\fIvalue\fR arguments have the same interpretation as for the \fBadd\fR
widget command.  It is not possible to insert new menu entries before the
tear-off entry, if the menu has one.
The \fBinsert\fR widget command returns the id of the new entry.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke \fIindex\fR
.
Invoke the action of the menu entry.  See the sections on the
individual entries above for details on what happens.  If the
menu entry is disabled then nothing happens.  If the
entry has a command associated with it then the result of that
command is returned as the result of the \fBinvoke\fR widget
command.  Otherwise the result is an empty string.  Note:  invoking
a menu entry does not automatically unpost the menu;  the default
bindings normally take care of this before invoking the \fBinvoke\fR
widget command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBpost \fIx y\fR ?\fIindex\fR?
.
Arrange for the menu to be displayed on the screen at the root-window
coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.  If an index is specified
the menu will be located so that the entry with that index is
displayed at the point.  These coordinates are adjusted if necessary to
guarantee that the entire menu is visible on the screen.  This command
normally returns an empty string.  If the \fB\-postcommand\fR option
has been specified, then its value is executed as a Tcl script before
posting the menu and the result of that script is returned as the
result of the \fBpost\fR widget command.  If an error returns while
executing the command, then the error is returned without posting the
menu.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBpostcascade \fIindex\fR
.
Posts the submenu associated with the cascade entry given by
\fIindex\fR, and unposts any previously posted submenu.
If \fIindex\fR does not correspond to a cascade entry,
or if \fIpathName\fR is not posted,
the command has no effect except to unpost any currently posted
submenu.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBtype \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the type of the menu entry given by \fIindex\fR.
This is the \fItype\fR argument passed to the \fBadd\fR or \fBinsert\fR widget
command when the entry was created, such as \fBcommand\fR
or \fBseparator\fR, or \fBtearoff\fR for a tear-off entry.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBunpost\fR
.
Unmap the window so that it is no longer displayed.  If a
lower-level cascaded menu is posted, unpost that menu.  Returns an
empty string. This subcommand does not work on Windows and the
Macintosh, as those platforms have their own way of unposting menus.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBxposition \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate within the menu
window of the leftmost pixel in the entry specified by \fIindex\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fByposition \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate within the menu
window of the topmost pixel in the entry specified by \fIindex\fR.
.SH "MENU ENTRY OPTIONS"
The following options are allowed on menu entries. Most options are not
supported by all entry types.

.TP
\fB\-activebackground \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it
is active. This option is ignored on Aqua/MacOS.
If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
\fB\-activebackground\fR option for the overall menu is used.
If the \fBtk_strictMotif\fR variable has been set to request strict
Motif compliance, then this option is ignored and the \fB\-background\fR
option is used in its place.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-activeforeground \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it
is active.   This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS.
If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
\fB\-activeforeground\fR option for the overall menu is used.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.TP
\fB\-accelerator \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a string to display at the right side of the menu entry.
Normally describes an accelerator keystroke sequence that may be
used to invoke the same function as the menu entry. This is a display
option, it does not actually set the corresponding binding (which can
be achieved using the \fBbind\fR command). This option is not available
for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-background \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it
is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled).
This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS.
If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
\fB\-background\fR option for the overall menu is used.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-bitmap \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a bitmap to display in the menu instead of a textual
label, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
This option overrides the \fB\-label\fR option
(as controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option)
but may be reset
to an empty string to enable a textual label to be displayed.
If a \fB\-image\fR option has been specified, it overrides
\fB\-bitmap\fR.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-columnbreak \fIvalue\fR
.
When this option is zero, the entry appears below the previous entry. When
this option is one, the entry appears at the top of a new column in the
menu.
This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS, where menus are always a single
column.

.TP
\fB\-command \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a Tcl command to execute when the menu entry is invoked.
Not available for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-compound \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies whether the menu entry should display both an image and text,
and if so, where the image should be placed relative to the text.
Valid values for this option are \fBbottom\fR, \fBcenter\fR,
\fBleft\fR, \fBnone\fR, \fBright\fR and \fBtop\fR.  The default value
is \fBnone\fR, meaning that the button will display either an image or
text, depending on the values of the \fB\-image\fR and \fB\-bitmap\fR
options.

.TP
\fB\-font \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies the font to use when drawing the label or accelerator
string in this entry.
If this option is specified as an empty string (the default) then
the \fB\-font\fR option for the overall menu is used.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it
is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled).
This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS.
If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
\fB\-foreground\fR option for the overall menu is used.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-hidemargin \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies whether the standard margins should be drawn for this menu
entry. This is useful when creating palette with images in them, i.e.,
color palettes, pattern palettes, etc. 1 indicates that the margin for
the entry is hidden; 0 means that the margin is used.

.TP
\fB\-image \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies an image to display in the menu instead of a text string
or bitmap.
The image must have been created by some previous invocation of
\fBimage create\fR.
This option overrides the \fB\-label\fR and \fB\-bitmap\fR options
(as controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option)
but may be reset to an empty string to enable a textual or
bitmap label to be displayed.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-indicatoron \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
\fIValue\fR is a boolean that determines whether or not the
indicator should be displayed.

.TP
\fB\-label \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as an identifying label in the menu
entry.  Not available for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-menu \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for cascade entries.  Specifies the path name of
the submenu associated with this entry.
The submenu must be a child of the menu.

.TP
\fB\-offvalue \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton entries.  Specifies the value to
store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is
deselected.

.TP
\fB\-onvalue \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton entries.  Specifies the value to
store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected.

.TP
\fB\-selectcolor \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
Specifies the color to display in the indicator when the entry is
selected.
If the value is an empty string (the default) then the \fB\-selectcolor\fR
option for the menu determines the indicator color.

.TP
\fB\-selectimage \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
Specifies an image to display in the entry (in place of
the \fB\-image\fR option) when it is selected.
\fIValue\fR is the name of an image, which must have been created
by some previous invocation of \fBimage create\fR.
This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has
been specified.

.TP
\fB\-state \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies one of three states for the entry:  \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR,
or \fBdisabled\fR.  In normal state the entry is displayed using the
\fB\-foreground\fR option for the menu and the \fB\-background\fR
option from the entry or the menu.
The active state is typically used when the pointer is over the entry.
In active state the entry is displayed using the \fB\-activeforeground\fR
option for the menu along with the \fB\-activebackground\fR option from
the entry.  Disabled state means that the entry
should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
or invoke the entry.
In this state the entry is displayed according to the
\fB\-disabledforeground\fR option for the menu and the
\fB\-background\fR option from the entry.
This option is not available for separator entries.

.TP
\fB\-underline \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the entry.
This option is also queried by the default bindings and used to
implement keyboard traversal.
0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the entry,
1 to the next character, and so on.
If a bitmap or image is displayed in the entry then this option is ignored.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.

.TP
\fB\-value \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for radiobutton entries.  Specifies the value to
store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected.
If an empty string is specified, then the \fB\-label\fR option
for the entry as the value to store in the variable.

.TP
\fB\-variable \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.  Specifies
the name of a global variable to set when the entry is selected.
For checkbutton entries the variable is also set when the entry
is deselected.  For radiobutton entries, changing the variable







<
|
<



<
|
<



<
|
<

<
|
<






<
<
<
<
<
<
|
<




<
|
<



<
|
<


<
|
<













>






|


>













>







>









>















>








>







>













>








>




|
>










>












>














>









>







>







>





>








>











>







|









>









>












>








>





>










>








>









>







>












>






>





>






>






>





>








>










>

















>










>







>







309
310
311
312
313
314
315

316

317
318
319

320

321
322
323

324

325

326

327
328
329
330
331
332






333

334
335
336
337

338

339
340
341

342

343
344

345

346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.
.PP
Many of the widget commands for a menu take as one argument an
indicator of which entry of the menu to operate on. These
indicators are called \fIindex\fRes and may be specified in
any of the following forms:

.IP \fBactive\fR 12

Indicates the entry that is currently active.  If no entry is
active then this form is equivalent to \fB{}\fR.  This form may
not be abbreviated.

.IP \fBend\fR 12

Indicates the bottommost entry in the menu.  If there are no
entries in the menu then this form is equivalent to \fB{}\fR.
This form may not be abbreviated.

.IP \fBlast\fR 12

Same as \fBend\fR.

.IP \fB{}\fR 12

Indicates
.QW "no entry at all" ;
this is used most commonly with
the \fBactivate\fR option to deactivate all the entries in the
menu.  In most cases the specification of \fB{}\fR causes
nothing to happen in the widget command.






.IP \fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR 12

Indicates the entry that covers the point in the menu's window specified
by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates).
If no entry covers that point, then this form is equivalent to \fB{}\fR.
If only a single number is specified, it is treated as the y-coordinate.

.IP \fInumber\fR 12

Specifies the entry numerically, where 0 corresponds
to the top-most entry of the menu, 1 to the entry below it, and
so on.

.IP \fIid\fR 12

If the index does not satisfy one of the above forms then the menu is
searched for an entry with the specified id.

.IP \fIpattern\fR 12

If all of the above methods for finding an entry fail, this
form is used.  \fIPattern\fR is pattern-matched against the label of
each entry in the menu, in order from the top down, until a
matching entry is found.  The rules of \fBstring match\fR
are used.
.PP
If the index could match more than one of the above forms, then
the form earlier in the above list takes precedence.
Indexes support the same simple interpretation as
for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index
arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR.
.PP
The following widget commands are possible for menu widgets:
.\" METHOD: activate
.TP
\fIpathName \fBactivate \fIindex\fR
.
Change the state of the entry indicated by \fIindex\fR to \fBactive\fR
and redisplay it using its active colors.
Any previously-active entry is deactivated.  If \fIindex\fR
is specified as \fB{}\fR, or if the specified entry is
disabled, then the menu ends up with no active entry.
Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: add
.TP
\fIpathName \fBadd \fItype \fR?\fIid\fR? ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
.
Add a new entry to the bottom of the menu.  The new entry's type
is given by \fItype\fR and must be one of \fBcascade\fR,
\fBcheckbutton\fR, \fBcommand\fR, \fBradiobutton\fR, or \fBseparator\fR,
or a unique abbreviation of one of the above.
If the \fIid\fR argument is specified, it is used as the entry identifier;
\fIid\fR must not already exist in the menu. Otherwise, a new unique
identifier is generated.
If additional arguments are present, they specify the options listed in the
\fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR section below.
The \fBadd\fR widget command returns the id of the new entry.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenu\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: clone
.TP
\fIpathName \fBclone \fInewPathname\fR ?\fIcloneType\fR?
.
Makes a clone of the current menu named \fInewPathName\fR. This clone
is a menu in its own right, but any changes to the clone are
propagated to the original menu and vice versa. \fIcloneType\fR can be
\fBnormal\fR, \fBmenubar\fR, or \fBtearoff\fR. Should not normally be
called outside of the Tk library. See the \fBCLONES\fR section for
more information.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenu\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: delete
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2\fR?
.
Delete all of the menu entries between \fIindex1\fR and
\fIindex2\fR inclusive.
If \fIindex2\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fIindex1\fR.
Attempts to delete a tear-off menu entry are ignored (instead, you
should change the \fB\-tearoff\fR option to remove the tear-off entry).
.\" METHOD: entrycget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBentrycget \fIindex option\fR
.
Returns the current value of a configuration option for
the entry given by \fIindex\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the names described in the
\fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR section below.
.\" METHOD: entryconfigure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBentryconfigure \fIindex \fR?\fIoptions...\fR?
.
This command is similar to the \fBconfigure\fR command, except that
it applies to the options for an individual entry, whereas \fBconfigure\fR
applies to the options for the menu as a whole.
\fIOptions\fR may have any of the values described in the
\fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR
section below.  If \fIoptions\fR are specified, options are
modified as indicated in the command and the command returns an empty string.
If no \fIoptions\fR are specified, returns a list describing
the current options for entry \fIindex\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).
.\" METHOD: id
.TP
\fIpathName \fBid \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the id of the menu entry given by \fIindex\fR.
This is the identifier that was assigned to the entry when it was created
using the \fBadd\fR or \fBinsert\fR widget command.
Returns an empty string for the tear-off entry, or if \fIindex\fR is
equivalent to \fB{}\fR.
.\" METHOD: index
.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR, or
\fB{}\fR if \fIindex\fR was specified as \fB{}\fR.
.\" METHOD: insert
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex type \fR?\fIid\fR? ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
.
Same as the \fBadd\fR widget command except that it inserts the new
entry just before the entry given by \fIindex\fR, instead of appending
to the end of the menu.  The \fItype\fR, \fIid\fR, \fIoption\fR, and
\fIvalue\fR arguments have the same interpretation as for the \fBadd\fR
widget command.  It is not possible to insert new menu entries before the
tear-off entry, if the menu has one.
The \fBinsert\fR widget command returns the id of the new entry.
.\" METHOD: invoke
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke \fIindex\fR
.
Invoke the action of the menu entry.  See the sections on the
individual entries above for details on what happens.  If the
menu entry is disabled then nothing happens.  If the
entry has a command associated with it then the result of that
command is returned as the result of the \fBinvoke\fR widget
command.  Otherwise the result is an empty string.  Note:  invoking
a menu entry does not automatically unpost the menu;  the default
bindings normally take care of this before invoking the \fBinvoke\fR
widget command.
.\" METHOD: post
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpost \fIx y\fR ?\fIindex\fR?
.
Arrange for the menu to be displayed on the screen at the root-window
coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.  If an index is specified
the menu will be located so that the entry with that index is
displayed at the point.  These coordinates are adjusted if necessary to
guarantee that the entire menu is visible on the screen.  This command
normally returns an empty string.  If the \fB\-postcommand\fR option
has been specified, then its value is executed as a Tcl script before
posting the menu and the result of that script is returned as the
result of the \fBpost\fR widget command.  If an error returns while
executing the command, then the error is returned without posting the
menu.
.\" METHOD: postcascade
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpostcascade \fIindex\fR
.
Posts the submenu associated with the cascade entry given by
\fIindex\fR, and unposts any previously posted submenu.
If \fIindex\fR does not correspond to a cascade entry,
or if \fIpathName\fR is not posted,
the command has no effect except to unpost any currently posted
submenu.
.\" METHOD: type
.TP
\fIpathName \fBtype \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the type of the menu entry given by \fIindex\fR.
This is the \fItype\fR argument passed to the \fBadd\fR or \fBinsert\fR widget
command when the entry was created, such as \fBcommand\fR
or \fBseparator\fR, or \fBtearoff\fR for a tear-off entry.
.\" METHOD: unpost
.TP
\fIpathName \fBunpost\fR
.
Unmap the window so that it is no longer displayed.  If a
lower-level cascaded menu is posted, unpost that menu.  Returns an
empty string. This subcommand does not work on Windows and the
Macintosh, as those platforms have their own way of unposting menus.
.\" METHOD: xposition
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxposition \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate within the menu
window of the leftmost pixel in the entry specified by \fIindex\fR.
.\" METHOD: yposition
.TP
\fIpathName \fByposition \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate within the menu
window of the topmost pixel in the entry specified by \fIindex\fR.
.SH "MENU ENTRY OPTIONS"
The following options are allowed on menu entries. Most options are not
supported by all entry types.
.\" OPTION: -activebackground
.TP
\fB\-activebackground \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it
is active. This option is ignored on Aqua/MacOS.
If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
\fB\-activebackground\fR option for the overall menu is used.
If the \fBtk_strictMotif\fR variable has been set to request strict
Motif compliance, then this option is ignored and the \fB\-background\fR
option is used in its place.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -activeforeground
.TP
\fB\-activeforeground \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it
is active.   This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS.
If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
\fB\-activeforeground\fR option for the overall menu is used.
.\" OPTION: -accelerator
.TP
\fB\-accelerator \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a string to display at the right side of the menu entry.
Normally describes an accelerator keystroke sequence that may be
used to invoke the same function as the menu entry. This is a display
option, it does not actually set the corresponding binding (which can
be achieved using the \fBbind\fR command). This option is not available
for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -background
.TP
\fB\-background \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it
is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled).
This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS.
If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
\fB\-background\fR option for the overall menu is used.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -bitmap
.TP
\fB\-bitmap \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a bitmap to display in the menu instead of a textual
label, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
This option overrides the \fB\-label\fR option
(as controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option)
but may be reset
to an empty string to enable a textual label to be displayed.
If a \fB\-image\fR option has been specified, it overrides
\fB\-bitmap\fR.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -columnbreak
.TP
\fB\-columnbreak \fIvalue\fR
.
When this option is zero, the entry appears below the previous entry. When
this option is one, the entry appears at the top of a new column in the
menu.
This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS, where menus are always a single
column.
.\" OPTION: -command
.TP
\fB\-command \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a Tcl command to execute when the menu entry is invoked.
Not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -compound
.TP
\fB\-compound \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies whether the menu entry should display both an image and text,
and if so, where the image should be placed relative to the text.
Valid values for this option are \fBbottom\fR, \fBcenter\fR,
\fBleft\fR, \fBnone\fR, \fBright\fR and \fBtop\fR.  The default value
is \fBnone\fR, meaning that the button will display either an image or
text, depending on the values of the \fB\-image\fR and \fB\-bitmap\fR
options.
.\" OPTION: -font
.TP
\fB\-font \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies the font to use when drawing the label or accelerator
string in this entry.
If this option is specified as an empty string (the default) then
the \fB\-font\fR option for the overall menu is used.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -foreground
.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it
is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled).
This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS.
If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
\fB\-foreground\fR option for the overall menu is used.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -hidemargin
.TP
\fB\-hidemargin \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies whether the standard margins should be drawn for this menu
entry. This is useful when creating palette with images in them, i.e.,
color palettes, pattern palettes, etc. 1 indicates that the margin for
the entry is hidden; 0 means that the margin is used.
.\" OPTION: -image
.TP
\fB\-image \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies an image to display in the menu instead of a text string
or bitmap.
The image must have been created by some previous invocation of
\fBimage create\fR.
This option overrides the \fB\-label\fR and \fB\-bitmap\fR options
(as controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option)
but may be reset to an empty string to enable a textual or
bitmap label to be displayed.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -indicatoron
.TP
\fB\-indicatoron \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
\fIValue\fR is a boolean that determines whether or not the
indicator should be displayed.
.\" OPTION: -label
.TP
\fB\-label \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as an identifying label in the menu
entry.  Not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -menu
.TP
\fB\-menu \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for cascade entries.  Specifies the path name of
the submenu associated with this entry.
The submenu must be a child of the menu.
.\" OPTION: -offvalue
.TP
\fB\-offvalue \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton entries.  Specifies the value to
store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is
deselected.
.\" OPTION: -onvalue
.TP
\fB\-onvalue \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton entries.  Specifies the value to
store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected.
.\" OPTION: -selectcolor
.TP
\fB\-selectcolor \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
Specifies the color to display in the indicator when the entry is
selected.
If the value is an empty string (the default) then the \fB\-selectcolor\fR
option for the menu determines the indicator color.
.\" OPTION: -selectimage
.TP
\fB\-selectimage \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
Specifies an image to display in the entry (in place of
the \fB\-image\fR option) when it is selected.
\fIValue\fR is the name of an image, which must have been created
by some previous invocation of \fBimage create\fR.
This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has
been specified.
.\" OPTION: -state
.TP
\fB\-state \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies one of three states for the entry:  \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR,
or \fBdisabled\fR.  In normal state the entry is displayed using the
\fB\-foreground\fR option for the menu and the \fB\-background\fR
option from the entry or the menu.
The active state is typically used when the pointer is over the entry.
In active state the entry is displayed using the \fB\-activeforeground\fR
option for the menu along with the \fB\-activebackground\fR option from
the entry.  Disabled state means that the entry
should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
or invoke the entry.
In this state the entry is displayed according to the
\fB\-disabledforeground\fR option for the menu and the
\fB\-background\fR option from the entry.
This option is not available for separator entries.
.\" OPTION: -underline
.TP
\fB\-underline \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the entry.
This option is also queried by the default bindings and used to
implement keyboard traversal.
0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the entry,
1 to the next character, and so on.
If a bitmap or image is displayed in the entry then this option is ignored.
This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
.\" OPTION: -value
.TP
\fB\-value \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for radiobutton entries.  Specifies the value to
store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected.
If an empty string is specified, then the \fB\-label\fR option
for the entry as the value to store in the variable.
.\" OPTION: -variable
.TP
\fB\-variable \fIvalue\fR
.
Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.  Specifies
the name of a global variable to set when the entry is selected.
For checkbutton entries the variable is also set when the entry
is deselected.  For radiobutton entries, changing the variable

Changes to doc/menubutton.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH menubutton n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
menubutton \- Create and manipulate 'menubutton' pop-up menu indicator widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBmenubutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH menubutton n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
menubutton \- Create and manipulate 'menubutton' pop-up menu indicator widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBmenubutton\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable
118
119
120
121
122
123
124

125
126
127
128
129
130
131

132
133
134
135
136
137
138
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for menubutton widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenubutton\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified







>







>







118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for menubutton widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenubutton\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified

Changes to doc/message.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH message n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
message \- Create and manipulate 'message' non-interactive text widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBmessage\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-anchor	\-background	\-borderwidth
\-cursor	\-font	\-foreground
\-highlightbackground	\-highlightcolor	\-highlightthickness
\-padx	\-pady	\-relief
\-takefocus	\-text	\-textvariable
.SE







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH message n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
message \- Create and manipulate 'message' non-interactive text widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBmessage\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-anchor	\-background	\-borderwidth
\-cursor	\-font	\-foreground
\-highlightbackground	\-highlightcolor	\-highlightthickness
\-padx	\-pady	\-relief
\-takefocus	\-text	\-textvariable
.SE
107
108
109
110
111
112
113

114
115
116
117
118
119
120

121
122
123
124
125
126
127
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for message widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmessage\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified







>







>







107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for message widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmessage\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified

Changes to doc/messageBox.n.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27

28
29
30
31

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41

42
43
44
45
46
47
48

49
50
51
52
53
54
55

56
57
58
59
60

61
62
63
64
65

66
67
68
69
70

71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
application-specified message, an icon and a set of buttons.  Each of
the buttons in the message window is identified by a unique symbolic
name (see the \fB\-type\fR options).  After the message window is
popped up, \fBtk_messageBox\fR waits for the user to select one of the
buttons. Then it returns the symbolic name of the selected button.
.PP
The following option-value pairs are supported:

.TP
\fB\-command\fR \fIstring\fR

Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the
dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR followed by a space
and the name of the button clicked by the user to close the dialog. This
is only available on Mac OS X.

.TP
\fB\-default\fR \fIname\fR
.
\fIName\fR gives the symbolic name of the default button for
this message window (
.QW ok ,
.QW cancel ,
and so on). See \fB\-type\fR
for a list of the symbolic names.  If this option is not specified,
the first button in the dialog will be made the default.

.TP
\fB\-detail\fR \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies an auxiliary message to the main message given by the
\fB\-message\fR option. The message detail will be presented beneath the main
message and, where supported by the OS, in a less emphasized font than the
main message.

.TP
\fB\-icon\fR \fIiconImage\fR
.
Specifies an icon to display. \fIIconImage\fR must be one of the
following: \fBerror\fR, \fBinfo\fR, \fBquestion\fR or
\fBwarning\fR. If this option is not specified, then the info icon will be
displayed.

.TP
\fB\-message\fR \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies the message to display in this message box. The
default value is an empty string.

.TP
\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR
.
Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the message box. The message
box is displayed on top of its parent window.

.TP
\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box. The
default value is an empty string.

.TP
\fB\-type\fR \fIpredefinedType\fR
.
Arranges for a predefined set of buttons to be displayed. The
following values are possible for \fIpredefinedType\fR:
.RS
.TP 18
\fBabortretryignore\fR
.
Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fBabort\fR,
\fBretry\fR and \fBignore\fR.
.TP 18
\fBok\fR
.
Displays one button whose symbolic name is \fBok\fR.
.TP 18
\fBokcancel\fR
.
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBok\fR and \fBcancel\fR.
.TP 18
\fBretrycancel\fR
.
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBretry\fR and \fBcancel\fR.
.TP 18
\fByesno\fR
.
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR and \fBno\fR.
.TP 18
\fByesnocancel\fR
.
Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR, \fBno\fR
and \fBcancel\fR.
.RE
.PP
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
set answer [\fBtk_messageBox\fR \-message "Really quit?" \e
        \-icon question \-type yesno \e
        \-detail "Select \e"Yes\e" to make the application exit"]
switch \-\- $answer {
    yes exit
    no {\fBtk_messageBox\fR \-message "I know you like this application!" \e
            \-type ok}
}
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
message box
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







>

|
>




>

|








>

|





>

|





>

|



>

|



>

|



>

|




<
|
<


<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<







|
|
|
|

|
|







19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85

86

87
88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
application-specified message, an icon and a set of buttons.  Each of
the buttons in the message window is identified by a unique symbolic
name (see the \fB\-type\fR options).  After the message window is
popped up, \fBtk_messageBox\fR waits for the user to select one of the
buttons. Then it returns the symbolic name of the selected button.
.PP
The following option-value pairs are supported:
.\" OPTION: -command
.TP
\fB\-command\fI string\fR
.
Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the
dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR followed by a space
and the name of the button clicked by the user to close the dialog. This
is only available on Mac OS X.
.\" OPTION: -default
.TP
\fB\-default\fI name\fR
.
\fIName\fR gives the symbolic name of the default button for
this message window (
.QW ok ,
.QW cancel ,
and so on). See \fB\-type\fR
for a list of the symbolic names.  If this option is not specified,
the first button in the dialog will be made the default.
.\" OPTION: -detail
.TP
\fB\-detail\fI string\fR
.
Specifies an auxiliary message to the main message given by the
\fB\-message\fR option. The message detail will be presented beneath the main
message and, where supported by the OS, in a less emphasized font than the
main message.
.\" OPTION: -icon
.TP
\fB\-icon\fI iconImage\fR
.
Specifies an icon to display. \fIIconImage\fR must be one of the
following: \fBerror\fR, \fBinfo\fR, \fBquestion\fR or
\fBwarning\fR. If this option is not specified, then the info icon will be
displayed.
.\" OPTION: -message
.TP
\fB\-message\fI string\fR
.
Specifies the message to display in this message box. The
default value is an empty string.
.\" OPTION: -parent
.TP
\fB\-parent\fI window\fR
.
Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the message box. The message
box is displayed on top of its parent window.
.\" OPTION: -title
.TP
\fB\-title\fI titleString\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box. The
default value is an empty string.
.\" OPTION: -type
.TP
\fB\-type\fI predefinedType\fR
.
Arranges for a predefined set of buttons to be displayed. The
following values are possible for \fIpredefinedType\fR:
.RS

.IP \fBabortretryignore\fR 18

Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fBabort\fR,
\fBretry\fR and \fBignore\fR.

.IP \fBok\fR 18

Displays one button whose symbolic name is \fBok\fR.

.IP \fBokcancel\fR 18

Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBok\fR and \fBcancel\fR.

.IP \fBretrycancel\fR 18

Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBretry\fR and \fBcancel\fR.

.IP \fByesno\fR 18

Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR and \fBno\fR.

.IP \fByesnocancel\fR 18

Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR, \fBno\fR
and \fBcancel\fR.
.RE
.PP
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
set answer [\fBtk_messageBox\fR -message "Really quit?" \e
        -icon question -type yesno \e
        -detail "Select \e"Yes\e" to make the application exit"]
switch -- $answer {
    yes exit
    no {\fBtk_messageBox\fR -message "I know you like this application!" \e
            -type ok}
}
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
message box
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/nsimage.n.

22
23
24
25
26
27
28

29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64


65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72

73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80

81
82
83
84
85
86
87

88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97

98
99
100
101
102
103
104

105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113

114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
\fBimage create nsimage \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.PP
creates a new nsimage and a command with the same name and returns its
name.
.SH OPTIONS
.PP
Valid \fIoptions\fR are:

.TP
\fB\-source\fR
.PP
The value of the \fB\-source\fR option is a string describing an
NSimage.  There are several ways to interpret this string, and the
interpretation is determined by the value of the \fB\-as\fR option.
This option is required.
.PP

.TP
\fB\-as\fR
.PP
There are four possible values for the \fB-as\fR option which specify
how the source string should be interpreted.  The allowed values and
their meanings are:
.IP
\fBname\fR
.IP
The source should be interpreted as the name of a named NSImage
provided by the system.  This is the default if the -as option is not specified.
.IP

\fBfile\fR
.IP
The source should be interpreted as a path to an image
file in one of the formats understood by the NSImage class.
.IP
\fBpath\fR
.IP
The source should be interpreted as a path to an arbitrary
file. The type of the file will be examined and the resulting image
will be the system icon for files of that type.
.IP
\fBfiletype\fR
.IP
The source is interpreted as a string identifying a
particular file type.  It may be a filename extension, an Apple Uniform Type
Identifier or a 4-character OSType value as used in the HFS filesystem.


.TP
\fB\-width\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIwidth\fR option is an integer specifying the width
in pixels of the nsimage.  If the width is not specified it will be
computed from the height so as to preserve the aspect ration.  If
neither width nor height are specified then the width and height of
the underlying NSImage will be used.

.TP
\fB\-height\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIheight\fR option is an integer specifying the
height in pixels of the nsimage. If the height is not specified it
will be computed from the height so as to preserve the aspect ration.
If neither width nor height are specified then the width and height of
the underlying NSImage will be used.

.TP
\fB\-radius\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIradius\fR option is an integer.  If non-zero the
image will be clipped to a rounded rectangle with the same width and
height as the image, but with circular arcs of the specified radius
cutting off the corners of the rectangle.

.TP
\fB\-ring\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIring\fR option is an integer.  If non-zero then it
specifies the thickness of a focus ring which will be drawn around the
image using the control accent color specified in the System
Preferences.  The image is resized to reduce its width and height by
twice the thickness of the ring.  Note that this may create a small
amount of distortion.  The aspect ration of a non-square image will
change slightly.

.TP
\fB\-alpha\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIalpha\fR option should be a floating point number
between 0.0 and 1.0.  This alpha value will be applied to each pixel
of the nsimage, producing a partially transparent image.  The default value
is 1,0, which makes the image opaque.

.TP
\fB\-pressed\fR
.PP
The \fIpressed\fR option takes a boolean value.  If the value is true
or 1 then the image will be algorithmically modified to become darker
in light mode or lighter in dark mode.  The default is false.  For an
image button, the primary image should use the value false while the
pressed image should be the same image but with the \fIpressed\fR
option set to true.

.TP
\fB\-template\fR
.PP
The \fItemplate\fR option takes a boolean value.  If the value is true
or 1 then the image will be marked as being a template image.  This
means that the system will algorithmically convert the image to a
light colored image when in dark mode.  For the algorithm to work
correctly the image must consist only of black pixels with alpha
values.







>

|






>

|

|


|
|
<

|
<
>
|
<


<
|
<



<
|
<



>
>

|






>

|






>

|





>

|








>

|




|
>

|







>

|







22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

47
48

49
50

51
52

53

54
55
56

57

58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
\fBimage create nsimage \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.PP
creates a new nsimage and a command with the same name and returns its
name.
.SH OPTIONS
.PP
Valid \fIoptions\fR are:
.\" OPTION: -source
.TP
\fB\-source\fI string\fR
.PP
The value of the \fB\-source\fR option is a string describing an
NSimage.  There are several ways to interpret this string, and the
interpretation is determined by the value of the \fB\-as\fR option.
This option is required.
.PP
.\" OPTION: -as
.TP
\fB\-as\fI type\fR
.PP
There are four possible values for the \fB\-as\fR option which specify
how the source string should be interpreted.  The allowed values and
their meanings are:
.RS
.IP \fBname\fR

The source should be interpreted as the name of a named NSImage
provided by the system.

This is the default if the \fB\-as\fR option is not specified.
.IP \fBfile\fR

The source should be interpreted as a path to an image
file in one of the formats understood by the NSImage class.

.IP \fBpath\fR

The source should be interpreted as a path to an arbitrary
file. The type of the file will be examined and the resulting image
will be the system icon for files of that type.

.IP \fBfiletype\fR

The source is interpreted as a string identifying a
particular file type.  It may be a filename extension, an Apple Uniform Type
Identifier or a 4-character OSType value as used in the HFS filesystem.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -width
.TP
\fB\-width\fI pixels\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIwidth\fR option is an integer specifying the width
in pixels of the nsimage.  If the width is not specified it will be
computed from the height so as to preserve the aspect ration.  If
neither width nor height are specified then the width and height of
the underlying NSImage will be used.
.\" OPTION: -height
.TP
\fB\-height\fI pixels\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIheight\fR option is an integer specifying the
height in pixels of the nsimage. If the height is not specified it
will be computed from the height so as to preserve the aspect ration.
If neither width nor height are specified then the width and height of
the underlying NSImage will be used.
.\" OPTION: -radius
.TP
\fB\-radius\fI pixels\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIradius\fR option is an integer.  If non-zero the
image will be clipped to a rounded rectangle with the same width and
height as the image, but with circular arcs of the specified radius
cutting off the corners of the rectangle.
.\" OPTION: -ring
.TP
\fB\-ring\fI pixels\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIring\fR option is an integer.  If non-zero then it
specifies the thickness of a focus ring which will be drawn around the
image using the control accent color specified in the System
Preferences.  The image is resized to reduce its width and height by
twice the thickness of the ring.  Note that this may create a small
amount of distortion.  The aspect ration of a non-square image will
change slightly.
.\" OPTION: -alpha
.TP
\fB\-alpha\fI float\fR
.PP
The value of the \fIalpha\fR option should be a floating point number
between 0.0 and 1.0.  This alpha value will be applied to each pixel
of the nsimage, producing a partially transparent image.  The default value
is 1.0, which makes the image opaque.
.\" OPTION: -pressed
.TP
\fB\-pressed\fI boolean\fR
.PP
The \fIpressed\fR option takes a boolean value.  If the value is true
or 1 then the image will be algorithmically modified to become darker
in light mode or lighter in dark mode.  The default is false.  For an
image button, the primary image should use the value false while the
pressed image should be the same image but with the \fIpressed\fR
option set to true.
.\" OPTION: -template
.TP
\fB\-template\fI boolean\fR
.PP
The \fItemplate\fR option takes a boolean value.  If the value is true
or 1 then the image will be marked as being a template image.  This
means that the system will algorithmically convert the image to a
light colored image when in dark mode.  For the algorithm to work
correctly the image must consist only of black pixels with alpha
values.

Changes to doc/option.n.

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

38
39
40
41
42
43
44

45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54

55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
\fBoption get \fIwindow name class\fR
\fBoption readfile \fIfileName \fR?\fIpriority\fR?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBoption\fR command allows you to add entries to the Tk option
database or to retrieve options from the database.  The \fBadd\fR

form of the command adds a new option to the database.
\fIPattern\fR contains
the option being specified, and consists of names and/or classes
separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format (see
\fBPATTERN FORMAT\fR).  \fIValue\fR
contains a text string to associate with \fIpattern\fR;  this is the
value that will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR or by
invocations of the \fBoption get\fR command.  If \fIpriority\fR
is specified, it indicates the priority level for this option (see
below for legal values);  it defaults to \fBinteractive\fR.
This command always returns an empty string.
.PP

The \fBoption clear\fR command clears the option database.  Default
options (from the
\fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or the \fB.Xdefaults\fR
file) will be reloaded automatically the next time an
option is added to the database or removed from it.  This command
always returns an empty string.
.PP

The \fBoption get\fR command returns the value of the option
specified for \fIwindow\fR
under \fIname\fR and \fIclass\fR.  If several entries in the option
database match \fIwindow\fR, \fIname\fR, and \fIclass\fR, then
the command returns whichever was created with highest
\fIpriority\fR level.  If there are several matching
entries at the same priority level, then it returns whichever entry
was most recently entered into the option database.  If there are
no matching entries, then the empty string is returned.
.PP

The \fBreadfile\fR form of the command reads \fIfileName\fR,
which should have the standard format for an
X resource database such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, and adds all the
options specified in that file to the option database.  If \fIpriority\fR
is specified, it indicates the priority level at which to enter the
options;  \fIpriority\fR defaults to \fBinteractive\fR.
.PP
The file is read through a channel which is in "utf-8" encoding,
invalid byte sequences are automatically converted to valid ones.
This means that encodings like ISO 8859-1 or cp1252 with high
probability will work as well, but this cannot be guaranteed.
This cannot be changed, setting the [encoding system] has no effect.
.PP
The \fIpriority\fR arguments to the \fBoption\fR command are
normally specified symbolically using one of the following values:
.TP
\fBwidgetDefault\fR
Level 20.  Used for default values hard-coded into widgets.
.TP
\fBstartupFile\fR
Level 40.  Used for options specified in application-specific
startup files.
.TP
\fBuserDefault\fR
Level 60.  Used for options specified in user-specific defaults
files, such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, resource databases loaded into
the X server, or user-specific startup files.
.TP
\fBinteractive\fR
Level 80.  Used for options specified interactively after the application
starts running.  If \fIpriority\fR is not specified, it defaults to
this level.
.PP
Any of the above keywords may be abbreviated.  In addition, priorities
may be specified numerically using integers between 0 and 100,
inclusive.  The numeric form is probably a bad idea except for new priority







|
>
|











>







>










>















<
|

<
|


<
|



<
|







18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73

74
75

76
77
78

79
80
81
82

83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
\fBoption get \fIwindow name class\fR
\fBoption readfile \fIfileName \fR?\fIpriority\fR?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBoption\fR command allows you to add entries to the Tk option
database or to retrieve options from the database.
.\" METHOD: add
The \fBadd\fR form of the command adds a new option to the database.
\fIPattern\fR contains
the option being specified, and consists of names and/or classes
separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format (see
\fBPATTERN FORMAT\fR).  \fIValue\fR
contains a text string to associate with \fIpattern\fR;  this is the
value that will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR or by
invocations of the \fBoption get\fR command.  If \fIpriority\fR
is specified, it indicates the priority level for this option (see
below for legal values);  it defaults to \fBinteractive\fR.
This command always returns an empty string.
.PP
.\" METHOD: clear
The \fBoption clear\fR command clears the option database.  Default
options (from the
\fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or the \fB.Xdefaults\fR
file) will be reloaded automatically the next time an
option is added to the database or removed from it.  This command
always returns an empty string.
.PP
.\" METHOD: get
The \fBoption get\fR command returns the value of the option
specified for \fIwindow\fR
under \fIname\fR and \fIclass\fR.  If several entries in the option
database match \fIwindow\fR, \fIname\fR, and \fIclass\fR, then
the command returns whichever was created with highest
\fIpriority\fR level.  If there are several matching
entries at the same priority level, then it returns whichever entry
was most recently entered into the option database.  If there are
no matching entries, then the empty string is returned.
.PP
.\" METHOD: readfile
The \fBreadfile\fR form of the command reads \fIfileName\fR,
which should have the standard format for an
X resource database such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, and adds all the
options specified in that file to the option database.  If \fIpriority\fR
is specified, it indicates the priority level at which to enter the
options;  \fIpriority\fR defaults to \fBinteractive\fR.
.PP
The file is read through a channel which is in "utf-8" encoding,
invalid byte sequences are automatically converted to valid ones.
This means that encodings like ISO 8859-1 or cp1252 with high
probability will work as well, but this cannot be guaranteed.
This cannot be changed, setting the [encoding system] has no effect.
.PP
The \fIpriority\fR arguments to the \fBoption\fR command are
normally specified symbolically using one of the following values:

.IP \fBwidgetDefault\fR3
Level 20.  Used for default values hard-coded into widgets.

.IP \fBstartupFile\fR
Level 40.  Used for options specified in application-specific
startup files.

.IP \fBuserDefault\fR
Level 60.  Used for options specified in user-specific defaults
files, such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, resource databases loaded into
the X server, or user-specific startup files.

.IP \fBinteractive\fR
Level 80.  Used for options specified interactively after the application
starts running.  If \fIpriority\fR is not specified, it defaults to
this level.
.PP
Any of the above keywords may be abbreviated.  In addition, priorities
may be specified numerically using integers between 0 and 100,
inclusive.  The numeric form is probably a bad idea except for new priority

Changes to doc/options.n.

56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more
than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons).
.OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background
Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements.
See above for definition of active elements.
.OP \-activerelief activeRelief Relief
Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the active item of the widget.
See the \fB-relief\fR option for details.
.OP \-anchor anchor Anchor
Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap)
is to be displayed in the widget.
Must be one of the values \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR,
\fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR.
For example, \fBnw\fR means display the information such that its
top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget.







|







56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more
than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons).
.OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background
Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements.
See above for definition of active elements.
.OP \-activerelief activeRelief Relief
Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the active item of the widget.
See the \fB\-relief\fR option for details.
.OP \-anchor anchor Anchor
Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap)
is to be displayed in the widget.
Must be one of the values \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR,
\fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR.
For example, \fBnw\fR means display the information such that its
top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget.
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
If the value has any other form, then the traversal scripts take
the value, append the name of the window to it (with a separator space),
and evaluate the resulting string as a Tcl script.
The script must return \fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, or an empty string:  a
\fB0\fR or \fB1\fR value specifies whether the window will receive
the input focus, and an empty string results in the default decision
described above.
Note: this interpretation of the option is defined entirely by
the Tcl scripts that implement traversal:  the widget implementations
ignore the option entirely, so you can change its meaning if you
redefine the keyboard traversal scripts.
.OP \-text text Text
Specifies a string to be displayed inside the widget.  The way in which
the string is displayed depends on the particular widget and may be
determined by other options, such as \fB\-anchor\fR or \fB\-justify\fR.







|







288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
If the value has any other form, then the traversal scripts take
the value, append the name of the window to it (with a separator space),
and evaluate the resulting string as a Tcl script.
The script must return \fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, or an empty string:  a
\fB0\fR or \fB1\fR value specifies whether the window will receive
the input focus, and an empty string results in the default decision
described above.
Note that this interpretation of the option is defined entirely by
the Tcl scripts that implement traversal:  the widget implementations
ignore the option entirely, so you can change its meaning if you
redefine the keyboard traversal scripts.
.OP \-text text Text
Specifies a string to be displayed inside the widget.  The way in which
the string is displayed depends on the particular widget and may be
determined by other options, such as \fB\-anchor\fR or \fB\-justify\fR.

Changes to doc/pack.n.

19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27
28
29

30
31

32
33
34
35
36
37
38

39
40

41
42
43

44
45

46
47
48
49

50
51

52
53
54

55
56

57
58
59
60
61

62
63

64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83

84
85

86
87

88
89

90
91
92
93

94
95

96
97
98

99
100

101
102
103
104

105
106

107
108
109
110

111
112

113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126

127








128

129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139

140
141

142
143
144
145
146
147

148
149

150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
The \fBpack\fR command is used to communicate with the packer,
a geometry manager that arranges the children of a parent by
packing them in order around the edges of the parent.
The \fBpack\fR command can have any of several forms, depending
on the \fIoption\fR argument:
.TP
\fBpack \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?

If the first argument to \fBpack\fR is a window name (any value
starting with
.QW . ),
then the command is processed in the same way as \fBpack configure\fR.

.TP
\fBpack configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?

The arguments consist of the names of one or more content windows
followed by pairs of arguments that specify how
to manage the content.
See \fBTHE PACKER ALGORITHM\fR below for details on how the options
are used by the packer.
The following options are supported:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-after \fIother\fR

\fIOther\fR must the name of another window.
Use its container as the container for the content, and insert
the content just after \fIother\fR in the packing order.

.TP
\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR

\fIAnchor\fR must be a valid anchor position such as \fBn\fR
or \fBsw\fR; it specifies where to position each content in its
parcel.
Defaults to \fBcenter\fR.

.TP
\fB\-before \fIother\fR

\fIOther\fR must the name of another window.
Use its container as the container for the content, and insert
the content just before \fIother\fR in the packing order.

.TP
\fB\-expand \fIboolean\fR

Specifies whether the content should be expanded to consume
extra space in their container.
\fIBoolean\fR may have any proper boolean value, such as \fB1\fR
or \fBno\fR.
Defaults to 0.

.TP
\fB\-fill \fIstyle\fR

If a content's parcel is larger than its requested dimensions, this
option may be used to stretch the content.
\fIStyle\fR must have one of the following values:
.RS
.TP
\fBnone\fR
Give the content its requested dimensions plus any internal padding
requested with \fB\-ipadx\fR or \fB\-ipady\fR.  This is the default.
.TP
\fBx\fR
Stretch the content horizontally to fill the entire width of its
parcel (except leave external padding as specified by \fB\-padx\fR).
.TP
\fBy\fR
Stretch the content vertically to fill the entire height of its
parcel (except leave external padding as specified by \fB\-pady\fR).
.TP
\fBboth\fR
Stretch the content both horizontally and vertically.
.RE

.TP
\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR

Insert the window at the end of the packing order for the container
window given by \fIcontainer\fR.

.TP
\fB\-ipadx \fIamount\fR

\fIAmount\fR specifies how much horizontal internal padding to
leave on each side of the content.
\fIAmount\fR must be a valid screen distance, such as \fB2\fR or \fB.5c\fR.
It defaults to 0.

.TP
\fB\-ipady \fIamount\fR

\fIAmount\fR specifies how much vertical internal padding to
leave on each side of the content.
\fIAmount\fR  defaults to 0.

.TP
\fB\-padx \fIamount\fR

\fIAmount\fR specifies how much horizontal external padding to
leave on each side of the content.  \fIAmount\fR may be a list
of two values to specify padding for left and right separately.
\fIAmount\fR defaults to 0.

.TP
\fB\-pady \fIamount\fR

\fIAmount\fR specifies how much vertical external padding to
leave on each side of the content.  \fIAmount\fR may be a list
of two values to specify padding for top and bottom separately.
\fIAmount\fR defaults to 0.

.TP
\fB\-side \fIside\fR

Specifies which side of the container the content will be packed against.
Must be \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, \fBtop\fR, or \fBbottom\fR.
Defaults to \fBtop\fR.
.LP
If no \fB\-in\fR, \fB\-after\fR or \fB\-before\fR option is specified
then each of the content will be inserted at the end of the packing list
for its parent unless it is already managed by the packer (in which
case it will be left where it is).
If one of these options is specified then all the content will be
inserted at the specified point.
If any of the content are already managed by the geometry manager
then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather
than receiving default values.
.RE

.TP








\fBpack forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR?

Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from the packing order for its
container and unmaps their windows.
The content will no longer be managed by the packer.
.RS
.PP
.VS "TIP 518"
If the last content window of the container becomes unmanaged, this will also send
the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the container; the container
may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change.
.VE "TIP 518"
.RE

.TP
\fBpack info \fIwindow\fR

Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
the window given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that
might be specified to \fBpack configure\fR.
The first two elements of the list are
.QW "\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR"
where \fIcontainer\fR is the window's container.

.TP
\fBpack propagate \fIcontainer\fR ?\fIboolean\fR?

If \fIboolean\fR has a true boolean value such as \fB1\fR or \fBon\fR
then propagation is enabled for \fIcontainer\fR, which must be a window
name (see \fBGEOMETRY PROPAGATION\fR below).
If \fIboolean\fR has a false boolean value then propagation is
disabled for \fIcontainer\fR.
In either of these cases an empty string is returned.
If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or
\fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled
for \fIcontainer\fR.
Propagation is enabled by default.
.TP
\fBpack content \fIwindow\fR
Returns a list of all of the content windows in the packing order for \fIwindow\fR.
The order of the content windows in the list is the same as their order in
the packing order.
If \fIwindow\fR has no content then an empty string is returned.
.TP
\fBpack slaves \fIwindow\fR
.
Synonym for \fBpack content \fIwindow\fR.
.SH "THE PACKER ALGORITHM"
.PP
For each container the packer maintains an ordered list of content







>




>


>







>


>



>


>




>


>



>


>





>


>




<
|


<
|


<
|


<
|


>


>


>


>




>


>



>


>




>


>




>


>














>

>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>

>






|
|
|


>


>






>


>










|
<
<
<
<
<







19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80

81
82
83

84
85
86

87
88
89

90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195





196
197
198
199
200
201
202
The \fBpack\fR command is used to communicate with the packer,
a geometry manager that arranges the children of a parent by
packing them in order around the edges of the parent.
The \fBpack\fR command can have any of several forms, depending
on the \fIoption\fR argument:
.TP
\fBpack \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
If the first argument to \fBpack\fR is a window name (any value
starting with
.QW . ),
then the command is processed in the same way as \fBpack configure\fR.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fBpack configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
The arguments consist of the names of one or more content windows
followed by pairs of arguments that specify how
to manage the content.
See \fBTHE PACKER ALGORITHM\fR below for details on how the options
are used by the packer.
The following options are supported:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -after
.TP
\fB\-after \fIother\fR
.
\fIOther\fR must the name of another window.
Use its container as the container for the content, and insert
the content just after \fIother\fR in the packing order.
.\" OPTION: -anchor
.TP
\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
.
\fIAnchor\fR must be a valid anchor position such as \fBn\fR
or \fBsw\fR; it specifies where to position each content in its
parcel.
Defaults to \fBcenter\fR.
.\" OPTION: -before
.TP
\fB\-before \fIother\fR
.
\fIOther\fR must the name of another window.
Use its container as the container for the content, and insert
the content just before \fIother\fR in the packing order.
.\" OPTION: -expand
.TP
\fB\-expand \fIboolean\fR
.
Specifies whether the content should be expanded to consume
extra space in their container.
\fIBoolean\fR may have any proper boolean value, such as \fB1\fR
or \fBno\fR.
Defaults to 0.
.\" OPTION: -fill
.TP
\fB\-fill \fIstyle\fR
.
If a content's parcel is larger than its requested dimensions, this
option may be used to stretch the content.
\fIStyle\fR must have one of the following values:
.RS

.IP \fBnone\fR
Give the content its requested dimensions plus any internal padding
requested with \fB\-ipadx\fR or \fB\-ipady\fR.  This is the default.

.IP \fBx\fR
Stretch the content horizontally to fill the entire width of its
parcel (except leave external padding as specified by \fB\-padx\fR).

.IP \fBy\fR
Stretch the content vertically to fill the entire height of its
parcel (except leave external padding as specified by \fB\-pady\fR).

.IP \fBboth\fR
Stretch the content both horizontally and vertically.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -in
.TP
\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR
.
Insert the window at the end of the packing order for the container
window given by \fIcontainer\fR.
.\" OPTION: -ipadx
.TP
\fB\-ipadx \fIamount\fR
.
\fIAmount\fR specifies how much horizontal internal padding to
leave on each side of the content.
\fIAmount\fR must be a valid screen distance, such as \fB2\fR or \fB.5c\fR.
It defaults to 0.
.\" OPTION: -ipady
.TP
\fB\-ipady \fIamount\fR
.
\fIAmount\fR specifies how much vertical internal padding to
leave on each side of the content.
\fIAmount\fR  defaults to 0.
.\" OPTION: -padx
.TP
\fB\-padx \fIamount\fR
.
\fIAmount\fR specifies how much horizontal external padding to
leave on each side of the content.  \fIAmount\fR may be a list
of two values to specify padding for left and right separately.
\fIAmount\fR defaults to 0.
.\" OPTION: -pady
.TP
\fB\-pady \fIamount\fR
.
\fIAmount\fR specifies how much vertical external padding to
leave on each side of the content.  \fIAmount\fR may be a list
of two values to specify padding for top and bottom separately.
\fIAmount\fR defaults to 0.
.\" OPTION: -side
.TP
\fB\-side \fIside\fR
.
Specifies which side of the container the content will be packed against.
Must be \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, \fBtop\fR, or \fBbottom\fR.
Defaults to \fBtop\fR.
.LP
If no \fB\-in\fR, \fB\-after\fR or \fB\-before\fR option is specified
then each of the content will be inserted at the end of the packing list
for its parent unless it is already managed by the packer (in which
case it will be left where it is).
If one of these options is specified then all the content will be
inserted at the specified point.
If any of the content are already managed by the geometry manager
then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather
than receiving default values.
.RE
.\" METHOD: content
.TP
\fBpack content \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a list of all of the content windows in the packing order for
\fIwindow\fR. The order of the content windows in the list is the same as
their order in the packing order.
If \fIwindow\fR has no content then an empty string is returned.
.\" METHOD: forget
.TP
\fBpack forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR?
.
Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from the packing order for its
container and unmaps their windows.
The content will no longer be managed by the packer.
.RS
.PP
.VS "TIP 518"
If the last content window of the container becomes unmanaged, this will
also send the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the container; the
container may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change.
.VE "TIP 518"
.RE
.\" METHOD: info
.TP
\fBpack info \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
the window given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that
might be specified to \fBpack configure\fR.
The first two elements of the list are
.QW "\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR"
where \fIcontainer\fR is the window's container.
.\" METHOD: propagate
.TP
\fBpack propagate \fIcontainer\fR ?\fIboolean\fR?
.
If \fIboolean\fR has a true boolean value such as \fB1\fR or \fBon\fR
then propagation is enabled for \fIcontainer\fR, which must be a window
name (see \fBGEOMETRY PROPAGATION\fR below).
If \fIboolean\fR has a false boolean value then propagation is
disabled for \fIcontainer\fR.
In either of these cases an empty string is returned.
If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or
\fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled
for \fIcontainer\fR.
Propagation is enabled by default.
.\" METHOD: slaves





.TP
\fBpack slaves \fIwindow\fR
.
Synonym for \fBpack content \fIwindow\fR.
.SH "THE PACKER ALGORITHM"
.PP
For each container the packer maintains an ordered list of content
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
will be highest in the stacking order.
Or, you can use the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR commands to change
the stacking order of either the container or the content.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
# Make the widgets
label .t \-text "This widget is at the top"    \-bg red
label .b \-text "This widget is at the bottom" \-bg green
label .l \-text "Left\enHand\enSide"
label .r \-text "Right\enHand\enSide"
text .mid
\&.mid insert end "This layout is like Java's BorderLayout"
# Lay them out
\fBpack\fR .t   \-side top    \-fill x
\fBpack\fR .b   \-side bottom \-fill x
\fBpack\fR .l   \-side left   \-fill y
\fBpack\fR .r   \-side right  \-fill y
\fBpack\fR .mid \-expand 1    \-fill both
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
grid(n), place(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
geometry manager, location, packer, parcel, propagation, size
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
|
|
|



|
|
|
|
|








299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
will be highest in the stacking order.
Or, you can use the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR commands to change
the stacking order of either the container or the content.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
# Make the widgets
label .t -text "This widget is at the top"    -bg red
label .b -text "This widget is at the bottom" -bg green
label .l -text "Left\enHand\enSide"
label .r -text "Right\enHand\enSide"
text .mid
\&.mid insert end "This layout is like Java's BorderLayout"
# Lay them out
\fBpack\fR .t   -side top    -fill x
\fBpack\fR .b   -side bottom -fill x
\fBpack\fR .l   -side left   -fill y
\fBpack\fR .r   -side right  -fill y
\fBpack\fR .mid -expand 1    -fill both
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
grid(n), place(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
geometry manager, location, packer, parcel, propagation, size
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/palette.n.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH tk_setPalette n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_setPalette, tk_bisque \- Modify the Tk color palette
.SH SYNOPSIS

\fBtk_setPalette \fIbackground\fR
.sp
\fBtk_setPalette \fIname value \fR?\fIname value ...\fR?
.sp
\fBtk_bisque\fR

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk_setPalette\fR procedure changes the color scheme for Tk.
It does this by modifying the colors of existing widgets and by changing
the option database so that future widgets will use the new color scheme.
If \fBtk_setPalette\fR is invoked with a single argument, the













>

<

<

>







1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH tk_setPalette n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_setPalette, tk_bisque \- Modify the Tk color palette
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBtk_setPalette \fIbackground\fR

\fBtk_setPalette \fIname value \fR?\fIname value ...\fR?

\fBtk_bisque\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk_setPalette\fR procedure changes the color scheme for Tk.
It does this by modifying the colors of existing widgets and by changing
the option database so that future widgets will use the new color scheme.
If \fBtk_setPalette\fR is invoked with a single argument, the

Changes to doc/panedwindow.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH panedwindow n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
panedwindow \- Create and manipulate 'panedwindow' split container widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBpanedwindow\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-background	\-borderwidth	\-cursor
\-orient	\-relief
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-handlepad handlePad HandlePad
When sash handles are drawn, specifies the distance from the top or







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH panedwindow n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
panedwindow \- Create and manipulate 'panedwindow' split container widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBpanedwindow\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-background	\-borderwidth	\-cursor
\-orient	\-relief
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-handlepad handlePad HandlePad
When sash handles are drawn, specifies the distance from the top or
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
or if resizing should be deferred until the sash is placed (false).
In the latter case, a
.QW ghost
version of the sash is displayed during the resizing to show where the
panes will be resized to when releasing the mouse button. This
.QW ghost
version of the sash is the proxy. It's rendering can be configured
using the \fB-proxybackground\fR, \fB-proxyborderwidth\fR and
\fB-proxyrelief\fR options.
.OP \-proxybackground proxyBackground ProxyBackground
Background color to use when drawing the proxy. If an empty string, the
value of the \fB-background\fR option will be used.
.OP \-proxyborderwidth proxyBorderWidth ProxyBorderWidth
Specifies the borderwidth of the proxy. May be any value accepted by
\fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
.OP \-proxyrelief proxyRelief ProxyRelief
Relief to use when drawing the proxy. May be any of the standard Tk
relief values. If an empty string, the value of the \fB-sashrelief\fR
option will be used.
.OP \-sashcursor sashCursor SashCursor
Mouse cursor to use when over a sash.  If null,
\fBsb_h_double_arrow\fR will be used for horizontal panedwindows, and
\fBsb_v_double_arrow\fR will be used for vertical panedwindows.
.OP \-sashpad sashPad SashPad
Specifies the amount of padding to leave of each side of a sash.  May







|
|


|





|







34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
or if resizing should be deferred until the sash is placed (false).
In the latter case, a
.QW ghost
version of the sash is displayed during the resizing to show where the
panes will be resized to when releasing the mouse button. This
.QW ghost
version of the sash is the proxy. It's rendering can be configured
using the \fB\-proxybackground\fR, \fB\-proxyborderwidth\fR and
\fB\-proxyrelief\fR options.
.OP \-proxybackground proxyBackground ProxyBackground
Background color to use when drawing the proxy. If an empty string, the
value of the \fB\-background\fR option will be used.
.OP \-proxyborderwidth proxyBorderWidth ProxyBorderWidth
Specifies the borderwidth of the proxy. May be any value accepted by
\fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
.OP \-proxyrelief proxyRelief ProxyRelief
Relief to use when drawing the proxy. May be any of the standard Tk
relief values. If an empty string, the value of the \fB\-sashrelief\fR
option will be used.
.OP \-sashcursor sashCursor SashCursor
Mouse cursor to use when over a sash.  If null,
\fBsb_h_double_arrow\fR will be used for horizontal panedwindows, and
\fBsb_v_double_arrow\fR will be used for vertical panedwindows.
.OP \-sashpad sashPad SashPad
Specifies the amount of padding to leave of each side of a sash.  May
94
95
96
97
98
99
100

101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108

109
110
111
112
113
114

115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128

129
130
131
132
133

134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142

143
144
145
146
147

148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162

163
164
165
166
167

168
169
170
171
172

173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181

182
183
184
185
186
187

188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195

196
197
198
199
200
201

202
203
204
205
206
207

208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221

222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256

257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266

267
268
269
270

271
272
273
274
275
276
277
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the panedwindow widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for panedwindow widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBadd \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Add one or more windows to the panedwindow, each in a separate pane.
The arguments consist of the names of one or more windows
followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the windows.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBconfigure\fR subcommand.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBpanedwindow\fR command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.  If no
\fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the
available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have
any of the values accepted by the \fBpanedwindow\fR command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBforget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR?
.
Remove the pane containing \fIwindow\fR from the panedwindow.  All
geometry management options for \fIwindow\fR will be forgotten.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
.
Identify the panedwindow component underneath the point given by
\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, in window coordinates.  If the point is over a
sash or a sash handle, the result is a two element list containing the
index of the sash or handle, and a word indicating whether it is over
a sash or a handle, such as {0 sash} or {2 handle}.  If the point is
over any other part of the panedwindow, the result is an empty list.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBpanecget \fIwindow option\fR
.
Query a management option for \fIwindow\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any
value allowed by the \fBpaneconfigure\fR subcommand.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBpaneconfigure \fIwindow \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the management options for \fIwindow\fR.  If no
\fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the
available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.  The following options
are supported:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-after \fIwindow\fR
.
Insert the window after the window specified.  \fIwindow\fR should be the
name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR.

.TP
\fB\-before \fIwindow\fR
.
Insert the window before the window specified.  \fIwindow\fR should be
the name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR.

.TP
\fB\-height \fIsize\fR
.
Specify a height for the window.  The height will be the outer
dimension of the window including its border, if any.  If \fIsize\fR
is an empty string, or if \fB\-height\fR is not specified, then the
height requested internally by the window will be used initially; the
height may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the
panedwindow.  \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.

.TP
\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
.
Controls the visibility of a pane.  When the \fIboolean\fR is true
(according to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR) the pane will not be visible, but
it will still be maintained in the list of panes.

.TP
\fB\-minsize \fIn\fR
.
Specifies that the size of the window cannot be made less than
\fIn\fR.  This constraint only affects the size of the widget in the
paned dimension \(em the x dimension for horizontal panedwindows, the y
dimension for vertical panedwindows.  May be any value accepted by
\fBTk_GetPixels\fR.

.TP
\fB\-padx \fIn\fR
.
Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
leave on each side of the window in the X-direction.  The value may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.

.TP
\fB\-pady \fIn\fR
.
Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
leave on each side of the window in the Y-direction.  The value may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.

.TP
\fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR
.
If a window's pane is larger than the requested dimensions of the
window, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the window
within its pane.  \fIStyle\fR  is a string that contains zero or more
of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR.  The string
can optionally contains spaces or commas, but they are ignored.  Each
letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the window
will
.QW stick
to.  If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR)
are specified, the window will be stretched to fill the entire height
(or width) of its cavity.

.TP
\fB\-stretch \fIwhen\fR
.
Controls how extra space is allocated to each of the panes.
\fIWhen\fR is one of \fBalways\fR, \fBfirst\fR, \fBlast\fR,
\fBmiddle\fR, and \fBnever\fR.
The panedwindow will calculate the required size of all its panes. Any
remaining (or deficit) space will be distributed to those panes marked
for stretching. The space will be distributed based on each panes
current ratio of the whole.  The \fIwhen\fR values have the following
definition:
.RS
.TP
\fBalways\fR
.
This pane will always stretch.
.TP
\fBfirst\fR
.
Only if this pane is the first pane (left-most or top-most) will it
stretch.
.TP
\fBlast\fR
.
Only if this pane is the last pane (right-most or bottom-most) will it
stretch.  This is the default value.
.TP
\fBmiddle\fR
.
Only if this pane is not the first or last pane will it stretch.
.TP
\fBnever\fR
.
This pane will never stretch.
.RE

.TP
\fB\-width \fIsize\fR
.
Specify a width for the window.  The width will be the outer
dimension of the window including its border, if any.  If \fIsize\fR
is an empty string, or if \fB\-width\fR is not specified, then the
width requested internally by the window will be used initially; the
width may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the
panedwindow.  \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBpanes\fR
.
Returns an ordered list of the widgets managed by \fIpathName\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBproxy \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the position of the sash
proxy, used for rubberband-style pane resizing. It can take any of
the following forms:
.RS







>








>






>














>





>









>





>















>





>





>









>






>








>






>






>














>












<
|
<

<
|
<


<
|
<


<
|
<

<
|
<


>










>




>







94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249

250

251

252

253
254

255

256
257

258

259

260

261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the panedwindow widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for panedwindow widgets:
.\" METHOD: add
.TP
\fIpathName \fBadd \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Add one or more windows to the panedwindow, each in a separate pane.
The arguments consist of the names of one or more windows
followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the windows.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBconfigure\fR subcommand.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBpanedwindow\fR command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.  If no
\fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the
available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have
any of the values accepted by the \fBpanedwindow\fR command.
.\" METHOD: forget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBforget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR?
.
Remove the pane containing \fIwindow\fR from the panedwindow.  All
geometry management options for \fIwindow\fR will be forgotten.
.\" METHOD: identify
.TP
\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
.
Identify the panedwindow component underneath the point given by
\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, in window coordinates.  If the point is over a
sash or a sash handle, the result is a two element list containing the
index of the sash or handle, and a word indicating whether it is over
a sash or a handle, such as {0 sash} or {2 handle}.  If the point is
over any other part of the panedwindow, the result is an empty list.
.\" METHOD: panecget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpanecget \fIwindow option\fR
.
Query a management option for \fIwindow\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any
value allowed by the \fBpaneconfigure\fR subcommand.
.\" METHOD: paneconfigure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpaneconfigure \fIwindow \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the management options for \fIwindow\fR.  If no
\fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the
available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.  The following options
are supported:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -after
.TP
\fB\-after \fIwindow\fR
.
Insert the window after the window specified.  \fIwindow\fR should be the
name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR.
.\" OPTION: -before
.TP
\fB\-before \fIwindow\fR
.
Insert the window before the window specified.  \fIwindow\fR should be
the name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR.
.\" OPTION: -height
.TP
\fB\-height \fIsize\fR
.
Specify a height for the window.  The height will be the outer
dimension of the window including its border, if any.  If \fIsize\fR
is an empty string, or if \fB\-height\fR is not specified, then the
height requested internally by the window will be used initially; the
height may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the
panedwindow.  \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
.\" OPTION: -hide
.TP
\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
.
Controls the visibility of a pane.  When the \fIboolean\fR is true
(according to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR) the pane will not be visible, but
it will still be maintained in the list of panes.
.\" OPTION: -minsize
.TP
\fB\-minsize \fIn\fR
.
Specifies that the size of the window cannot be made less than
\fIn\fR.  This constraint only affects the size of the widget in the
paned dimension \(em the x dimension for horizontal panedwindows, the y
dimension for vertical panedwindows.  May be any value accepted by
\fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
.\" OPTION: -padx
.TP
\fB\-padx \fIn\fR
.
Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
leave on each side of the window in the X-direction.  The value may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
.\" OPTION: -pady
.TP
\fB\-pady \fIn\fR
.
Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
leave on each side of the window in the Y-direction.  The value may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
.\" OPTION: -sticky
.TP
\fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR
.
If a window's pane is larger than the requested dimensions of the
window, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the window
within its pane.  \fIStyle\fR  is a string that contains zero or more
of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR.  The string
can optionally contains spaces or commas, but they are ignored.  Each
letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the window
will
.QW stick
to.  If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR)
are specified, the window will be stretched to fill the entire height
(or width) of its cavity.
.\" OPTION: -stretch
.TP
\fB\-stretch \fIwhen\fR
.
Controls how extra space is allocated to each of the panes.
\fIWhen\fR is one of \fBalways\fR, \fBfirst\fR, \fBlast\fR,
\fBmiddle\fR, and \fBnever\fR.
The panedwindow will calculate the required size of all its panes. Any
remaining (or deficit) space will be distributed to those panes marked
for stretching. The space will be distributed based on each panes
current ratio of the whole.  The \fIwhen\fR values have the following
definition:
.RS

.IP \fBalways\fR

This pane will always stretch.

.IP \fBfirst\fR

Only if this pane is the first pane (left-most or top-most) will it
stretch.

.IP \fBlast\fR

Only if this pane is the last pane (right-most or bottom-most) will it
stretch.  This is the default value.

.IP \fBmiddle\fR

Only if this pane is not the first or last pane will it stretch.

.IP \fBnever\fR

This pane will never stretch.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -width
.TP
\fB\-width \fIsize\fR
.
Specify a width for the window.  The width will be the outer
dimension of the window including its border, if any.  If \fIsize\fR
is an empty string, or if \fB\-width\fR is not specified, then the
width requested internally by the window will be used initially; the
width may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the
panedwindow.  \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
.RE
.\" METHOD: panes
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpanes\fR
.
Returns an ordered list of the widgets managed by \fIpathName\fR.
.\" METHOD: proxy
.TP
\fIpathName \fBproxy \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the position of the sash
proxy, used for rubberband-style pane resizing. It can take any of
the following forms:
.RS
285
286
287
288
289
290
291

292
293

294
295
296
297
298
299
300
.
Remove the proxy from the display.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBproxy place \fIx y\fR
.
Place the proxy at the given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBsash \fR?\fIargs\fR?

This command is used to query and change the position of sashes in the
panedwindow.  It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsash coord \fIindex\fR
.
Return the current x and y coordinate pair for the sash given by







>


>







294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
.
Remove the proxy from the display.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBproxy place \fIx y\fR
.
Place the proxy at the given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates.
.RE
.\" METHOD: sash
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsash \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the position of sashes in the
panedwindow.  It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsash coord \fIindex\fR
.
Return the current x and y coordinate pair for the sash given by

Changes to doc/photo.n.

39
40
41
42
43
44
45




46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56

57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70

71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78

79
80
81
82
83
84

85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104

105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113

114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125

126
127
128
129
130
131
132
internally in full color (32 bits per pixel), and is displayed using
dithering if necessary.  Image data for a photo image can be obtained
from a file or a string, or it can be supplied from C code through a
procedural interface.  At present, only
.VS 8.6
PNG,
.VE 8.6




GIF and PPM/PGM formats are supported, but an interface exists to
allow additional image file formats to be added easily.  A photo image
is (semi)transparent if the image data it was obtained from had
transparency informaton. In regions where no image data has been
supplied, it is fully transparent. Transparency may also be modified
with the \fBtransparency set\fR subcommand.
.SH "CREATING PHOTOS"
.PP
Like all images, photos are created using the \fBimage create\fR
command.
Photos support the following \fIoptions\fR:

.TP
\fB\-data \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies the contents of the image as a string.
.VS 8.7
The string should
contain data in the default list-of-lists form,
.VE 8.7
binary data or, for some formats, base64-encoded data (this is
currently guaranteed to be supported for PNG and GIF images). The
format of the string must be one of those for which there is an image
file format handler that will accept string data.  If both the
\fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified, the \fB\-file\fR
option takes precedence.

.TP
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?}
.
Specifies the name of the file format for the data specified with the
\fB\-data\fR or \fB\-file\fR option and optional arguments passed to
the format handler. Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.

.TP
\fB\-file \fIname\fR
.
\fIname\fR gives the name of a file that is to be read to supply data
for the photo image.  The file format must be one of those for which
there is an image file format handler that can read data.

.TP
\fB\-gamma \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies that the colors allocated for displaying this image in a
window should be corrected for a non-linear display with the specified
gamma exponent value.  (The intensity produced by most
CRT displays is a power function of the input value, to a good
approximation; gamma is the exponent and is typically around 2).
The value specified must be greater than zero.  The default
value is one (no correction).  In general, values greater than one
will make the image lighter, and values less than one will make it
darker.

.TP
\fB\-height \fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the height of the image, in pixels.  This option is useful
primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents
of the image piece by piece.  A value of zero (the default) allows the
image to expand or shrink vertically to fit the data stored in it.
.VS 8.7

.TP
\fB\-metadata \fImetadata\fR
.
Set the metadata dictionary of the image.
Additional keys may be set within the metadata dictionary of the image,
if image data is processed due to a \fB\-file\fR or \fB\-data\fR options
and the driver outputs any metadata keys.
See section \fBMETADATA DICTIONARY\fR below.
.VE 8.7

.TP
\fB\-palette \fIpalette-spec\fR
.
Specifies the resolution of the color cube to be allocated for
displaying this image, and thus the number of colors used from the
colormaps of the windows where it is displayed.  The
\fIpalette-spec\fR string may be either a single decimal number,
specifying the number of shades of gray to use, or three decimal
numbers separated by slashes (/), specifying the number of shades of
red, green and blue to use, respectively.  If the first form (a single
number) is used, the image will be displayed in monochrome (i.e.,
grayscale).

.TP
\fB\-width \fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the width of the image, in pixels.    This option is useful
primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents
of the image piece by piece.  A value of zero (the default) allows the
image to expand or shrink horizontally to fit the data stored in it.







>
>
>
>
|


|







>














>





|


>






>












>








>









>












>







39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
internally in full color (32 bits per pixel), and is displayed using
dithering if necessary.  Image data for a photo image can be obtained
from a file or a string, or it can be supplied from C code through a
procedural interface.  At present, only
.VS 8.6
PNG,
.VE 8.6
GIF, PPM/PGM,
.VS 8.7
and (read-only) SVG
.VE 8.7
formats are supported, but an interface exists to
allow additional image file formats to be added easily.  A photo image
is (semi)transparent if the image data it was obtained from had
transparency information. In regions where no image data has been
supplied, it is fully transparent. Transparency may also be modified
with the \fBtransparency set\fR subcommand.
.SH "CREATING PHOTOS"
.PP
Like all images, photos are created using the \fBimage create\fR
command.
Photos support the following \fIoptions\fR:
.\" OPTION: -data
.TP
\fB\-data \fIstring\fR
.
Specifies the contents of the image as a string.
.VS 8.7
The string should
contain data in the default list-of-lists form,
.VE 8.7
binary data or, for some formats, base64-encoded data (this is
currently guaranteed to be supported for PNG and GIF images). The
format of the string must be one of those for which there is an image
file format handler that will accept string data.  If both the
\fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified, the \fB\-file\fR
option takes precedence.
.\" OPTION: -format
.TP
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?}
.
Specifies the name of the file format for the data specified with the
\fB\-data\fR or \fB\-file\fR option and optional arguments passed to
the format handler. Note that the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.\" OPTION: -file
.TP
\fB\-file \fIname\fR
.
\fIname\fR gives the name of a file that is to be read to supply data
for the photo image.  The file format must be one of those for which
there is an image file format handler that can read data.
.\" OPTION: -gamma
.TP
\fB\-gamma \fIvalue\fR
.
Specifies that the colors allocated for displaying this image in a
window should be corrected for a non-linear display with the specified
gamma exponent value.  (The intensity produced by most
CRT displays is a power function of the input value, to a good
approximation; gamma is the exponent and is typically around 2).
The value specified must be greater than zero.  The default
value is one (no correction).  In general, values greater than one
will make the image lighter, and values less than one will make it
darker.
.\" OPTION: -height
.TP
\fB\-height \fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the height of the image, in pixels.  This option is useful
primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents
of the image piece by piece.  A value of zero (the default) allows the
image to expand or shrink vertically to fit the data stored in it.
.VS 8.7
.\" OPTION: -metadata
.TP
\fB\-metadata \fImetadata\fR
.
Set the metadata dictionary of the image.
Additional keys may be set within the metadata dictionary of the image,
if image data is processed due to a \fB\-file\fR or \fB\-data\fR options
and the driver outputs any metadata keys.
See section \fBMETADATA DICTIONARY\fR below.
.VE 8.7
.\" OPTION: -palette
.TP
\fB\-palette \fIpalette-spec\fR
.
Specifies the resolution of the color cube to be allocated for
displaying this image, and thus the number of colors used from the
colormaps of the windows where it is displayed.  The
\fIpalette-spec\fR string may be either a single decimal number,
specifying the number of shades of gray to use, or three decimal
numbers separated by slashes (/), specifying the number of shades of
red, green and blue to use, respectively.  If the first form (a single
number) is used, the image will be displayed in monochrome (i.e.,
grayscale).
.\" OPTION: -width
.TP
\fB\-width \fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the width of the image, in pixels.    This option is useful
primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents
of the image piece by piece.  A value of zero (the default) allows the
image to expand or shrink horizontally to fit the data stored in it.
147
148
149
150
151
152
153

154
155
156
157
158
159


160
161
162
163
164
165
166

167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185

186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195

196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205

206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215

216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223

224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232

233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240

241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252

253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264

265
266
267
268
269
270

271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288

289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298

299
300
301
302
303
304

305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315


316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336

337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348

349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356

357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370

371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380

381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391

392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402

403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410

411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419

420
421
422
423
424
425
426

427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436

437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463

464
465
466
467
468
469

470
471
472
473
474
475

476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489

490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498

499
500
501
502
503
504

505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
of the image, if necessary, to accommodate the data written to the
image, unless the user has specified non-zero values for the
\fB\-width\fR and/or \fB\-height\fR configuration options, in which
case the width and/or height, respectively, of the image will not be
changed.
.PP
The following commands are possible for photo images:

.TP
\fIimageName \fBblank\fR
.
Blank the image; that is, set the entire image to have no data, so it
will be displayed as transparent, and the background of whatever
window it is displayed in will show through. The metadata dict of the image is not changed.


.TP
\fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBimage create\fR \fBphoto\fR command.

.TP
\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options for the image.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIimageName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBimage create\fR \fBphoto\fR command.
.VS 8.7
Note: setting the \fB\-metadata\fR option without any other option
will not invoke the image format driver to recreate the bitmap.
.VE 8.7

.TP
\fIimageName \fBcopy\fR \fIsourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Copies a region from the image called \fIsourceImage\fR (which must
be a photo image) to the image called \fIimageName\fR, possibly with
pixel zooming and/or subsampling.  If no options are specified, this
command copies the whole of \fIsourceImage\fR into \fIimageName\fR,
starting at coordinates (0,0) in \fIimageName\fR.  The following
options may be specified:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the source image to be copied.
(\fIx1,y1\fR) and (\fIx2,y2\fR) specify diagonally opposite corners of
the rectangle.  If \fIx2\fR and \fIy2\fR are not specified, the
default value is the bottom-right corner of the source image.  The
pixels copied will include the left and top edges of the specified
rectangle but not the bottom or right edges.  If the \fB\-from\fR
option is not given, the default is the whole source image.

.TP
\fB\-to \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the destination image to be
affected.  (\fIx1,y1\fR) and (\fIx2,y2\fR) specify diagonally opposite
corners of the rectangle.  If \fIx2\fR and \fIy2\fR are not specified,
the default value is (\fIx1,y1\fR) plus the size of the source
region (after subsampling and zooming, if specified).  If \fIx2\fR and
\fIy2\fR are specified, the source region will be replicated if
necessary to fill the destination region in a tiled fashion.

.TP
\fB\-shrink\fR
.
Specifies that the size of the destination image should be reduced, if
necessary, so that the region being copied into is at the bottom-right
corner of the image.  This option will not affect the width or height
of the image if the user has specified a non-zero value for the
\fB\-width\fR or \fB\-height\fR configuration option, respectively.

.TP
\fB\-zoom \fIx y\fR
.
Specifies that the source region should be magnified by a factor of
\fIx\fR in the X direction and \fIy\fR in the Y direction.  If \fIy\fR
is not given, the default value is the same as \fIx\fR.  With this
option, each pixel in the source image will be expanded into a block
of \fIx\fR x \fIy\fR pixels in the destination image, all the same
color.  \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR must be greater than 0.

.TP
\fB\-subsample \fIx y\fR
.
Specifies that the source image should be reduced in size by using
only every \fIx\fRth pixel in the X direction and \fIy\fRth pixel in
the Y direction.  Negative values will cause the image to be flipped
about the Y or X axes, respectively.  If \fIy\fR is not given, the
default value is the same as \fIx\fR.

.TP
\fB\-compositingrule \fIrule\fR
.
Specifies how transparent pixels in the source image are combined with
the destination image.  When a compositing rule of \fIoverlay\fR is
set, the old contents of the destination image are visible, as if the
source image were printed on a piece of transparent film and placed
over the top of the destination.  When a compositing rule of \fIset\fR
is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and
the source image is used as-is.  The default compositing rule is
\fIoverlay\fR.
.RE

.TP
\fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Returns image data in the form of a string.
.VS 8.7
The format of the string depends on the format handler. By default, a
human readable format as a list of lists of pixel data is used, other
formats can be chosen with the \fB-format\fR option.
See \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below for details.
.VE 8.7
The following options may be specified:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-background\fI color\fR
.
If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
the specified color.

.TP
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?}
.
Specifies the name of the image file format handler to use and,
optionally, arguments to the format handler.  Specifically, this
subcommand searches for the first handler whose name matches an
initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to
write a string containing this image data.
.VS 8.7
If this option is not given, this subcommand uses the default format
that consists of a list (one element per row) of lists (one element
per pixel/column) of colors in
.QW \fB#\fIrrggbb\fR
format (see \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below).
.VE 8.7
Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.

.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be returned.
If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region
extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of
\fIimageName\fR.  If all four coordinates are given, they specify
diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region, including x1,y1
and excluding x2,y2.  The default, if this option is not given, is the
whole image.

.TP
\fB\-grayscale\fR
.
If this options is specified, the data will not contain color
information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale.
.VS 8.7

.TP
\fB\-metadata\fR \fImetadata\fR
.
Image format handler may use metadata to be included in the returned
data string.
The specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the driver for inclusion in the
data.
If no \fB\-metadata\fR option is given, the current metadata of the
image is used.
.VE 8.7
.RE


\fIimageName \fBget\fR \fIx y\fR ?\fB-withalpha\fR?
.
Returns the color of the pixel at coordinates (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) in the
image as a list of three integers between 0 and 255, representing the
red, green and blue components respectively. If the \fB-withalpha\fR
option is specified, the returned list will have a fourth element
representing the alpha value of the pixel as an integer between 0 and
255.
.VE 8.7
.TP
\fIimageName \fBput\fR \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Sets pixels in \fI imageName\fR to the data specified in \fIdata\fR.
.VS 8.7
This command searches the list of image file format handlers for
a handler that can interpret the data in \fIdata\fR, and then reads
the image encoded within into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image).
See \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below for details on formats for image data.
.VE 8.7
The following options may be specified:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ..\fR?}
.
Specifies the format of the image data in \fIdata\fR and, optionally,
arguments to be passed to the format handler.
Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
\fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data
format handler to read the data.
Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.VS 8.7

.TP
\fB\-metadata\fR \fImetadata\fR
.
A specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the image format driver when interpreting
the data.
Note: The current metadata of the image is not passed to the format driver
and is not changed by the command.
.VE 8.7

.TP
\fB\-to \fIx1 y1\fR ?\fIx2 y2\fR?
.
Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR)
of the region of \fIimageName\fR into which the image data will be
copied.  The default position is (0,0).  If \fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR is given
and \fIdata\fR is not large enough to cover the rectangle specified by
this option, the image data extracted will be tiled so it covers the
entire destination rectangle. If the region specified with this opion
is smaller than the supplied \fIdata\fR, the exceeding data is silently
discarded. Note that if \fIdata\fR specifies a
single color value, then a region extending to the bottom-right corner
represented by (\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR) will be filled with that color.
.RE

.TP
\fIimageName \fBread\fR \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Reads image data from the file named \fIfilename\fR into the image.
This command first searches the list of
image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data
in \fIfilename\fR, and then reads the image in \fIfilename\fR into
\fIimageName\fR (the destination image).  The following options may be
specified:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-format {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ..\fR?}
.
Specifies the format of the image data in \fIfilename\fR and,
optionally, additional options to the format handler.
Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
\fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data
format handler to read the data.
Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.

.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the image file data to be copied
to the destination image.  If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are
specified, the region extends from (\fIx1,y1\fR) to the bottom-right
corner of the image in the image file.  If all four coordinates are
specified, they specify diagonally opposite corners or the region.
The default, if this option is not specified, is the whole of the
image in the image file.
.VS 8.7

.TP
\fB\-metadata\fR \fImetadata\fR
.
A specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the image format driver when interpreting
the data.
Note: The current metadata of the image is not passed to the format driver
and is not changed by the command.
.VE 8.7

.TP
\fB\-shrink\fR
.
If this option, the size of \fIimageName\fR will be reduced, if
necessary, so that the region into which the image file data are read
is at the bottom-right corner of the \fIimageName\fR.  This option
will not affect the width or height of the image if the user has
specified a non-zero value for the \fB\-width\fR or \fB\-height\fR
configuration option, respectively.

.TP
\fB\-to \fIx y\fR
.
Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner of the region of
\fIimageName\fR into which data from \fIfilename\fR are to be read.
The default is (0,0).
.RE

.TP
\fIimageName \fBredither\fR
.
The dithering algorithm used in displaying photo images propagates
quantization errors from one pixel to its neighbors.
If the image data for \fIimageName\fR is supplied in pieces, the
dithered image may not be exactly correct.  Normally the difference is
not noticeable, but if it is a problem, this command can be used to
recalculate the dithered image in each window where the image is
displayed.

.TP
\fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
Allows examination and manipulation of the transparency information in
the photo image.  Several subcommands are available:
.RS
.VS 8.7
.TP
\fIimageName \fBtransparency get \fIx y\fR ?\fB-alpha\fR?
.
Returns true if the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) is fully transparent,
false otherwise.  If the option \fB-alpha\fR is passed, returns the
alpha value of the pixel instead, as an integer in the range 0 to 255.
.VE 8.7

.VS 8.7
.TP
\fIimageName \fBtransparency set \fIx y\fR \fInewVal\fR ?\fB-alpha\fR?
.
Change the transparency of the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) to
\fInewVal.\fR If no additional option is passed, \fInewVal\fR is
interpreted as a boolean and the pixel is made fully transparent if
that value is true, fully opaque otherwise.  If the \fB-alpha\fR
option is passed, \fInewVal\fR is interpreted as an integral alpha
value for the pixel, which must be in the range 0 to 255.
.VE 8.7
.RE

.TP
\fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Writes image data from \fIimageName\fR to a file named \fIfilename\fR.
The following options may be specified:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-background\fI color\fR
.
If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
the specified color.

.TP
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?}
.
Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used to
write the data to the file and, optionally, options to pass to the
format handler.  Specifically, this subcommand searches for the first
handler whose name matches an initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR
and which has the capability to write an image file.  If this option
is not given, the format is guessed from the file extension. If that
cannot be determined, this subcommand uses the first handler that has
the capability to write an image file.
Note: the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.

.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be written to the
image file.  If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region
extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of
\fIimageName\fR.  If all four coordinates are given, they specify
diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region.  The default,
if this option is not given, is the whole image.

.TP
\fB\-grayscale\fR
.
If this options is specified, the data will not contain color
information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale.
.VS 8.7

.TP
\fB\-metadata\fR \fBmetadata\fR
.
Image format handler may use metadata to be included in the written file.
The specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the driver for inclusion in the
file.
If no \fB\-metadata\fR option is given, the current metadata of the
image is used.
.VE 8.7
.RE
.SH "IMAGE FORMATS"
.PP
The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional
image file formats to be added easily.  The photo image code maintains
a list of these handlers.  Handlers are added to the list by
registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR.  The
standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG and GIF
formats,
.VS 8.7
as well as the \fBdefault\fR handler to encode/decode image
data in a human readable form.
.VE 8.7
These handlers are automatically registered on initialization.
.PP
When reading an image file or processing string data specified with







>





|
>
>

|





>
















|


>

|








>










>










>








>









>








>












>







|




>






>















|


>










>






>

|









>
>
|



|



|

|










>








|



>

|



|


>








|





>

|








>








|


>











>

|



|


>









>







>










>






<

|
|

|


<
<

|
|



|




>






>






>











|


>









>






>

|














|
|







159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484

485
486
487
488
489
490
491


492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
of the image, if necessary, to accommodate the data written to the
image, unless the user has specified non-zero values for the
\fB\-width\fR and/or \fB\-height\fR configuration options, in which
case the width and/or height, respectively, of the image will not be
changed.
.PP
The following commands are possible for photo images:
.\" METHOD: blank
.TP
\fIimageName \fBblank\fR
.
Blank the image; that is, set the entire image to have no data, so it
will be displayed as transparent, and the background of whatever
window it is displayed in will show through. The metadata dict of the
image is not changed.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIimageName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBimage create\fR \fBphoto\fR command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options for the image.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIimageName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
\fBimage create\fR \fBphoto\fR command.
.VS 8.7
Note that setting the \fB\-metadata\fR option without any other option
will not invoke the image format driver to recreate the bitmap.
.VE 8.7
.\" METHOD: copy
.TP
\fIimageName \fBcopy\fI sourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Copies a region from the image called \fIsourceImage\fR (which must
be a photo image) to the image called \fIimageName\fR, possibly with
pixel zooming and/or subsampling.  If no options are specified, this
command copies the whole of \fIsourceImage\fR into \fIimageName\fR,
starting at coordinates (0,0) in \fIimageName\fR.  The following
options may be specified:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -from
.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the source image to be copied.
(\fIx1,y1\fR) and (\fIx2,y2\fR) specify diagonally opposite corners of
the rectangle.  If \fIx2\fR and \fIy2\fR are not specified, the
default value is the bottom-right corner of the source image.  The
pixels copied will include the left and top edges of the specified
rectangle but not the bottom or right edges.  If the \fB\-from\fR
option is not given, the default is the whole source image.
.\" OPTION: -to
.TP
\fB\-to \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the destination image to be
affected.  (\fIx1,y1\fR) and (\fIx2,y2\fR) specify diagonally opposite
corners of the rectangle.  If \fIx2\fR and \fIy2\fR are not specified,
the default value is (\fIx1,y1\fR) plus the size of the source
region (after subsampling and zooming, if specified).  If \fIx2\fR and
\fIy2\fR are specified, the source region will be replicated if
necessary to fill the destination region in a tiled fashion.
.\" OPTION: -shrink
.TP
\fB\-shrink\fR
.
Specifies that the size of the destination image should be reduced, if
necessary, so that the region being copied into is at the bottom-right
corner of the image.  This option will not affect the width or height
of the image if the user has specified a non-zero value for the
\fB\-width\fR or \fB\-height\fR configuration option, respectively.
.\" OPTION: -zoom
.TP
\fB\-zoom \fIx y\fR
.
Specifies that the source region should be magnified by a factor of
\fIx\fR in the X direction and \fIy\fR in the Y direction.  If \fIy\fR
is not given, the default value is the same as \fIx\fR.  With this
option, each pixel in the source image will be expanded into a block
of \fIx\fR x \fIy\fR pixels in the destination image, all the same
color.  \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR must be greater than 0.
.\" OPTION: -subsample
.TP
\fB\-subsample \fIx y\fR
.
Specifies that the source image should be reduced in size by using
only every \fIx\fRth pixel in the X direction and \fIy\fRth pixel in
the Y direction.  Negative values will cause the image to be flipped
about the Y or X axes, respectively.  If \fIy\fR is not given, the
default value is the same as \fIx\fR.
.\" OPTION: -compositingrule
.TP
\fB\-compositingrule \fIrule\fR
.
Specifies how transparent pixels in the source image are combined with
the destination image.  When a compositing rule of \fIoverlay\fR is
set, the old contents of the destination image are visible, as if the
source image were printed on a piece of transparent film and placed
over the top of the destination.  When a compositing rule of \fIset\fR
is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and
the source image is used as-is.  The default compositing rule is
\fIoverlay\fR.
.RE
.\" METHOD: data
.TP
\fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Returns image data in the form of a string.
.VS 8.7
The format of the string depends on the format handler. By default, a
human readable format as a list of lists of pixel data is used, other
formats can be chosen with the \fB\-format\fR option.
See \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below for details.
.VE 8.7
The following options may be specified:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -background
.TP
\fB\-background\fI color\fR
.
If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
the specified color.
.\" OPTION: -format
.TP
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?}
.
Specifies the name of the image file format handler to use and,
optionally, arguments to the format handler.  Specifically, this
subcommand searches for the first handler whose name matches an
initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to
write a string containing this image data.
.VS 8.7
If this option is not given, this subcommand uses the default format
that consists of a list (one element per row) of lists (one element
per pixel/column) of colors in
.QW \fB#\fIrrggbb\fR
format (see \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below).
.VE 8.7
Note that the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.\" OPTION: -from
.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be returned.
If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region
extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of
\fIimageName\fR.  If all four coordinates are given, they specify
diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region, including x1,y1
and excluding x2,y2.  The default, if this option is not given, is the
whole image.
.\" OPTION: -grayscale
.TP
\fB\-grayscale\fR
.
If this options is specified, the data will not contain color
information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale.
.VS 8.7
.\" OPTION: -metadata
.TP
\fB\-metadata\fI metadata\fR
.
Image format handler may use metadata to be included in the returned
data string.
The specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the driver for inclusion in the
data.
If no \fB\-metadata\fR option is given, the current metadata of the
image is used.
.VE 8.7
.RE
.\" METHOD: get
.TP
\fIimageName \fBget\fI x y\fR ?\fB\-withalpha\fR?
.
Returns the color of the pixel at coordinates (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) in the
image as a list of three integers between 0 and 255, representing the
red, green and blue components respectively. If the \fB\-withalpha\fR
option is specified, the returned list will have a fourth element
representing the alpha value of the pixel as an integer between 0 and
255.
.\" METHOD: put
.TP
\fIimageName \fBput\fI data\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Sets pixels in \fI imageName\fR to the data specified in \fIdata\fR.
.VS 8.7
This command searches the list of image file format handlers for
a handler that can interpret the data in \fIdata\fR, and then reads
the image encoded within into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image).
See \fBIMAGE FORMATS\fR below for details on formats for image data.
.VE 8.7
The following options may be specified:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -format
.TP
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ..\fR?}
.
Specifies the format of the image data in \fIdata\fR and, optionally,
arguments to be passed to the format handler.
Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
\fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data
format handler to read the data.
Note that the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.VS 8.7
.\" OPTION: -metadata
.TP
\fB\-metadata\fI metadata\fR
.
A specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the image format driver when interpreting
the data.
Note that the current metadata of the image is not passed to the format driver
and is not changed by the command.
.VE 8.7
.\" OPTION: -to
.TP
\fB\-to \fIx1 y1\fR ?\fIx2 y2\fR?
.
Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR)
of the region of \fIimageName\fR into which the image data will be
copied.  The default position is (0,0).  If \fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR is given
and \fIdata\fR is not large enough to cover the rectangle specified by
this option, the image data extracted will be tiled so it covers the
entire destination rectangle. If the region specified with this option
is smaller than the supplied \fIdata\fR, the exceeding data is silently
discarded. Note that if \fIdata\fR specifies a
single color value, then a region extending to the bottom-right corner
represented by (\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR) will be filled with that color.
.RE
.\" METHOD: read
.TP
\fIimageName \fBread\fI filename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Reads image data from the file named \fIfilename\fR into the image.
This command first searches the list of
image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data
in \fIfilename\fR, and then reads the image in \fIfilename\fR into
\fIimageName\fR (the destination image).  The following options may be
specified:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -format
.TP
\fB\-format {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ..\fR?}
.
Specifies the format of the image data in \fIfilename\fR and,
optionally, additional options to the format handler.
Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
\fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data
format handler to read the data.
Note that the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.\" OPTION: -from
.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the image file data to be copied
to the destination image.  If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are
specified, the region extends from (\fIx1,y1\fR) to the bottom-right
corner of the image in the image file.  If all four coordinates are
specified, they specify diagonally opposite corners or the region.
The default, if this option is not specified, is the whole of the
image in the image file.
.VS 8.7
.\" OPTION: -metadata
.TP
\fB\-metadata\fI metadata\fR
.
A specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the image format driver when interpreting
the data.
Note that the current metadata of the image is not passed to the format driver
and is not changed by the command.
.VE 8.7
.\" OPTION: -shrink
.TP
\fB\-shrink\fR
.
If this option, the size of \fIimageName\fR will be reduced, if
necessary, so that the region into which the image file data are read
is at the bottom-right corner of the \fIimageName\fR.  This option
will not affect the width or height of the image if the user has
specified a non-zero value for the \fB\-width\fR or \fB\-height\fR
configuration option, respectively.
.\" OPTION: -to
.TP
\fB\-to \fIx y\fR
.
Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner of the region of
\fIimageName\fR into which data from \fIfilename\fR are to be read.
The default is (0,0).
.RE
.\" METHOD: redither
.TP
\fIimageName \fBredither\fR
.
The dithering algorithm used in displaying photo images propagates
quantization errors from one pixel to its neighbors.
If the image data for \fIimageName\fR is supplied in pieces, the
dithered image may not be exactly correct.  Normally the difference is
not noticeable, but if it is a problem, this command can be used to
recalculate the dithered image in each window where the image is
displayed.
.\" METHOD: transparency
.TP
\fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
Allows examination and manipulation of the transparency information in
the photo image.  Several subcommands are available:
.RS

.TP
\fIimageName \fBtransparency get \fIx y\fR ?\fB\-alpha\fR?
.VS 8.7
Returns true if the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) is fully transparent,
false otherwise.  If the option \fB\-alpha\fR is passed, returns the
alpha value of the pixel instead, as an integer in the range 0 to 255.
.VE 8.7


.TP
\fIimageName \fBtransparency set \fIx y newVal\fR ?\fB\-alpha\fR?
.VS 8.7
Change the transparency of the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) to
\fInewVal.\fR If no additional option is passed, \fInewVal\fR is
interpreted as a boolean and the pixel is made fully transparent if
that value is true, fully opaque otherwise.  If the \fB\-alpha\fR
option is passed, \fInewVal\fR is interpreted as an integral alpha
value for the pixel, which must be in the range 0 to 255.
.VE 8.7
.RE
.\" METHOD: write
.TP
\fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
.
Writes image data from \fIimageName\fR to a file named \fIfilename\fR.
The following options may be specified:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -background
.TP
\fB\-background\fI color\fR
.
If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
the specified color.
.\" OPTION: -format
.TP
\fB\-format\fR {\fIformat-name\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?}
.
Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used to
write the data to the file and, optionally, options to pass to the
format handler.  Specifically, this subcommand searches for the first
handler whose name matches an initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR
and which has the capability to write an image file.  If this option
is not given, the format is guessed from the file extension. If that
cannot be determined, this subcommand uses the first handler that has
the capability to write an image file.
Note that the value of this option must be a Tcl list.
This means that the braces may be omitted if the argument has only one
word. Also, instead of braces, double quotes may be used for quoting.
.\" OPTION: -from
.TP
\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
.
Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be written to the
image file.  If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region
extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of
\fIimageName\fR.  If all four coordinates are given, they specify
diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region.  The default,
if this option is not given, is the whole image.
.\" OPTION: -grayscale
.TP
\fB\-grayscale\fR
.
If this options is specified, the data will not contain color
information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale.
.VS 8.7
.\" OPTION: -metadata
.TP
\fB\-metadata\fI metadata\fR
.
Image format handler may use metadata to be included in the written file.
The specified \fImetadata\fR is passed to the driver for inclusion in the
file.
If no \fB\-metadata\fR option is given, the current metadata of the
image is used.
.VE 8.7
.RE
.SH "IMAGE FORMATS"
.PP
The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional
image file formats to be added easily.  The photo image code maintains
a list of these handlers.  Handlers are added to the list by
registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR.  The
standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG, GIF and
(read-only) SVG formats,
.VS 8.7
as well as the \fBdefault\fR handler to encode/decode image
data in a human readable form.
.VE 8.7
These handlers are automatically registered on initialization.
.PP
When reading an image file or processing string data specified with
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576

577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588

589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596

597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604




605
606
607
608
609
610


611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620


621
622
623
624
625


626
627
628


629
630
631
632
633
634


635


636
637
638


639
640


641


642
643


644
645


646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655

656
657
658

659
660
661
662
663
664
665
.SS "THE DEFAULT IMAGE HANDLER"
.PP
The \fBdefault\fR image handler cannot be used to read or write data
from/to a file. Its sole purpose is to encode and decode image data in
string form in a clear text, human readable, form. The \fIimageName\fR
\fBdata\fR subcommand uses this handler when no other format is
specified. When reading image data from a string with \fIimageName\fR
\fBput\fR or the \fB-data\fR option, the default handler is treated
as the other handlers.
.PP
Image data in the \fBdefault\fR string format is a (top-to-bottom)
list of scan-lines, with each scan-line being a (left-to-right) list
of pixel data. Every scan-line has the same length. The color
and, optionally, alpha value of each pixel is specified in any of
the forms described in the \fBCOLOR FORMATS\fR section below.
.VE 8.7

.SS "FORMAT SUBOPTIONS"
.PP
.VS 8.6
Image formats may support sub-options, wich ahre specified using
additional words in the value to the \fB\-format\fR option. These
suboptions can affect how image data is read or written to file or
string. The nature and values of these options is up to the format
handler.
The built-in handlers support these suboptions:

.VS 8.7
.TP
\fBdefault \-colorformat\fI formatType\fR
.
The option is allowed when writing image data to a string with
\fIimageName\fR \fBdata\fR. Specifies the format to use for the color
string of each pixel. \fIformatType\fR may be one of: \fBrgb\fR to
encode pixel data in the form \fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR, \fBrgba\fR to encode
pixel data in the form \fB#\fIRRGGBBAA\fR or \fBlist\fR to encode
pixel data as a list with four elements. See \fBCOLOR FORMATS\fR
below for details. The default is \fBrgb\fR.
.VE 8.7

.TP
\fBgif \-index\fI indexValue\fR
.
The option has effect when reading image data from a file. When
parsing a multi-part GIF image, Tk normally only accesses the first
image. By giving the \fB\-index\fR sub-option, the \fIindexValue\fR'th
value may be used instead. The \fIindexValue\fR must be an integer
from 0 up to the number of image parts in the GIF data.

.TP
\fBpng \-alpha\fI alphaValue\fR
.
The option has effect when reading image data from a file. Specifies
an additional alpha filtering for the overall image, which allows the
background on which the image is displayed to show through.  This
usually also has the effect of desaturating the image.  The
\fIalphaValue\fR must be between 0.0 and 1.0.




.TP
\fBsvg \-dpi\fI dpiValue\fB \-scale\fI scaleValue\fB \-scaletowidth \fI width\fB \-scaletoheight\fI height\fR
.
\fIdpiValue\fR is used in conversion between given coordinates and
screen resolution. The value must be greater than 0 and the default
value is 96.


\fIscaleValue\fR is used to scale the resulting image. The value must
be greater than 0 and the default value is 1.
\fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are the width or height that the image
will be adjusted to. Only one parameter among \fB\-scale\fR,
\fB\-scaletowidth\fR and \fB\-scaletoheight\fR can be given at a time
and the aspect ratio of the original image is always preserved.
The svg format supports a wide range of SVG features, but the
full SVG standard is not available, for instance the 'text' feature
is missing and silently ignored when reading the SVG data.
The supported SVG features are:


.
.RS
\fB elements:\fR g, path, rect, circle, ellipse, line, polyline, polygon,
linearGradient, radialGradient, stop, defs, svg, style
.PP


\fB attributes:\fR width, height, viewBox,
preserveAspectRatio with none, xMin, xMid, xMax, yMin, yMid, yMax, slice
.PP


\fB gradient attributes:\fR gradientUnits with objectBoundingBox,
gradientTransform, cx, cy, r fx, fy x1, y1, x2, y2
spreadMethod with pad, reflect or repeat,
xlink:href
.PP
\fB poly attributes: \fR points


.PP


\fB line attributes: \fR x1, y1, x2, y2
.PP
\fB ellipse attributes: \fR cx, cy, rx, ry


.PP
\fB circle attributes: \fR cx, cy, r


.PP


\fB rectangle attributes: \fR x, y, width, height, rx, ry
.PP


\fB path attributes: \fR d with m, M, l, L, h, H, v, V, c, C, s, S, q, Q, t, T, a, A, z, Z
.PP


\fB style attributes: \fR display with none, visibility, hidden, visible,
fill with nonzero and evenodd, opacity, fill-opacity,
stroke, stroke-width, stroke-dasharray, stroke-dashoffset, stroke-opacity,
stroke-linecap with butt, round and square,
stroke-linejoin with miter, round and  bevel, stroke-miterlimit
fill-rule, font-size,
transform with matrix, translate, scale, rotate, skewX and  skewY,
stop-color, stop-opacity, offset, id, class
.RE
.

Currently only SVG images reading and conversion into (pixel-based
format) photos is supported: Tk does not (yet) support bundling photo
images in SVG vector graphics.

.VE 8.6
.VS 8.7
.SH "COLOR FORMATS"
.PP
The default image handler can represent/parse color and alpha values
of a pixel in one of the formats listed below. If a color format does
not contain transparency information, full opacity is assumed.  The







|












|





>





|






>








>








>
>
>
>

|




>
>






|



>
>

<
|

|
>
>
|

|
>
>
|



|
|
>
>
|
>
>
|
|
|
>
>
|
|
>
>
|
>
>
|
|
>
>
|
|
>
>
|








|
>



>







596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677

678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
.SS "THE DEFAULT IMAGE HANDLER"
.PP
The \fBdefault\fR image handler cannot be used to read or write data
from/to a file. Its sole purpose is to encode and decode image data in
string form in a clear text, human readable, form. The \fIimageName\fR
\fBdata\fR subcommand uses this handler when no other format is
specified. When reading image data from a string with \fIimageName\fR
\fBput\fR or the \fB\-data\fR option, the default handler is treated
as the other handlers.
.PP
Image data in the \fBdefault\fR string format is a (top-to-bottom)
list of scan-lines, with each scan-line being a (left-to-right) list
of pixel data. Every scan-line has the same length. The color
and, optionally, alpha value of each pixel is specified in any of
the forms described in the \fBCOLOR FORMATS\fR section below.
.VE 8.7

.SS "FORMAT SUBOPTIONS"
.PP
.VS 8.6
Image formats may support sub-options, which are specified using
additional words in the value to the \fB\-format\fR option. These
suboptions can affect how image data is read or written to file or
string. The nature and values of these options is up to the format
handler.
The built-in handlers support these suboptions:
.\" OPTION -colorformat
.VS 8.7
.TP
\fBdefault \-colorformat\fI formatType\fR
.
The option is allowed when writing image data to a string with
\fIimageName \fBdata\fR. Specifies the format to use for the color
string of each pixel. \fIformatType\fR may be one of: \fBrgb\fR to
encode pixel data in the form \fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR, \fBrgba\fR to encode
pixel data in the form \fB#\fIRRGGBBAA\fR or \fBlist\fR to encode
pixel data as a list with four elements. See \fBCOLOR FORMATS\fR
below for details. The default is \fBrgb\fR.
.VE 8.7
.\" OPTION -index
.TP
\fBgif \-index\fI indexValue\fR
.
The option has effect when reading image data from a file. When
parsing a multi-part GIF image, Tk normally only accesses the first
image. By giving the \fB\-index\fR sub-option, the \fIindexValue\fR'th
value may be used instead. The \fIindexValue\fR must be an integer
from 0 up to the number of image parts in the GIF data.
.\" OPTION -alpha
.TP
\fBpng \-alpha\fI alphaValue\fR
.
The option has effect when reading image data from a file. Specifies
an additional alpha filtering for the overall image, which allows the
background on which the image is displayed to show through.  This
usually also has the effect of desaturating the image.  The
\fIalphaValue\fR must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
.\" OPTION -dpi
.\" OPTION -scale
.\" OPTION -scaletowidth
.\" OPTION -scaletoheight
.TP
\fBsvg \-dpi\fI dpiValue \fB\-scale\fI scaleValue \fB\-scaletowidth\fI width \fB\-scaletoheight\fI height\fR
.
\fIdpiValue\fR is used in conversion between given coordinates and
screen resolution. The value must be greater than 0 and the default
value is 96.
.PP
.RS
\fIscaleValue\fR is used to scale the resulting image. The value must
be greater than 0 and the default value is 1.
\fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are the width or height that the image
will be adjusted to. Only one parameter among \fB\-scale\fR,
\fB\-scaletowidth\fR and \fB\-scaletoheight\fR can be given at a time
and the aspect ratio of the original image is always preserved.
The \fBsvg\fR format supports a wide range of SVG features, but the
full SVG standard is not available, for instance the 'text' feature
is missing and silently ignored when reading the SVG data.
The supported SVG features are:
.TP
\fBelements:\fR
.

g, path, rect, circle, ellipse, line, polyline, polygon,
linearGradient, radialGradient, stop, defs, svg, style
.TP
\fBattributes:\fR
.
width, height, viewBox,
preserveAspectRatio with none, xMin, xMid, xMax, yMin, yMid, yMax, slice
.TP
\fBgradient attributes:\fR
.
gradientUnits with objectBoundingBox,
gradientTransform, cx, cy, r fx, fy x1, y1, x2, y2
spreadMethod with pad, reflect or repeat,
xlink:href
.TP
\fBpoly attributes:\fR
.
points
.TP
\fBline attributes:\fR
.
x1, y1, x2, y2
.TP
\fBellipse attributes:\fR
.
cx, cy, rx, ry
.TP
\fBcircle attributes:\fR
.
cx, cy, r
.TP
\fBrectangle attributes:\fR
.
x, y, width, height, rx, ry
.TP
\fBpath attributes:\fR
.
d with m, M, l, L, h, H, v, V, c, C, s, S, q, Q, t, T, a, A, z, Z
.TP
\fBstyle attributes:\fR
.
display with none, visibility, hidden, visible,
fill with nonzero and evenodd, opacity, fill-opacity,
stroke, stroke-width, stroke-dasharray, stroke-dashoffset, stroke-opacity,
stroke-linecap with butt, round and square,
stroke-linejoin with miter, round and  bevel, stroke-miterlimit
fill-rule, font-size,
transform with matrix, translate, scale, rotate, skewX and  skewY,
stop-color, stop-opacity, offset, id, class
.RE
.PP
.RS
Currently only SVG images reading and conversion into (pixel-based
format) photos is supported: Tk does not (yet) support bundling photo
images in SVG vector graphics.
.RE
.VE 8.6
.VS 8.7
.SH "COLOR FORMATS"
.PP
The default image handler can represent/parse color and alpha values
of a pixel in one of the formats listed below. If a color format does
not contain transparency information, full opacity is assumed.  The
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776

777
778
779
780

781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
comments.
Image format drivers may output metadata when image data is
parsed, or may use metadata to be included in image files or formats.
.SS "METADATA KEYS (MULTIPLE FORMATS)"
.PP
Each image format driver supports an individual set of metadata dictionary
keys. Predefined keys are:
.TP
DPI
.
Horizontal image resolution in DPI as a double value.
Supported by format \fBpng\fR.
.TP
aspect
.
Aspect ratio horizontal divided by vertical as double value.
Supported by formats \fBgif\fR and \fBpng\fR.
.TP
comment
.
Image text comment.
Supported by formats \fBgif\fR and \fBpng\fR.
.PP
It is valid to set any key in the metadata dict.
A format driver will ignore keys it does not handle.
.SS "METADATA KEYS FOR ANIMATED GIF INFORMATION"
.PP
The following metadata keys are reported when reading a \fBgif\fR format file.
They are typically used in conjunction with the \fI-index\fR option of an
animated \fBgif\fR file to properly display the subimage sequence.
The options are linked to each subimage selected by \fI-index\fR.
.TP
\fBdelay time\fR \fItime\fR
.
Update delay time in 10ms unit. This key is only present, if delay time is not 0.

.TP
\fBdisposal method\fR \fImethod\fR
.
Disposal method of the preceeding image, if given for the current image.

Possible values are: \fIdo not dispose\fR, \fIrestore to background color\fR, \fIrestore to previous\fR.
.TP
\fBuser interaction\fR \fIbool\fR
.
The key is present with a value of 1, if user interaction is specified.
Otherwise, the key is not present.
.TP
\fBupdate region\fR \fIX0\fR, \fIY0\fR, \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR
.
Update region of the current subimage, if subimage has not the same size as
the full image. The pixel outside of this box are all fully transparent.
.PP
.VE 8.7
.SH CREDITS
.PP
The photo image type was designed and implemented by Paul Mackerras,
based on his earlier photo widget and some suggestions from
John Ousterhout.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Load an image from a file and tile it to the size of a window, which
is useful for producing a tiled background:
.PP
.CS
# These lines should be called once
\fBimage create photo\fR untiled \-file "theFile.ppm"
\fBimage create photo\fR tiled

# These lines should be called whenever .someWidget changes
# size; a <Configure> binding is useful here
set width  [winfo width .someWidget]
set height [winfo height .someWidget]
tiled \fBcopy\fR untiled \-to 0 0 $width $height \-shrink
.CE
.PP
.VS 8.6
The PNG image loader allows the application of an additional alpha factor
during loading, which is useful for generating images suitable for disabled
buttons:
.PP
.CS
\fBimage create photo\fR icon \-file "icon.png"
\fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled \-file "icon.png" \e
        \-format "png \-alpha 0.5"
button .b \-image icon \-disabledimage iconDisabled
.CE
.VE 8.6
.PP
.VS 8.7
Create a green box with a simple shadow effect
.PP
.CS







<
|
<


<
|
<


<
|
<




|



|

|

|

|
>

|


>
|

|




|

















|






|








|
|
|
|







817
818
819
820
821
822
823

824

825
826

827

828
829

830

831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
comments.
Image format drivers may output metadata when image data is
parsed, or may use metadata to be included in image files or formats.
.SS "METADATA KEYS (MULTIPLE FORMATS)"
.PP
Each image format driver supports an individual set of metadata dictionary
keys. Predefined keys are:

.IP \fBDPI\fR

Horizontal image resolution in DPI as a double value.
Supported by format \fBpng\fR.

.IP \fBaspect\fR

Aspect ratio horizontal divided by vertical as double value.
Supported by formats \fBgif\fR and \fBpng\fR.

.IP \fBcomment\fR

Image text comment.
Supported by formats \fBgif\fR and \fBpng\fR.
.PP
It is valid to set any key in the metadata dict.
A format driver will ignore keys that it does not handle.
.SS "METADATA KEYS FOR ANIMATED GIF INFORMATION"
.PP
The following metadata keys are reported when reading a \fBgif\fR format file.
They are typically used in conjunction with the \fB\-index\fR option of an
animated \fBgif\fR file to properly display the subimage sequence.
The options are linked to each subimage selected by \fB\-index\fR.
.TP
\fBdelay time\fI time\fR
.
Update delay time in 10ms units.
This key is only present if the delay time is not 0.
.TP
\fBdisposal method\fI method\fR
.
Disposal method of the preceeding image, if given for the current image.
Possible values are: \fBdo not dispose\fR, \fBrestore to background color\fR,
\fBrestore to previous\fR.
.TP
\fBuser interaction\fI bool\fR
.
The key is present with a value of 1, if user interaction is specified.
Otherwise, the key is not present.
.TP
\fBupdate region\fI X0\fR, \fIY0\fR, \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR
.
Update region of the current subimage, if subimage has not the same size as
the full image. The pixel outside of this box are all fully transparent.
.PP
.VE 8.7
.SH CREDITS
.PP
The photo image type was designed and implemented by Paul Mackerras,
based on his earlier photo widget and some suggestions from
John Ousterhout.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Load an image from a file and tile it to the size of a window, which
is useful for producing a tiled background:
.PP
.CS
# These lines should be called once
\fBimage create photo\fR untiled -file "theFile.ppm"
\fBimage create photo\fR tiled

# These lines should be called whenever .someWidget changes
# size; a <Configure> binding is useful here
set width  [winfo width .someWidget]
set height [winfo height .someWidget]
tiled \fBcopy\fR untiled -to 0 0 $width $height -shrink
.CE
.PP
.VS 8.6
The PNG image loader allows the application of an additional alpha factor
during loading, which is useful for generating images suitable for disabled
buttons:
.PP
.CS
\fBimage create photo\fR icon -file "icon.png"
\fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled -file "icon.png" \e
        -format "png -alpha 0.5"
button .b -image icon -disabledimage iconDisabled
.CE
.VE 8.6
.PP
.VS 8.7
Create a green box with a simple shadow effect
.PP
.CS

Changes to doc/place.n.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32

33
34
35
36
37

38
39

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52

53
54

55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

64
65

66
67
68
69
70
71
72
in response to changes in the size of the container.
Lastly, the placer allows you to mix these styles of placement so
that, for example, the content has a fixed width and height but is
centered inside the container.
.PP
.TP
\fBplace \fIwindow option value \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?

Arrange for the placer to manage the geometry of a content whose
pathName is \fIwindow\fR.  The remaining arguments consist of one or
more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs that specify the way in which
\fIwindow\fR's geometry is managed.  \fIOption\fR may have any of the
values accepted by the \fBplace configure\fR command.

.TP
\fBplace configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?

Query or modify the geometry options of the content given by
\fIwindow\fR.  If no \fIoption\fR is specified, this command returns a
list describing the available options (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case
the command returns an empty string.
.RS
.PP
The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are supported:

.TP
\fB\-anchor \fIwhere\fR

\fIWhere\fR specifies which point of \fIwindow\fR is to be positioned
at the (x,y) location selected by the \fB\-x\fR, \fB\-y\fR,
\fB\-relx\fR, and \fB\-rely\fR options.
The anchor point is in terms of the outer area of \fIwindow\fR
including its border, if any.
Thus if \fIwhere\fR is \fBse\fR then the lower-right corner of
\fIwindow\fR's border will appear at the given (x,y) location
in the container.
The anchor position defaults to \fBnw\fR.

.TP
\fB\-bordermode \fImode\fR

\fIMode\fR determines the degree to which borders within the
container are used in determining the placement of the content.
The default and most common value is \fBinside\fR.
In this case the placer considers the area of the container to
be the innermost area of the container, inside any border:
an option of \fB\-x 0\fR corresponds to an x-coordinate just
inside the border and an option of \fB\-relwidth 1.0\fR







>





>


>













>


>









>


>







26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
in response to changes in the size of the container.
Lastly, the placer allows you to mix these styles of placement so
that, for example, the content has a fixed width and height but is
centered inside the container.
.PP
.TP
\fBplace \fIwindow option value \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.
Arrange for the placer to manage the geometry of a content whose
pathName is \fIwindow\fR.  The remaining arguments consist of one or
more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs that specify the way in which
\fIwindow\fR's geometry is managed.  \fIOption\fR may have any of the
values accepted by the \fBplace configure\fR command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fBplace configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the geometry options of the content given by
\fIwindow\fR.  If no \fIoption\fR is specified, this command returns a
list describing the available options (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case
the command returns an empty string.
.RS
.PP
The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are supported:
.\" OPTION: -anchor
.TP
\fB\-anchor \fIwhere\fR
.
\fIWhere\fR specifies which point of \fIwindow\fR is to be positioned
at the (x,y) location selected by the \fB\-x\fR, \fB\-y\fR,
\fB\-relx\fR, and \fB\-rely\fR options.
The anchor point is in terms of the outer area of \fIwindow\fR
including its border, if any.
Thus if \fIwhere\fR is \fBse\fR then the lower-right corner of
\fIwindow\fR's border will appear at the given (x,y) location
in the container.
The anchor position defaults to \fBnw\fR.
.\" OPTION: -bordermode
.TP
\fB\-bordermode \fImode\fR
.
\fIMode\fR determines the degree to which borders within the
container are used in determining the placement of the content.
The default and most common value is \fBinside\fR.
In this case the placer considers the area of the container to
be the innermost area of the container, inside any border:
an option of \fB\-x 0\fR corresponds to an x-coordinate just
inside the border and an option of \fB\-relwidth 1.0\fR
80
81
82
83
84
85
86

87
88

89
90
91
92
93
94
95

96
97

98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107

108
109

110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117

118
119

120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127

128
129

130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139

140
141

142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151

152
153

154
155
156
157
158
159
160

161
162

163
164
165
166
167

168
169

170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179

180







181

182
183
184
185
186

187
188

189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
outside its container, as with the options \fB\-x 0 \-y 0 \-anchor ne\fR.
Lastly, \fImode\fR may be specified as \fBignore\fR, in which
case borders are ignored:  the area of the container is considered
to be its official X area, which includes any internal border but
no external border.  A bordermode of \fBignore\fR is probably
not very useful.
.RE

.TP
\fB\-height \fIsize\fR

\fISize\fR specifies the height for \fIwindow\fR in screen units
(i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
The height will be the outer dimension of \fIwindow\fR including its
border, if any.
If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if no \fB\-height\fR or
\fB\-relheight\fR option is specified, then the height requested
internally by the window will be used.

.TP
\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR

\fIContainer\fR specifies the path name of the window relative
to which \fIwindow\fR is to be placed.
\fIContainer\fR must either be \fIwindow\fR's parent or a descendant
of \fIwindow\fR's parent.
In addition, \fIcontainer\fR and \fIwindow\fR must both be descendants
of the same top-level window.
These restrictions are necessary to guarantee
that \fIwindow\fR is visible whenever \fIcontainer\fR is visible.
If this option is not specified then the other window defaults to
\fIwindow\fR's parent.

.TP
\fB\-relheight \fIsize\fR

\fISize\fR specifies the height for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the height is specified as a floating-point number
relative to the height of the container: 0.5 means \fIwindow\fR will
be half as high as the container, 1.0 means \fIwindow\fR will have
the same height as the container, and so on.
If both \fB\-height\fR and \fB\-relheight\fR are specified for a content,
their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-relheight 1.0 \-height \-2\fR
makes the content 2 pixels shorter than the container.

.TP
\fB\-relwidth \fIsize\fR

\fISize\fR specifies the width for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the width is specified as a floating-point number
relative to the width of the container: 0.5 means \fIwindow\fR will
be half as wide as the container, 1.0 means \fIwindow\fR will have
the same width as the container, and so on.
If both \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-relwidth\fR are specified for a content,
their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-relwidth 1.0 \-width 5\fR
makes the content 5 pixels wider than the container.

.TP
\fB\-relx \fIlocation\fR

\fILocation\fR specifies the x-coordinate within the container window
of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the location is specified in a relative fashion
as a floating-point number:  0.0 corresponds to the left edge
of the container and 1.0 corresponds to the right edge of the container.
\fILocation\fR need not be in the range 0.0\-1.0.
If both \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-relx\fR are specified for a content
then their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-relx 0.5 \-x \-2\fR
positions the left edge of the content 2 pixels to the left of the
center of its container.

.TP
\fB\-rely \fIlocation\fR

\fILocation\fR specifies the y-coordinate within the container window
of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the value is specified in a relative fashion
as a floating-point number:  0.0 corresponds to the top edge
of the container and 1.0 corresponds to the bottom edge of the container.
\fILocation\fR need not be in the range 0.0\-1.0.
If both \fB\-y\fR and \fB\-rely\fR are specified for a content
then their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-rely 0.5 \-x 3\fR
positions the top edge of the content 3 pixels below the
center of its container.

.TP
\fB\-width \fIsize\fR

\fISize\fR specifies the width for \fIwindow\fR in screen units
(i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
The width will be the outer width of \fIwindow\fR including its
border, if any.
If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if no \fB\-width\fR
or \fB\-relwidth\fR option is specified, then the width requested
internally by the window will be used.

.TP
\fB\-x \fIlocation\fR

\fILocation\fR specifies the x-coordinate within the container window
of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms
accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) and need not lie within the bounds
of the container window.

.TP
\fB\-y \fIlocation\fR

\fILocation\fR specifies the y-coordinate within the container window
of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms
accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) and need not lie within the bounds
of the container window.
.PP
If the same value is specified separately with
two different options, such as \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-relx\fR, then
the most recent option is used and the older one is ignored.
.RE

.TP







\fBplace forget \fIwindow\fR

Causes the placer to stop managing the geometry of \fIwindow\fR.  As a
side effect of this command \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped so that it
does not appear on the screen.  If \fIwindow\fR is not currently managed
by the placer then the command has no effect.  This command returns an
empty string.

.TP
\fBplace info \fIwindow\fR

Returns a list giving the current configuration of \fIwindow\fR.
The list consists of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs in exactly the
same form as might be specified to the \fBplace configure\fR
command.
.TP
\fBplace content \fIwindow\fR
Returns a list of all the content windows for which \fIwindow\fR is the container.
If there is no content for \fIwindow\fR then an empty string is returned.
.TP
\fBplace slaves \fIwindow\fR
.
Synonym for \fBplace content \fIwindow\fR.
.PP
If the configuration of a window has been retrieved with
\fBplace info\fR, that configuration can be restored later by







>


>







>


>










>


>








>


>








>


>










>


>










>


>







>


>





>


>










>

>
>
>
>
>
>
>

>





>


>




|
<
<
<







87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229



230
231
232
233
234
235
236
outside its container, as with the options \fB\-x 0 \-y 0 \-anchor ne\fR.
Lastly, \fImode\fR may be specified as \fBignore\fR, in which
case borders are ignored:  the area of the container is considered
to be its official X area, which includes any internal border but
no external border.  A bordermode of \fBignore\fR is probably
not very useful.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -height
.TP
\fB\-height \fIsize\fR
.
\fISize\fR specifies the height for \fIwindow\fR in screen units
(i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
The height will be the outer dimension of \fIwindow\fR including its
border, if any.
If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if no \fB\-height\fR or
\fB\-relheight\fR option is specified, then the height requested
internally by the window will be used.
.\" OPTION: -in
.TP
\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR
.
\fIContainer\fR specifies the path name of the window relative
to which \fIwindow\fR is to be placed.
\fIContainer\fR must either be \fIwindow\fR's parent or a descendant
of \fIwindow\fR's parent.
In addition, \fIcontainer\fR and \fIwindow\fR must both be descendants
of the same top-level window.
These restrictions are necessary to guarantee
that \fIwindow\fR is visible whenever \fIcontainer\fR is visible.
If this option is not specified then the other window defaults to
\fIwindow\fR's parent.
.\" OPTION: -relheight
.TP
\fB\-relheight \fIsize\fR
.
\fISize\fR specifies the height for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the height is specified as a floating-point number
relative to the height of the container: 0.5 means \fIwindow\fR will
be half as high as the container, 1.0 means \fIwindow\fR will have
the same height as the container, and so on.
If both \fB\-height\fR and \fB\-relheight\fR are specified for a content,
their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-relheight 1.0 \-height \-2\fR
makes the content 2 pixels shorter than the container.
.\" OPTION: -relwidth
.TP
\fB\-relwidth \fIsize\fR
.
\fISize\fR specifies the width for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the width is specified as a floating-point number
relative to the width of the container: 0.5 means \fIwindow\fR will
be half as wide as the container, 1.0 means \fIwindow\fR will have
the same width as the container, and so on.
If both \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-relwidth\fR are specified for a content,
their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-relwidth 1.0 \-width 5\fR
makes the content 5 pixels wider than the container.
.\" OPTION: -relx
.TP
\fB\-relx \fIlocation\fR
.
\fILocation\fR specifies the x-coordinate within the container window
of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the location is specified in a relative fashion
as a floating-point number:  0.0 corresponds to the left edge
of the container and 1.0 corresponds to the right edge of the container.
\fILocation\fR need not be in the range 0.0\-1.0.
If both \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-relx\fR are specified for a content
then their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-relx 0.5 \-x \-2\fR
positions the left edge of the content 2 pixels to the left of the
center of its container.
.\" OPTION: -rely
.TP
\fB\-rely \fIlocation\fR
.
\fILocation\fR specifies the y-coordinate within the container window
of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the value is specified in a relative fashion
as a floating-point number:  0.0 corresponds to the top edge
of the container and 1.0 corresponds to the bottom edge of the container.
\fILocation\fR need not be in the range 0.0\-1.0.
If both \fB\-y\fR and \fB\-rely\fR are specified for a content
then their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-rely 0.5 \-x 3\fR
positions the top edge of the content 3 pixels below the
center of its container.
.\" OPTION: -width
.TP
\fB\-width \fIsize\fR
.
\fISize\fR specifies the width for \fIwindow\fR in screen units
(i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
The width will be the outer width of \fIwindow\fR including its
border, if any.
If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if no \fB\-width\fR
or \fB\-relwidth\fR option is specified, then the width requested
internally by the window will be used.
.\" OPTION: -x
.TP
\fB\-x \fIlocation\fR
.
\fILocation\fR specifies the x-coordinate within the container window
of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms
accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) and need not lie within the bounds
of the container window.
.\" OPTION: -y
.TP
\fB\-y \fIlocation\fR
.
\fILocation\fR specifies the y-coordinate within the container window
of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms
accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) and need not lie within the bounds
of the container window.
.PP
If the same value is specified separately with
two different options, such as \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-relx\fR, then
the most recent option is used and the older one is ignored.
.RE
.\" METHOD: content
.TP
\fBplace content \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a list of all the content windows for which \fIwindow\fR is the
container. If there is no content for \fIwindow\fR then an empty string
is returned.
.\" METHOD: forget
.TP
\fBplace forget \fIwindow\fR
.
Causes the placer to stop managing the geometry of \fIwindow\fR.  As a
side effect of this command \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped so that it
does not appear on the screen.  If \fIwindow\fR is not currently managed
by the placer then the command has no effect.  This command returns an
empty string.
.\" METHOD: info
.TP
\fBplace info \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a list giving the current configuration of \fIwindow\fR.
The list consists of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs in exactly the
same form as might be specified to the \fBplace configure\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: slaves



.TP
\fBplace slaves \fIwindow\fR
.
Synonym for \fBplace content \fIwindow\fR.
.PP
If the configuration of a window has been retrieved with
\fBplace info\fR, that configuration can be restored later by
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256

257
258
259
To control the sizes of these windows, make them windows like
frames and canvases that provide configuration options for this purpose.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Make the label occupy the middle bit of the toplevel, no matter how it
is resized:
.CS
label .l \-text "In the\enMiddle!" \-bg black \-fg white
\fBplace\fR .l \-relwidth .3 \-relx .35 \-relheight .3 \-rely .35
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
grid(n), pack(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
geometry manager, height, location, container, place, rubber sheet, content, width

'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
|




|
>



276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
To control the sizes of these windows, make them windows like
frames and canvases that provide configuration options for this purpose.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Make the label occupy the middle bit of the toplevel, no matter how it
is resized:
.CS
label .l -text "In the\enMiddle!" -bg black -fg white
\fBplace\fR .l -relwidth .3 -relx .35 -relheight .3 -rely .35
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
grid(n), pack(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
geometry manager, height, location, container, place, rubber sheet,
content, width
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/popup.n.

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
the given point.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
How to attach a simple popup menu to a widget.
.CS
# Create a menu
set m [menu .popupMenu]
$m add command \-label "Example 1" \-command bell
$m add command \-label "Example 2" \-command bell

# Create something to attach it to
pack [label .l \-text "Click me!"]

# Arrange for the menu to pop up when the label is clicked
bind .l <Button-1> {\fBtk_popup\fR .popupMenu %X %Y}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
bind(n), menu(n), tk_optionMenu(n)
.SH KEYWORDS







|
|


|







27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
the given point.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
How to attach a simple popup menu to a widget.
.CS
# Create a menu
set m [menu .popupMenu]
$m add command -label "Example 1" -command bell
$m add command -label "Example 2" -command bell

# Create something to attach it to
pack [label .l -text "Click me!"]

# Arrange for the menu to pop up when the label is clicked
bind .l <Button-1> {\fBtk_popup\fR .popupMenu %X %Y}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
bind(n), menu(n), tk_optionMenu(n)
.SH KEYWORDS

Changes to doc/radiobutton.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH radiobutton n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
radiobutton \- Create and manipulate 'radiobutton' pick-one widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBradiobutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH radiobutton n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
radiobutton \- Create and manipulate 'radiobutton' pick-one widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBradiobutton\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
raised\fR.  If the value of this option is the empty string, then no
alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the radiobutton.
The empty string is the default value.
.OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background
Specifies a background color to use when the button is selected.
If \fBindicatorOn\fR is true then the color is used as the background for
the indicator regardless of the select state.
If \fB\-indicatoron\fR is false, this color is used as the background
for the entire widget, in place of \fB\-background\fR or \fB\-activeBackground\fR,
whenever the widget is selected.
If specified as an empty string then no special color is used for
displaying when the widget is selected.
.OP \-selectimage selectImage SelectImage
Specifies an image to display (in place of the \fB\-image\fR option)
when the radiobutton is selected.
This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has been







|
|







61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
raised\fR.  If the value of this option is the empty string, then no
alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the radiobutton.
The empty string is the default value.
.OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background
Specifies a background color to use when the button is selected.
If \fBindicatorOn\fR is true then the color is used as the background for
the indicator regardless of the select state.
If \fB\-indicatoron\fR is false, this color is used as the background for the
entire widget, in place of \fB\-background\fR or \fB\-activeBackground\fR,
whenever the widget is selected.
If specified as an empty string then no special color is used for
displaying when the widget is selected.
.OP \-selectimage selectImage SelectImage
Specifies an image to display (in place of the \fB\-image\fR option)
when the radiobutton is selected.
This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has been
177
178
179
180
181
182
183

184
185
186
187
188
189
190

191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205

206
207
208
209
210
211
212

213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220

221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229

230
231
232
233
234
235
236
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for radiobutton widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdeselect\fR
.
Deselects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to an
empty string.
If this radiobutton was not currently selected, the command has
no effect.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBflash\fR
.
Flashes the radiobutton.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the radiobutton
several times, alternating between active and normal colors.  At
the end of the flash the radiobutton is left in the same normal/active
state as when the command was invoked.
This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR
.
Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the radiobutton
with the mouse: selects the button and invokes
its associated Tcl command, if there is one.
The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
empty string if there is no command associated with the radiobutton.
This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBselect\fR
.
Selects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to the
value corresponding to this widget.
.SH BINDINGS
.PP







>

|





>















>







>








>









>







177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for radiobutton widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: deselect
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdeselect\fR
.
Deselects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to an
empty string.
If this radiobutton was not currently selected, the command has
no effect.
.\" METHOD: flash
.TP
\fIpathName \fBflash\fR
.
Flashes the radiobutton.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the radiobutton
several times, alternating between active and normal colors.  At
the end of the flash the radiobutton is left in the same normal/active
state as when the command was invoked.
This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
.\" METHOD: invoke
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR
.
Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the radiobutton
with the mouse: selects the button and invokes
its associated Tcl command, if there is one.
The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
empty string if there is no command associated with the radiobutton.
This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
.\" METHOD: select
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselect\fR
.
Selects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to the
value corresponding to this widget.
.SH BINDINGS
.PP
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260

261
262
263
264
265
.PP
If the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above
actions occur:  the radiobutton is completely non-responsive.
.PP
The behavior of radiobuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
checkbutton(n), labelframe(n), listbox(n), options(n), scale(n), ttk::radiobutton(n)

.SH KEYWORDS
radiobutton, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
>





259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
.PP
If the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above
actions occur:  the radiobutton is completely non-responsive.
.PP
The behavior of radiobuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
checkbutton(n), labelframe(n), listbox(n), options(n), scale(n),
ttk::radiobutton(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
radiobutton, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/raise.n.

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Make a button appear to be in a sibling frame that was created after
it. This is is often necessary when building GUIs in the style where
you create your activity widgets first before laying them out on the
display:
.CS
button .b \-text "Hi there!"
pack [frame .f \-background blue]
pack [label .f.l1 \-text "This is above"]
pack .b \-in .f
pack [label .f.l2 \-text "This is below"]
\fBraise\fR .b
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
lower(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
obscure, raise, stacking order
'\" Local Variables:







|
|
|
|
|







37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Make a button appear to be in a sibling frame that was created after
it. This is is often necessary when building GUIs in the style where
you create your activity widgets first before laying them out on the
display:
.CS
button .b -text "Hi there!"
pack [frame .f -background blue]
pack [label .f.l1 -text "This is above"]
pack .b -in .f
pack [label .f.l2 -text "This is below"]
\fBraise\fR .b
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
lower(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
obscure, raise, stacking order
'\" Local Variables:

Changes to doc/scale.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH scale n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
scale \- Create and manipulate 'scale' value-controlled slider widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBscale\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-foreground	\-relief
\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-repeatdelay
\-borderwidth	\-highlightcolor	\-repeatinterval
\-cursor	\-highlightthickness	\-takefocus
\-font	\-orient	\-troughcolor
.SE







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH scale n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
scale \- Create and manipulate 'scale' value-controlled slider widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBscale\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-foreground	\-relief
\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-repeatdelay
\-borderwidth	\-highlightcolor	\-repeatinterval
\-cursor	\-highlightthickness	\-takefocus
\-font	\-orient	\-troughcolor
.SE
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81


82
83
84
85
86
87
88
If the scale is disabled then the value may not be changed and the scale
will not activate.
If the scale is active, the slider is displayed using the color
specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR option.
.OP \-tickinterval tickInterval TickInterval
Must be a real value.
Determines the spacing between numerical
tick marks displayed below or to the left of the slider. The values will all be displayed with the same number of decimal places, which will be enough to ensure they are all accurate to within 20% of a tick interval.


If 0, no tick marks will be displayed.
.OP \-to to To
Specifies a real value corresponding
to the right or bottom end of the scale.
This value may be either less than or greater than the \fB\-from\fR option.
.OP \-variable variable Variable
Specifies the name of a global variable to link to the scale.  Whenever the







|
>
>







74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
If the scale is disabled then the value may not be changed and the scale
will not activate.
If the scale is active, the slider is displayed using the color
specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR option.
.OP \-tickinterval tickInterval TickInterval
Must be a real value.
Determines the spacing between numerical
tick marks displayed below or to the left of the slider. The values will all
be displayed with the same number of decimal places, which will be enough to
ensure they are all accurate to within 20% of a tick interval.
If 0, no tick marks will be displayed.
.OP \-to to To
Specifies a real value corresponding
to the right or bottom end of the scale.
This value may be either less than or greater than the \fB\-from\fR option.
.OP \-variable variable Variable
Specifies the name of a global variable to link to the scale.  Whenever the
139
140
141
142
143
144
145

146
147
148
149
150
151
152

153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167

168
169
170
171
172
173
174

175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183

184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195

196
197
198
199
200
201
202
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for scale widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscale\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscale\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcoords \fR?\fIvalue\fR?
.
Returns a list whose elements are the x and y coordinates of
the point along the centerline of the trough that corresponds
to \fIvalue\fR.
If \fIvalue\fR is omitted then the scale's current value is used.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fIx y\fR?
.
If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are omitted, returns the current value
of the scale.  If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they give
pixel coordinates within the widget;  the command returns
the scale value corresponding to the given pixel.
Only one of \fIx\fR or \fIy\fR is used:  for horizontal scales
\fIy\fR is ignored, and for vertical scales \fIx\fR is ignored.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
.
Returns a string indicating what part of the scale lies under
the coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.
A return value of \fBslider\fR means that the point is over
the slider;  \fBtrough1\fR means that the point is over the
portion of the slider above  or to the left of the slider;
and \fBtrough2\fR means that the point is over the portion
of the slider below or to the right of the slider.
If the point is not over one of these elements, an empty string
is returned.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBset \fIvalue\fR
.
This command is invoked to change the current value of the scale,
and hence the position at which the slider is displayed.  \fIValue\fR
gives the new value for the scale.
The command has no effect if the scale is disabled.







>

|





>















>







>









>












>







141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for scale widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscale\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscale\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: coords
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcoords \fR?\fIvalue\fR?
.
Returns a list whose elements are the x and y coordinates of
the point along the centerline of the trough that corresponds
to \fIvalue\fR.
If \fIvalue\fR is omitted then the scale's current value is used.
.\" METHOD: get
.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fIx y\fR?
.
If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are omitted, returns the current value
of the scale.  If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they give
pixel coordinates within the widget;  the command returns
the scale value corresponding to the given pixel.
Only one of \fIx\fR or \fIy\fR is used:  for horizontal scales
\fIy\fR is ignored, and for vertical scales \fIx\fR is ignored.
.\" METHOD: identify
.TP
\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
.
Returns a string indicating what part of the scale lies under
the coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.
A return value of \fBslider\fR means that the point is over
the slider;  \fBtrough1\fR means that the point is over the
portion of the slider above  or to the left of the slider;
and \fBtrough2\fR means that the point is over the portion
of the slider below or to the right of the slider.
If the point is not over one of these elements, an empty string
is returned.
.\" METHOD: set
.TP
\fIpathName \fBset \fIvalue\fR
.
This command is invoked to change the current value of the scale,
and hence the position at which the slider is displayed.  \fIValue\fR
gives the new value for the scale.
The command has no effect if the scale is disabled.

Changes to doc/scrollbar.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH scrollbar n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
scrollbar \- Create and manipulate 'scrollbar' scrolling control and indicator widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBscrollbar\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-highlightcolor	\-repeatdelay
\-background	\-highlightthickness	\-repeatinterval
\-borderwidth	\-jump	\-takefocus
\-cursor	\-orient	\-troughcolor
\-highlightbackground	\-relief
.SE







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH scrollbar n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
scrollbar \- Create and manipulate 'scrollbar' scrolling control and indicator widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBscrollbar\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-highlightcolor	\-repeatdelay
\-background	\-highlightthickness	\-repeatinterval
\-borderwidth	\-jump	\-takefocus
\-cursor	\-orient	\-troughcolor
\-highlightbackground	\-relief
.SE
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110

111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123

124
125
126
127
128
129
130

131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145

146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157

158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169

170
171
172
173
174

175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182

183
184
185
186
187
188
189
Scrollbars can be used to adjust the view in the associated window
by clicking or dragging with the mouse.  See the \fBBINDINGS\fR section
below for details.
.SH "ELEMENTS"
.PP
A scrollbar displays five elements, which are referred to in the
widget commands for the scrollbar:
.TP 10
\fBarrow1\fR
The top or left arrow in the scrollbar.
.TP 10
\fBtrough1\fR
The region between the slider and \fBarrow1\fR.
.TP 10
\fBslider\fR
The rectangle that indicates what is visible in the associated widget.
.TP 10
\fBtrough2\fR
The region between the slider and \fBarrow2\fR.
.TP 10
\fBarrow2\fR
The bottom or right arrow in the scrollbar.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP
The \fBscrollbar\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
command may be used to invoke various
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for scrollbar widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBactivate \fR?\fIelement\fR?
.
Marks the element indicated by \fIelement\fR as active, which
causes it to be displayed as specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR
and \fB\-activerelief\fR options.
The only element values understood by this command are \fBarrow1\fR,
\fBslider\fR, or \fBarrow2\fR.
If any other value is specified then no element of the scrollbar
will be active.
If \fIelement\fR is not specified, the command returns
the name of the element that is currently active, or an empty string
if no element is active.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscrollbar\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscrollbar\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelta \fIdeltaX deltaY\fR
.
Returns a real number indicating the fractional change in
the scrollbar setting that corresponds to a given change
in slider position.  For example, if the scrollbar is horizontal,
the result indicates how much the scrollbar setting must change
to move the slider \fIdeltaX\fR pixels to the right (\fIdeltaY\fR is
ignored in this case).
If the scrollbar is vertical, the result indicates how much the
scrollbar setting must change to move the slider \fIdeltaY\fR pixels
down.  The arguments and the result may be zero or negative.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBfraction \fIx y\fR
.
Returns a real number between 0 and 1 indicating where the point
given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lies in the trough area of the scrollbar.
The value 0 corresponds to the top or left of the trough, the
value 1 corresponds to the bottom or right, 0.5 corresponds to
the middle, and so on.
\fIX\fR and \fIy\fR must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar
widget.
If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR refer to a point outside the trough, the closest
point in the trough is used.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR
.
Returns the scrollbar settings in the form of a list whose
elements are the arguments to the most recent \fBset\fR widget command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
.
Returns the name of the element under the point given by \fIx\fR and
\fIy\fR (such as \fBarrow1\fR), or an empty string if the point does
not lie in any element of the scrollbar.
\fIX\fR and \fIy\fR must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar
widget.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBset \fIfirst last\fR
.
This command is invoked by the scrollbar's associated widget to
tell the scrollbar about the current view in the widget.
The command takes two arguments, each of which is a real fraction
between 0 and 1.







<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|

<
|













>













>







>















>












>












>





>








>







77
78
79
80
81
82
83

84
85

86
87

88
89

90
91

92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
Scrollbars can be used to adjust the view in the associated window
by clicking or dragging with the mouse.  See the \fBBINDINGS\fR section
below for details.
.SH "ELEMENTS"
.PP
A scrollbar displays five elements, which are referred to in the
widget commands for the scrollbar:

.IP \fBarrow1\fR 10
The top or left arrow in the scrollbar.

.IP \fBtrough1\fR 10
The region between the slider and \fBarrow1\fR.

.IP \fBslider\fR 10
The rectangle that indicates what is visible in the associated widget.

.IP \fBtrough2\fR 10
The region between the slider and \fBarrow2\fR.

.IP \fBarrow2\fR 10
The bottom or right arrow in the scrollbar.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP
The \fBscrollbar\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
command may be used to invoke various
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for scrollbar widgets:
.\" METHOD: activate
.TP
\fIpathName \fBactivate \fR?\fIelement\fR?
.
Marks the element indicated by \fIelement\fR as active, which
causes it to be displayed as specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR
and \fB\-activerelief\fR options.
The only element values understood by this command are \fBarrow1\fR,
\fBslider\fR, or \fBarrow2\fR.
If any other value is specified then no element of the scrollbar
will be active.
If \fIelement\fR is not specified, the command returns
the name of the element that is currently active, or an empty string
if no element is active.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscrollbar\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscrollbar\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: delta
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelta \fIdeltaX deltaY\fR
.
Returns a real number indicating the fractional change in
the scrollbar setting that corresponds to a given change
in slider position.  For example, if the scrollbar is horizontal,
the result indicates how much the scrollbar setting must change
to move the slider \fIdeltaX\fR pixels to the right (\fIdeltaY\fR is
ignored in this case).
If the scrollbar is vertical, the result indicates how much the
scrollbar setting must change to move the slider \fIdeltaY\fR pixels
down.  The arguments and the result may be zero or negative.
.\" METHOD: fraction
.TP
\fIpathName \fBfraction \fIx y\fR
.
Returns a real number between 0 and 1 indicating where the point
given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lies in the trough area of the scrollbar.
The value 0 corresponds to the top or left of the trough, the
value 1 corresponds to the bottom or right, 0.5 corresponds to
the middle, and so on.
\fIX\fR and \fIy\fR must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar
widget.
If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR refer to a point outside the trough, the closest
point in the trough is used.
.\" METHOD: get
.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR
.
Returns the scrollbar settings in the form of a list whose
elements are the arguments to the most recent \fBset\fR widget command.
.\" METHOD: identify
.TP
\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
.
Returns the name of the element under the point given by \fIx\fR and
\fIy\fR (such as \fBarrow1\fR), or an empty string if the point does
not lie in any element of the scrollbar.
\fIX\fR and \fIy\fR must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar
widget.
.\" METHOD: set
.TP
\fIpathName \fBset \fIfirst last\fR
.
This command is invoked by the scrollbar's associated widget to
tell the scrollbar about the current view in the widget.
The command takes two arguments, each of which is a real fraction
between 0 and 1.
200
201
202
203
204
205
206

207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216

217
218
219
220
221
222
223
must change its view.
The scrollbar makes the notification by evaluating a Tcl command
generated from the scrollbar's \fB\-command\fR option.
The command may take any of the following forms.
In each case, \fIprefix\fR is the contents of the
\fB\-command\fR option, which usually has a form like
.QW "\fB.t yview\fR" .

.TP
\fIprefix \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR
.
\fIFraction\fR is a real number between 0 and 1.
The widget should adjust its view so that the point given
by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget.
If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the
document.  1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333
refers to a point one-third of the way through the document,
and so on.

.TP
\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR
.
The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages.
It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page;  typically
it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there
is a slight overlap between the old and new views.







>










>







203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
must change its view.
The scrollbar makes the notification by evaluating a Tcl command
generated from the scrollbar's \fB\-command\fR option.
The command may take any of the following forms.
In each case, \fIprefix\fR is the contents of the
\fB\-command\fR option, which usually has a form like
.QW "\fB.t yview\fR" .
.\" METHOD: moveto
.TP
\fIprefix \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR
.
\fIFraction\fR is a real number between 0 and 1.
The widget should adjust its view so that the point given
by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget.
If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the
document.  1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333
refers to a point one-third of the way through the document,
and so on.
.\" METHOD: scroll
.TP
\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR
.
The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages.
It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page;  typically
it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there
is a slight overlap between the old and new views.
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
.IP [14]
The End key adjusts the view to the bottom (right edge) of the document.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Create a window with a scrollable \fBtext\fR widget:
.CS
toplevel .tl
text .tl.t \-yscrollcommand {.tl.s set}
\fBscrollbar\fR .tl.s \-command {.tl.t yview}
grid .tl.t .tl.s \-sticky nsew
grid columnconfigure .tl 0 \-weight 1
grid rowconfigure .tl 0 \-weight 1
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk:scrollbar(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
scrollbar, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
|
|
|
|








309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
.IP [14]
The End key adjusts the view to the bottom (right edge) of the document.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Create a window with a scrollable \fBtext\fR widget:
.CS
toplevel .tl
text .tl.t -yscrollcommand {.tl.s set}
\fBscrollbar\fR .tl.s -command {.tl.t yview}
grid .tl.t .tl.s -sticky nsew
grid columnconfigure .tl 0 -weight 1
grid rowconfigure .tl 0 -weight 1
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk:scrollbar(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
scrollbar, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/selection.n.

22
23
24
25
26
27
28

29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
.PP
Note that for management of the \fBCLIPBOARD\fR selection (see below), the
\fBclipboard\fR command may also be used.
.PP
The first argument to \fBselection\fR determines the format of the
rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command.  The following
forms are currently supported:

.TP
\fBselection clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR?
.
If \fIselection\fR exists anywhere on \fIwindow\fR's display, clear it
so that no window owns the selection anymore.  \fISelection\fR
specifies the X selection that should be cleared, and should be an
atom name such as \fBPRIMARY\fR or \fBCLIPBOARD\fR; see the Inter-Client
Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
\fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and \fIwindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fBselection get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR?
.
Retrieves the value of \fIselection\fR from \fIwindow\fR's display and
returns it as a result.  \fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and
\fIwindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
\fIType\fR specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned
(the desired







>

|









>

|







22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
.PP
Note that for management of the \fBCLIPBOARD\fR selection (see below), the
\fBclipboard\fR command may also be used.
.PP
The first argument to \fBselection\fR determines the format of the
rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command.  The following
forms are currently supported:
.\" METHOD: clear
.TP
\fBselection clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fI window\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fI selection\fR?
.
If \fIselection\fR exists anywhere on \fIwindow\fR's display, clear it
so that no window owns the selection anymore.  \fISelection\fR
specifies the X selection that should be cleared, and should be an
atom name such as \fBPRIMARY\fR or \fBCLIPBOARD\fR; see the Inter-Client
Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
\fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and \fIwindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: get
.TP
\fBselection get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fI window\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fI selection\fR? ?\fB\-type\fI type\fR?
.
Retrieves the value of \fIselection\fR from \fIwindow\fR's display and
returns it as a result.  \fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and
\fIwindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
\fIType\fR specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned
(the desired
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
than the selection type; see the ICCCM for all the confusing details).
If the selection is returned in a non-string format, such as \fBINTEGER\fR
or \fBATOM\fR, the \fBselection\fR command converts it to string format as a
collection of fields separated by spaces: atoms are converted to their
textual names, and anything else is converted to hexadecimal integers.
Note that \fBselection get\fR does not retrieve the selection in the
\fBUTF8_STRING\fR format unless told to.

.TP
\fBselection handle\fR ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIs\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fIt\fR? ?\fB\-format\fR \fIf\fR? \fIwindow command\fR
.
Creates a handler for selection requests, such that \fIcommand\fR will
be executed whenever selection \fIs\fR is owned by \fIwindow\fR and
someone attempts to retrieve it in the form given by type \fIt\fR
(e.g. \fIt\fR is specified in the \fBselection get\fR command).
\fIS\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR, \fIt\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR, and
\fIf\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.  If \fIcommand\fR is an empty string







>

|







59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
than the selection type; see the ICCCM for all the confusing details).
If the selection is returned in a non-string format, such as \fBINTEGER\fR
or \fBATOM\fR, the \fBselection\fR command converts it to string format as a
collection of fields separated by spaces: atoms are converted to their
textual names, and anything else is converted to hexadecimal integers.
Note that \fBselection get\fR does not retrieve the selection in the
\fBUTF8_STRING\fR format unless told to.
.\" METHOD: handle
.TP
\fBselection handle\fR ?\fB\-selection\fI s\fR? ?\fB\-type\fI t\fR? ?\fB\-format\fI f\fR? \fIwindow command\fR
.
Creates a handler for selection requests, such that \fIcommand\fR will
be executed whenever selection \fIs\fR is owned by \fIwindow\fR and
someone attempts to retrieve it in the form given by type \fIt\fR
(e.g. \fIt\fR is specified in the \fBselection get\fR command).
\fIS\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR, \fIt\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR, and
\fIf\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.  If \fIcommand\fR is an empty string
115
116
117
118
119
120
121

122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145




146
147



148
149
150
151

152
153





154
155
156
157


158
159


160
161


162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
.PP
The \fIformat\fR argument is needed only for compatibility with
selection requesters that do not use Tk.  If Tk is being
used to retrieve the selection then the value is converted back to
a string at the requesting end, so \fIformat\fR is
irrelevant.
.RE

.TP
\fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR?
.TP
\fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-command\fR \fIcommand\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? \fIwindow\fR
.
The first form of \fBselection own\fR returns the path name of the
window in this application that owns \fIselection\fR on the display
containing \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no window in this
application owns the selection.  \fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and
\fIwindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
.RS
.PP
The second form of \fBselection own\fR causes \fIwindow\fR to become
the new owner of \fIselection\fR on \fIwindow\fR's display, returning
an empty string as result. The existing owner, if any, is notified
that it has lost the selection.
If \fIcommand\fR is specified, it is a Tcl script to execute when
some other window claims ownership of the selection away from
\fIwindow\fR.  \fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY.
.RE
.SH WIDGET FACILITIES
.PP
The \fBtext\fR, \fBentry\fR, \fBttk::entry\fR, \fBlistbox\fR, \fBspinbox\fR and \fBttk::spinbox\fR widgets have the option \fB\-exportselection\fR.  If a widget has this option set to boolean \fBtrue\fR, then (in an unsafe interpreter) a selection made in the widget is automatically written to the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection.




.PP
A GUI event, for example \fB<<PasteSelection>>\fR, can copy the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection to certain widgets.  This copy is implemented by a widget binding to the event.  The binding script makes appropriate calls to the \fBselection\fR command.



.PP
.SH PORTABILITY ISSUES
.PP
On X11, the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is a system-wide feature of the X server, allowing communication between different processes that are X11 clients.

.PP
On Windows, the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is not provided by the system, but only by Tk, and so it is shared only between windows of a parent interpreter and its child interpreters.  It is not shared between interpreters in different processes or different threads.  Each parent interpreter has a separate \fBPRIMARY\fR selection that is shared only with its child interpreters which are not safe interpreters.





.PP
.SH SECURITY
.PP
A safe interpreter cannot read from the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection because its \fBselection\fR command is hidden.  For this reason the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection cannot be written to the Tk widgets of a safe interpreter.


.PP
A Tk widget can have its option \fB\-exportselection\fR set to boolean \fBtrue\fR, but in a safe interpreter this option has no effect: writing from the widget to the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is disabled.


.PP
These are security features.  A safe interpreter may run untrusted code, and it is a security risk if this untrusted code can read or write the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection used by other interpreters.


.PP
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
On X11 platforms, one of the standard selections available is the
\fBSECONDARY\fR selection. Hardly anything uses it, but here is how to read
it using Tk:
.PP
.CS
set selContents [\fBselection get\fR \-selection SECONDARY]
.CE
.PP
Many different types of data may be available for a selection; the
special type \fBTARGETS\fR allows you to get a list of available types:
.PP
.CS
foreach type [\fBselection get\fR \-type TARGETS] {
   puts "Selection PRIMARY supports type $type"
}
.CE
.PP
To claim the selection, you must first set up a handler to supply the
data for the selection. Then you have to claim the selection...
.CS
# Set up the data handler ready for incoming requests
set foo "This is a string with some data in it... blah blah"
\fBselection handle\fR \-selection SECONDARY . getData
proc getData {offset maxChars} {
   puts "Retrieving selection starting at $offset"
   return [string range $::foo $offset [expr {$offset+$maxChars-1}]]
}

# Now we grab the selection itself
puts "Claiming selection"
\fBselection own\fR \-command lost \-selection SECONDARY .
proc lost {} {
   puts "Lost selection"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
clipboard(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
clear, format, handler, ICCCM, own, selection, target, type
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







>

|

|



















|
>
>
>
>

|
>
>
>



|
>

|
>
>
>
>
>



|
>
>

|
>
>

|
>
>








|






|









|







|











118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
.PP
The \fIformat\fR argument is needed only for compatibility with
selection requesters that do not use Tk.  If Tk is being
used to retrieve the selection then the value is converted back to
a string at the requesting end, so \fIformat\fR is
irrelevant.
.RE
.\" METHOD: own
.TP
\fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fI window\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fI selection\fR?
.TP
\fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-command\fI command\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fI selection\fR? \fIwindow\fR
.
The first form of \fBselection own\fR returns the path name of the
window in this application that owns \fIselection\fR on the display
containing \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no window in this
application owns the selection.  \fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and
\fIwindow\fR defaults to
.QW . .
.RS
.PP
The second form of \fBselection own\fR causes \fIwindow\fR to become
the new owner of \fIselection\fR on \fIwindow\fR's display, returning
an empty string as result. The existing owner, if any, is notified
that it has lost the selection.
If \fIcommand\fR is specified, it is a Tcl script to execute when
some other window claims ownership of the selection away from
\fIwindow\fR.  \fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY.
.RE
.SH WIDGET FACILITIES
.PP
The \fBtext\fR, \fBentry\fR, \fBttk::entry\fR, \fBlistbox\fR, \fBspinbox\fR
and \fBttk::spinbox\fR widgets have the option \fB\-exportselection\fR.  If a
widget has this option set to boolean \fBtrue\fR, then (in an unsafe
interpreter) a selection made in the widget is automatically written to the
\fBPRIMARY\fR selection.
.PP
A GUI event, for example \fB<<PasteSelection>>\fR, can copy the \fBPRIMARY\fR
selection to certain widgets.  This copy is implemented by a widget binding to
the event.  The binding script makes appropriate calls to the \fBselection\fR
command.
.PP
.SH PORTABILITY ISSUES
.PP
On X11, the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is a system-wide feature of the X server,
allowing communication between different processes that are X11 clients.
.PP
On Windows, the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is not provided by the system, but
only by Tk, and so it is shared only between windows of a parent interpreter
and its child interpreters.  It is not shared between interpreters in
different processes or different threads.  Each parent interpreter has a
separate \fBPRIMARY\fR selection that is shared only with its child
interpreters which are not safe interpreters.
.PP
.SH SECURITY
.PP
A safe interpreter cannot read from the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection because its
\fBselection\fR command is hidden.  For this reason the \fBPRIMARY\fR
selection cannot be written to the Tk widgets of a safe interpreter.
.PP
A Tk widget can have its option \fB\-exportselection\fR set to boolean
\fBtrue\fR, but in a safe interpreter this option has no effect: writing
from the widget to the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is disabled.
.PP
These are security features.  A safe interpreter may run untrusted code, and
it is a security risk if this untrusted code can read or write the
\fBPRIMARY\fR selection used by other interpreters.
.PP
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
On X11 platforms, one of the standard selections available is the
\fBSECONDARY\fR selection. Hardly anything uses it, but here is how to read
it using Tk:
.PP
.CS
set selContents [\fBselection get\fR -selection SECONDARY]
.CE
.PP
Many different types of data may be available for a selection; the
special type \fBTARGETS\fR allows you to get a list of available types:
.PP
.CS
foreach type [\fBselection get\fR -type TARGETS] {
   puts "Selection PRIMARY supports type $type"
}
.CE
.PP
To claim the selection, you must first set up a handler to supply the
data for the selection. Then you have to claim the selection...
.CS
# Set up the data handler ready for incoming requests
set foo "This is a string with some data in it... blah blah"
\fBselection handle\fR -selection SECONDARY . getData
proc getData {offset maxChars} {
   puts "Retrieving selection starting at $offset"
   return [string range $::foo $offset [expr {$offset+$maxChars-1}]]
}

# Now we grab the selection itself
puts "Claiming selection"
\fBselection own\fR -command lost -selection SECONDARY .
proc lost {} {
   puts "Lost selection"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
clipboard(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
clear, format, handler, ICCCM, own, selection, target, type
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/send.n.

26
27
28
29
30
31
32

33
34

35
36
37
38
39
40

41
42

43
44
45

46
47

48
49
50
51
52
53
54
contained entirely within the \fIcmd\fR argument.  If one or
more \fIarg\fRs are present, they are concatenated to form the
command to be executed, just as for the \fBeval\fR command.
.PP
If the initial arguments of the command begin with
.QW \-
they are treated as options.  The following options are currently defined:

.TP
\fB\-async\fR

Requests asynchronous invocation.  In this case the \fBsend\fR
command will complete immediately without waiting for \fIcmd\fR
to complete in the target application;  no result will be available
and errors in the sent command will be ignored.
If the target application is in the same process as the sending
application then the \fB\-async\fR option is ignored.

.TP
\fB\-displayof\fR \fIpathName\fR

Specifies that the target application's main window is on the display
of the window given by \fIpathName\fR, instead of the display containing
the application's main window.

.TP
\fB\-\|\-\fR

Serves no purpose except to terminate the list of options.  This
option is needed only if \fIapp\fR could contain a leading
.QW \-
character.
.SH "APPLICATION NAMES"
.PP
The name of an application is set initially from the name of the







>


>






>

|
>



>


>







26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
contained entirely within the \fIcmd\fR argument.  If one or
more \fIarg\fRs are present, they are concatenated to form the
command to be executed, just as for the \fBeval\fR command.
.PP
If the initial arguments of the command begin with
.QW \-
they are treated as options.  The following options are currently defined:
.\" OPTION: -async
.TP
\fB\-async\fR
.
Requests asynchronous invocation.  In this case the \fBsend\fR
command will complete immediately without waiting for \fIcmd\fR
to complete in the target application;  no result will be available
and errors in the sent command will be ignored.
If the target application is in the same process as the sending
application then the \fB\-async\fR option is ignored.
.\" OPTION: -displayof
.TP
\fB\-displayof\fI pathName\fR
.
Specifies that the target application's main window is on the display
of the window given by \fIpathName\fR, instead of the display containing
the application's main window.
.\" OPTION: --
.TP
\fB\-\|\-\fR
.
Serves no purpose except to terminate the list of options.  This
option is needed only if \fIapp\fR could contain a leading
.QW \-
character.
.SH "APPLICATION NAMES"
.PP
The name of an application is set initially from the name of the
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
functionality is provided by the \fBdde\fR command instead.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
This script fragment can be used to make an application that only runs
once on a particular display.
.CS
if {[tk appname FoobarApp] ne "FoobarApp"} {
    \fBsend\fR \-async FoobarApp RemoteStart $argv
    exit
}
# The command that will be called remotely, which raises
# the application main window and opens the requested files
proc RemoteStart args {
    raise .
    foreach filename $args {







|







92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
functionality is provided by the \fBdde\fR command instead.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
This script fragment can be used to make an application that only runs
once on a particular display.
.CS
if {[tk appname FoobarApp] ne "FoobarApp"} {
    \fBsend\fR -async FoobarApp RemoteStart $argv
    exit
}
# The command that will be called remotely, which raises
# the application main window and opens the requested files
proc RemoteStart args {
    raise .
    foreach filename $args {

Changes to doc/spinbox.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH spinbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
spinbox \- Create and manipulate 'spinbox' value spinner widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBspinbox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-highlightthickness	\-repeatinterval
\-background	\-insertbackground	\-selectbackground
\-borderwidth	\-insertborderwidth	\-selectborderwidth
\-cursor	\-insertontime	\-selectforeground
\-exportselection	\-insertwidth	\-takefocus
\-font	\-insertofftime	\-textvariable







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH spinbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
spinbox \- Create and manipulate 'spinbox' value spinner widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBspinbox\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-activebackground	\-highlightthickness	\-repeatinterval
\-background	\-insertbackground	\-selectbackground
\-borderwidth	\-insertborderwidth	\-selectborderwidth
\-cursor	\-insertontime	\-selectforeground
\-exportselection	\-insertwidth	\-takefocus
\-font	\-insertofftime	\-textvariable
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox loses focus.
.IP \fBkey\fR 10
The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox is edited.
.IP \fBall\fR 10
The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called for all above conditions.
.PP
It is possible to perform percent substitutions on the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR scripts, just as you would in a \fBbind\fR script.  The
following substitutions are recognized:
.PP
.IP \fB%d\fR 5
Type of action: 1 for \fBinsert\fR, 0 for \fBdelete\fR,
or \-1 for focus, forced or textvariable validation.
.IP \fB%i\fR 5
Index of char string to be inserted/deleted, if any, otherwise \-1.
.IP \fB%P\fR 5







|
|







164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox loses focus.
.IP \fBkey\fR 10
The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox is edited.
.IP \fBall\fR 10
The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called for all above conditions.
.PP
It is possible to perform percent substitutions on the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR scripts, just as you would in a \fBbind\fR script.
The following substitutions are recognized:
.PP
.IP \fB%d\fR 5
Type of action: 1 for \fBinsert\fR, 0 for \fBdelete\fR,
or \-1 for focus, forced or textvariable validation.
.IP \fB%i\fR 5
Index of char string to be inserted/deleted, if any, otherwise \-1.
.IP \fB%P\fR 5
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252

253
254
255
256

257
258
259
260

261
262
263
264
265

266
267
268
269

270
271
272
273

274
275
276
277
278

279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296

297
298

299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306

307
308

309
310
311
312

313
314

315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326

327
328

329
330
331
332
333
334
335

336
337

338

339
340

341
342

343
344

345
346
347

348
349

350

351
352

353
354

355
356

357
358

359
360

361
362
363
364
365

366
367
368
369
370
371

372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379

380
381

382
383
384
385
386

387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397

398
399
400
401
402

403
404
405
406

407
408
409
410
411

412
413
414
415

416
417
418
419
420
421
422

423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435

436
437

438
439
440

441
442

443
444
445
446

447
448

449
450
451
452
453
454

455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464

465
466
467
468

469
470
471
472
473

474
475
476
477
478
479
480
\fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the
spinbox widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the
\fB\-invalidcommand\fR.  Such editions will override the one that was being
validated.  If you wish to edit the value of the widget
during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should
include the command
.CS
     \fI%W config \-validate %v\fR
.CE
in the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR (whichever one you
were editing the spinbox widget from).  It is also recommended to not set an
associated \fB\-textvariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the
spinbox widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR.
.PP
Also, the \fB-validate\fR option will set itself to \fBnone\fR when the
spinbox value gets changed because of adjustment of \fB-from\fR or \fB-to\fR
and the \fB-validatecommand\fR returns false. For instance
.CS
     \fIspinbox pathName \-from 1 \-to 10 \-validate all \-validatecommand {return 0}\fR
.CE
will in fact set the \fB-validate\fR option to \fBnone\fR because the default
value for the spinbox gets changed (due to the \fB-from\fR and \fB-to\fR
options) to a value not accepted by the validation script.
.PP
Moreover, forced validation is performed when invoking any spinbutton of
the spinbox. If the validation script returns false in this situation,
then the \fB-validate\fR option will be automatically set to \fBnone\fR.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP
The \fBspinbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
name is \fIpathName\fR.  This command may be used to invoke various
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.
.SS INDICES
.PP
Many of the widget commands for spinboxes take one or more indices as
arguments.  An index specifies a particular character in the spinbox's
string, in any of the following ways:
.TP 12
\fInumber\fR

Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
to the first character in the string.
.TP 12
\fBanchor\fR

Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
\fBselect from\fR and \fBselect adjust\fR widget commands.
.TP 12
\fBend\fR

Indicates the character just after the last one in the spinbox's string.
This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length
of the spinbox's string.
.TP 12
\fBinsert\fR

Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the
insertion cursor.
.TP 12
\fBsel.first\fR

Indicates the first character in the selection.  It is an error to
use this form if the selection is not in the spinbox window.
.TP 12
\fBsel.last\fR

Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection.
It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the
spinbox window.
.TP 12
\fB@\fInumber\fR

In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the
spinbox's window;  the character spanning that x-coordinate is used.
For example,
.QW \fB@0\fR
indicates the left-most character in the window.
.LP
Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g.
.QW \fBe\fR
or
.QW \fBsel.f\fR .
In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the
nearest legal value.
Indexes support the same simple interpretation as
for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index
arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR.
.SS SUBCOMMANDS
.PP
The following commands are possible for spinbox widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR

Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the
character given by \fIindex\fR.
The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of
the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character
(in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give
the width and height of the character, in pixels.
The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area
of the window.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR

Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBspinbox\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBspinbox\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?

Delete one or more elements of the spinbox.
\fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and
\fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last
one to delete.
If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1,
i.e. a single character is deleted.
This command returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR

Returns the spinbox's string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR

Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character
given by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBidentify\fI x y\fR

Returns the name of the window element corresponding to coordinates
\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR in the spinbox.  Return value is one of:
\fBnone\fR, \fBbuttondown\fR, \fBbuttonup\fR, \fBentry\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR

Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR

Insert the characters of \fIstring\fR just before the character
indicated by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fI element\fR

Causes the specified element, either \fBbuttondown\fR or \fBbuttonup\fR,
to be invoked, triggering the action associated with it.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR

This command is used to implement scanning on spinboxes.  It has
two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx\fR

Records \fIx\fR and the current view in the spinbox window;  used in
conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands.  Typically this
command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget.  It
returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx\fR

This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR argument
and the \fIx\fR argument to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for
the widget.  It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the
difference in x-coordinates.  This command is typically associated
with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
dragging the spinbox at high speed through the window.  The return
value is an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR

This command is used to adjust the selection within a spinbox.  It
has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection adjust \fIindex\fR

Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by
\fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR
(i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR).  The other
end of the selection is made the anchor point for future
\fBselect to\fR commands.  If the selection
is not currently in the spinbox, then a new selection is created to
include the characters between \fIindex\fR and the most recent
selection anchor point, inclusive.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR

Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget.  If the
selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection element\fR ?\fIelement\fR?

Sets or gets the currently selected element.  If a spinbutton element
is specified, it will be displayed depressed.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection from \fIindex\fR

Set the selection anchor point to just before the character
given by \fIindex\fR.  Does not change the selection.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection present\fR

Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the spinbox,
0 if nothing is selected.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart end\fR

Sets the selection to include the characters starting with
the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just
before \fIend\fR.
If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an
earlier one, then the spinbox's selection is cleared.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection to \fIindex\fR

If \fIindex\fR is before the anchor point, set the selection
to the characters from \fIindex\fR up to but not including
the anchor point.
If \fIindex\fR is the same as the anchor point, do nothing.
If \fIindex\fR is after the anchor point, set the selection
to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including
\fIindex\fR.
The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect from\fR
or \fBselect adjust\fR command in this widget.
If the selection is not in this widget then a new selection is
created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget.
Returns an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBset\fR ?\fIstring\fR?

If \fIstring\fR is specified, the spinbox will try and set it to this
value, otherwise it just returns the spinbox's string.
If validation is on, it will occur when setting the string.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR

This command is used to force an evaluation of the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
independent of the conditions specified by the \fB\-validate\fR option.
This is done by temporarily setting the \fB\-validate\fR option to \fBall\fR.
It returns 0 or 1.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR

This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR

Returns a list containing two elements.
Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
20% of the spinbox's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
option.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIindex\fR

Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR
is displayed at the left edge of the window.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR

Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR

This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer or a float, but if it is a float then
it is converted to an integer, rounded away from 0.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation
of one of these.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR







|






|
|
|

|

|
|




|

















>




>




>





>




>




>





>


















>


>








>

|
>




>


>












>


>







>


>

>


>


>


>



>


>

>


>


>


>


>

|
>





>






>








>


>





>











>





>




>





>




>







>













>


>



>


>




>


>






>










>




>





>







209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
\fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the
spinbox widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the
\fB\-invalidcommand\fR.  Such editions will override the one that was being
validated.  If you wish to edit the value of the widget
during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should
include the command
.CS
     \fI%W config -validate %v\fR
.CE
in the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR (whichever one you
were editing the spinbox widget from).  It is also recommended to not set an
associated \fB\-textvariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the
spinbox widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR.
.PP
Also, the \fB\-validate\fR option will set itself to \fBnone\fR when the
spinbox value gets changed because of adjustment of \fB\-from\fR or \fB\-to\fR
and the \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns false. For instance
.CS
     \fIspinbox pathName -from 1 -to 10 -validate all -validatecommand {return 0}\fR
.CE
will in fact set the \fB\-validate\fR option to \fBnone\fR because the default
value for the spinbox gets changed (due to the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR
options) to a value not accepted by the validation script.
.PP
Moreover, forced validation is performed when invoking any spinbutton of
the spinbox. If the validation script returns false in this situation,
then the \fB\-validate\fR option will be automatically set to \fBnone\fR.
.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
.PP
The \fBspinbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
name is \fIpathName\fR.  This command may be used to invoke various
operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.
.SS INDICES
.PP
Many of the widget commands for spinboxes take one or more indices as
arguments.  An index specifies a particular character in the spinbox's
string, in any of the following ways:
.TP 12
\fInumber\fR
.
Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
to the first character in the string.
.TP 12
\fBanchor\fR
.
Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
\fBselect from\fR and \fBselect adjust\fR widget commands.
.TP 12
\fBend\fR
.
Indicates the character just after the last one in the spinbox's string.
This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length
of the spinbox's string.
.TP 12
\fBinsert\fR
.
Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the
insertion cursor.
.TP 12
\fBsel.first\fR
.
Indicates the first character in the selection.  It is an error to
use this form if the selection is not in the spinbox window.
.TP 12
\fBsel.last\fR
.
Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection.
It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the
spinbox window.
.TP 12
\fB@\fInumber\fR
.
In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the
spinbox's window;  the character spanning that x-coordinate is used.
For example,
.QW \fB@0\fR
indicates the left-most character in the window.
.LP
Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g.
.QW \fBe\fR
or
.QW \fBsel.f\fR .
In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the
nearest legal value.
Indexes support the same simple interpretation as
for the command \fBstring index\fR, with simple integer index
arithmetic and indexing relative to \fBend\fR.
.SS SUBCOMMANDS
.PP
The following commands are possible for spinbox widgets:
.\" METHOD: bbox
.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the
character given by \fIindex\fR.
The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of
the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character
(in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give
the width and height of the character, in pixels.
The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area
of the window.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBspinbox\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
this case the command returns an empty string.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBspinbox\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: delete
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
.
Delete one or more elements of the spinbox.
\fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and
\fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last
one to delete.
If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1,
i.e. a single character is deleted.
This command returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: get
.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR
.
Returns the spinbox's string.
.\" METHOD: icursor
.TP
\fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR
.
Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character
given by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: identify
.TP
\fIpathName \fBidentify\fI x y\fR
.
Returns the name of the window element corresponding to coordinates
\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR in the spinbox.  Return value is one of:
\fBnone\fR, \fBbuttondown\fR, \fBbuttonup\fR, \fBentry\fR.
.\" METHOD: index
.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR
.
Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR.
.\" METHOD: insert
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR
.
Insert the characters of \fIstring\fR just before the character
indicated by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: invoke
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fI element\fR
.
Causes the specified element, either \fBbuttondown\fR or \fBbuttonup\fR,
to be invoked, triggering the action associated with it.
.\" METHOD: scan
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan\fI option args\fR
.
This command is used to implement scanning on spinboxes.  It has
two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx\fR
.
Records \fIx\fR and the current view in the spinbox window;  used in
conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands.  Typically this
command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget.  It
returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx\fR
.
This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR argument
and the \fIx\fR argument to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for
the widget.  It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the
difference in x-coordinates.  This command is typically associated
with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
dragging the spinbox at high speed through the window.  The return
value is an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: selection
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR
.
This command is used to adjust the selection within a spinbox.  It
has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection adjust \fIindex\fR
.
Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by
\fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR
(i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR).  The other
end of the selection is made the anchor point for future
\fBselect to\fR commands.  If the selection
is not currently in the spinbox, then a new selection is created to
include the characters between \fIindex\fR and the most recent
selection anchor point, inclusive.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR
.
Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget.  If the
selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection element\fR ?\fIelement\fR?
.
Sets or gets the currently selected element.  If a spinbutton element
is specified, it will be displayed depressed.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection from \fIindex\fR
.
Set the selection anchor point to just before the character
given by \fIindex\fR.  Does not change the selection.
Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection present\fR
.
Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the spinbox,
0 if nothing is selected.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart end\fR
.
Sets the selection to include the characters starting with
the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just
before \fIend\fR.
If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an
earlier one, then the spinbox's selection is cleared.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBselection to \fIindex\fR
.
If \fIindex\fR is before the anchor point, set the selection
to the characters from \fIindex\fR up to but not including
the anchor point.
If \fIindex\fR is the same as the anchor point, do nothing.
If \fIindex\fR is after the anchor point, set the selection
to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including
\fIindex\fR.
The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect from\fR
or \fBselect adjust\fR command in this widget.
If the selection is not in this widget then a new selection is
created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget.
Returns an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: set
.TP
\fIpathName \fBset\fR ?\fIstring\fR?
.
If \fIstring\fR is specified, the spinbox will try and set it to this
value, otherwise it just returns the spinbox's string.
If validation is on, it will occur when setting the string.
.\" METHOD: validate
.TP
\fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR
.
This command is used to force an evaluation of the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
independent of the conditions specified by the \fB\-validate\fR option.
This is done by temporarily setting the \fB\-validate\fR option to \fBall\fR.
It returns 0 or 1.
.\" METHOD: xview
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
.
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
.
Returns a list containing two elements.
Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
20% of the spinbox's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
option.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIindex\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR
is displayed at the left edge of the window.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer or a float, but if it is a float then
it is converted to an integer, rounded away from 0.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBpages\fR or \fBunits\fR or an abbreviation
of one of these.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR

Changes to doc/sysnotify.n.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17


18
19
20
21
22
23
24
.\" Text automatically generated by txt2man
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2020 Kevin Walzer/WordTech Communications LLC.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH tk sysnotify n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros

.SH NAME
sysnotify \- Creates a notification window with a title and message.
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtk sysnotify\fR \fItitle\fR \fImessage\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk sysnotify\fR command creates a platform-specific system notification alert. Its intent is to provide a brief, unobtrusive notification to the user by popping up a window that briefly appears in a corner of the screen.


.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Here is an example of the \fBtk sysnotify\fR code:
.PP
.CS
tk sysnotify "Alert" \e
      "This is just a test of the Tk System Notification Code."









>



|



|
>
>







1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.\" Text automatically generated by txt2man
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2020 Kevin Walzer/WordTech Communications LLC.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH tk sysnotify n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
sysnotify \- Creates a notification window with a title and message.
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtk sysnotify\fI title message\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk sysnotify\fR command creates a platform-specific system notification
alert. Its intent is to provide a brief, unobtrusive notification to the user
by popping up a window that briefly appears in a corner of the screen.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Here is an example of the \fBtk sysnotify\fR code:
.PP
.CS
tk sysnotify "Alert" \e
      "This is just a test of the Tk System Notification Code."

Changes to doc/systray.n.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
11
12
13
14

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.\" Text automatically generated by txt2man
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2020 Kevin Walzer/WordTech Communications LLC.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH tk systray n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros

.SH NAME
systray \- Creates an icon display in the platform-specific system tray.
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtk systray create \fI\-image image\fR \fI?\-text text\fR? \fI?\-button1 callback?\fR \fI?\-button3 callback?\fR
.sp

\fBtk systray configure \fI?option? ?value option value ...?\fR
.sp
\fBtk systray exists\fR
.sp
\fBtk systray destroy\fR
.BE
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
.\" METHOD: create
The \fBtk systray create\fR command creates an icon in the platform-specific
tray. The widget is configured with a Tk image for the icon display, an
optional string for display in a tooltip, and optional callbacks that are









>



<
|
>

<

<

|







1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14
15
16

17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.\" Text automatically generated by txt2man
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2020 Kevin Walzer/WordTech Communications LLC.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH tk systray n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
systray \- Creates an icon display in the platform-specific system tray.
.SH SYNOPSIS

.nf
\fBtk systray create \-image \fIimage\fR ?\fB\-text \fItext\fR? ?\fB\-button1 \fIcallback\fR? ?\fB\-button3 \fIcallback\fR?
\fBtk systray configure \fI?option? ?value option value ...?\fR

\fBtk systray exists\fR

\fBtk systray destroy\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
.\" METHOD: create
The \fBtk systray create\fR command creates an icon in the platform-specific
tray. The widget is configured with a Tk image for the icon display, an
optional string for display in a tooltip, and optional callbacks that are

Changes to doc/text.n.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
text, tk_textCopy, tk_textCut, tk_textPaste \- Create and manipulate 'text' hypertext editing widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBtext\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
\fBtk_textCopy\fR \fIpathName\fR
\fBtk_textCut\fR \fIpathName\fR
\fBtk_textPaste\fR \fIpathName\fR

.SO
\-background	\-highlightthickness	\-relief
\-borderwidth	\-insertbackground	\-selectbackground
\-cursor	\-insertborderwidth	\-selectborderwidth
\-exportselection	\-insertofftime	\-selectforeground
\-font	\-insertontime	\-setgrid
\-foreground	\-insertwidth	\-takefocus







|
|
|
|
>







9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
text, tk_textCopy, tk_textCut, tk_textPaste \- Create and manipulate 'text' hypertext editing widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBtext\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
\fBtk_textCopy\fI pathName\fR
\fBtk_textCut\fI pathName\fR
\fBtk_textPaste\fI pathName\fR
.fi
.SO
\-background	\-highlightthickness	\-relief
\-borderwidth	\-insertbackground	\-selectbackground
\-cursor	\-insertborderwidth	\-selectborderwidth
\-exportselection	\-insertofftime	\-selectforeground
\-font	\-insertontime	\-setgrid
\-foreground	\-insertwidth	\-takefocus
412
413
414
415
416
417
418

419
420
421
422
423

424
425
426
427
428
429
430

431
432
433
434
435
436

437
438
439
440
441
442

443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450

451
452
453
454
455

456
457
458
459
460
461

462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469

470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478

479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488

489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498

499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506

507
508
509
510
511
512

513
514
515
516
517
518
519

520
521
522
523
524
525
526

527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536

537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545

546
547

548
549
550
551
552

553
554

555
556
557
558
559

560
561
562
563
564
565

566
567
568
569
570
571

572
573
574
575
576
577

578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588

589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596

597
598
599
600
601

602
603
604
605
606
607
608

609
610
611
612
613
614
615
as determined by the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-font\fR, and \fB\-foreground\fR
options for the text widget. However, display options may be associated with
individual tags using the
.QW "\fIpathName \fBtag configure\fR"
widget command. If a character has been tagged, then the display options
associated with the tag override the default display style. The following
options are currently supported for tags:

.TP
\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use for characters associated
with the tag. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.

.TP
\fB\-bgstipple \fIbitmap\fR
.
\fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern for the
background. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If
\fIbitmap\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string,
then a solid fill will be used for the background.

.TP
\fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the width of a border to draw around the tag using any
of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option should be used in
conjunction with the \fB\-relief\fR option to provide the desired border.

.TP
\fB\-elide \fIboolean\fR
.
\fIElide\fR specifies whether the data should be elided. Elided data
(characters, images, embedded windows, etc.) is not displayed and takes no
space on screen, but further on behaves just as normal data.

.TP
\fB\-fgstipple \fIbitmap\fR
.
\fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern when drawing
text and other foreground information such as underlines. It may have any of
the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If \fIbitmap\fR has not been
specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then a solid fill will be
used.

.TP
\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR
.
\fIFontName\fR is the name of a font to use for drawing characters. It may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetFont\fR.

.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when drawing text and other foreground
information such as underlines. It may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTk_GetColor\fR.

.TP
\fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR
.
If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this
option has been specified, then \fIjustify\fR determines how to justify the
line. It must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. If a line
wraps, then the justification for each line on the display is determined by
the first non-elided character of that display line.

.TP
\fB\-lmargin1 \fIpixels\fR
.
If the first non-elided character of a text line has a tag for which this
option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how much the line
should be indented from the left edge of the window. \fIPixels\fR may have any
of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line of text wraps, this
option only applies to the first line on the display; the \fB\-lmargin2\fR
option controls the indentation for subsequent lines.

.TP
\fB\-lmargin2 \fIpixels\fR
.
If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this
option has been specified, and if the display line is not the first for its
text line (i.e., the text line has wrapped), then \fIpixels\fR specifies how
much the line should be indented from the left edge of the window.
\fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This
option is only used when wrapping is enabled, and it only applies to the
second and later display lines for a text line.

.TP
\fB\-lmargincolor \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use in regions that do not
contain characters because they are indented by \fB\-lmargin1\fR or
\fB\-lmargin2\fR. It may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is
specified as an empty string, then the color used is specified by the
\fB-background\fR tag option (or, if this is also unspecified, by the
\fB-background\fR widget option).

.TP
\fB\-offset \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies an amount by which the text's baseline should be offset
vertically from the baseline of the overall line, in pixels. For example, a
positive offset can be used for superscripts and a negative offset can be used
for subscripts. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen
distances.

.TP
\fB\-overstrike \fIboolean\fR
.
Specifies whether or not to draw a horizontal rule through the middle of
characters. \fIBoolean\fR may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.

.TP
\fB\-overstrikefg \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when displaying the overstrike. It may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not
been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color
specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used.

.TP
\fB\-relief \fIrelief\fR
.
\fIRelief\fR specifies the relief style to use for drawing the border, in any
of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetRelief\fR. This option is used in
conjunction with the \fB\-borderwidth\fR option to enable to the desired
border appearance.

.TP
\fB\-rmargin \fIpixels\fR
.
If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this
option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how wide a margin to
leave between the end of the line and the right edge of the window.
\fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This
option is only used when wrapping is enabled. If a text line wraps, the right
margin for each line on the display is determined by the first non-elided
character of that display line.

.TP
\fB\-rmargincolor \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use in regions that do not
contain characters because they are indented by \fB\-rmargin\fR. It may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not
been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color
used is specified by the \fB-background\fR tag option (or, if this is also
unspecified, by the \fB-background\fR widget option).

.TP
\fB\-selectbackground \fIcolor\fR

\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying selected
items. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If
\fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty
string, then the color specified by the \fB\-background\fR tag option is
used.

.TP
\fB\-selectforeground \fIcolor\fR

\fIColor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying selected
items. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If
\fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty
string, then the color specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is
used.

.TP
\fB\-spacing1 \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left above each
text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line
wraps, this option only applies to the first line on the display.

.TP
\fB\-spacing2 \fIpixels\fR
.
For lines that wrap, this option specifies how much additional space to leave
between the display lines for a single text line. \fIPixels\fR may have any of
the standard forms for screen distances.

.TP
\fB\-spacing3 \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left below each
text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line
wraps, this option only applies to the last line on the display.

.TP
\fB\-tabs \fItabList\fR
.
\fITabList\fR specifies a set of tab stops in the same form as for the
\fB\-tabs\fR option for the text widget. This option only applies to a display
line if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If
this option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it
unspecified for the tag (the default). If the option is specified as a
non-empty string that is an empty list, such as \fB\-tags\0{\0}\fR, then it
requests default 8-character tabs as described for the \fB\-tags\fR widget
option.

.TP
\fB\-tabstyle \fIstyle\fR
.
\fIStyle\fR specifies either the \fItabular\fR or \fIwordprocessor\fR style of
tabbing to use for the text widget. This option only applies to a display line
if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If this
option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it
unspecified for the tag (the default).

.TP
\fB\-underline \fIboolean\fR
.
\fIBoolean\fR specifies whether or not to draw an underline underneath
characters. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.

.TP
\fB\-underlinefg \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when displaying the underline. It may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not
been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color
specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used.

.TP
\fB\-wrap \fImode\fR
.
\fIMode\fR specifies how to handle lines that are wider than the text's
window. This option only applies to a display line if it applies to the
first non-elided character on that display line. It has the same legal
values as the \fB\-wrap\fR option for the text widget: \fBnone\fR,







>





>







>






>






>








>





>






>








>









>










>








|
|
>








>






>







>







>










>







|
|
>


>





>


>





>






>






>






>











>








>





>







>







413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
as determined by the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-font\fR, and \fB\-foreground\fR
options for the text widget. However, display options may be associated with
individual tags using the
.QW "\fIpathName \fBtag configure\fR"
widget command. If a character has been tagged, then the display options
associated with the tag override the default display style. The following
options are currently supported for tags:
.\" OPTION: -background
.TP
\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use for characters associated
with the tag. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
.\" OPTION: -bgstipple
.TP
\fB\-bgstipple \fIbitmap\fR
.
\fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern for the
background. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If
\fIbitmap\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string,
then a solid fill will be used for the background.
.\" OPTION: -borderwidth
.TP
\fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the width of a border to draw around the tag using any
of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option should be used in
conjunction with the \fB\-relief\fR option to provide the desired border.
.\" OPTION: -elide
.TP
\fB\-elide \fIboolean\fR
.
\fIElide\fR specifies whether the data should be elided. Elided data
(characters, images, embedded windows, etc.) is not displayed and takes no
space on screen, but further on behaves just as normal data.
.\" OPTION: -fgstipple
.TP
\fB\-fgstipple \fIbitmap\fR
.
\fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern when drawing
text and other foreground information such as underlines. It may have any of
the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If \fIbitmap\fR has not been
specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then a solid fill will be
used.
.\" OPTION: -font
.TP
\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR
.
\fIFontName\fR is the name of a font to use for drawing characters. It may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
.\" OPTION: -foreground
.TP
\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when drawing text and other foreground
information such as underlines. It may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTk_GetColor\fR.
.\" OPTION: -justify
.TP
\fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR
.
If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this
option has been specified, then \fIjustify\fR determines how to justify the
line. It must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. If a line
wraps, then the justification for each line on the display is determined by
the first non-elided character of that display line.
.\" OPTION: -lmargin1
.TP
\fB\-lmargin1 \fIpixels\fR
.
If the first non-elided character of a text line has a tag for which this
option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how much the line
should be indented from the left edge of the window. \fIPixels\fR may have any
of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line of text wraps, this
option only applies to the first line on the display; the \fB\-lmargin2\fR
option controls the indentation for subsequent lines.
.\" OPTION: -lmargin2
.TP
\fB\-lmargin2 \fIpixels\fR
.
If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this
option has been specified, and if the display line is not the first for its
text line (i.e., the text line has wrapped), then \fIpixels\fR specifies how
much the line should be indented from the left edge of the window.
\fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This
option is only used when wrapping is enabled, and it only applies to the
second and later display lines for a text line.
.\" OPTION: -lmargincolor
.TP
\fB\-lmargincolor \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use in regions that do not
contain characters because they are indented by \fB\-lmargin1\fR or
\fB\-lmargin2\fR. It may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is
specified as an empty string, then the color used is specified by the
\fB\-background\fR tag option (or, if this is also unspecified, by the
\fB\-background\fR widget option).
.\" OPTION: -offset
.TP
\fB\-offset \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies an amount by which the text's baseline should be offset
vertically from the baseline of the overall line, in pixels. For example, a
positive offset can be used for superscripts and a negative offset can be used
for subscripts. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen
distances.
.\" OPTION: -overstrike
.TP
\fB\-overstrike \fIboolean\fR
.
Specifies whether or not to draw a horizontal rule through the middle of
characters. \fIBoolean\fR may have any of the forms accepted by
\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.
.\" OPTION: -overstrikefg
.TP
\fB\-overstrikefg \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when displaying the overstrike. It may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not
been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color
specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used.
.\" OPTION: -relief
.TP
\fB\-relief \fIrelief\fR
.
\fIRelief\fR specifies the relief style to use for drawing the border, in any
of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetRelief\fR. This option is used in
conjunction with the \fB\-borderwidth\fR option to enable to the desired
border appearance.
.\" OPTION: -rmargin
.TP
\fB\-rmargin \fIpixels\fR
.
If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this
option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how wide a margin to
leave between the end of the line and the right edge of the window.
\fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This
option is only used when wrapping is enabled. If a text line wraps, the right
margin for each line on the display is determined by the first non-elided
character of that display line.
.\" OPTION: -rmargincolor
.TP
\fB\-rmargincolor \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use in regions that do not
contain characters because they are indented by \fB\-rmargin\fR. It may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not
been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color
used is specified by the \fB\-background\fR tag option (or, if this is also
unspecified, by the \fB\-background\fR widget option).
.\" OPTION: -selectbackground
.TP
\fB\-selectbackground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying selected
items. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If
\fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty
string, then the color specified by the \fB\-background\fR tag option is
used.
.\" OPTION: -selectforeground
.TP
\fB\-selectforeground \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying selected
items. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If
\fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty
string, then the color specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is
used.
.\" OPTION: -spacing1
.TP
\fB\-spacing1 \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left above each
text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line
wraps, this option only applies to the first line on the display.
.\" OPTION: -spacing2
.TP
\fB\-spacing2 \fIpixels\fR
.
For lines that wrap, this option specifies how much additional space to leave
between the display lines for a single text line. \fIPixels\fR may have any of
the standard forms for screen distances.
.\" OPTION: -spacing3
.TP
\fB\-spacing3 \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left below each
text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line
wraps, this option only applies to the last line on the display.
.\" OPTION: -tabs
.TP
\fB\-tabs \fItabList\fR
.
\fITabList\fR specifies a set of tab stops in the same form as for the
\fB\-tabs\fR option for the text widget. This option only applies to a display
line if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If
this option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it
unspecified for the tag (the default). If the option is specified as a
non-empty string that is an empty list, such as \fB\-tags\0{\0}\fR, then it
requests default 8-character tabs as described for the \fB\-tags\fR widget
option.
.\" OPTION: -tabstyle
.TP
\fB\-tabstyle \fIstyle\fR
.
\fIStyle\fR specifies either the \fItabular\fR or \fIwordprocessor\fR style of
tabbing to use for the text widget. This option only applies to a display line
if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If this
option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it
unspecified for the tag (the default).
.\" OPTION: -underline
.TP
\fB\-underline \fIboolean\fR
.
\fIBoolean\fR specifies whether or not to draw an underline underneath
characters. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.
.\" OPTION: -underlinefg
.TP
\fB\-underlinefg \fIcolor\fR
.
\fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when displaying the underline. It may
have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not
been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color
specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used.
.\" OPTION: -wrap
.TP
\fB\-wrap \fImode\fR
.
\fIMode\fR specifies how to handle lines that are wider than the text's
window. This option only applies to a display line if it applies to the
first non-elided character on that display line. It has the same legal
values as the \fB\-wrap\fR option for the text widget: \fBnone\fR,
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709

710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719

720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731

732
733
734
735
736
737

738
739
740
741
742
743

744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751

752
753
754
755
756
757
758
unit's worth of index space in the text widget, and it may be referred to
either by the name of its embedded window or by its position in the widget's
index space. If the range of text containing the embedded window is deleted
then the window is destroyed. Similarly if the text widget as a whole is
deleted, then the window is destroyed.
.PP
Eliding an embedded window immediately after scheduling it for creation via
\fIpathName \fBwindow create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will prevent it from being
effectively created. Uneliding an elided embedded window scheduled for creation
via \fIpathName \fBwindow create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will automatically
trigger the associated creation script. After destroying an elided embedded
window, the latter won't get automatically recreated.
.PP
When an embedded window is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName
\fBwindow create\fR widget command, several configuration options may be
associated with it. These options may be modified later with the \fIpathName
\fBwindow configure\fR widget command. The following options are currently
supported:

.TP
\fB\-align \fIwhere\fR
.
If the window is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed, this option
determines where the window is displayed in the line. \fIWhere\fR must have
one of the values \fBtop\fR (align the top of the window with the top of the
line), \fBcenter\fR (center the window within the range of the line),
\fBbottom\fR (align the bottom of the window with the bottom of the line's
area), or \fBbaseline\fR (align the bottom of the window with the baseline of
the line).

.TP
\fB\-create \fIscript\fR
.
Specifies a Tcl script that may be evaluated to create the window for the
annotation. If no \fB\-window\fR option has been specified for the annotation
this script will be evaluated when the annotation is about to be displayed on
the screen. \fIScript\fR must create a window for the annotation and return
the name of that window as its result. Two substitutions will be performed in
\fIscript\fR before evaluation. \fI%W\fR will be substituted by the name of
the parent text widget, and \fI%%\fR will be substituted by a single \fI%\fR.
If the annotation's window should ever be deleted, \fIscript\fR will be
evaluated again the next time the annotation is displayed.

.TP
\fB\-padx \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on each side of the
embedded window. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen
distance.

.TP
\fB\-pady \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on the top and on
the bottom of the embedded window. It may have any of the usual forms defined
for a screen distance.

.TP
\fB\-stretch \fIboolean\fR
.
If the requested height of the embedded window is less than the height of the
line in which it is displayed, this option can be used to specify whether the
window should be stretched vertically to fill its line. If the \fB\-pady\fR
option has been specified as well, then the requested padding will be retained
even if the window is stretched.

.TP
\fB\-window \fIpathName\fR
.
Specifies the name of a window to display in the annotation. Note that if a
\fIpathName\fR has been set, then later configuring a window to the empty
string will not delete the widget corresponding to the old \fIpathName\fR.
Rather it will remove the association between the old \fIpathName\fR and the







|

|








>










>












>






>






>








>







722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
unit's worth of index space in the text widget, and it may be referred to
either by the name of its embedded window or by its position in the widget's
index space. If the range of text containing the embedded window is deleted
then the window is destroyed. Similarly if the text widget as a whole is
deleted, then the window is destroyed.
.PP
Eliding an embedded window immediately after scheduling it for creation via
\fIpathName \fBwindow create \fIindex \fB\-create\fR will prevent it from being
effectively created. Uneliding an elided embedded window scheduled for creation
via \fIpathName \fBwindow create \fIindex \fB\-create\fR will automatically
trigger the associated creation script. After destroying an elided embedded
window, the latter won't get automatically recreated.
.PP
When an embedded window is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName
\fBwindow create\fR widget command, several configuration options may be
associated with it. These options may be modified later with the \fIpathName
\fBwindow configure\fR widget command. The following options are currently
supported:
.\" OPTION: -align
.TP
\fB\-align \fIwhere\fR
.
If the window is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed, this option
determines where the window is displayed in the line. \fIWhere\fR must have
one of the values \fBtop\fR (align the top of the window with the top of the
line), \fBcenter\fR (center the window within the range of the line),
\fBbottom\fR (align the bottom of the window with the bottom of the line's
area), or \fBbaseline\fR (align the bottom of the window with the baseline of
the line).
.\" OPTION: -create
.TP
\fB\-create \fIscript\fR
.
Specifies a Tcl script that may be evaluated to create the window for the
annotation. If no \fB\-window\fR option has been specified for the annotation
this script will be evaluated when the annotation is about to be displayed on
the screen. \fIScript\fR must create a window for the annotation and return
the name of that window as its result. Two substitutions will be performed in
\fIscript\fR before evaluation. \fI%W\fR will be substituted by the name of
the parent text widget, and \fI%%\fR will be substituted by a single \fI%\fR.
If the annotation's window should ever be deleted, \fIscript\fR will be
evaluated again the next time the annotation is displayed.
.\" OPTION: -padx
.TP
\fB\-padx \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on each side of the
embedded window. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen
distance.
.\" OPTION: -pady
.TP
\fB\-pady \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on the top and on
the bottom of the embedded window. It may have any of the usual forms defined
for a screen distance.
.\" OPTION: -stretch
.TP
\fB\-stretch \fIboolean\fR
.
If the requested height of the embedded window is less than the height of the
line in which it is displayed, this option can be used to specify whether the
window should be stretched vertically to fill its line. If the \fB\-pady\fR
option has been specified as well, then the requested padding will be retained
even if the window is stretched.
.\" OPTION: -window
.TP
\fB\-window \fIpathName\fR
.
Specifies the name of a window to display in the annotation. Note that if a
\fIpathName\fR has been set, then later configuring a window to the empty
string will not delete the widget corresponding to the old \fIpathName\fR.
Rather it will remove the association between the old \fIpathName\fR and the
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799

800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808

809
810
811
812
813

814
815
816
817
818
819
820

821
822
823
824
825
826

827
828
829
830
831
832
833
space in the text widget, and it may be referred to either by its position in
the widget's index space, or the name it is assigned when the image is inserted
into the text widget with \fIpathName \fBimage create\fR. If the range of text
containing the embedded image is deleted then that copy of the image is removed
from the screen.
.PP
Eliding an embedded image immediately after scheduling it for creation via
\fIpathName \fBimage create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will prevent it from being
effectively created. Uneliding an elided embedded image scheduled for creation
via \fIpathName \fBimage create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will automatically
trigger the associated creation script. After destroying an elided embedded
image, the latter won't get automatically recreated.
.PP
When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName \fBimage
create\fR widget command, a name unique to this instance of the image is
returned. This name may then be used to refer to this image instance. The name
is taken to be the value of the \fB\-name\fR option (described below). If the
\fB\-name\fR option is not provided, the \fB\-image\fR name is used instead.
If the \fIimageName\fR is already in use in the text widget, then \fB#\fInn\fR
is added to the end of the \fIimageName\fR, where \fInn\fR is an arbitrary
integer. This insures the \fIimageName\fR is unique. Once this name is
assigned to this instance of the image, it does not change, even though the
\fB\-image\fR or \fB\-name\fR values can be changed with \fIpathName \fBimage
configure\fR.
.PP
When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName \fBimage
create\fR widget command, several configuration options may be associated with
it. These options may be modified later with the \fIpathName \fBimage
configure\fR widget command. The following options are currently supported:

.TP
\fB\-align \fIwhere\fR
.
If the image is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed, this option
determines where the image is displayed in the line. \fIWhere\fR must have one
of the values \fBtop\fR (align the top of the image with the top of the line),
\fBcenter\fR (center the image within the range of the line), \fBbottom\fR
(align the bottom of the image with the bottom of the line's area), or
\fBbaseline\fR (align the bottom of the image with the baseline of the line).

.TP
\fB\-image \fIimage\fR
.
Specifies the name of the Tk image to display in the annotation. If
\fIimage\fR is not a valid Tk image, then an error is returned.

.TP
\fB\-name \fIImageName\fR
.
Specifies the name by which this image instance may be referenced in the text
widget. If \fIImageName\fR is not supplied, then the name of the Tk image is
used instead. If the \fIimageName\fR is already in use, \fI#nn\fR is appended
to the end of the name as described above.

.TP
\fB\-padx \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on each side of the
embedded image. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen
distance.

.TP
\fB\-pady \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on the top and on
the bottom of the embedded image. It may have any of the usual forms defined
for a screen distance.
.SH "THE SELECTION"







|

|



















>









>





>







>






>







807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
space in the text widget, and it may be referred to either by its position in
the widget's index space, or the name it is assigned when the image is inserted
into the text widget with \fIpathName \fBimage create\fR. If the range of text
containing the embedded image is deleted then that copy of the image is removed
from the screen.
.PP
Eliding an embedded image immediately after scheduling it for creation via
\fIpathName \fBimage create \fIindex \fB\-create\fR will prevent it from being
effectively created. Uneliding an elided embedded image scheduled for creation
via \fIpathName \fBimage create \fIindex \fB\-create\fR will automatically
trigger the associated creation script. After destroying an elided embedded
image, the latter won't get automatically recreated.
.PP
When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName \fBimage
create\fR widget command, a name unique to this instance of the image is
returned. This name may then be used to refer to this image instance. The name
is taken to be the value of the \fB\-name\fR option (described below). If the
\fB\-name\fR option is not provided, the \fB\-image\fR name is used instead.
If the \fIimageName\fR is already in use in the text widget, then \fB#\fInn\fR
is added to the end of the \fIimageName\fR, where \fInn\fR is an arbitrary
integer. This insures the \fIimageName\fR is unique. Once this name is
assigned to this instance of the image, it does not change, even though the
\fB\-image\fR or \fB\-name\fR values can be changed with \fIpathName \fBimage
configure\fR.
.PP
When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName \fBimage
create\fR widget command, several configuration options may be associated with
it. These options may be modified later with the \fIpathName \fBimage
configure\fR widget command. The following options are currently supported:
.\" OPTION: -align
.TP
\fB\-align \fIwhere\fR
.
If the image is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed, this option
determines where the image is displayed in the line. \fIWhere\fR must have one
of the values \fBtop\fR (align the top of the image with the top of the line),
\fBcenter\fR (center the image within the range of the line), \fBbottom\fR
(align the bottom of the image with the bottom of the line's area), or
\fBbaseline\fR (align the bottom of the image with the baseline of the line).
.\" OPTION: -image
.TP
\fB\-image \fIimage\fR
.
Specifies the name of the Tk image to display in the annotation. If
\fIimage\fR is not a valid Tk image, then an error is returned.
.\" OPTION: -name
.TP
\fB\-name \fIImageName\fR
.
Specifies the name by which this image instance may be referenced in the text
widget. If \fIImageName\fR is not supplied, then the name of the Tk image is
used instead. If the \fIimageName\fR is already in use, \fI#nn\fR is appended
to the end of the name as described above.
.\" OPTION: -padx
.TP
\fB\-padx \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on each side of the
embedded image. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen
distance.
.\" OPTION: -pady
.TP
\fB\-pady \fIpixels\fR
.
\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on the top and on
the bottom of the embedded image. It may have any of the usual forms defined
for a screen distance.
.SH "THE SELECTION"
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
creation of peer widgets.
.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS UPDATE OF LINE HEIGHTS"
.PP
In order to maintain a responsive user-experience, the text widget calculates
lines metrics (line heights in pixels) asynchronously. Because of this, some
commands of the text widget may return wrong results if the asynchronous
calculations are not finished at the time of calling. This applies to
\fIpathName \fBcount -ypixels\fR and \fIpathName \fByview\fR.
.PP
Again for performance reasons, it would not be appropriate to let these
commands always wait for the end of the update calculation each time they are
called. In most use cases of these commands a more or less inaccurate result
does not really matter compared to execution speed.
.PP
In case accurate result is needed (and if the text widget is managed by a







|







1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
creation of peer widgets.
.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS UPDATE OF LINE HEIGHTS"
.PP
In order to maintain a responsive user-experience, the text widget calculates
lines metrics (line heights in pixels) asynchronously. Because of this, some
commands of the text widget may return wrong results if the asynchronous
calculations are not finished at the time of calling. This applies to
\fIpathName \fBcount \-ypixels\fR and \fIpathName \fByview\fR.
.PP
Again for performance reasons, it would not be appropriate to let these
commands always wait for the end of the update calculation each time they are
called. In most use cases of these commands a more or less inaccurate result
does not really matter compared to execution speed.
.PP
In case accurate result is needed (and if the text widget is managed by a
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063

1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073

1074
1075
1076
1077
1078

1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087

1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100

1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
operations on the widget. It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the text
widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact
behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for text widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a list of four elements describing the screen area of the character
given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y
coordinates of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the character,
and the last two elements give the width and height of the area. If the
character is only partially visible on the screen, then the return value
reflects just the visible part. If the character is not visible on the screen
then the return value is an empty list.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtext\fR command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcompare\fR \fIindex1 op index2\fR
.
Compares the indices given by \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR according to the
relational operator given by \fIop\fR, and returns 1 if the relationship is
satisfied and 0 if it is not. \fIOp\fR must be one of the operators <, <=, ==,
>=, >, or !=. If \fIop\fR is == then 1 is returned if the two indices refer to
the same character, if \fIop\fR is < then 1 is returned if \fIindex1\fR refers
to an earlier character in the text than \fIindex2\fR, and so on.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is
specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for
\fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of
this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command
returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to
the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is
specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the
command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in
this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of
the values accepted by the \fBtext\fR command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcount\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIindex1 index2\fR
.
Counts the number of relevant things between the two indices. If \fIindex1\fR
is after \fIindex2\fR, the result will be a negative number (and this holds
for each of the possible options). The actual items which are counted depend
on the options given. The result is a list of integers, one for the result of







>










>

|



>

|







>













>







1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
operations on the widget. It has the following general form:
.CS
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the text
widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact
behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for text widgets:
.\" METHOD: bbox
.TP
\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a list of four elements describing the screen area of the character
given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y
coordinates of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the character,
and the last two elements give the width and height of the area. If the
character is only partially visible on the screen, then the return value
reflects just the visible part. If the character is not visible on the screen
then the return value is an empty list.
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtext\fR command.
.\" METHOD: compare
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcompare\fI index1 op index2\fR
.
Compares the indices given by \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR according to the
relational operator given by \fIop\fR, and returns 1 if the relationship is
satisfied and 0 if it is not. \fIOp\fR must be one of the operators <, <=, ==,
>=, >, or !=. If \fIop\fR is == then 1 is returned if the two indices refer to
the same character, if \fIop\fR is < then 1 is returned if \fIindex1\fR refers
to an earlier character in the text than \fIindex2\fR, and so on.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is
specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for
\fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of
this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command
returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to
the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is
specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the
command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in
this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of
the values accepted by the \fBtext\fR command.
.\" METHOD: count
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcount\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIindex1 index2\fR
.
Counts the number of relevant things between the two indices. If \fIindex1\fR
is after \fIindex2\fR, the result will be a negative number (and this holds
for each of the possible options). The actual items which are counted depend
on the options given. The result is a list of integers, one for the result of
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163

1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183

1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
The command returns a positive or negative integer corresponding to the number
of items counted between the two indices. One such integer is returned for
each counting option given, so a list is returned if more than one option was
supplied. For example
.QW ".text count \-xpixels \-ypixels 1.3 4.5"
is perfectly valid and will return a list of two elements.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdebug \fR?\fIboolean\fR?
.
If \fIboolean\fR is specified, then it must have one of the true or false
values accepted by Tcl_GetBoolean. If the value is a true one then internal
consistency checks will be turned on in the B-tree code associated with text
widgets. If \fIboolean\fR has a false value then the debugging checks will be
turned off. In either case the command returns an empty string. If
\fIboolean\fR is not specified then the command returns \fBon\fR or \fBoff\fR
to indicate whether or not debugging is turned on. There is a single debugging
switch shared by all text widgets: turning debugging on or off in any widget
turns it on or off for all widgets. For widgets with large amounts of text,
the consistency checks may cause a noticeable slow-down.
.RS
.PP
When debugging is turned on, the drawing routines of the text widget set the
global variables \fBtk_textRedraw\fR and \fBtk_textRelayout\fR to the lists of
indices that are redrawn. The values of these variables are tested by Tk's
test suite.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIindex1 \fR?\fIindex2 ...\fR?
.
Delete a range of characters from the text.
If both \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR are specified, then delete
all the characters starting with the one given by \fIindex1\fR
and stopping just before \fIindex2\fR (i.e. the character at







>




















>







1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
The command returns a positive or negative integer corresponding to the number
of items counted between the two indices. One such integer is returned for
each counting option given, so a list is returned if more than one option was
supplied. For example
.QW ".text count \-xpixels \-ypixels 1.3 4.5"
is perfectly valid and will return a list of two elements.
.RE
.\" METHOD: debug
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdebug \fR?\fIboolean\fR?
.
If \fIboolean\fR is specified, then it must have one of the true or false
values accepted by Tcl_GetBoolean. If the value is a true one then internal
consistency checks will be turned on in the B-tree code associated with text
widgets. If \fIboolean\fR has a false value then the debugging checks will be
turned off. In either case the command returns an empty string. If
\fIboolean\fR is not specified then the command returns \fBon\fR or \fBoff\fR
to indicate whether or not debugging is turned on. There is a single debugging
switch shared by all text widgets: turning debugging on or off in any widget
turns it on or off for all widgets. For widgets with large amounts of text,
the consistency checks may cause a noticeable slow-down.
.RS
.PP
When debugging is turned on, the drawing routines of the text widget set the
global variables \fBtk_textRedraw\fR and \fBtk_textRelayout\fR to the lists of
indices that are redrawn. The values of these variables are tested by Tk's
test suite.
.RE
.\" METHOD: delete
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIindex1 \fR?\fIindex2 ...\fR?
.
Delete a range of characters from the text.
If both \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR are specified, then delete
all the characters starting with the one given by \fIindex1\fR
and stopping just before \fIindex2\fR (i.e. the character at
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210

1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226

1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244

1245
1246
1247
1248
1249

1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256

1257
1258
1259
1260

1261
1262
1263
1264

1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270

1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278

1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286

1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
All indices are first checked for validity before any deletions are made.
They are sorted and the text is removed from the last range to the
first range so deleted text does not cause an undesired index shifting
side-effects.  If multiple ranges with the same start index are given,
then the longest range is used.  If overlapping ranges are given, then
they will be merged into spans that do not cause deletion of text
outside the given ranges due to text shifted during deletion.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdlineinfo \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a list with five elements describing the area occupied by the display
line containing \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and
y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the line, the
third and fourth elements give the width and height of the area, and the fifth
element gives the position of the baseline for the line, measured down from
the top of the area. All of this information is measured in pixels. If the
current wrap mode is \fBnone\fR and the line extends beyond the boundaries of
the window, the area returned reflects the entire area of the line, including
the portions that are out of the window. If the line is shorter than the full
width of the window then the area returned reflects just the portion of the
line that is occupied by characters and embedded windows. If the display line
containing \fIindex\fR is not visible on the screen then the return value is
an empty list.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBdump \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIindex1 \fR?\fIindex2\fR?
.
Return the contents of the text widget from \fIindex1\fR up to, but not
including \fIindex2\fR, including the text and information about marks, tags,
and embedded windows. If \fIindex2\fR is not specified, then it defaults to
one character past \fIindex1\fR. The information is returned in the following
format:
.RS
.LP
\fIkey1 value1 index1 key2 value2 index2\fR ...
.LP
The possible \fIkey\fR values are \fBtext\fR, \fBmark\fR, \fBtagon\fR,
\fBtagoff\fR, \fBimage\fR, and \fBwindow\fR. The corresponding \fIvalue\fR is
the text, mark name, tag name, image name, or window name. The \fIindex\fR
information is the index of the start of the text, mark, tag transition, image
or window. One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof)
may be specified to control the dump:

.TP
\fB\-all\fR
.
Return information about all elements: text, marks, tags, images and windows.
This is the default.

.TP
\fB\-command \fIcommand\fR
.
Instead of returning the information as the result of the dump operation,
invoke the \fIcommand\fR on each element of the text widget within the range.
The command has three arguments appended to it before it is evaluated: the
\fIkey\fR, \fIvalue\fR, and \fIindex\fR.

.TP
\fB\-image\fR
.
Include information about images in the dump results.

.TP
\fB\-mark\fR
.
Include information about marks in the dump results.

.TP
\fB\-tag\fR
.
Include information about tag transitions in the dump results. Tag information
is returned as \fBtagon\fR and \fBtagoff\fR elements that indicate the begin
and end of each range of each tag, respectively.

.TP
\fB\-text\fR
.
Include information about text in the dump results. The value is the text up
to the next element or the end of range indicated by \fIindex2\fR. A text
element does not span newlines. A multi-line block of text that contains no
marks or tag transitions will still be dumped as a set of text segments that
each end with a newline. The newline is part of the value.

.TP
\fB\-window\fR
.
Include information about embedded windows in the dump results. The value of a
window is its Tk pathname, unless the window has not been created yet. (It
must have a create script.) In this case an empty string is returned, and you
must query the window by its index position to get more information.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBedit \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command controls the undo mechanism and the modified flag. The exact
behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the
\fBedit\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently
supported:







>
















>


















>





>







>




>




>






>








>








>







1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
All indices are first checked for validity before any deletions are made.
They are sorted and the text is removed from the last range to the
first range so deleted text does not cause an undesired index shifting
side-effects.  If multiple ranges with the same start index are given,
then the longest range is used.  If overlapping ranges are given, then
they will be merged into spans that do not cause deletion of text
outside the given ranges due to text shifted during deletion.
.\" METHOD: dlineinfo
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdlineinfo \fIindex\fR
.
Returns a list with five elements describing the area occupied by the display
line containing \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and
y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the line, the
third and fourth elements give the width and height of the area, and the fifth
element gives the position of the baseline for the line, measured down from
the top of the area. All of this information is measured in pixels. If the
current wrap mode is \fBnone\fR and the line extends beyond the boundaries of
the window, the area returned reflects the entire area of the line, including
the portions that are out of the window. If the line is shorter than the full
width of the window then the area returned reflects just the portion of the
line that is occupied by characters and embedded windows. If the display line
containing \fIindex\fR is not visible on the screen then the return value is
an empty list.
.\" METHOD: dump
.TP
\fIpathName \fBdump \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIindex1 \fR?\fIindex2\fR?
.
Return the contents of the text widget from \fIindex1\fR up to, but not
including \fIindex2\fR, including the text and information about marks, tags,
and embedded windows. If \fIindex2\fR is not specified, then it defaults to
one character past \fIindex1\fR. The information is returned in the following
format:
.RS
.LP
\fIkey1 value1 index1 key2 value2 index2\fR ...
.LP
The possible \fIkey\fR values are \fBtext\fR, \fBmark\fR, \fBtagon\fR,
\fBtagoff\fR, \fBimage\fR, and \fBwindow\fR. The corresponding \fIvalue\fR is
the text, mark name, tag name, image name, or window name. The \fIindex\fR
information is the index of the start of the text, mark, tag transition, image
or window. One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof)
may be specified to control the dump:
.\" OPTION: -all
.TP
\fB\-all\fR
.
Return information about all elements: text, marks, tags, images and windows.
This is the default.
.\" OPTION: -command
.TP
\fB\-command \fIcommand\fR
.
Instead of returning the information as the result of the dump operation,
invoke the \fIcommand\fR on each element of the text widget within the range.
The command has three arguments appended to it before it is evaluated: the
\fIkey\fR, \fIvalue\fR, and \fIindex\fR.
.\" OPTION: -image
.TP
\fB\-image\fR
.
Include information about images in the dump results.
.\" OPTION: -mark
.TP
\fB\-mark\fR
.
Include information about marks in the dump results.
.\" OPTION: -tag
.TP
\fB\-tag\fR
.
Include information about tag transitions in the dump results. Tag information
is returned as \fBtagon\fR and \fBtagoff\fR elements that indicate the begin
and end of each range of each tag, respectively.
.\" OPTION: -text
.TP
\fB\-text\fR
.
Include information about text in the dump results. The value is the text up
to the next element or the end of range indicated by \fIindex2\fR. A text
element does not span newlines. A multi-line block of text that contains no
marks or tag transitions will still be dumped as a set of text segments that
each end with a newline. The newline is part of the value.
.\" OPTION: -window
.TP
\fB\-window\fR
.
Include information about embedded windows in the dump results. The value of a
window is its Tk pathname, unless the window has not been created yet. (It
must have a create script.) In this case an empty string is returned, and you
must query the window by its index position to get more information.
.RE
.\" METHOD: edit
.TP
\fIpathName \fBedit \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command controls the undo mechanism and the modified flag. The exact
behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the
\fBedit\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently
supported:
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336

1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354

1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
.
Undoes the last edit action when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, and returns a
list of indices indicating what ranges were changed by the undo operation. An
edit action is defined as all the insert and delete commands that are recorded
on the undo stack in between two separators. Generates an error when the undo
stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fB\-displaychars\fR? ?\fB\-\-\fR? \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2 ...\fR?
.
Return a range of characters from the text. The return value will be all the
characters in the text starting with the one whose index is \fIindex1\fR and
ending just before the one whose index is \fIindex2\fR (the character at
\fIindex2\fR will not be returned). If \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the single
character at \fIindex1\fR is returned. If there are no characters in the
specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR
is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then an empty string is returned. If
the specified range contains embedded windows, no information about them is
included in the returned string. If multiple index pairs are given, multiple
ranges of text will be returned in a list. Invalid ranges will not be
represented with empty strings in the list. The ranges are returned in the
order passed to \fIpathName \fBget\fR. If the \fB\-displaychars\fR option is
given, then, within each range, only those characters which are not elided
will be returned. This may have the effect that some of the returned ranges
are empty strings.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBimage \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate embedded images. The behavior of the
command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBimage\fR
argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported:
.RS







>


















>







1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
.
Undoes the last edit action when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, and returns a
list of indices indicating what ranges were changed by the undo operation. An
edit action is defined as all the insert and delete commands that are recorded
on the undo stack in between two separators. Generates an error when the undo
stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false.
.RE
.\" METHOD: get
.TP
\fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fB\-displaychars\fR? ?\fB\-\-\fR? \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2 ...\fR?
.
Return a range of characters from the text. The return value will be all the
characters in the text starting with the one whose index is \fIindex1\fR and
ending just before the one whose index is \fIindex2\fR (the character at
\fIindex2\fR will not be returned). If \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the single
character at \fIindex1\fR is returned. If there are no characters in the
specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR
is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then an empty string is returned. If
the specified range contains embedded windows, no information about them is
included in the returned string. If multiple index pairs are given, multiple
ranges of text will be returned in a list. Invalid ranges will not be
represented with empty strings in the list. The ranges are returned in the
order passed to \fIpathName \fBget\fR. If the \fB\-displaychars\fR option is
given, then, within each range, only those characters which are not elided
will be returned. This may have the effect that some of the returned ranges
are empty strings.
.\" METHOD: image
.TP
\fIpathName \fBimage \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate embedded images. The behavior of the
command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBimage\fR
argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported:
.RS
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396

1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402

1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419

1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
identifier returned.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBimage names\fR
.
Returns a list whose elements are the names of all image instances currently
embedded in \fIwindow\fR.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the position corresponding to \fIindex\fR in the form \fIline.char\fR
where \fIline\fR is the line number and \fIchar\fR is the character number.
\fIIndex\fR may have any of the forms described under \fBINDICES\fR above.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex chars \fR?\fItagList chars tagList ...\fR?
.
Inserts all of the \fIchars\fR arguments just before the character at
\fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR refers to the end of the text (the character after
the last newline) then the new text is inserted just before the last newline
instead. If there is a single \fIchars\fR argument and no \fItagList\fR, then
the new text will receive any tags that are present on both the character
before and the character after the insertion point; if a tag is present on
only one of these characters then it will not be applied to the new text. If
\fItagList\fR is specified then it consists of a list of tag names; the new
characters will receive all of the tags in this list and no others, regardless
of the tags present around the insertion point. If multiple
\fIchars\fR\-\fItagList\fR argument pairs are present, they produce the same
effect as if a separate \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR widget command had been
issued for each pair, in order. The last \fItagList\fR argument may be
omitted.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBmark \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate marks. The exact behavior of the command
depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBmark\fR argument. The
following forms of the command are currently supported:
.RS







>






>

















>







1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
identifier returned.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBimage names\fR
.
Returns a list whose elements are the names of all image instances currently
embedded in \fIwindow\fR.
.RE
.\" METHOD: index
.TP
\fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the position corresponding to \fIindex\fR in the form \fIline.char\fR
where \fIline\fR is the line number and \fIchar\fR is the character number.
\fIIndex\fR may have any of the forms described under \fBINDICES\fR above.
.\" METHOD: insert
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex chars \fR?\fItagList chars tagList ...\fR?
.
Inserts all of the \fIchars\fR arguments just before the character at
\fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR refers to the end of the text (the character after
the last newline) then the new text is inserted just before the last newline
instead. If there is a single \fIchars\fR argument and no \fItagList\fR, then
the new text will receive any tags that are present on both the character
before and the character after the insertion point; if a tag is present on
only one of these characters then it will not be applied to the new text. If
\fItagList\fR is specified then it consists of a list of tag names; the new
characters will receive all of the tags in this list and no others, regardless
of the tags present around the insertion point. If multiple
\fIchars\fR\-\fItagList\fR argument pairs are present, they produce the same
effect as if a separate \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR widget command had been
issued for each pair, in order. The last \fItagList\fR argument may be
omitted.
.\" METHOD: mark
.TP
\fIpathName \fBmark \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate marks. The exact behavior of the command
depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBmark\fR argument. The
following forms of the command are currently supported:
.RS
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
specified in numerical form, then the search for the next mark begins at that
index. If \fIindex\fR is the name of a mark, then the search for the next mark
begins immediately after that mark. This can still return a mark at the same
position if there are multiple marks at the same index. These semantics mean
that the \fBmark next\fR operation can be used to step through all the marks
in a text widget in the same order as the mark information returned by the
\fIpathName \fBdump\fR operation. If a mark has been set to the special
\fBend\fR index, then it appears to be \fIafter\fR \fBend\fR with respect to
the \fIpathName \fBmark next\fR operation. An empty string is returned if
there are no marks after \fIindex\fR.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBmark previous \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the name of the mark at or before \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is
specified in numerical form, then the search for the previous mark begins with







|







1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
specified in numerical form, then the search for the next mark begins at that
index. If \fIindex\fR is the name of a mark, then the search for the next mark
begins immediately after that mark. This can still return a mark at the same
position if there are multiple marks at the same index. These semantics mean
that the \fBmark next\fR operation can be used to step through all the marks
in a text widget in the same order as the mark information returned by the
\fIpathName \fBdump\fR operation. If a mark has been set to the special
\fBend\fR index, then it appears to be \fIafter \fBend\fR with respect to
the \fIpathName \fBmark next\fR operation. An empty string is returned if
there are no marks after \fIindex\fR.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBmark previous \fIindex\fR
.
Returns the name of the mark at or before \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is
specified in numerical form, then the search for the previous mark begins with
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481

1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500

1501
1502

1503

1504
1505

1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519

1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
.
Remove the mark corresponding to each of the \fImarkName\fR arguments. The
removed marks will not be usable in indices and will not be returned by future
calls to
.QW "\fIpathName \fBmark names\fR" .
This command returns an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBpeer \fIoption args\fR
.
This command is used to create and query widget peers. It has two forms,
depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpeer create \fInewPathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
Creates a peer text widget with the given \fInewPathName\fR, and any optional
standard configuration options (as for the \fItext\fR command). By default the
peer will have the same start and end line as the parent widget, but these can
be overridden with the standard configuration options.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpeer names\fR
.
Returns a list of peers of this widget (this does not include the widget
itself). The order within this list is undefined.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBpendingsync\fR

Returns 1 if the line heights calculations are not up-to-date, 0 otherwise.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBreplace\fR \fIindex1 index2 chars\fR ?\fItagList chars tagList ...\fR?

Replaces the range of characters between \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR
with the given characters and tags.  See the section on \fIpathName
\fBinsert\fR for an explanation of the handling of the \fItagList...\fR
arguments, and the section on \fIpathName
\fBdelete\fR for an explanation of the handling of the indices.  If
\fIindex2\fR corresponds to an index earlier in the text than
\fIindex1\fR, an error will be generated.
.RS
.PP
The deletion and insertion are arranged so that no unnecessary scrolling of
the window or movement of insertion cursor occurs. In addition the undo/redo
stack are correctly modified, if undo operations are active in the text
widget. The command returns an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan \fIoption args\fR
.
This command is used to implement scanning on texts. It has two forms,
depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP







>



















>


>

>

|
>














>







1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
.
Remove the mark corresponding to each of the \fImarkName\fR arguments. The
removed marks will not be usable in indices and will not be returned by future
calls to
.QW "\fIpathName \fBmark names\fR" .
This command returns an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: peer
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpeer \fIoption args\fR
.
This command is used to create and query widget peers. It has two forms,
depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpeer create \fInewPathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
Creates a peer text widget with the given \fInewPathName\fR, and any optional
standard configuration options (as for the \fItext\fR command). By default the
peer will have the same start and end line as the parent widget, but these can
be overridden with the standard configuration options.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpeer names\fR
.
Returns a list of peers of this widget (this does not include the widget
itself). The order within this list is undefined.
.RE
.\" METHOD: pendingsync
.TP
\fIpathName \fBpendingsync\fR
.
Returns 1 if the line heights calculations are not up-to-date, 0 otherwise.
.\" METHOD: replace
.TP
\fIpathName \fBreplace\fI index1 index2 chars\fR ?\fItagList chars tagList ...\fR?
.
Replaces the range of characters between \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR
with the given characters and tags.  See the section on \fIpathName
\fBinsert\fR for an explanation of the handling of the \fItagList...\fR
arguments, and the section on \fIpathName
\fBdelete\fR for an explanation of the handling of the indices.  If
\fIindex2\fR corresponds to an index earlier in the text than
\fIindex1\fR, an error will be generated.
.RS
.PP
The deletion and insertion are arranged so that no unnecessary scrolling of
the window or movement of insertion cursor occurs. In addition the undo/redo
stack are correctly modified, if undo operations are active in the text
widget. The command returns an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: scan
.TP
\fIpathName \fBscan \fIoption args\fR
.
This command is used to implement scanning on texts. It has two forms,
depending on \fIoption\fR:
.RS
.TP
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542

1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551

1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557

1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566

1567
1568
1569
1570
1571

1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582

1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590

1591
1592
1593
1594

1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604

1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623

1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640

1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647

1648
1649
1650
1651

1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments
and the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments to the last \fIpathName \fBscan mark\fR
command for the widget. It then adjusts the view by 10 times the difference in
coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in
the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the text at high speed through
the window. The return value is an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBsearch \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIpattern index \fR?\fIstopIndex\fR?
.
Searches the text in \fIpathName\fR starting at \fIindex\fR for a range of
characters that matches \fIpattern\fR. If a match is found, the index of the
first character in the match is returned as result; otherwise an empty string
is returned. One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof)
may be specified to control the search:
.RS

.TP
\fB\-forwards\fR
.
The search will proceed forward through the text, finding the first matching
range starting at or after the position given by \fIindex\fR. This is the
default.

.TP
\fB\-backwards\fR
.
The search will proceed backward through the text, finding the matching range
closest to \fIindex\fR whose first character is before \fIindex\fR (it is not
allowed to be at \fIindex\fR). Note that, for a variety of reasons, backwards
searches can be substantially slower than forwards searches (particularly when
using \fB\-regexp\fR), so it is recommended that performance-critical code use
forward searches.

.TP
\fB\-exact\fR
.
Use exact matching: the characters in the matching range must be identical to
those in \fIpattern\fR. This is the default.

.TP
\fB\-regexp\fR
.
Treat \fIpattern\fR as a regular expression and match it against the text
using the rules for regular expressions (see the \fBregexp\fR command
and the \fBre_syntax\fR page for
details). The default matching automatically passes both the
\fB\-lineanchor\fR and \fB\-linestop\fR options to the regexp engine (unless
\fB\-nolinestop\fR is used), so that \fI^$\fR match beginning and end of line,
and \fI.\fR, \fI[^\fR sequences will never match the newline character
\fI\en\fR.

.TP
\fB\-nolinestop\fR
.
This allows \fI.\fR and \fI[^\fR sequences to match the newline character
\fI\en\fR, which they will otherwise not do (see the \fBregexp\fR command for
details). This option is only meaningful if \fB\-regexp\fR is also given, and
an error will be thrown otherwise. For example, to match the entire text, use
.QW "\fIpathName \fBsearch \-nolinestop \-regexp\fR \N'34'.*\N'34' 1.0" .

.TP
\fB\-nocase\fR
.
Ignore case differences between the pattern and the text.

.TP
\fB\-count\fI varName\fR
.
The argument following \fB\-count\fR gives the name of a variable; if a match
is found, the number of index positions between beginning and end of the
matching range will be stored in the variable. If there are no embedded images
or windows in the matching range (and there are no elided characters if
\fB\-elide\fR is not given), this is equivalent to the number of characters
matched. In either case, the range \fImatchIdx\fR to \fImatchIdx + $count
chars\fR will return the entire matched text.

.TP
\fB\-all\fR
.
Find all matches in the given range and return a list of the indices of the
first character of each match. If a \fB\-count\fI varName\fR switch is given,
then \fIvarName\fR is also set to a list containing one element for each
successful match. Note that, even for exact searches, the elements of this
list may be different, if there are embedded images, windows or hidden text.
Searches with \fB\-all\fR behave very similarly to the Tcl command \fBregexp
\-all\fR, in that overlapping matches are not normally returned. For example,
applying an \fB\-all\fR search of the pattern
.QW \ew+
against
.QW "hello there"
will just match twice, once for each word, and matching
.QW "Z[a\-z]+Z"
against
.QW ZooZooZoo
will just match once.

.TP
\fB\-overlap\fR
.
When performing \fB\-all\fR searches, the normal behaviour is that matches
which overlap an already-found match will not be returned. This switch changes
that behaviour so that all matches which are not totally enclosed within
another match are returned. For example, applying an \fB\-overlap\fR search of
the pattern
.QW \ew+
against
.QW "hello there"
will just match twice (i.e. no different to just \fB\-all\fR), but matching
.QW Z[a\-z]+Z
against
.QW ZooZooZoo
will now match twice. An error will be thrown if this switch is used without
\fB\-all\fR.

.TP
\fB\-strictlimits\fR
.
When performing any search, the normal behaviour is that the start and stop
limits are checked with respect to the start of the matching text. With the
\fB\-strictlimits\fR flag, the entire matching range must lie inside the start
and stop limits specified for the match to be valid.

.TP
\fB\-elide\fR
.
Find elided (hidden) text as well. By default only displayed text is searched.

.TP
\fB\-\|\-\fR
.
This switch has no effect except to terminate the list of switches: the next
argument will be treated as \fIpattern\fR even if it starts with \fB\-\fR.
.PP
The matching range may be within a single line of text, or run across multiple







>









>






>









>





>











>








>




>










>



















>

















>







>




>







1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments
and the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments to the last \fIpathName \fBscan mark\fR
command for the widget. It then adjusts the view by 10 times the difference in
coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in
the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the text at high speed through
the window. The return value is an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: search
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsearch \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIpattern index \fR?\fIstopIndex\fR?
.
Searches the text in \fIpathName\fR starting at \fIindex\fR for a range of
characters that matches \fIpattern\fR. If a match is found, the index of the
first character in the match is returned as result; otherwise an empty string
is returned. One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof)
may be specified to control the search:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -forwards
.TP
\fB\-forwards\fR
.
The search will proceed forward through the text, finding the first matching
range starting at or after the position given by \fIindex\fR. This is the
default.
.\" OPTION: -backwards
.TP
\fB\-backwards\fR
.
The search will proceed backward through the text, finding the matching range
closest to \fIindex\fR whose first character is before \fIindex\fR (it is not
allowed to be at \fIindex\fR). Note that, for a variety of reasons, backwards
searches can be substantially slower than forwards searches (particularly when
using \fB\-regexp\fR), so it is recommended that performance-critical code use
forward searches.
.\" OPTION: -exact
.TP
\fB\-exact\fR
.
Use exact matching: the characters in the matching range must be identical to
those in \fIpattern\fR. This is the default.
.\" OPTION: -regexp
.TP
\fB\-regexp\fR
.
Treat \fIpattern\fR as a regular expression and match it against the text
using the rules for regular expressions (see the \fBregexp\fR command
and the \fBre_syntax\fR page for
details). The default matching automatically passes both the
\fB\-lineanchor\fR and \fB\-linestop\fR options to the regexp engine (unless
\fB\-nolinestop\fR is used), so that \fI^$\fR match beginning and end of line,
and \fI.\fR, \fI[^\fR sequences will never match the newline character
\fI\en\fR.
.\" OPTION: -nolinestop
.TP
\fB\-nolinestop\fR
.
This allows \fI.\fR and \fI[^\fR sequences to match the newline character
\fI\en\fR, which they will otherwise not do (see the \fBregexp\fR command for
details). This option is only meaningful if \fB\-regexp\fR is also given, and
an error will be thrown otherwise. For example, to match the entire text, use
.QW "\fIpathName \fBsearch \-nolinestop \-regexp\fR \N'34'.*\N'34' 1.0" .
.\" OPTION: -nocase
.TP
\fB\-nocase\fR
.
Ignore case differences between the pattern and the text.
.\" OPTION: -count
.TP
\fB\-count\fI varName\fR
.
The argument following \fB\-count\fR gives the name of a variable; if a match
is found, the number of index positions between beginning and end of the
matching range will be stored in the variable. If there are no embedded images
or windows in the matching range (and there are no elided characters if
\fB\-elide\fR is not given), this is equivalent to the number of characters
matched. In either case, the range \fImatchIdx\fR to \fImatchIdx + $count
chars\fR will return the entire matched text.
.\" OPTION: -all
.TP
\fB\-all\fR
.
Find all matches in the given range and return a list of the indices of the
first character of each match. If a \fB\-count\fI varName\fR switch is given,
then \fIvarName\fR is also set to a list containing one element for each
successful match. Note that, even for exact searches, the elements of this
list may be different, if there are embedded images, windows or hidden text.
Searches with \fB\-all\fR behave very similarly to the Tcl command \fBregexp
\-all\fR, in that overlapping matches are not normally returned. For example,
applying an \fB\-all\fR search of the pattern
.QW \ew+
against
.QW "hello there"
will just match twice, once for each word, and matching
.QW "Z[a\-z]+Z"
against
.QW ZooZooZoo
will just match once.
.\" OPTION: -overlap
.TP
\fB\-overlap\fR
.
When performing \fB\-all\fR searches, the normal behaviour is that matches
which overlap an already-found match will not be returned. This switch changes
that behaviour so that all matches which are not totally enclosed within
another match are returned. For example, applying an \fB\-overlap\fR search of
the pattern
.QW \ew+
against
.QW "hello there"
will just match twice (i.e. no different to just \fB\-all\fR), but matching
.QW Z[a\-z]+Z
against
.QW ZooZooZoo
will now match twice. An error will be thrown if this switch is used without
\fB\-all\fR.
.\" OPTION: -strictlimits
.TP
\fB\-strictlimits\fR
.
When performing any search, the normal behaviour is that the start and stop
limits are checked with respect to the start of the matching text. With the
\fB\-strictlimits\fR flag, the entire matching range must lie inside the start
and stop limits specified for the match to be valid.
.\" OPTION: -elide
.TP
\fB\-elide\fR
.
Find elided (hidden) text as well. By default only displayed text is searched.
.\" OPTION: --
.TP
\fB\-\|\-\fR
.
This switch has no effect except to terminate the list of switches: the next
argument will be treated as \fIpattern\fR even if it starts with \fB\-\fR.
.PP
The matching range may be within a single line of text, or run across multiple
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673

1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682

1683
1684

1685
1686
1687
1688

1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694

1695
1696
1697
1698
1699

1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
beginning or end of the text is reached, the search continues at the other end
until the starting location is reached again; if \fIstopIndex\fR is specified,
no wrap-around will occur. This means that, for example, if the search is
\fB\-forwards\fR but \fIstopIndex\fR is earlier in the text than
\fIstartIndex\fR, nothing will ever be found. See \fBKNOWN BUGS\fR below for a
number of minor limitations of the \fIpathName \fBsearch\fR command.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBsee \fIindex\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR is
completely visible. If \fIindex\fR is already visible then the command does
nothing. If \fIindex\fR is a short distance out of view, the command adjusts
the view just enough to make \fIindex\fR visible at the edge of the window.
If \fIindex\fR is far out of view, then the command centers \fIindex\fR in the
window.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBsync\fR ?\fB-command \fIcommand\fR?

Controls the synchronization of the view of the text widget.
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsync\fR

Immediately brings the line metrics up-to-date by forcing computation of any
outdated line heights. The command returns immediately if there is no such
outdated line heights, otherwise it returns only at the end of the computation.
The command returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsync -command \fIcommand\fR

Schedules \fIcommand\fR to be executed (by the event loop) exactly once as soon
as all line heights are up-to-date. If there are no pending line metrics
calculations, the scheduling is immediate. The command returns the empty
string. \fBbgerror\fR is called on \fIcommand\fR failure.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBtag \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate tags. The exact behavior of the command
depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBtag\fR argument. The
following forms of the command are currently supported:
.RS







>









>

|
>




>





|
>





>







1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
beginning or end of the text is reached, the search continues at the other end
until the starting location is reached again; if \fIstopIndex\fR is specified,
no wrap-around will occur. This means that, for example, if the search is
\fB\-forwards\fR but \fIstopIndex\fR is earlier in the text than
\fIstartIndex\fR, nothing will ever be found. See \fBKNOWN BUGS\fR below for a
number of minor limitations of the \fIpathName \fBsearch\fR command.
.RE
.\" METHOD: see
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsee \fIindex\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR is
completely visible. If \fIindex\fR is already visible then the command does
nothing. If \fIindex\fR is a short distance out of view, the command adjusts
the view just enough to make \fIindex\fR visible at the edge of the window.
If \fIindex\fR is far out of view, then the command centers \fIindex\fR in the
window.
.\" METHOD: sync
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsync\fR ?\fB\-command \fIcommand\fR?
.
Controls the synchronization of the view of the text widget.
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsync\fR
.
Immediately brings the line metrics up-to-date by forcing computation of any
outdated line heights. The command returns immediately if there is no such
outdated line heights, otherwise it returns only at the end of the computation.
The command returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBsync \-command \fIcommand\fR
.
Schedules \fIcommand\fR to be executed (by the event loop) exactly once as soon
as all line heights are up-to-date. If there are no pending line metrics
calculations, the scheduling is immediate. The command returns the empty
string. \fBbgerror\fR is called on \fIcommand\fR failure.
.RE
.\" METHOD: tag
.TP
\fIpathName \fBtag \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate tags. The exact behavior of the command
depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBtag\fR argument. The
following forms of the command are currently supported:
.RS
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
starting at \fIindex2\fR will be considered). If several matching ranges
exist, the one closest to \fIindex1\fR is chosen. The command's return value
is a list containing two elements, which are the index of the first character
of the range and the index of the character just after the last one in the
range. If no matching range is found then the return value is an empty string.
If \fIindex2\fR is not given then it defaults to the beginning of the text.
.TP
\fIpathName\fB tag raise \fItagName \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR?
.
Changes the priority of tag \fItagName\fR so that it is just higher in
priority than the tag whose name is \fIaboveThis\fR. If \fIaboveThis\fR is
omitted, then \fItagName\fR's priority is changed to make it highest priority
of all tags.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBtag ranges \fItagName\fR







|







1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
starting at \fIindex2\fR will be considered). If several matching ranges
exist, the one closest to \fIindex1\fR is chosen. The command's return value
is a list containing two elements, which are the index of the first character
of the range and the index of the character just after the last one in the
range. If no matching range is found then the return value is an empty string.
If \fIindex2\fR is not given then it defaults to the beginning of the text.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBtag raise \fItagName \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR?
.
Changes the priority of tag \fItagName\fR so that it is just higher in
priority than the tag whose name is \fIaboveThis\fR. If \fIaboveThis\fR is
omitted, then \fItagName\fR's priority is changed to make it highest priority
of all tags.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBtag ranges \fItagName\fR
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868

1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
\fIindex2\fR is not affected). A single command may contain any number of
\fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the
tag is removed from the single character at \fIindex1\fR. If there are no
characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the
file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command
has no effect. This command returns an empty string.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBwindow \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate embedded windows. The behavior of the
command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBwindow\fR
argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported:
.RS







>







1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
\fIindex2\fR is not affected). A single command may contain any number of
\fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the
tag is removed from the single character at \fIindex1\fR. If there are no
characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the
file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command
has no effect. This command returns an empty string.
.RE
.\" METHOD: window
.TP
\fIpathName \fBwindow \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate embedded windows. The behavior of the
command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBwindow\fR
argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported:
.RS
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908

1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
information on the options that are supported. Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBwindow names\fR
.
Returns a list whose elements are the names of all windows currently embedded
in \fIwindow\fR.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIoption args\fR
.
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the text
in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
.TP







>







1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
information on the options that are supported. Returns an empty string.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBwindow names\fR
.
Returns a list whose elements are the names of all windows currently embedded
in \fIwindow\fR.
.RE
.\" METHOD: xview
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIoption args\fR
.
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the text
in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
.TP
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953

1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by
\fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view adjusts by
\fInumber\fR pixels; if it is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or
right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display. If \fInumber\fR is
negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive
then characters farther to the right become visible.
.RE

.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in
the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
.TP







>







2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by
\fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view adjusts by
\fInumber\fR pixels; if it is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or
right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display. If \fInumber\fR is
negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive
then characters farther to the right become visible.
.RE
.\" METHOD: yview
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in
the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms:
.RS
.TP
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
means in the case where the first extra line added results in no match and
Tcl's regexp system returns the incorrect code and adding a second extra line
would actually match, the text widget will return the wrong result. In
practice this is a rare problem, but it can occur, for example:
.CS
pack [\fBtext\fR .t]
\&.t insert 1.0 "aaaa\enbbbb\encccc\enbbbb\enaaaa\en"
\&.t search \-regexp \-\- {(a+|b+\enc+\enb+)+\ena+} 1.0
.CE
will not find a match when one exists of 19 characters starting from the first
.QW b .
.PP
Whenever one possible match is fully enclosed in another, the search command
will attempt to ensure only the larger match is returned. When performing
backwards regexp searches it is possible that Tcl will not always achieve
this, in the case where a match is preceded by one or more short,
non-overlapping matches, all of which are preceded by a large match which
actually encompasses all of them. The search algorithm used by the widget does
not look back arbitrarily far for a possible match which might cover large
portions of the widget. For example:
.CS
pack [\fBtext\fR .t]
\&.t insert 1.0 "aaaa\enbbbb\enbbbb\enbbbb\enbbbb\\n"
\&.t search \-regexp \-backward \-\- {b+\en|a+\en(b+\en)+} end
.CE
matches at
.QW 5.0
when a true greedy match would match at
.QW 1.0 .
Similarly if we add \fB\-all\fR to this case, it matches at all of
.QW 5.0 ,







|















|







2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
means in the case where the first extra line added results in no match and
Tcl's regexp system returns the incorrect code and adding a second extra line
would actually match, the text widget will return the wrong result. In
practice this is a rare problem, but it can occur, for example:
.CS
pack [\fBtext\fR .t]
\&.t insert 1.0 "aaaa\enbbbb\encccc\enbbbb\enaaaa\en"
\&.t search -regexp -- {(a+|b+\enc+\enb+)+\ena+} 1.0
.CE
will not find a match when one exists of 19 characters starting from the first
.QW b .
.PP
Whenever one possible match is fully enclosed in another, the search command
will attempt to ensure only the larger match is returned. When performing
backwards regexp searches it is possible that Tcl will not always achieve
this, in the case where a match is preceded by one or more short,
non-overlapping matches, all of which are preceded by a large match which
actually encompasses all of them. The search algorithm used by the widget does
not look back arbitrarily far for a possible match which might cover large
portions of the widget. For example:
.CS
pack [\fBtext\fR .t]
\&.t insert 1.0 "aaaa\enbbbb\enbbbb\enbbbb\enbbbb\\n"
\&.t search -regexp -backward -- {b+\en|a+\en(b+\en)+} end
.CE
matches at
.QW 5.0
when a true greedy match would match at
.QW 1.0 .
Similarly if we add \fB\-all\fR to this case, it matches at all of
.QW 5.0 ,

Changes to doc/tk.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
.TH tk n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk \- Manipulate Tk internal state
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtk\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk\fR command provides access to miscellaneous
elements of Tk's internal state.
Most of the information manipulated by this command pertains to the
application as a whole, or to a screen or display, rather than to a
particular window.
The command can take any of a number of different forms
depending on the \fIoption\fR argument.  The legal forms are:

.TP
\fBtk appname \fR?\fInewName\fR?
.
If \fInewName\fR is not specified, this command returns the name
of the application (the name that may be used in \fBsend\fR
commands to communicate with the application).
If \fInewName\fR is specified, then the name of the application







|










>







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
.TH tk n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk \- Manipulate Tk internal state
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtk\fI option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk\fR command provides access to miscellaneous
elements of Tk's internal state.
Most of the information manipulated by this command pertains to the
application as a whole, or to a screen or display, rather than to a
particular window.
The command can take any of a number of different forms
depending on the \fIoption\fR argument.  The legal forms are:
.\" METHOD: appname
.TP
\fBtk appname \fR?\fInewName\fR?
.
If \fInewName\fR is not specified, this command returns the name
of the application (the name that may be used in \fBsend\fR
commands to communicate with the application).
If \fInewName\fR is specified, then the name of the application
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

47
48
49
50
51
52
53

54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65

66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83

84
85

86
87

88
89
90
91
92
93
94

95
96
97
98
99
100
101
\fInewName\fR should not start with a capital letter.
This will interfere with option processing, since names starting with
capitals are assumed to be classes;  as a result, Tk may not
be able to find some options for the application.
If sends have been disabled by deleting the \fBsend\fR command,
this command will reenable them and recreate the \fBsend\fR
command.

.TP
\fBtk busy \fIsubcommand\fR ...
.
This command controls the marking of window hierarchies as
.QW busy ,
rendering them non-interactive while some other operation is proceeding. For
more details see the \fBbusy\fR manual page.

.TP
\fBtk caret \fIwindow \fR?\fB\-x \fIx\fR? ?\fB\-y \fIy\fR? ?\fB\-height \fIheight\fR?
.
Sets and queries the caret location for the display of the specified
Tk window \fIwindow\fR.  The caret is the per-display cursor location
used for indicating global focus (e.g. to comply with Microsoft
Accessibility guidelines), as well as for location of the over-the-spot
XIM (X Input Methods) or Windows IME windows.  If no options are specified,
the last values used for setting the caret are return in option-value pair
format.  \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-y\fR represent window-relative coordinates, and
\fB\-height\fR is the height of the current cursor location, or the height
of the specified \fIwindow\fR if none is given.

.TP
\fBtk inactive \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fBreset\fR?
.
Returns a positive integer, the number of milliseconds since the last
time the user interacted with the system. If the \fB\-displayof\fR
option is given then the return value refers to the display of
\fIwindow\fR; otherwise it refers to the display of the application's
main window.
.RS
.PP
\fBtk inactive\fR will return \-1, if querying the user inactive time
is not supported by the system, and in safe interpreters.
.PP
If the literal string \fBreset\fR is given as an additional argument,
the timer is reset and an empty string is returned. Resetting the
inactivity time is forbidden in safe interpreters and will throw an
error if tried.
.RE

.TP
\fBtk fontchooser \fIsubcommand\fR ...

Controls the Tk font selection dialog. For more details see the
\fBfontchooser\fR manual page.

.TP
\fBtk print \fIwindow\fR
.
The \fBtk print\fR command posts a dialog that allows users to print output
from the \fBcanvas\fR and \fBtext\fR widgets. The printing will be done using
platform-native APIs and dialogs where available. For more details see the
\fBprint\fR manual page.

.TP
\fBtk scaling \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fInumber\fR?
.
Sets and queries the current scaling factor used by Tk to convert between
physical units (for example, points, inches, or millimeters) and pixels.  The
\fInumber\fR argument is a floating point number that specifies the number of
pixels per point on \fIwindow\fR's display.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is







>







>












>


















>


>


>







>







41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
\fInewName\fR should not start with a capital letter.
This will interfere with option processing, since names starting with
capitals are assumed to be classes;  as a result, Tk may not
be able to find some options for the application.
If sends have been disabled by deleting the \fBsend\fR command,
this command will reenable them and recreate the \fBsend\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: busy
.TP
\fBtk busy \fIsubcommand\fR ...
.
This command controls the marking of window hierarchies as
.QW busy ,
rendering them non-interactive while some other operation is proceeding. For
more details see the \fBbusy\fR manual page.
.\" METHOD: caret
.TP
\fBtk caret \fIwindow \fR?\fB\-x \fIx\fR? ?\fB\-y \fIy\fR? ?\fB\-height \fIheight\fR?
.
Sets and queries the caret location for the display of the specified
Tk window \fIwindow\fR.  The caret is the per-display cursor location
used for indicating global focus (e.g. to comply with Microsoft
Accessibility guidelines), as well as for location of the over-the-spot
XIM (X Input Methods) or Windows IME windows.  If no options are specified,
the last values used for setting the caret are return in option-value pair
format.  \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-y\fR represent window-relative coordinates, and
\fB\-height\fR is the height of the current cursor location, or the height
of the specified \fIwindow\fR if none is given.
.\" METHOD: inactive
.TP
\fBtk inactive \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fBreset\fR?
.
Returns a positive integer, the number of milliseconds since the last
time the user interacted with the system. If the \fB\-displayof\fR
option is given then the return value refers to the display of
\fIwindow\fR; otherwise it refers to the display of the application's
main window.
.RS
.PP
\fBtk inactive\fR will return \-1, if querying the user inactive time
is not supported by the system, and in safe interpreters.
.PP
If the literal string \fBreset\fR is given as an additional argument,
the timer is reset and an empty string is returned. Resetting the
inactivity time is forbidden in safe interpreters and will throw an
error if tried.
.RE
.\" METHOD: fontchooser
.TP
\fBtk fontchooser \fIsubcommand\fR ...
.
Controls the Tk font selection dialog. For more details see the
\fBfontchooser\fR manual page.
.\" METHOD: print
.TP
\fBtk print \fIwindow\fR
.
The \fBtk print\fR command posts a dialog that allows users to print output
from the \fBcanvas\fR and \fBtext\fR widgets. The printing will be done using
platform-native APIs and dialogs where available. For more details see the
\fBprint\fR manual page.
.\" METHOD: scaling
.TP
\fBtk scaling \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fInumber\fR?
.
Sets and queries the current scaling factor used by Tk to convert between
physical units (for example, points, inches, or millimeters) and pixels.  The
\fInumber\fR argument is a floating point number that specifies the number of
pixels per point on \fIwindow\fR's display.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

120
121
122
123
124
125
126

127
128
129
130
131

132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141

142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
displayed 1.25 times as large as normal.  The initial value for the scaling
factor is set when the application starts, based on properties of the
installed monitor, but it can be changed at any time.  Measurements made
after the scaling factor is changed will use the new scaling factor, but it
is undefined whether existing widgets will resize themselves dynamically to
accommodate the new scaling factor.
.RE

.TP
\fBtk sysnotify \fP \fItitle\fP? \fImessage\fP?
.
The \fBtk sysnotify\fP  command creates a platform-specific system
notification alert. Its intent is to provide a brief, unobtrusive
notification to the user by popping up a window that briefly appears in a
corner of the screen. For more details see the \fBsysnotify\fR manual page.

.TP
\fBtk systray create\fP \fIsubcommand...\fP
.
The \fBtk systray\fP command creates an icon in the platform-specific
tray. For more details see the \fBsystray\fR manual page.

.TP
\fBtk useinputmethods \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIboolean\fR?
.
Sets and queries the state of whether Tk should use XIM (X Input Methods)
for filtering events.  The resulting state is returned.  XIM is used in
some locales (i.e., Japanese, Korean), to handle special input devices. This
feature is only significant on X.  If XIM support is not available, this
will always return 0.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults
to the main window.  If the \fIboolean\fR argument is omitted, the current
state is returned.  This is turned on by default for the main display.

.TP
\fBtk windowingsystem\fR
.
Returns the current Tk windowing system, one of
\fBx11\fR (X11-based), \fBwin32\fR (MS Windows),
or \fBaqua\fR (Mac OS X Aqua).
.SH "SEE ALSO"
busy(n), fontchooser(n), print(n), send(n), sysnotify(n), systray(n), winfo(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
application name, print, send, sysnotify, systray
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







>







>





>










>













121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
displayed 1.25 times as large as normal.  The initial value for the scaling
factor is set when the application starts, based on properties of the
installed monitor, but it can be changed at any time.  Measurements made
after the scaling factor is changed will use the new scaling factor, but it
is undefined whether existing widgets will resize themselves dynamically to
accommodate the new scaling factor.
.RE
.\" METHOD: sysnotify
.TP
\fBtk sysnotify \fP \fItitle\fP? \fImessage\fP?
.
The \fBtk sysnotify\fP  command creates a platform-specific system
notification alert. Its intent is to provide a brief, unobtrusive
notification to the user by popping up a window that briefly appears in a
corner of the screen. For more details see the \fBsysnotify\fR manual page.
.\" METHOD: systray
.TP
\fBtk systray create\fP \fIsubcommand...\fP
.
The \fBtk systray\fP command creates an icon in the platform-specific
tray. For more details see the \fBsystray\fR manual page.
.\" METHOD: useinputmethods
.TP
\fBtk useinputmethods \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIboolean\fR?
.
Sets and queries the state of whether Tk should use XIM (X Input Methods)
for filtering events.  The resulting state is returned.  XIM is used in
some locales (i.e., Japanese, Korean), to handle special input devices. This
feature is only significant on X.  If XIM support is not available, this
will always return 0.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults
to the main window.  If the \fIboolean\fR argument is omitted, the current
state is returned.  This is turned on by default for the main display.
.\" METHOD: windowingsystem
.TP
\fBtk windowingsystem\fR
.
Returns the current Tk windowing system, one of
\fBx11\fR (X11-based), \fBwin32\fR (MS Windows),
or \fBaqua\fR (Mac OS X Aqua).
.SH "SEE ALSO"
busy(n), fontchooser(n), print(n), send(n), sysnotify(n), systray(n), winfo(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
application name, print, send, sysnotify, systray
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/tk_mac.n.

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48
49
50
51
52
53
54

55
56
57
58
59
60
61

62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79

80
81
82
83
84
85
86

87
88
89
90
91
92
93
\fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR

\fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR
\fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR
\fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR
\fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR


\fB::tk::mac::iconBitmap \fIname width height \-kind value\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH "EVENT HANDLER CALLBACKS"
.PP
The Aqua/Mac OS X application environment defines a number of additional
events that applications should respond to. These events are mapped by Tk to
calls to commands in the \fB::tk::mac\fR namespace; unless otherwise noted, if
the command is absent, no action will be taken.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptFile\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for AEDoScriptHandler. This command
executes a Tcl file when an AppleScript sends a
.QW "do script"
command to Wish with a file path as a parameter.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptText\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for AEDoScriptHandler. This command
executes Tcl code when an AppleScript sends a
.QW "do script"
command to Wish with Tcl code or a Tcl procedure as a parameter.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ShowPreferences\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for kAEShowPreferences,
.QW pref .
The application menu
.QW "Preferences"
menu item is only enabled when this proc is defined. Typically this command is
used to wrap a specific own preferences command, which pops up a preferences
window. Something like:
.RS
.PP
.CS
proc ::tk::mac::ShowPreferences {} {
    setPref
}
.CE
.RE

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OpenApplication\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined, this proc fill fire when your application
is initially opened. It is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEOpenApplication,
.QW oapp .

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ReopenApplication\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEReopenApplication,
.QW rapp ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is opened when it is already







<









>







>







>


















>







>







31
32
33
34
35
36
37

38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
\fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR

\fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR
\fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR
\fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR
\fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR


\fB::tk::mac::iconBitmap \fIname width height \-kind value\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH "EVENT HANDLER CALLBACKS"
.PP
The Aqua/Mac OS X application environment defines a number of additional
events that applications should respond to. These events are mapped by Tk to
calls to commands in the \fB::tk::mac\fR namespace; unless otherwise noted, if
the command is absent, no action will be taken.
.\" COMMAND: DoScriptFile
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptFile\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for AEDoScriptHandler. This command
executes a Tcl file when an AppleScript sends a
.QW "do script"
command to Wish with a file path as a parameter.
.\" COMMAND: DoScriptText
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptText\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for AEDoScriptHandler. This command
executes Tcl code when an AppleScript sends a
.QW "do script"
command to Wish with Tcl code or a Tcl procedure as a parameter.
.\" COMMAND: ShowPreferences
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ShowPreferences\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for kAEShowPreferences,
.QW pref .
The application menu
.QW "Preferences"
menu item is only enabled when this proc is defined. Typically this command is
used to wrap a specific own preferences command, which pops up a preferences
window. Something like:
.RS
.PP
.CS
proc ::tk::mac::ShowPreferences {} {
    setPref
}
.CE
.RE
.\" COMMAND: OpenApplication
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OpenApplication\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined, this proc fill fire when your application
is initially opened. It is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEOpenApplication,
.QW oapp .
.\" COMMAND: ReopenApplication
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ReopenApplication\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEReopenApplication,
.QW rapp ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is opened when it is already
102
103
104
105
106
107
108

109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126

127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134

135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144

145
146
147
148
149

150
151
152
153
154
155

156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164

165
166
167
168
169
170
171
    } else {
        wm deiconify .
    }
    raise .
}
.CE
.RE

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OpenDocument \fIfile...\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEOpenDocuments,
.QW odoc ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to open one or more
documents (e.g., by drag & drop onto the app or by opening a document of a
type associated to the app). The proc should take as arguments paths to the
files to be opened, like so:
.RS
.PP
.CS
proc ::tk::mac::OpenDocument {args} {
    foreach f $args {my_open_document $f}
}
.CE
.RE

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PrintDocument \fIfile...\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEPrintDocuments,
.QW pdoc ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to print a
document.  It takes a single absolute file path as an argument.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::Quit\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEQuitApplication,
.QW quit ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to be quit, e.g. via the
quit menu item in the application menu, the quit menu item in the Dock menu,
or during a logout/restart/shutdown etc. If this is not defined, \fBexit\fR is
called instead.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OnHide\fR
.
If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppHidden
event, e.g. via the hide menu item in the application or Dock menus.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OnShow\fR
.
If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppShown
event, e.g. via the show all menu item in the application menu, or by clicking
the Dock icon of a hidden application.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ShowHelp\fR
.
Customizes behavior of Apple Help menu; if this procedure is not defined, the
platform-specific standard Help menu item
.QW "YourApp Help"
performs the default Cocoa action of showing the Help Book configured in the
application's Info.plist (or displaying an alert if no Help Book is
set).

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PerformService\fR
.
Executes a Tcl procedure called from the macOS
.QW Services
menu in the Application menu item. The
.QW Services







>


















>








>










>





>






>









>







106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
    } else {
        wm deiconify .
    }
    raise .
}
.CE
.RE
.\" COMMAND: OpenDocument
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OpenDocument \fIfile...\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEOpenDocuments,
.QW odoc ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to open one or more
documents (e.g., by drag & drop onto the app or by opening a document of a
type associated to the app). The proc should take as arguments paths to the
files to be opened, like so:
.RS
.PP
.CS
proc ::tk::mac::OpenDocument {args} {
    foreach f $args {my_open_document $f}
}
.CE
.RE
.\" COMMAND: PrintDocument
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PrintDocument \fIfile...\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEPrintDocuments,
.QW pdoc ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to print a
document.  It takes a single absolute file path as an argument.
.\" COMMAND: Quit
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::Quit\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEQuitApplication,
.QW quit ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to be quit, e.g. via the
quit menu item in the application menu, the quit menu item in the Dock menu,
or during a logout/restart/shutdown etc. If this is not defined, \fBexit\fR is
called instead.
.\" COMMAND: OnHide
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OnHide\fR
.
If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppHidden
event, e.g. via the hide menu item in the application or Dock menus.
.\" COMMAND: OnShow
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OnShow\fR
.
If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppShown
event, e.g. via the show all menu item in the application menu, or by clicking
the Dock icon of a hidden application.
.\" COMMAND: ShowHelp
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ShowHelp\fR
.
Customizes behavior of Apple Help menu; if this procedure is not defined, the
platform-specific standard Help menu item
.QW "YourApp Help"
performs the default Cocoa action of showing the Help Book configured in the
application's Info.plist (or displaying an alert if no Help Book is
set).
.\" COMMAND: PerformService
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PerformService\fR
.
Executes a Tcl procedure called from the macOS
.QW Services
menu in the Application menu item. The
.QW Services
189
190
191
192
193
194
195

196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217

218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235

236
237
238
239
240

241
242
243
244
245

246
247
248
249
250
251

252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259

260
261
262
263
264
265
266
the application's Info.plist file. The underlying code supporting this
command also allows the text, entry and ttk::entry widgets to access
services from other applications via the Services menu. The NSPortName
key in Wish's Info.plist file is currently set as
.QW "Wish"
; if a developer changes the name of the Wish executable to something
  else, this key should be modified with the same name.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::LaunchURL \fIURL...\fR
.
If defined, launches a URL within Tk. This would be used if a Tk
application wants to handle a URL itself, such as displaying data from
an RSS feed, rather than launching a default application to handle the
URL, although it can defined as such. Wish includes a stub URL scheme
of
.QW foo://
in the CFBundleURLSchemes key of its Info.plist file; this should be customized for the specific URL
scheme the developer wants to support.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::GetAppPath\fR
.
Returns the current applications's file path.
.TP


.SH "ADDITIONAL DIALOGS"
.PP
The Aqua/Mac OS X defines additional dialogs that applications should
support.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR
.
Brings the standard Cocoa about panel to the front with information filled in
from the application bundle files. The panel displays the application icon and
the values associated to the info.plist keys named CFBundleName,
CFBundleShortVersionString, NSAboutPanelOptionVersion and
NSHumanReadableCopyright.  If a file named \fICredits.html\fR or
\fICredits.rtf\fR exists in the bundle's Resources directory then its contents
will be displayed in a scrolling text box at the bottom of the dialog. See the
documentation for -[NSApplication orderFrontStandardAboutPanelWithOptions:]
for more details. A hook is also provided for a custom About dialog.  If a Tcl
proc named tkAboutDialog is defined in the main interpreter then that
procedure will be called instead of opening the standardAboutPanel.
.SH "SYSTEM CONFIGURATION"
.PP
There are a number of additional global configuration options that control the
details of how Tk renders by default.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR
.
Preserves compatibility with older Tk/Aqua metrics; set to \fBfalse\fR for
more native spacing.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR
.
Sets the antialiasing limit; lines thinner that \fIlimit\fR pixels will not be
antialiased. Integer, set to 0 by default, making all lines be antialiased.

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR
.
Sets anti-aliased text.  Controls text antialiasing, possible values for
\fInumber\fR are -1 (default, use system default for text AA), 0 (no text AA),
1 (use text AA).

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR
.
Sets toplevel windows to draw with the modern grayish/ pinstripe Mac
background. Equivalent to configuring the toplevel with
.QW "\fB\-background systemWindowHeaderBackground\fR" ,
or to using a \fBttk::frame\fR.
.SH "SUPPORT COMMANDS"

.TP
\fB::tk::mac::iconBitmap \fIname width height \-kind value\fR
.
Renders native icons and bitmaps in Tk applications (including any image file
readable by NSImage). A native bitmap name is interpreted as follows (in
order):
.RS







>









|
|




|
<
<




>


















>





>





>






>








>







200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223


224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
the application's Info.plist file. The underlying code supporting this
command also allows the text, entry and ttk::entry widgets to access
services from other applications via the Services menu. The NSPortName
key in Wish's Info.plist file is currently set as
.QW "Wish"
; if a developer changes the name of the Wish executable to something
  else, this key should be modified with the same name.
.\" COMMAND: LaunchURL
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::LaunchURL \fIURL...\fR
.
If defined, launches a URL within Tk. This would be used if a Tk
application wants to handle a URL itself, such as displaying data from
an RSS feed, rather than launching a default application to handle the
URL, although it can defined as such. Wish includes a stub URL scheme
of
.QW foo://
in the CFBundleURLSchemes key of its Info.plist file; this should be
customized for the specific URL scheme the developer wants to support.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::GetAppPath\fR
.
Returns the current applications's file path.
.PP


.SH "ADDITIONAL DIALOGS"
.PP
The Aqua/Mac OS X defines additional dialogs that applications should
support.
.\" COMMAND: standardAboutPanel
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR
.
Brings the standard Cocoa about panel to the front with information filled in
from the application bundle files. The panel displays the application icon and
the values associated to the info.plist keys named CFBundleName,
CFBundleShortVersionString, NSAboutPanelOptionVersion and
NSHumanReadableCopyright.  If a file named \fICredits.html\fR or
\fICredits.rtf\fR exists in the bundle's Resources directory then its contents
will be displayed in a scrolling text box at the bottom of the dialog. See the
documentation for -[NSApplication orderFrontStandardAboutPanelWithOptions:]
for more details. A hook is also provided for a custom About dialog.  If a Tcl
proc named tkAboutDialog is defined in the main interpreter then that
procedure will be called instead of opening the standardAboutPanel.
.SH "SYSTEM CONFIGURATION"
.PP
There are a number of additional global configuration options that control the
details of how Tk renders by default.
.\" COMMAND: useCompatibilityMetrics
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR
.
Preserves compatibility with older Tk/Aqua metrics; set to \fBfalse\fR for
more native spacing.
.\" COMMAND: CGAntialiasLimit
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR
.
Sets the antialiasing limit; lines thinner that \fIlimit\fR pixels will not be
antialiased. Integer, set to 0 by default, making all lines be antialiased.
.\" COMMAND: antialiasedtext
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR
.
Sets anti-aliased text.  Controls text antialiasing, possible values for
\fInumber\fR are -1 (default, use system default for text AA), 0 (no text AA),
1 (use text AA).
.\" COMMAND: useThemedToplevel
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR
.
Sets toplevel windows to draw with the modern grayish/ pinstripe Mac
background. Equivalent to configuring the toplevel with
.QW "\fB\-background systemWindowHeaderBackground\fR" ,
or to using a \fBttk::frame\fR.
.SH "SUPPORT COMMANDS"
.\" COMMAND: iconBitmap
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::iconBitmap \fIname width height \-kind value\fR
.
Renders native icons and bitmaps in Tk applications (including any image file
readable by NSImage). A native bitmap name is interpreted as follows (in
order):
.RS
274
275
276
277
278
279
280

281
282
283
284

285
286
287
288

289
290
291
292

293
294
295
296

297
298
299
300

301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
.IP \(bu 3
NSImage url string
.IP \(bu 3
4-char OSType of IconServices icon
.PP
The \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR arguments to \fBtk::mac::iconBitmap\fR define
the dimensions of the image to create, and \fI\-kind\fR must be one of:

.TP
\fB\-file\fR
.
icon of file at given path

.TP
\fB\-fileType\fR
.
icon of given file type

.TP
\fB\-osType\fR
.
icon of given 4-char OSType file type

.TP
\fB\-systemType\fR
.
icon for given IconServices 4-char OSType

.TP
\fB\-namedImage\fR
.
named NSImage for given name

.TP
\fB\-imageFile\fR
.
image at given path
.RE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
bind(n), wm(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
about dialog, antialiasing, Apple event, icon, NSImage
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







>




>




>




>




>




>












290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
.IP \(bu 3
NSImage url string
.IP \(bu 3
4-char OSType of IconServices icon
.PP
The \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR arguments to \fBtk::mac::iconBitmap\fR define
the dimensions of the image to create, and \fI\-kind\fR must be one of:
.\" OPTION: -file
.TP
\fB\-file\fR
.
icon of file at given path
.\" OPTION: -fileType
.TP
\fB\-fileType\fR
.
icon of given file type
.\" OPTION: -osType
.TP
\fB\-osType\fR
.
icon of given 4-char OSType file type
.\" OPTION: -systemType
.TP
\fB\-systemType\fR
.
icon for given IconServices 4-char OSType
.\" OPTION: -namedImage
.TP
\fB\-namedImage\fR
.
named NSImage for given name
.\" OPTION: -imageFile
.TP
\fB\-imageFile\fR
.
image at given path
.RE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
bind(n), wm(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
about dialog, antialiasing, Apple event, icon, NSImage
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/tkerror.n.

14
15
16
17
18
19
20


21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtkerror \fImessage\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Note: as of Tk 4.1 the \fBtkerror\fR command has been renamed to
\fBbgerror\fR because the event loop (which is what usually invokes


it) is now part of Tcl.  For backward compatibility
the \fBbgerror\fR provided by the current Tk version still
tries to call \fBtkerror\fR if there is one (or an auto loadable one),
so old script defining that error handler should still work, but you
should anyhow modify your scripts to use \fBbgerror\fR instead
of \fBtkerror\fR because that support for the old name might vanish
in the near future. If that call fails, \fBbgerror\fR
posts a dialog showing the error and offering to see the stack trace
to the user. If you want your own error management you should
directly override \fBbgerror\fR instead of \fBtkerror\fR.
Documentation for \fBbgerror\fR is available as part of Tcl's
documentation.
.SH KEYWORDS
background error, reporting







>
>
|





|







14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtkerror \fImessage\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Note: as of Tk 4.1 the \fBtkerror\fR command has been renamed to
\fBbgerror\fR because the event loop (which is what usually invokes
it) is now part of Tcl.  Using the \fBtkerror\fR name is deprecated.
.PP
For backward compatibility
the \fBbgerror\fR provided by the current Tk version still
tries to call \fBtkerror\fR if there is one (or an auto loadable one),
so old script defining that error handler should still work, but you
should anyhow modify your scripts to use \fBbgerror\fR instead
of \fBtkerror\fR because that support for the old name might vanish
in the future. If that call fails, \fBbgerror\fR
posts a dialog showing the error and offering to see the stack trace
to the user. If you want your own error management you should
directly override \fBbgerror\fR instead of \fBtkerror\fR.
Documentation for \fBbgerror\fR is available as part of Tcl's
documentation.
.SH KEYWORDS
background error, reporting

Changes to doc/tkvars.n.

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.SH NAME
geometry, tk_library, tk_patchLevel, tk::scalingPct, tk_strictMotif, tk::svgFmt, tk_version \- Variables used or set by Tk
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The following Tcl variables are either set or used by Tk at various times
in its execution:

.TP 15
\fBtk_library\fR
.
This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library
of Tcl scripts related to Tk.  These scripts include an initialization
file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up,
plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors







>







12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
.SH NAME
geometry, tk_library, tk_patchLevel, tk::scalingPct, tk_strictMotif, tk::svgFmt, tk_version \- Variables used or set by Tk
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The following Tcl variables are either set or used by Tk at various times
in its execution:
.\" VARIABLE: tk_library
.TP 15
\fBtk_library\fR
.
This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library
of Tcl scripts related to Tk.  These scripts include an initialization
file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up,
plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54

55
56
57
58
59
60
61
compiled-in default location, the location of the Tcl library directory,
the location of the binary containing the application, and the current
working directory.
.PP
The variable can be modified by an application to switch to a different
library.
.RE

.TP
\fBtk_patchLevel\fR
.
Contains a dot-separated sequence of decimal integers giving the
current patch level for Tk.
The patch level is incremented for each new release or patch, and
it uniquely identifies an official version of Tk.
.RS
.PP
This value is normally the same as the result of
.QW "\fBpackage require\fR \fBtk\fR" .
.RE

.TP
\fBtk::scalingPct\fR
.
Tk sets this variable at initialization time to the scaling percentage
corresponding to the display's DPI scaling level.  This value is at least
100 and is restricted to multiples of 25 (100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
225, ...).  The sizes and various attributes of the Tk core and Ttk







>












>







37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
compiled-in default location, the location of the Tcl library directory,
the location of the binary containing the application, and the current
working directory.
.PP
The variable can be modified by an application to switch to a different
library.
.RE
.\" VARIABLE: tk_patchLevel
.TP
\fBtk_patchLevel\fR
.
Contains a dot-separated sequence of decimal integers giving the
current patch level for Tk.
The patch level is incremented for each new release or patch, and
it uniquely identifies an official version of Tk.
.RS
.PP
This value is normally the same as the result of
.QW "\fBpackage require\fR \fBtk\fR" .
.RE
.\" VARIABLE: scalingPct
.TP
\fBtk::scalingPct\fR
.
Tk sets this variable at initialization time to the scaling percentage
corresponding to the display's DPI scaling level.  This value is at least
100 and is restricted to multiples of 25 (100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
225, ...).  The sizes and various attributes of the Tk core and Ttk
83
84
85
86
87
88
89

90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98

99
100
101
102
103
104
105
150, or 175 when running GNOME on Xorg or the Cinnamon desktop).  On
\fBx11\fR the scaling percentage is computed mostly (but not
exclusively) from the value of the X resource Xft.dpi, and, as an
additional step, Tk synchronizes the scaling factor used to convert
between physical units and pixels with the scaling percentage, with the
aid of the \fBtk scaling\fR command.
.RE

.TP
\fBtk_strictMotif\fR
.
This variable is set to zero by default.
If an application sets it to one, then Tk attempts to adhere as
closely as possible to Motif look-and-feel standards.
For example, active elements such as buttons and scrollbar
sliders will not change color when the pointer passes over them.
Modern applications should not normally set this variable.

.TP
\fBtk::svgFmt\fR
.
This variable is set at Tk initialization time to
.RS
.RS 4
.PP







>









>







86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
150, or 175 when running GNOME on Xorg or the Cinnamon desktop).  On
\fBx11\fR the scaling percentage is computed mostly (but not
exclusively) from the value of the X resource Xft.dpi, and, as an
additional step, Tk synchronizes the scaling factor used to convert
between physical units and pixels with the scaling percentage, with the
aid of the \fBtk scaling\fR command.
.RE
.\" VARIABLE: tk_strictMotif
.TP
\fBtk_strictMotif\fR
.
This variable is set to zero by default.
If an application sets it to one, then Tk attempts to adhere as
closely as possible to Motif look-and-feel standards.
For example, active elements such as buttons and scrollbar
sliders will not change color when the pointer passes over them.
Modern applications should not normally set this variable.
.\" VARIABLE: svgFmt
.TP
\fBtk::svgFmt\fR
.
This variable is set at Tk initialization time to
.RS
.RS 4
.PP
115
116
117
118
119
120
121

122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136

137
138
139
140
141
142
143


144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156

157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
DPI scaling level.
.PP
Note that any access to this variable is supposed to be strictly
read-only!  Note also that whenever the scaling factor used to convert
between physical units and pixels is changed via \fBtk scaling\fR, the
value of the variable \fBtk::svgFmt\fR is automatically updated.
.RE

.TP
\fBtk_version\fR
.
Tk sets this variable in the interpreter for each application.
The variable holds the current version number of the Tk
library in the form \fImajor\fR.\fIminor\fR.  \fIMajor\fR and
\fIminor\fR are integers.  The major version number increases in
any Tk release that includes changes that are not backward compatible
(i.e. whenever existing Tk applications and scripts may have to change to
work with the new release).  The minor version number increases with
each new release of Tk, except that it resets to zero whenever the
major version number changes.
.SS "INTERNAL AND DEBUGGING VARIABLES"
.PP
These variables should not normally be set by user code.

.TP
\fBtk::Priv\fR
.
This variable is an array containing several pieces of information
that are private to Tk.  The elements of \fBtk::Priv\fR are used by
Tk library procedures and default bindings.
They should not be accessed by any code outside Tk.


.TP
\fBtk_textRedraw\fR
.TP
\fBtk_textRelayout\fR
.
These variables are set by text widgets when they have debugging
turned on.  The values written to these variables can be used to
test or debug text widget operations.  These variables are mostly
used by Tk's test suite.
.SH "OTHER GLOBAL VARIABLES"
The following variables are only guaranteed to exist in \fBwish\fR
executables; the Tk library does not define them itself but many Tk
environments do.

.TP
\fBgeometry\fR
.
If set, contains the user-supplied geometry specification to use for
the main Tk window.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
package(n), tclvars(n), wish(1)
.SH KEYWORDS
environment, text, variables, version
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







>















>







>
>













>












120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
DPI scaling level.
.PP
Note that any access to this variable is supposed to be strictly
read-only!  Note also that whenever the scaling factor used to convert
between physical units and pixels is changed via \fBtk scaling\fR, the
value of the variable \fBtk::svgFmt\fR is automatically updated.
.RE
.\" VARIABLE: tk_version
.TP
\fBtk_version\fR
.
Tk sets this variable in the interpreter for each application.
The variable holds the current version number of the Tk
library in the form \fImajor\fR.\fIminor\fR.  \fIMajor\fR and
\fIminor\fR are integers.  The major version number increases in
any Tk release that includes changes that are not backward compatible
(i.e. whenever existing Tk applications and scripts may have to change to
work with the new release).  The minor version number increases with
each new release of Tk, except that it resets to zero whenever the
major version number changes.
.SS "INTERNAL AND DEBUGGING VARIABLES"
.PP
These variables should not normally be set by user code.
.\" VARIABLE: Priv
.TP
\fBtk::Priv\fR
.
This variable is an array containing several pieces of information
that are private to Tk.  The elements of \fBtk::Priv\fR are used by
Tk library procedures and default bindings.
They should not be accessed by any code outside Tk.
.\" VARIABLE: tk_textRedraw
.\" VARIABLE: tk_textRelayout
.TP
\fBtk_textRedraw\fR
.TP
\fBtk_textRelayout\fR
.
These variables are set by text widgets when they have debugging
turned on.  The values written to these variables can be used to
test or debug text widget operations.  These variables are mostly
used by Tk's test suite.
.SH "OTHER GLOBAL VARIABLES"
The following variables are only guaranteed to exist in \fBwish\fR
executables; the Tk library does not define them itself but many Tk
environments do.
.\" VARIABLE: geometry
.TP
\fBgeometry\fR
.
If set, contains the user-supplied geometry specification to use for
the main Tk window.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
package(n), tclvars(n), wish(1)
.SH KEYWORDS
environment, text, variables, version
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/tkwait.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

15
16
17
18
19

20
21
22
23
24
25

26
27
28

29
30
31
32
33
34

35
36
37
38
39
40
41
.TH tkwait n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tkwait \- Wait for variable to change or window to be destroyed
.SH SYNOPSIS

\fBtkwait variable \fIname\fR
.sp
\fBtkwait visibility \fIname\fR
.sp
\fBtkwait window \fIname\fR

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtkwait\fR command waits for one of several things to happen,
then it returns without taking any other actions.
The return value is always an empty string.

If the first argument is \fBvariable\fR (or any abbreviation of
it) then the second argument is the name of a global variable and the
command waits for that variable to be modified.

If the first argument is \fBvisibility\fR (or any abbreviation
of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the
\fBtkwait\fR command waits for a change in its
visibility state (as indicated by the arrival of a VisibilityNotify
event).  This form is typically used to wait for a newly-created
window to appear on the screen before taking some action.

If the first argument is \fBwindow\fR (or any abbreviation
of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the
\fBtkwait\fR command waits for that window to be destroyed.
This form is typically used to wait for a user to finish interacting
with a dialog box before using the result of that interaction.
.PP
While the \fBtkwait\fR command is waiting it processes events in







>

<

<

>






>



>






>







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
.TH tkwait n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tkwait \- Wait for variable to change or window to be destroyed
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBtkwait variable \fIname\fR

\fBtkwait visibility \fIname\fR

\fBtkwait window \fIname\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtkwait\fR command waits for one of several things to happen,
then it returns without taking any other actions.
The return value is always an empty string.
.\" METHOD: variable
If the first argument is \fBvariable\fR (or any abbreviation of
it) then the second argument is the name of a global variable and the
command waits for that variable to be modified.
.\" METHOD: visibility
If the first argument is \fBvisibility\fR (or any abbreviation
of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the
\fBtkwait\fR command waits for a change in its
visibility state (as indicated by the arrival of a VisibilityNotify
event).  This form is typically used to wait for a newly-created
window to appear on the screen before taking some action.
.\" METHOD: window
If the first argument is \fBwindow\fR (or any abbreviation
of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the
\fBtkwait\fR command waits for that window to be destroyed.
This form is typically used to wait for a user to finish interacting
with a dialog box before using the result of that interaction.
.PP
While the \fBtkwait\fR command is waiting it processes events in

Changes to doc/toplevel.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH toplevel n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
toplevel \- Create and manipulate 'toplevel' main and popup window widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtoplevel\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-borderwidth	\-highlightcolor	\-pady
\-cursor	\-highlightthickness	\-relief
\-highlightbackground	\-padx	\-takefocus
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-background background Background







|







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.TH toplevel n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
toplevel \- Create and manipulate 'toplevel' main and popup window widgets
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtoplevel\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
.SO
\-borderwidth	\-highlightcolor	\-pady
\-cursor	\-highlightthickness	\-relief
\-highlightbackground	\-padx	\-takefocus
.SE
.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
.OP \-background background Background
144
145
146
147
148
149
150

151
152
153
154
155
156
157

158
159
160
161
162
163
164
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
.PP
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the toplevel widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for toplevel widgets:

.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtoplevel\fR
command.

.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified







>







>







144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.CE
.PP
\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
the toplevel widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
commands are possible for toplevel widgets:
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtoplevel\fR
command.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified

Changes to doc/winfo.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23

24
25
26
27
28
29

30
31

32
33
34
35
36
37
38

39
40

41
42

43
44

45
46
47
48
49
50

51
52

53

54
55

56
57
58
59
60
61
62

63
64

65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81

82
83

84
85

86
87

88
89

90
91

92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100

101
102

103
104
105

106
107

108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115

116
117

118
119
120
121

122
123

124
125
126
127
128

129
130

131

132
133

134
135
136
137
138
139
140

141
142

143
144
145

146
147

148
149

150
151

152
153
154
155
156
157

158
159

160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168

169
170

171
172
173
174
175
176

177
178

179
180
181
182
183
184
185

186
187

188
189
190
191
192
193

194
195

196
197
198

199
200

201
202
203

204
205

206
207
208
209
210
211

212
213

214
215
216
217

218
219

220
221
222
223

224
225

226
227

228
229

230
231

232
233

234
235

236
237

238
239

240
241

242
243

244
245

246
247

248
249

250
251
252
253

254
255

256
257

258
259

260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268

269
270

271
272
273

274
275

276
277
278

279
280

281
282
283
284

285
286

287

288
289

290
291
292
293
294
295
296

297
298

299
300

301
302

303
304

305
306

307
308
309
310

311
312

313
314
315
316

317
318

319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326

327
328

329
330
331
332

333
334

335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
.TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
winfo \- Return window-related information
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBwinfo\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBwinfo\fR command is used to retrieve information about windows
managed by Tk.  It can take any of a number of different forms,
depending on the \fIoption\fR argument.  The legal forms are:

.TP
\fBwinfo atom \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIname\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the integer identifier for the
atom whose name is \fIname\fR.  If no atom exists with the name
\fIname\fR then a new one is created.
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the atom is looked
up on the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it is looked up on
the display of the application's main window.

.TP
\fBwinfo atomname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR

Returns the textual name for the atom whose integer identifier is
\fIid\fR.
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked
up on the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it is looked up on
the display of the application's main window.
This command is the inverse of the \fBwinfo atom\fR command.
It generates an error if no such atom exists.

.TP
\fBwinfo cells \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the
color map for \fIwindow\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo children \fIwindow\fR

Returns a list containing the path names of all the children
of \fIwindow\fR. Top-level windows are returned as children
of their logical parents. The list is in stacking order, with
the lowest window first, except for Top-level windows which
are not returned in stacking order. Use the \fBwm stackorder\fR
command to query the stacking order of Top-level windows.

.TP
\fBwinfo class \fIwindow\fR

Returns the class name for \fIwindow\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo colormapfull \fIwindow\fR

Returns 1 if the colormap for \fIwindow\fR is known to be full, 0
otherwise.  The colormap for a window is
.QW known
to be full if the last
attempt to allocate a new color on that window failed and this
application has not freed any colors in the colormap since the
failed allocation.

.TP
\fBwinfo containing \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIrootX rootY\fR

Returns the path name for the window containing the point given
by \fIrootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR.
\fIRootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR are specified in screen units (i.e.
any form acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) in the coordinate
system of the root window (if a virtual-root window manager is in
use then the coordinate system of the virtual root window is used).
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the coordinates refer
to the screen containing \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise they refer to the
screen of the application's main window.
If no window in this application contains the point then an empty
string is returned.
An empty string is also returned if the point lies in the title bar
or border of its highest containing toplevel in this application.
(Note that with some window managers the borders may be invisible.)
In selecting the containing window, children are given higher priority
than parents and among siblings the highest one in the stacking order is
chosen.

.TP
\fBwinfo depth \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the depth of \fIwindow\fR (number
of bits per pixel).

.TP
\fBwinfo exists \fIwindow\fR

Returns 1 if there exists a window named \fIwindow\fR, 0 if no such
window exists.

.TP
\fBwinfo fpixels \fIwindow\fR \fInumber\fR

Returns a floating-point value giving the number of pixels
in \fIwindow\fR corresponding to the distance given by \fInumber\fR.
\fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR, such as
.QW 2.0c
or
.QW 1i .
The return value may be fractional;  for an integer value, use
\fBwinfo pixels\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo geometry \fIwindow\fR

Returns the geometry for \fIwindow\fR, in the form
\fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fB+\fIx\fB+\fIy\fR.  All dimensions are
in pixels.

.TP
\fBwinfo height \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's height in pixels.
When a window is first created its height will be 1 pixel;  the
height will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfil
the window's needs.
If you need the true height immediately after creating a widget,
invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it,
or use \fBwinfo reqheight\fR to get the window's requested height
instead of its actual height.

.TP
\fBwinfo id \fIwindow\fR

Returns a hexadecimal string giving a low-level platform-specific
identifier for \fIwindow\fR.  On Unix platforms, this is the X
window identifier.  Under Windows, this is the Windows
HWND.  On the Macintosh the value has no meaning outside Tk.

.TP
\fBwinfo interps \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR?

Returns a list whose members are the names of all Tcl interpreters
(e.g. all Tk-based applications) currently registered for a particular display.
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the return value refers
to the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it refers to
the display of the application's main window.

.TP
\fBwinfo ismapped \fIwindow\fR

Returns \fB1\fR if \fIwindow\fR is currently mapped, \fB0\fR otherwise.

.TP
\fBwinfo manager \fIwindow\fR

Returns the name of the geometry manager currently
responsible for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR
is not managed by any geometry manager.
The name is usually the name of the Tcl command for the geometry
manager, such as \fBpack\fR or \fBplace\fR.
If the geometry manager is a widget, such as canvases or text, the
name is the widget's class command, such as \fBcanvas\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo name \fIwindow\fR

Returns \fIwindow\fR's name (i.e. its name within its parent, as opposed
to its full path name).
The command \fBwinfo name .\fR will return the name of the application.

.TP
\fBwinfo parent \fIwindow\fR

Returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's parent, or an empty string
if \fIwindow\fR is the main window of the application.

.TP
\fBwinfo pathname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR

Returns the path name of the window whose X identifier is \fIid\fR.
\fIId\fR must be a decimal, hexadecimal, or octal integer and must
correspond to a window in the invoking application.
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked
up on the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it is looked up on
the display of the application's main window.

.TP
\fBwinfo pixels \fIwindow\fR \fInumber\fR

Returns the number of pixels in \fIwindow\fR corresponding
to the distance given by \fInumber\fR.
\fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as
.QW 2.0c
or
.QW 1i .
The result is rounded to the nearest integer value;  for a
fractional result, use \fBwinfo fpixels\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo pointerx \fIwindow\fR

If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the
pointer's x coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window.
If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is
measured in the virtual root.
If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then
-1 is returned.

.TP
\fBwinfo pointerxy \fIwindow\fR

If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns a list
with two elements, which are the pointer's x and y coordinates measured
in pixels in the screen's root window.
If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position
is computed in the virtual root.
If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then
both of the returned coordinates are \-1.

.TP
\fBwinfo pointery \fIwindow\fR

If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the
pointer's y coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window.
If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position
is computed in the virtual root.
If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then
-1 is returned.

.TP
\fBwinfo reqheight \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested height,
in pixels.  This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry
manager to compute its geometry.

.TP
\fBwinfo reqwidth \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested width,
in pixels.  This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry
manager to compute its geometry.

.TP
\fBwinfo rgb \fIwindow color\fR

Returns a list containing three decimal values in the range 0 to
65535, which are the
red, green, and blue intensities that correspond to \fIcolor\fR in
the window given by \fIwindow\fR.  \fIColor\fR
may be specified in any of the forms acceptable for a color
option.

.TP
\fBwinfo rootx \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in the root
window of the screen, of the
upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
has no border).

.TP
\fBwinfo rooty \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in the root
window of the screen, of the
upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
has no border).

.TP
\fBwinfo screen \fIwindow\fR

Returns the name of the screen associated with \fIwindow\fR, in
the form \fIdisplayName\fR.\fIscreenIndex\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo screencells \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the default
color map for \fIwindow\fR's screen.

.TP
\fBwinfo screendepth \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the depth of the root window
of \fIwindow\fR's screen (number of bits per pixel).

.TP
\fBwinfo screenheight \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
in pixels.

.TP
\fBwinfo screenmmheight \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
in millimeters.

.TP
\fBwinfo screenmmwidth \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
in millimeters.

.TP
\fBwinfo screenvisual \fIwindow\fR

Returns one of the following strings to indicate the default visual
class for \fIwindow\fR's screen: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR,
\fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or
\fBtruecolor\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo screenwidth \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
in pixels.

.TP
\fBwinfo server \fIwindow\fR

Returns a string containing information about the server for
\fIwindow\fR's display.  The exact format of this string may vary
from platform to platform.  For X servers the string
has the form
.QW "\fBX\fImajor\fBR\fIminor vendor vendorVersion\fR"
where \fImajor\fR and \fIminor\fR are the version and revision
numbers provided by the server (e.g., \fBX11R5\fR), \fIvendor\fR
is the name of the vendor for the server, and \fIvendorRelease\fR
is an integer release number provided by the server.

.TP
\fBwinfo toplevel \fIwindow\fR

Returns the path name of the top-of-hierarchy window containing \fIwindow\fR.
In standard Tk this will always be a \fBtoplevel\fR widget, but extensions may
create other kinds of top-of-hierarchy widgets.

.TP
\fBwinfo viewable \fIwindow\fR

Returns 1 if \fIwindow\fR and all of its ancestors up through the
nearest toplevel window are mapped.  Returns 0 if any of these
windows are not mapped.

.TP
\fBwinfo visual \fIwindow\fR

Returns one of the following strings to indicate the visual
class for \fIwindow\fR: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR,
\fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or
\fBtruecolor\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo visualid \fIwindow\fR

Returns the X identifier for the visual for \fIwindow\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo visualsavailable \fIwindow\fR ?\fBincludeids\fR?

Returns a list whose elements describe the visuals available for
\fIwindow\fR's screen.
Each element consists of a visual class followed by an integer depth.
The class has the same form as returned by \fBwinfo visual\fR.
The depth gives the number of bits per pixel in the visual.
In addition, if the \fBincludeids\fR argument is provided, then the
depth is followed by the X identifier for the visual.

.TP
\fBwinfo vrootheight \fIwindow\fR

Returns the height of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR
if there is one;  otherwise returns the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen.

.TP
\fBwinfo vrootwidth \fIwindow\fR

Returns the width of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR
if there is one;  otherwise returns the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen.

.TP
\fBwinfo vrootx \fIwindow\fR

Returns the x-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR,
relative to the root window of its screen.
This is normally either zero or negative.
Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo vrooty \fIwindow\fR

Returns the y-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR,
relative to the root window of its screen.
This is normally either zero or negative.
Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR.

.TP
\fBwinfo width \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's width in pixels.
When a window is first created its width will be 1 pixel;  the
width will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfil
the window's needs.
If you need the true width immediately after creating a widget,
invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it,
or use \fBwinfo reqwidth\fR to get the window's requested width
instead of its actual width.

.TP
\fBwinfo x \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's
parent, of the
upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
has no border).

.TP
\fBwinfo y \fIwindow\fR

Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's
parent, of the
upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
has no border).
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Print where the mouse pointer is and what window it is currently over:
.CS
lassign [\fBwinfo pointerxy\fR .] x y
puts \-nonewline "Mouse pointer at ($x,$y) which is "
set win [\fBwinfo containing\fR $x $y]
if {$win eq ""} {
    puts "over no window"
} else {
    puts "over $win"
}
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
atom, children, class, geometry, height, identifier, information, interpreters,
mapped, parent, path name, screen, virtual root, width, window
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|






>


>






>


>







>


>


>


>






>


>

>


>







>


>

















>


>


>


>


>

|
>









>


>



>


>








>


>




>


>





>


>

>


>







>


>



>


>


>


>






>

|
>









>


>






>


>







>


>






>


>



>


>



>


>






>


>




>


>




>


>


>


>


>


>


>


>


>


>


>


>


>


>




>


>


>


>









>


>



>


>



>


>




>


>

>


>







>


>


>


>


>


>




>


>




>


>








>


>




>


>









|













8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
.TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
winfo \- Return window-related information
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBwinfo\fI option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBwinfo\fR command is used to retrieve information about windows
managed by Tk.  It can take any of a number of different forms,
depending on the \fIoption\fR argument.  The legal forms are:
.\" METHOD: atom
.TP
\fBwinfo atom \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIname\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the integer identifier for the
atom whose name is \fIname\fR.  If no atom exists with the name
\fIname\fR then a new one is created.
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the atom is looked
up on the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it is looked up on
the display of the application's main window.
.\" METHOD: atomname
.TP
\fBwinfo atomname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR
.
Returns the textual name for the atom whose integer identifier is
\fIid\fR.
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked
up on the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it is looked up on
the display of the application's main window.
This command is the inverse of the \fBwinfo atom\fR command.
It generates an error if no such atom exists.
.\" METHOD: cells
.TP
\fBwinfo cells \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the
color map for \fIwindow\fR.
.\" METHOD: children
.TP
\fBwinfo children \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a list containing the path names of all the children
of \fIwindow\fR. Top-level windows are returned as children
of their logical parents. The list is in stacking order, with
the lowest window first, except for Top-level windows which
are not returned in stacking order. Use the \fBwm stackorder\fR
command to query the stacking order of Top-level windows.
.\" METHOD: class
.TP
\fBwinfo class \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the class name for \fIwindow\fR.
.\" METHOD: colormapfull
.TP
\fBwinfo colormapfull \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns 1 if the colormap for \fIwindow\fR is known to be full, 0
otherwise.  The colormap for a window is
.QW known
to be full if the last
attempt to allocate a new color on that window failed and this
application has not freed any colors in the colormap since the
failed allocation.
.\" METHOD: containing
.TP
\fBwinfo containing \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIrootX rootY\fR
.
Returns the path name for the window containing the point given
by \fIrootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR.
\fIRootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR are specified in screen units (i.e.
any form acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) in the coordinate
system of the root window (if a virtual-root window manager is in
use then the coordinate system of the virtual root window is used).
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the coordinates refer
to the screen containing \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise they refer to the
screen of the application's main window.
If no window in this application contains the point then an empty
string is returned.
An empty string is also returned if the point lies in the title bar
or border of its highest containing toplevel in this application.
(Note that with some window managers the borders may be invisible.)
In selecting the containing window, children are given higher priority
than parents and among siblings the highest one in the stacking order is
chosen.
.\" METHOD: depth
.TP
\fBwinfo depth \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the depth of \fIwindow\fR (number
of bits per pixel).
.\" METHOD: exists
.TP
\fBwinfo exists \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns 1 if there exists a window named \fIwindow\fR, 0 if no such
window exists.
.\" METHOD: fpixels
.TP
\fBwinfo fpixels \fIwindow number\fR
.
Returns a floating-point value giving the number of pixels
in \fIwindow\fR corresponding to the distance given by \fInumber\fR.
\fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR, such as
.QW 2.0c
or
.QW 1i .
The return value may be fractional;  for an integer value, use
\fBwinfo pixels\fR.
.\" METHOD: geometry
.TP
\fBwinfo geometry \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the geometry for \fIwindow\fR, in the form
\fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fB+\fIx\fB+\fIy\fR.  All dimensions are
in pixels.
.\" METHOD: height
.TP
\fBwinfo height \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's height in pixels.
When a window is first created its height will be 1 pixel;  the
height will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfil
the window's needs.
If you need the true height immediately after creating a widget,
invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it,
or use \fBwinfo reqheight\fR to get the window's requested height
instead of its actual height.
.\" METHOD: id
.TP
\fBwinfo id \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a hexadecimal string giving a low-level platform-specific
identifier for \fIwindow\fR.  On Unix platforms, this is the X
window identifier.  Under Windows, this is the Windows
HWND.  On the Macintosh the value has no meaning outside Tk.
.\" METHOD: interps
.TP
\fBwinfo interps \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR?
.
Returns a list whose members are the names of all Tcl interpreters
(e.g. all Tk-based applications) currently registered for a particular display.
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the return value refers
to the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it refers to
the display of the application's main window.
.\" METHOD: ismapped
.TP
\fBwinfo ismapped \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns \fB1\fR if \fIwindow\fR is currently mapped, \fB0\fR otherwise.
.\" METHOD: manager
.TP
\fBwinfo manager \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the name of the geometry manager currently
responsible for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR
is not managed by any geometry manager.
The name is usually the name of the Tcl command for the geometry
manager, such as \fBpack\fR or \fBplace\fR.
If the geometry manager is a widget, such as canvases or text, the
name is the widget's class command, such as \fBcanvas\fR.
.\" METHOD: name
.TP
\fBwinfo name \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns \fIwindow\fR's name (i.e. its name within its parent, as opposed
to its full path name).
The command \fBwinfo name .\fR will return the name of the application.
.\" METHOD: parent
.TP
\fBwinfo parent \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's parent, or an empty string
if \fIwindow\fR is the main window of the application.
.\" METHOD: pathname
.TP
\fBwinfo pathname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR
.
Returns the path name of the window whose X identifier is \fIid\fR.
\fIId\fR must be a decimal, hexadecimal, or octal integer and must
correspond to a window in the invoking application.
If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked
up on the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it is looked up on
the display of the application's main window.
.\" METHOD: pixels
.TP
\fBwinfo pixels \fIwindow number\fR
.
Returns the number of pixels in \fIwindow\fR corresponding
to the distance given by \fInumber\fR.
\fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as
.QW 2.0c
or
.QW 1i .
The result is rounded to the nearest integer value;  for a
fractional result, use \fBwinfo fpixels\fR.
.\" METHOD: pointerx
.TP
\fBwinfo pointerx \fIwindow\fR
.
If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the
pointer's x coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window.
If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is
measured in the virtual root.
If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then
-1 is returned.
.\" METHOD: pointerxy
.TP
\fBwinfo pointerxy \fIwindow\fR
.
If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns a list
with two elements, which are the pointer's x and y coordinates measured
in pixels in the screen's root window.
If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position
is computed in the virtual root.
If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then
both of the returned coordinates are \-1.
.\" METHOD: pointery
.TP
\fBwinfo pointery \fIwindow\fR
.
If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the
pointer's y coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window.
If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position
is computed in the virtual root.
If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then
-1 is returned.
.\" METHOD: reqheight
.TP
\fBwinfo reqheight \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested height,
in pixels.  This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry
manager to compute its geometry.
.\" METHOD: reqwidth
.TP
\fBwinfo reqwidth \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested width,
in pixels.  This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry
manager to compute its geometry.
.\" METHOD: rgb
.TP
\fBwinfo rgb \fIwindow color\fR
.
Returns a list containing three decimal values in the range 0 to
65535, which are the
red, green, and blue intensities that correspond to \fIcolor\fR in
the window given by \fIwindow\fR.  \fIColor\fR
may be specified in any of the forms acceptable for a color
option.
.\" METHOD: rootx
.TP
\fBwinfo rootx \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in the root
window of the screen, of the
upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
has no border).
.\" METHOD: rooty
.TP
\fBwinfo rooty \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in the root
window of the screen, of the
upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
has no border).
.\" METHOD: screen
.TP
\fBwinfo screen \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the name of the screen associated with \fIwindow\fR, in
the form \fIdisplayName\fR.\fIscreenIndex\fR.
.\" METHOD: screencells
.TP
\fBwinfo screencells \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the default
color map for \fIwindow\fR's screen.
.\" METHOD: screendepth
.TP
\fBwinfo screendepth \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the depth of the root window
of \fIwindow\fR's screen (number of bits per pixel).
.\" METHOD: screenheight
.TP
\fBwinfo screenheight \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
in pixels.
.\" METHOD: screenmmheight
.TP
\fBwinfo screenmmheight \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
in millimeters.
.\" METHOD: screenmmwidth
.TP
\fBwinfo screenmmwidth \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
in millimeters.
.\" METHOD: screenvisual
.TP
\fBwinfo screenvisual \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns one of the following strings to indicate the default visual
class for \fIwindow\fR's screen: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR,
\fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or
\fBtruecolor\fR.
.\" METHOD: screenwidth
.TP
\fBwinfo screenwidth \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
in pixels.
.\" METHOD: server
.TP
\fBwinfo server \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a string containing information about the server for
\fIwindow\fR's display.  The exact format of this string may vary
from platform to platform.  For X servers the string
has the form
.QW "\fBX\fImajor\fBR\fIminor vendor vendorVersion\fR"
where \fImajor\fR and \fIminor\fR are the version and revision
numbers provided by the server (e.g., \fBX11R5\fR), \fIvendor\fR
is the name of the vendor for the server, and \fIvendorRelease\fR
is an integer release number provided by the server.
.\" METHOD: toplevel
.TP
\fBwinfo toplevel \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the path name of the top-of-hierarchy window containing \fIwindow\fR.
In standard Tk this will always be a \fBtoplevel\fR widget, but extensions may
create other kinds of top-of-hierarchy widgets.
.\" METHOD: viewable
.TP
\fBwinfo viewable \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns 1 if \fIwindow\fR and all of its ancestors up through the
nearest toplevel window are mapped.  Returns 0 if any of these
windows are not mapped.
.\" METHOD: visual
.TP
\fBwinfo visual \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns one of the following strings to indicate the visual
class for \fIwindow\fR: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR,
\fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or
\fBtruecolor\fR.
.\" METHOD: visualid
.TP
\fBwinfo visualid \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the X identifier for the visual for \fIwindow\fR.
.\" METHOD: visualsavailable
.TP
\fBwinfo visualsavailable \fIwindow\fR ?\fBincludeids\fR?
.
Returns a list whose elements describe the visuals available for
\fIwindow\fR's screen.
Each element consists of a visual class followed by an integer depth.
The class has the same form as returned by \fBwinfo visual\fR.
The depth gives the number of bits per pixel in the visual.
In addition, if the \fBincludeids\fR argument is provided, then the
depth is followed by the X identifier for the visual.
.\" METHOD: vrootheight
.TP
\fBwinfo vrootheight \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the height of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR
if there is one;  otherwise returns the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen.
.\" METHOD: vrootwidth
.TP
\fBwinfo vrootwidth \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the width of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR
if there is one;  otherwise returns the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen.
.\" METHOD: vrootx
.TP
\fBwinfo vrootx \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the x-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR,
relative to the root window of its screen.
This is normally either zero or negative.
Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR.
.\" METHOD: vrooty
.TP
\fBwinfo vrooty \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the y-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR,
relative to the root window of its screen.
This is normally either zero or negative.
Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR.
.\" METHOD: width
.TP
\fBwinfo width \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's width in pixels.
When a window is first created its width will be 1 pixel;  the
width will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfil
the window's needs.
If you need the true width immediately after creating a widget,
invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it,
or use \fBwinfo reqwidth\fR to get the window's requested width
instead of its actual width.
.\" METHOD: x
.TP
\fBwinfo x \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's
parent, of the
upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
has no border).
.\" METHOD: y
.TP
\fBwinfo y \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's
parent, of the
upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
has no border).
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Print where the mouse pointer is and what window it is currently over:
.CS
lassign [\fBwinfo pointerxy\fR .] x y
puts -nonewline "Mouse pointer at ($x,$y) which is "
set win [\fBwinfo containing\fR $x $y]
if {$win eq ""} {
    puts "over no window"
} else {
    puts "over $win"
}
.CE
.SH KEYWORDS
atom, children, class, geometry, height, identifier, information, interpreters,
mapped, parent, path name, screen, virtual root, width, window
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

Changes to doc/wish.1.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18
19

20
21
22

23
24

25
26
27
28

29
30
31

32
33
34
35

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

47
48
49
50

51
52
53
54
55
56
57
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
wish \- Simple windowing shell
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBwish\fR ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName arg ...\fR?
.SH OPTIONS

.IP "\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR" 20
Specifies the encoding of the text stored in \fIfileName\fR.
This option is only recognized prior to the \fIfileName\fR argument.

.IP "\fB\-colormap \fInew\fR" 20
Specifies that the window should have a new private colormap instead of
using the default colormap for the screen.

.IP "\fB\-display \fIdisplay\fR" 20
Display (and screen) on which to display window.

.IP "\fB\-geometry \fIgeometry\fR" 20
Initial geometry to use for window.  If this option is specified, its
value is stored in the \fBgeometry\fR global variable of the application's
Tcl interpreter.

.IP "\fB\-name \fIname\fR" 20
Use \fIname\fR as the title to be displayed in the window, and
as the name of the interpreter for \fBsend\fR commands.

.IP "\fB\-sync\fR" 20
Execute all X server commands synchronously, so that errors
are reported immediately.  This will result in much slower
execution, but it is useful for debugging.

.IP "\fB\-use\fR \fIid\fR" 20
Specifies that the main window for the application is to be embedded in
the window whose identifier is \fIid\fR, instead of being created as an
independent toplevel window.  \fIId\fR must be specified in the same
way as the value for the \fB\-use\fR option for toplevel widgets (i.e.
it has a form like that returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command).
.RS
Note that on some platforms this will only work correctly if \fIid\fR
refers to a Tk \fBframe\fR or \fBtoplevel\fR that has its
\fB\-container\fR option enabled.
.RE

.IP "\fB\-visual \fIvisual\fR" 20
Specifies the visual to use for the window.
\fIVisual\fR may have any of the forms supported by the \fBTk_GetVisual\fR
procedure.

.IP "\fB\-\|\-\fR" 20
Pass all remaining arguments through to the script's \fBargv\fR
variable without interpreting them.
This provides a mechanism for passing arguments such as \fB\-name\fR
to a script instead of having \fBwish\fR interpret them.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION







>



>



>


>




>



>




>











>




>







10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
wish \- Simple windowing shell
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBwish\fR ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName arg ...\fR?
.SH OPTIONS
.\" OPTION: -encoding
.IP "\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR" 20
Specifies the encoding of the text stored in \fIfileName\fR.
This option is only recognized prior to the \fIfileName\fR argument.
.\" OPTION: -colormap
.IP "\fB\-colormap \fInew\fR" 20
Specifies that the window should have a new private colormap instead of
using the default colormap for the screen.
.\" OPTION: -display
.IP "\fB\-display \fIdisplay\fR" 20
Display (and screen) on which to display window.
.\" OPTION: -geometry
.IP "\fB\-geometry \fIgeometry\fR" 20
Initial geometry to use for window.  If this option is specified, its
value is stored in the \fBgeometry\fR global variable of the application's
Tcl interpreter.
.\" OPTION: -name
.IP "\fB\-name \fIname\fR" 20
Use \fIname\fR as the title to be displayed in the window, and
as the name of the interpreter for \fBsend\fR commands.
.\" OPTION: -sync
.IP "\fB\-sync\fR" 20
Execute all X server commands synchronously, so that errors
are reported immediately.  This will result in much slower
execution, but it is useful for debugging.
.\" OPTION: -use
.IP "\fB\-use\fR \fIid\fR" 20
Specifies that the main window for the application is to be embedded in
the window whose identifier is \fIid\fR, instead of being created as an
independent toplevel window.  \fIId\fR must be specified in the same
way as the value for the \fB\-use\fR option for toplevel widgets (i.e.
it has a form like that returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command).
.RS
Note that on some platforms this will only work correctly if \fIid\fR
refers to a Tk \fBframe\fR or \fBtoplevel\fR that has its
\fB\-container\fR option enabled.
.RE
.\" OPTION: -visual
.IP "\fB\-visual \fIvisual\fR" 20
Specifies the visual to use for the window.
\fIVisual\fR may have any of the forms supported by the \fBTk_GetVisual\fR
procedure.
.\" OPTION: --
.IP "\fB\-\|\-\fR" 20
Pass all remaining arguments through to the script's \fBargv\fR
variable without interpreting them.
This provides a mechanism for passing arguments such as \fB\-name\fR
to a script instead of having \fBwish\fR interpret them.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120

121
122

123
124

125
126

127
128
129
130

131
132

133
134

135
136

137
138
139
140
141

142
143

144
145
146
147
148
149
150
.PP
The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as
specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults
file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is
capitalized.
.SH "VARIABLES"
.PP
\fBWish\fR sets the following Tcl variables:

.TP 15
\fBargc\fR

Contains a count of the number of \fIarg\fR arguments (0 if none),
not including the options described above.

.TP 15
\fBargv\fR

Contains a Tcl list whose elements are the \fIarg\fR arguments
that follow a \fB\-\|\-\fR option or do not match any of the
options described in \fBOPTIONS\fR above, in order, or an empty string
if there are no such arguments.

.TP 15
\fBargv0\fR

Contains \fIfileName\fR if it was specified.
Otherwise, contains the name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked.

.TP 15
\fBgeometry\fR

If the \fB\-geometry\fR option is specified, \fBwish\fR copies its
value into this variable.  If the variable still exists after
\fIfileName\fR has been evaluated, \fBwish\fR uses the value of
the variable in a \fBwm geometry\fR command to set the main
window's geometry.

.TP 15
\fBtcl_interactive\fR

Contains 1 if \fBwish\fR is reading commands interactively (\fIfileName\fR
was not specified and standard input is a terminal-like
device), 0 otherwise.
.SH "SCRIPT FILES"
.PP
If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is
.CS







|
>


>


>


>




>


>


>


>





>


>







122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
.PP
The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as
specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults
file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is
capitalized.
.SH "VARIABLES"
.PP
\fBWish\fR sets the following global Tcl variables:
.\" VARIABLE: argc
.TP 15
\fBargc\fR
.
Contains a count of the number of \fIarg\fR arguments (0 if none),
not including the options described above.
.\" VARIABLE: argv
.TP 15
\fBargv\fR
.
Contains a Tcl list whose elements are the \fIarg\fR arguments
that follow a \fB\-\|\-\fR option or do not match any of the
options described in \fBOPTIONS\fR above, in order, or an empty string
if there are no such arguments.
.\" VARIABLE: argv0
.TP 15
\fBargv0\fR
.
Contains \fIfileName\fR if it was specified.
Otherwise, contains the name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked.
.\" VARIABLE: geometry
.TP 15
\fBgeometry\fR
.
If the \fB\-geometry\fR option is specified, \fBwish\fR copies its
value into this variable.  If the variable still exists after
\fIfileName\fR has been evaluated, \fBwish\fR uses the value of
the variable in a \fBwm geometry\fR command to set the main
window's geometry.
.\" VARIABLE: tcl_interactive
.TP 15
\fBtcl_interactive\fR
.
Contains 1 if \fBwish\fR is reading commands interactively (\fIfileName\fR
was not specified and standard input is a terminal-like
device), 0 otherwise.
.SH "SCRIPT FILES"
.PP
If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is
.CS

Changes to doc/wm.n.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44

45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60

61
62
63
64
65
66
67

68
69
70
71
72
73

74
75
76
77
78
79

80
81
82
83

84
85
86
87

88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97

98
99
100
101
102
103
104

105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117

118
119
120
121
122

123
124
125
126
127
128

129
130
131
132

133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145

146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158

159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171

172
173
174
175
176

177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187

188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267

268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278

279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291

292
293
294
295
296
297
298
.TH wm n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
wm \- Communicate with window manager
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBwm\fR \fIoption window \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBwm\fR command is used to interact with window managers in
order to control such things as the title for a window, its geometry,
or the increments in terms of which it may be resized.  The \fBwm\fR
command can take any of a number of different forms, depending on
the \fIoption\fR argument.  All of the forms expect at least one
additional argument, \fIwindow\fR, which must be the path name of a
top-level window.
.PP
The legal forms for the \fBwm\fR command are:

.TP
\fBwm aspect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIminNumer minDenom maxNumer maxDenom\fR?
.
If \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR
are all specified, then they will be passed to the window manager
and the window manager should use them to enforce a range of
acceptable aspect ratios for \fIwindow\fR.  The aspect ratio of
\fIwindow\fR (width/length) will be constrained to lie
between \fIminNumer\fR/\fIminDenom\fR and \fImaxNumer\fR/\fImaxDenom\fR.
If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are all specified as empty strings, then
any existing aspect ratio restrictions are removed.
If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are specified, then the command returns an
empty string.  Otherwise, it returns
a Tcl list containing four elements, which are the current values
of \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR
(if no aspect restrictions are in effect, then an empty string is
returned).

.TP
\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR
.TP
\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption\fR?
.TP
\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption value option value...\fR?
.
This subcommand returns or sets platform specific attributes associated
with a window. The first form returns a list of the platform specific
flags and their values. The second form returns the value for the
specific option. The third form sets one or more of the values. The
values are as follows:
.RS
.PP
All platforms support the following attributes (though X11 users
should see the notes below):

.TP
\fB\-alpha\fR
.
Specifies the alpha transparency level of the toplevel. It accepts a value
from \fB0.0\fR (fully transparent) to \fB1.0\fR (opaque).  Values outside that
range will be constrained.  Where not supported, the \fB\-alpha\fR value
remains at \fB1.0\fR.

.TP
\fB\-fullscreen\fR
.
Places the window in a mode that takes up the entire screen, has no
borders, and covers the general use area (i.e. Start menu and taskbar on
Windows, dock and menubar on OSX, general window decorations on X11).

.TP
\fB\-topmost\fR
.
Specifies whether this is a topmost window (displays above all other windows).
.PP
On Windows, the following attributes may be set.

.TP
\fB\-disabled\fR
.
Specifies whether the window is in a disabled state.

.TP
\fB\-toolwindow\fR
.
Specifies a toolwindow style window (as defined in the MSDN).

.TP
\fB\-transparentcolor\fR
.
Specifies the transparent color index of the toplevel.  It takes any color
value accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  If the empty string is specified
(default), no transparent color is used.  This is supported on Windows
2000/XP+.  Where not supported, the \fB\-transparentcolor\fR value remains
at \fB{}\fR.
.PP
On MacOS, the following attributes may be set.

.TP
\fB\-appearance\fR
.
Specifies whether the window is rendered in "dark mode".  Allowed
values are \fBauto\fR, \fBaqua\fR and \fBdarkaqua\fR.  If the setting
is auto then the appearance of the window is controlled by the
System Settings.

.TP
\fB\-class\fR
.
Specifies whether the underlying Aqua window for a toplevel is an
object of the NSWindow class or the NSPanel class.  The two allowed
values for this option are \fBnswindow\fR and \fBnspanel\fR.  It is
not possible to change the class of the underlying Aqua window once
that window has been instantiated, and attempting to do that is an
error.  However it is allowed to set this option for a pathname that
does not correspond to an existing window.  Doing that causes the
class name to be cached for later use.  When a toplevel with that
pathname is eventually created, the cached class name will determine which
class is used for the underlying Aqua window.

.TP
\fB\-isdark\fR
.
Returns a boolean value which is true if the window is currently in
dark mode.

.TP
\fB\-modified\fR
.
Specifies the modification state of the window (determines whether the
window close widget contains the modification indicator and whether the
proxy icon is draggable).

.TP
\fB\-notify\fR
.
Specifies process notification state (bouncing of the application dock icon).

.TP
\fB\-stylemask\fR
.
Specifies an integer to be assigned as the styleMask of the underlying
Aqua window.  (See the Apple documentation for styleMask property of
the NSWindow class.) The value of this option should be a list of
bitnames.  Each bit named in the list will be set to 1, and all other
bits will be set to 0.  The allowed bitnames are: \fBtitled\fR,
\fBclosable\fR, \fBminiaturizable\fR, \fBresizable\fR,
\fBfullsizecontentview\fR, \fBdocmodal\fR, \fButility\fR,
\fBnonactivatingpanel\fR, and \fBHUDwindow\fR.  Note that a side
effect of setting the fullsizecontentview bit is that the window title
bar becomes transparent.

.TP
\fB\-tabbingid\fR
.
Controls how tabbed toplevel windows are grouped together.  Two tabs
in the same group must correspond to toplevels with the same
tabbingid, which can be an arbitrary UTF8 string.  In the Tk
implementation, changing the tabbingid of a toplevel in a tab group
will cause it to be moved into a different group, in which all tabs
have the new tabbingid or, if the new tabbingid is unique, to become
a normal non-tabbed toplevel.   It is allowed to set the tabbingid before the
toplevel is created.  If the pathname provided in the command does not
correspond to a toplevel, the value will be cached and used later when
the toplevel is actually created.

.TP
\fB\-tabbingmode\fR
.
Controls whether a toplevel can be opened as a tab within a tab group.
The allowed values are \fBauto\fR, \fBpreferred\fR or
\fBdisallowed\fR.  A toplevel can be opened as a tab in exactly two
situations: if its tabbingmode is \fBpreferred\fR; or if its
tabbingmode is \fBauto\fR and the user has selected "prefer tabs when
opening documents" in the Desktop and Dock panel of the System
Settings application.  It is allowed to set the tabbingmode before the
toplevel is created.  If the pathname provided in the command does not
correspond to a toplevel, the value will be cached and used later when
the toplevel is actually created.

.TP
\fB\-titlepath\fR
.
Specifies the path of the file referenced as the window proxy icon
(which can be dragged and dropped in lieu of the file's finder icon).

.TP
\fB\-transparent\fR
.
Makes the window content area transparent and turns off the window shadow. For
the transparency to be effective, the toplevel background needs to be set to a
color with some alpha, e.g.
.QW systemTransparent .
.PP
On X11, the following attributes may be set. These are not supported by all
window managers, and will have no effect under older WMs.
.\" See https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/wm-spec/

.TP
\fB\-type\fR
.VS 8.6
Requests that the window should be interpreted by the window manager as being
of the specified type(s). This may cause the window to be decorated in a
different way or otherwise managed differently, though exactly what happens is
entirely up to the window manager. A list of types may be used, in order of
preference. The following values are mapped to constants defined in the EWMH
specification (using others is possible, but not advised):
.RS
.TP
\fBdesktop\fR
.
indicates a desktop feature,
.TP
\fBdock\fR
.
indicates a dock/panel feature,
.TP
\fBtoolbar\fR
.
indicates a toolbar window that should be acting on behalf of another window,
as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
.TP
\fBmenu\fR
.
indicates a torn-off menu that should be acting on behalf of another window,
as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
.TP
\fButility\fR
.
indicates a utility window (e.g., palette or toolbox) that should be acting on
behalf of another window, as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
.TP
\fBsplash\fR
.
indicates a splash screen, displayed during application start up,
.TP
\fBdialog\fR
.
indicates a general dialog window, that should be acting on behalf of another
window, as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
.TP
\fBdropdown_menu\fR
.
indicates a menu summoned from a menu bar, which should usually also be set to
be override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.TP
\fBpopup_menu\fR
.
indicates a popup menu, which should usually also be set to be
override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.TP
\fBtooltip\fR
.
indicates a tooltip window, which should usually also be set to be
override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.TP
\fBnotification\fR
.
indicates a window that provides a background notification of some event,
which should usually also be set to be override-redirected (with \fBwm
overrideredirect\fR),
.TP
\fBcombo\fR
.
indicates the drop-down list of a combobox widget, which should usually also
be set to be override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.TP
\fBdnd\fR
.
indicates a window that represents something being dragged, which should
usually also be set to be override-redirected (with
\fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.TP
\fBnormal\fR
.
indicates a window that has no special interpretation.
.RE
.VE 8.6

.TP
\fB\-zoomed\fR
.
Requests that the window should be maximized. This is the same as \fBwm state
zoomed\fR on Windows and Mac OS X.
.PP
On X11, changes to window attributes are performed asynchronously. Querying
the value of an attribute returns the current state, which will not be the
same as the value most recently set if the window manager has not yet
processed the request or if it does not support the attribute.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm client \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR?
.
If \fIname\fR is specified, this command stores \fIname\fR (which
should be the name of
the host on which the application is executing) in \fIwindow\fR's
\fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property for use by the window manager or
session manager.
The command returns an empty string in this case.
If \fIname\fR is not specified, the command returns the last name
set in a \fBwm client\fR command for \fIwindow\fR.
If \fIname\fR is specified as an empty string, the command deletes the
\fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property from \fIwindow\fR.

.TP
\fBwm colormapwindows \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindowList\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR
property, which provides information to the window managers about
windows that have private colormaps.
.RS







|












>

















>
















>







>






>






>




>




>










>







>













>





>






>




>













>













>













>





>











>










<
|
<

<
|
<

<
|
<


<
|
<


<
|
<


<
|
<

<
|
<


<
|
<


<
|
<


<
|
<


<
|
<



<
|
<


<
|
<



<
|
<



>











>













>







8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216

217

218

219

220

221

222
223

224

225
226

227

228
229

230

231

232

233
234

235

236
237

238

239
240

241

242
243

244

245
246
247

248

249
250

251

252
253
254

255

256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
.TH wm n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
wm \- Communicate with window manager
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBwm\fI option window \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBwm\fR command is used to interact with window managers in
order to control such things as the title for a window, its geometry,
or the increments in terms of which it may be resized.  The \fBwm\fR
command can take any of a number of different forms, depending on
the \fIoption\fR argument.  All of the forms expect at least one
additional argument, \fIwindow\fR, which must be the path name of a
top-level window.
.PP
The legal forms for the \fBwm\fR command are:
.\" METHOD: aspect
.TP
\fBwm aspect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIminNumer minDenom maxNumer maxDenom\fR?
.
If \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR
are all specified, then they will be passed to the window manager
and the window manager should use them to enforce a range of
acceptable aspect ratios for \fIwindow\fR.  The aspect ratio of
\fIwindow\fR (width/length) will be constrained to lie
between \fIminNumer\fR/\fIminDenom\fR and \fImaxNumer\fR/\fImaxDenom\fR.
If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are all specified as empty strings, then
any existing aspect ratio restrictions are removed.
If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are specified, then the command returns an
empty string.  Otherwise, it returns
a Tcl list containing four elements, which are the current values
of \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR
(if no aspect restrictions are in effect, then an empty string is
returned).
.\" METHOD: attributes
.TP
\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR
.TP
\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption\fR?
.TP
\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption value option value...\fR?
.
This subcommand returns or sets platform specific attributes associated
with a window. The first form returns a list of the platform specific
flags and their values. The second form returns the value for the
specific option. The third form sets one or more of the values. The
values are as follows:
.RS
.PP
All platforms support the following attributes (though X11 users
should see the notes below):
.\" OPTION: -alpha
.TP
\fB\-alpha\fR
.
Specifies the alpha transparency level of the toplevel. It accepts a value
from \fB0.0\fR (fully transparent) to \fB1.0\fR (opaque).  Values outside that
range will be constrained.  Where not supported, the \fB\-alpha\fR value
remains at \fB1.0\fR.
.\" OPTION: -fullscreen
.TP
\fB\-fullscreen\fR
.
Places the window in a mode that takes up the entire screen, has no
borders, and covers the general use area (i.e. Start menu and taskbar on
Windows, dock and menubar on OSX, general window decorations on X11).
.\" OPTION: -topmost
.TP
\fB\-topmost\fR
.
Specifies whether this is a topmost window (displays above all other windows).
.PP
On Windows, the following attributes may be set.
.\" OPTION: -disabled
.TP
\fB\-disabled\fR
.
Specifies whether the window is in a disabled state.
.\" OPTION: -toolwindow
.TP
\fB\-toolwindow\fR
.
Specifies a toolwindow style window (as defined in the MSDN).
.\" OPTION: -transparentcolor
.TP
\fB\-transparentcolor\fR
.
Specifies the transparent color index of the toplevel.  It takes any color
value accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  If the empty string is specified
(default), no transparent color is used.  This is supported on Windows
2000/XP+.  Where not supported, the \fB\-transparentcolor\fR value remains
at \fB{}\fR.
.PP
On MacOS, the following attributes may be set.
.\" OPTION: -appearance
.TP
\fB\-appearance\fR
.
Specifies whether the window is rendered in "dark mode".  Allowed
values are \fBauto\fR, \fBaqua\fR and \fBdarkaqua\fR.  If the setting
is auto then the appearance of the window is controlled by the
System Settings.
.\" OPTION: -class
.TP
\fB\-class\fR
.
Specifies whether the underlying Aqua window for a toplevel is an
object of the NSWindow class or the NSPanel class.  The two allowed
values for this option are \fBnswindow\fR and \fBnspanel\fR.  It is
not possible to change the class of the underlying Aqua window once
that window has been instantiated, and attempting to do that is an
error.  However it is allowed to set this option for a pathname that
does not correspond to an existing window.  Doing that causes the
class name to be cached for later use.  When a toplevel with that
pathname is eventually created, the cached class name will determine which
class is used for the underlying Aqua window.
.\" OPTION: -isdark
.TP
\fB\-isdark\fR
.
Returns a boolean value which is true if the window is currently in
dark mode.
.\" OPTION: -modified
.TP
\fB\-modified\fR
.
Specifies the modification state of the window (determines whether the
window close widget contains the modification indicator and whether the
proxy icon is draggable).
.\" OPTION: -notify
.TP
\fB\-notify\fR
.
Specifies process notification state (bouncing of the application dock icon).
.\" OPTION: -stylemask
.TP
\fB\-stylemask\fR
.
Specifies an integer to be assigned as the styleMask of the underlying
Aqua window.  (See the Apple documentation for styleMask property of
the NSWindow class.) The value of this option should be a list of
bitnames.  Each bit named in the list will be set to 1, and all other
bits will be set to 0.  The allowed bitnames are: \fBtitled\fR,
\fBclosable\fR, \fBminiaturizable\fR, \fBresizable\fR,
\fBfullsizecontentview\fR, \fBdocmodal\fR, \fButility\fR,
\fBnonactivatingpanel\fR, and \fBHUDwindow\fR.  Note that a side
effect of setting the fullsizecontentview bit is that the window title
bar becomes transparent.
.\" OPTION: -tabbingid
.TP
\fB\-tabbingid\fR
.
Controls how tabbed toplevel windows are grouped together.  Two tabs
in the same group must correspond to toplevels with the same
tabbingid, which can be an arbitrary UTF8 string.  In the Tk
implementation, changing the tabbingid of a toplevel in a tab group
will cause it to be moved into a different group, in which all tabs
have the new tabbingid or, if the new tabbingid is unique, to become
a normal non-tabbed toplevel.   It is allowed to set the tabbingid before the
toplevel is created.  If the pathname provided in the command does not
correspond to a toplevel, the value will be cached and used later when
the toplevel is actually created.
.\" OPTION: -tabbingmode
.TP
\fB\-tabbingmode\fR
.
Controls whether a toplevel can be opened as a tab within a tab group.
The allowed values are \fBauto\fR, \fBpreferred\fR or
\fBdisallowed\fR.  A toplevel can be opened as a tab in exactly two
situations: if its tabbingmode is \fBpreferred\fR; or if its
tabbingmode is \fBauto\fR and the user has selected "prefer tabs when
opening documents" in the Desktop and Dock panel of the System
Settings application.  It is allowed to set the tabbingmode before the
toplevel is created.  If the pathname provided in the command does not
correspond to a toplevel, the value will be cached and used later when
the toplevel is actually created.
.\" OPTION: -titlepath
.TP
\fB\-titlepath\fR
.
Specifies the path of the file referenced as the window proxy icon
(which can be dragged and dropped in lieu of the file's finder icon).
.\" OPTION: -transparent
.TP
\fB\-transparent\fR
.
Makes the window content area transparent and turns off the window shadow. For
the transparency to be effective, the toplevel background needs to be set to a
color with some alpha, e.g.
.QW systemTransparent .
.PP
On X11, the following attributes may be set. These are not supported by all
window managers, and will have no effect under older WMs.
.\" See https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/wm-spec/
.\" OPTION: -type
.TP
\fB\-type\fR
.VS 8.6
Requests that the window should be interpreted by the window manager as being
of the specified type(s). This may cause the window to be decorated in a
different way or otherwise managed differently, though exactly what happens is
entirely up to the window manager. A list of types may be used, in order of
preference. The following values are mapped to constants defined in the EWMH
specification (using others is possible, but not advised):
.RS

.IP \fBdesktop\fR

indicates a desktop feature,

.IP \fBdock\fR

indicates a dock/panel feature,

.IP \fBtoolbar\fR

indicates a toolbar window that should be acting on behalf of another window,
as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,

.IP \fBmenu\fR

indicates a torn-off menu that should be acting on behalf of another window,
as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,

.IP \fButility\fR

indicates a utility window (e.g., palette or toolbox) that should be acting on
behalf of another window, as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,

.IP \fBsplash\fR

indicates a splash screen, displayed during application start up,

.IP \fBdialog\fR

indicates a general dialog window, that should be acting on behalf of another
window, as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,

.IP \fBdropdown_menu\fR

indicates a menu summoned from a menu bar, which should usually also be set to
be override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),

.IP \fBpopup_menu\fR

indicates a popup menu, which should usually also be set to be
override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),

.IP \fBtooltip\fR

indicates a tooltip window, which should usually also be set to be
override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),

.IP \fBnotification\fR

indicates a window that provides a background notification of some event,
which should usually also be set to be override-redirected (with \fBwm
overrideredirect\fR),

.IP \fBcombo\fR

indicates the drop-down list of a combobox widget, which should usually also
be set to be override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),

.IP \fBdnd\fR

indicates a window that represents something being dragged, which should
usually also be set to be override-redirected (with
\fBwm overrideredirect\fR),

.IP \fBnormal\fR

indicates a window that has no special interpretation.
.RE
.VE 8.6
.\" OPTION: -zoomed
.TP
\fB\-zoomed\fR
.
Requests that the window should be maximized. This is the same as \fBwm state
zoomed\fR on Windows and Mac OS X.
.PP
On X11, changes to window attributes are performed asynchronously. Querying
the value of an attribute returns the current state, which will not be the
same as the value most recently set if the window manager has not yet
processed the request or if it does not support the attribute.
.RE
.\" METHOD: client
.TP
\fBwm client \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR?
.
If \fIname\fR is specified, this command stores \fIname\fR (which
should be the name of
the host on which the application is executing) in \fIwindow\fR's
\fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property for use by the window manager or
session manager.
The command returns an empty string in this case.
If \fIname\fR is not specified, the command returns the last name
set in a \fBwm client\fR command for \fIwindow\fR.
If \fIname\fR is specified as an empty string, the command deletes the
\fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property from \fIwindow\fR.
.\" METHOD: colormapwindows
.TP
\fBwm colormapwindows \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindowList\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR
property, which provides information to the window managers about
windows that have private colormaps.
.RS
316
317
318
319
320
321
322

323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334

335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344

345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364

365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372

373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381

382
383
384
385
386
387
388
If \fBwm colormapwindows\fR is not invoked, Tk will automatically set
the property for each top-level window to all the internal windows
whose colormaps differ from their parents, followed by the top-level
itself;  the order of the internal windows is undefined.
See the ICCCM documentation for more information on the
\fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm command \fIwindow\fR ?\fIvalue\fR?
.
If \fIvalue\fR is specified, this command stores \fIvalue\fR in \fIwindow\fR's
\fBWM_COMMAND\fR property for use by the window manager or
session manager and returns an empty string.
\fIValue\fR must have proper list structure;  the elements should
contain the words of the command used to invoke the application.
If \fIvalue\fR is not specified then the command returns the last value
set in a \fBwm command\fR command for \fIwindow\fR.
If \fIvalue\fR is specified as an empty string, the command
deletes the \fBWM_COMMAND\fR property from \fIwindow\fR.

.TP
\fBwm deiconify \fIwindow\fR
.
Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be displayed in normal (non-iconified) form.
This is done by mapping the window.  If the window has never been
mapped then this command will not map the window, but it will ensure
that when the window is first mapped it will be displayed
in de-iconified form.  On Windows, a deiconified window will also be
raised and be given the focus (made the active window).
Returns an empty string.

.TP
\fBwm focusmodel \fIwindow\fR ?\fBactive\fR|\fBpassive\fR?
.
If \fBactive\fR or \fBpassive\fR is supplied as an optional argument
to the command, then it specifies the focus model for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the command returns an empty string.  If no additional
argument is supplied, then the command returns the current focus
model for \fIwindow\fR.
.RS
.PP
An \fBactive\fR focus model means that \fIwindow\fR will claim the
input focus for itself or its descendants, even at times when
the focus is currently in some other application.  \fBPassive\fR means that
\fIwindow\fR will never claim the focus for itself:  the window manager
should give the focus to \fIwindow\fR at appropriate times.  However,
once the focus has been given to \fIwindow\fR or one of its descendants,
the application may re-assign the focus among \fIwindow\fR's descendants.
The focus model defaults to \fBpassive\fR, and Tk's \fBfocus\fR command
assumes a passive model of focusing.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm forget \fIwindow\fR
.
The \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped from the screen and will no longer
be managed by \fBwm\fR.  Windows created with the \fBtoplevel\fR
command will be treated like \fBframe\fR windows once they are no
longer managed by \fBwm\fR, however, the \fB\-menu\fR configuration will be
remembered and the menus will return once the widget is managed again.

.TP
\fBwm frame \fIwindow\fR
.
If \fIwindow\fR has been reparented by the window manager into a
decorative frame, the command returns the platform specific window
identifier for the outermost frame that contains \fIwindow\fR (the
window whose parent is the root or virtual root).  If \fIwindow\fR
has not been reparented by the window manager then the command returns
the platform specific window identifier for \fIwindow\fR.

.TP
\fBwm geometry \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewGeometry\fR?
.
If \fInewGeometry\fR is specified, then the geometry of \fIwindow\fR
is changed and an empty string is returned.  Otherwise the current
geometry for \fIwindow\fR is returned (this is the most recent
geometry specified either by manual resizing or







>












>










>




















>








>









>







310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
If \fBwm colormapwindows\fR is not invoked, Tk will automatically set
the property for each top-level window to all the internal windows
whose colormaps differ from their parents, followed by the top-level
itself;  the order of the internal windows is undefined.
See the ICCCM documentation for more information on the
\fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property.
.RE
.\" METHOD: command
.TP
\fBwm command \fIwindow\fR ?\fIvalue\fR?
.
If \fIvalue\fR is specified, this command stores \fIvalue\fR in \fIwindow\fR's
\fBWM_COMMAND\fR property for use by the window manager or
session manager and returns an empty string.
\fIValue\fR must have proper list structure;  the elements should
contain the words of the command used to invoke the application.
If \fIvalue\fR is not specified then the command returns the last value
set in a \fBwm command\fR command for \fIwindow\fR.
If \fIvalue\fR is specified as an empty string, the command
deletes the \fBWM_COMMAND\fR property from \fIwindow\fR.
.\" METHOD: deiconify
.TP
\fBwm deiconify \fIwindow\fR
.
Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be displayed in normal (non-iconified) form.
This is done by mapping the window.  If the window has never been
mapped then this command will not map the window, but it will ensure
that when the window is first mapped it will be displayed
in de-iconified form.  On Windows, a deiconified window will also be
raised and be given the focus (made the active window).
Returns an empty string.
.\" METHOD: focusmodel
.TP
\fBwm focusmodel \fIwindow\fR ?\fBactive\fR|\fBpassive\fR?
.
If \fBactive\fR or \fBpassive\fR is supplied as an optional argument
to the command, then it specifies the focus model for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case the command returns an empty string.  If no additional
argument is supplied, then the command returns the current focus
model for \fIwindow\fR.
.RS
.PP
An \fBactive\fR focus model means that \fIwindow\fR will claim the
input focus for itself or its descendants, even at times when
the focus is currently in some other application.  \fBPassive\fR means that
\fIwindow\fR will never claim the focus for itself:  the window manager
should give the focus to \fIwindow\fR at appropriate times.  However,
once the focus has been given to \fIwindow\fR or one of its descendants,
the application may re-assign the focus among \fIwindow\fR's descendants.
The focus model defaults to \fBpassive\fR, and Tk's \fBfocus\fR command
assumes a passive model of focusing.
.RE
.\" METHOD: forget
.TP
\fBwm forget \fIwindow\fR
.
The \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped from the screen and will no longer
be managed by \fBwm\fR.  Windows created with the \fBtoplevel\fR
command will be treated like \fBframe\fR windows once they are no
longer managed by \fBwm\fR, however, the \fB\-menu\fR configuration will be
remembered and the menus will return once the widget is managed again.
.\" METHOD: frame
.TP
\fBwm frame \fIwindow\fR
.
If \fIwindow\fR has been reparented by the window manager into a
decorative frame, the command returns the platform specific window
identifier for the outermost frame that contains \fIwindow\fR (the
window whose parent is the root or virtual root).  If \fIwindow\fR
has not been reparented by the window manager then the command returns
the platform specific window identifier for \fIwindow\fR.
.\" METHOD: geometry
.TP
\fBwm geometry \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewGeometry\fR?
.
If \fInewGeometry\fR is specified, then the geometry of \fIwindow\fR
is changed and an empty string is returned.  Otherwise the current
geometry for \fIwindow\fR is returned (this is the most recent
geometry specified either by manual resizing or
419
420
421
422
423
424
425

426
427
428
429
430
431
432
actual size and location of \fIwindow\fR, whereas \fBwm geometry\fR allows
both setting and querying of the \fIwindow manager\fR's understanding of the
size and location of the window. This can vary significantly, for example to
reflect the addition of decorative elements to \fIwindow\fR such as title
bars, and window managers are not required to precisely follow the requests
made through this command.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm grid \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbaseWidth baseHeight widthInc heightInc\fR?
.
This command indicates that \fIwindow\fR is to be managed as a
gridded window.
It also specifies the relationship between grid units and pixel units.
\fIBaseWidth\fR and \fIbaseHeight\fR specify the number of grid







>







419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
actual size and location of \fIwindow\fR, whereas \fBwm geometry\fR allows
both setting and querying of the \fIwindow manager\fR's understanding of the
size and location of the window. This can vary significantly, for example to
reflect the addition of decorative elements to \fIwindow\fR such as title
bars, and window managers are not required to precisely follow the requests
made through this command.
.RE
.\" METHOD: grid
.TP
\fBwm grid \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbaseWidth baseHeight widthInc heightInc\fR?
.
This command indicates that \fIwindow\fR is to be managed as a
gridded window.
It also specifies the relationship between grid units and pixel units.
\fIBaseWidth\fR and \fIbaseHeight\fR specify the number of grid
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461

462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472

473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503

504
505
506
507
508
509
510
.PP
Otherwise the return value is a Tcl list containing
four elements corresponding to the current \fIbaseWidth\fR,
\fIbaseHeight\fR, \fIwidthInc\fR, and \fIheightInc\fR;  if
\fIwindow\fR is not currently gridded, then an empty string
is returned.
.PP
Note: this command should not be needed very often, since the
\fBTk_SetGrid\fR library procedure and the \fBsetGrid\fR option
provide easier access to the same functionality.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm group \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR?
.
If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it gives the path name for the leader of
a group of related windows.  The window manager may use this information,
for example, to unmap all of the windows in a group when the group's
leader is iconified.  \fIPathName\fR may be specified as an empty string to
remove \fIwindow\fR from any group association.  If \fIpathName\fR is
specified then the command returns an empty string;  otherwise it
returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current group leader, or an empty
string if \fIwindow\fR is not part of any group.

.TP
\fBwm iconbadge \fIwindow\fR \fIbadge\fR
.
Sets a badge for the icon of the \fIwindow\fR. The badge can be a positive
integer number, for instance the number of new or unread messages, or
an exclamation point denoting attention needed. If the badge is an empty
string, the badge image is removed from the application icon. Managing
these changes through bindings, such as <FocusIn>, is the responsibility
of the developer.
.RS
.PP
On X11, for this command to work,
the variable \fB::tk::icons::base_icon($window)\fR must be set to the image that is
being used for the window icon of $window. On Windows and X11, the iconphoto
images work best at 32x32 or a similar dimension, as
the badge images are provided by Tk and drawn to overlay the icon images
using native (Windows) API's or Tk rendering. On macOS, the icon badge is
rendered by a system API and is not provided by Tk. The icon image itself
should be higher-resolution, preferably 512 pixels, to avoid being blurry.
.PP
The icon badge is intended for display in the Dock (macOS), taskbar
(Windows) or app panel (X11). On macOS, the last badge called will be
displayed in the Dock, regardless of how many different icon badges may be
assigned to different windows. On Windows, the taskbar display depends on
whether the taskbar buttons are combined or not (this is an OS setting
available to the user): if combined the behavior is the same as on macOS,
otherwise each button in the taskbar shows the badge it was assigned.
Badge display on macOS is configured in the system preferences. App
panel display behavior on X11 will depend on the window manager and/or
desktop environment.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm iconbitmap \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR?
.
If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard
forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details).
This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be displayed in
\fIwindow\fR's icon, and the command returns an empty string.  If







|



>











>

|










|
|
|










|





>







452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
.PP
Otherwise the return value is a Tcl list containing
four elements corresponding to the current \fIbaseWidth\fR,
\fIbaseHeight\fR, \fIwidthInc\fR, and \fIheightInc\fR;  if
\fIwindow\fR is not currently gridded, then an empty string
is returned.
.PP
Note that this command should not be needed very often, since the
\fBTk_SetGrid\fR library procedure and the \fBsetGrid\fR option
provide easier access to the same functionality.
.RE
.\" METHOD: group
.TP
\fBwm group \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR?
.
If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it gives the path name for the leader of
a group of related windows.  The window manager may use this information,
for example, to unmap all of the windows in a group when the group's
leader is iconified.  \fIPathName\fR may be specified as an empty string to
remove \fIwindow\fR from any group association.  If \fIpathName\fR is
specified then the command returns an empty string;  otherwise it
returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current group leader, or an empty
string if \fIwindow\fR is not part of any group.
.\" METHOD: iconbadge
.TP
\fBwm iconbadge \fIwindow badge\fR
.
Sets a badge for the icon of the \fIwindow\fR. The badge can be a positive
integer number, for instance the number of new or unread messages, or
an exclamation point denoting attention needed. If the badge is an empty
string, the badge image is removed from the application icon. Managing
these changes through bindings, such as <FocusIn>, is the responsibility
of the developer.
.RS
.PP
On X11, for this command to work,
the variable \fB::tk::icons::base_icon($window)\fR must be set to the image
that is being used for the window icon of $window. On Windows and X11, the
iconphoto images work best at 32x32 or a similar dimension, as
the badge images are provided by Tk and drawn to overlay the icon images
using native (Windows) API's or Tk rendering. On macOS, the icon badge is
rendered by a system API and is not provided by Tk. The icon image itself
should be higher-resolution, preferably 512 pixels, to avoid being blurry.
.PP
The icon badge is intended for display in the Dock (macOS), taskbar
(Windows) or app panel (X11). On macOS, the last badge called will be
displayed in the Dock, regardless of how many different icon badges may be
assigned to different windows. On Windows, the taskbar display depends on
whether the taskbar buttons are combined or not (this is an OS setting
available to the user): if combined, the behavior is the same as on macOS,
otherwise each button in the taskbar shows the badge it was assigned.
Badge display on macOS is configured in the system preferences. App
panel display behavior on X11 will depend on the window manager and/or
desktop environment.
.RE
.\" METHOD: iconbitmap
.TP
\fBwm iconbitmap \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR?
.
If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard
forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details).
This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be displayed in
\fIwindow\fR's icon, and the command returns an empty string.  If
526
527
528
529
530
531
532

533
534
535
536
537
538

539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553

554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564

565
566
567
568
569
570
571
any file which contains a valid
Windows icon is also accepted (usually .ico or .icr files), or any
file for which the shell has assigned an icon.  Tcl will
first test if the file contains an icon, then if it has an assigned
icon, and finally, if that fails, test for
a bitmap.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm iconify \fIwindow\fR
.
Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be iconified.  It \fIwindow\fR has not
yet been mapped for the first time, this command will arrange for
it to appear in the iconified state when it is eventually mapped.

.TP
\fBwm iconmask \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR?
.
If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard
forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details).
This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be used as a mask
in conjunction with the \fBiconbitmap\fR option:  where the mask
has zeroes no icon will be displayed;  where it has ones, the bits
from the icon bitmap will be displayed.  If
an empty string is specified for \fIbitmap\fR then any current icon
mask is cancelled for \fIwindow\fR (this is equivalent to specifying
a bitmap of all ones).  If \fIbitmap\fR is specified
then the command returns an empty string.  Otherwise it
returns the name of the current icon mask associated with
\fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no mask is in effect.

.TP
\fBwm iconname \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewName\fR?
.
If \fInewName\fR is specified, then it is passed to the window
manager;  the window manager should display \fInewName\fR inside
the icon associated with \fIwindow\fR.  In this case an empty
string is returned as result.  If \fInewName\fR is not specified
then the command returns the current icon name for \fIwindow\fR,
or an empty string if no icon name has been specified (in this
case the window manager will normally display the window's title,
as specified with the \fBwm title\fR command).

.TP
\fBwm iconphoto \fIwindow\fR ?\fB\-default\fR? \fIimage1\fR ?\fIimage2 ...\fR?
.
Sets the titlebar icon for \fIwindow\fR based on the named photo images.
If \fB\-default\fR is specified, this is applied to all future created
toplevels as well.  The data in the images is taken as a snapshot at the
time of invocation.  If the images are later changed, this is not







>






>















>











>







530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
any file which contains a valid
Windows icon is also accepted (usually .ico or .icr files), or any
file for which the shell has assigned an icon.  Tcl will
first test if the file contains an icon, then if it has an assigned
icon, and finally, if that fails, test for
a bitmap.
.RE
.\" METHOD: iconify
.TP
\fBwm iconify \fIwindow\fR
.
Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be iconified.  It \fIwindow\fR has not
yet been mapped for the first time, this command will arrange for
it to appear in the iconified state when it is eventually mapped.
.\" METHOD: iconmask
.TP
\fBwm iconmask \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR?
.
If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard
forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details).
This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be used as a mask
in conjunction with the \fBiconbitmap\fR option:  where the mask
has zeroes no icon will be displayed;  where it has ones, the bits
from the icon bitmap will be displayed.  If
an empty string is specified for \fIbitmap\fR then any current icon
mask is cancelled for \fIwindow\fR (this is equivalent to specifying
a bitmap of all ones).  If \fIbitmap\fR is specified
then the command returns an empty string.  Otherwise it
returns the name of the current icon mask associated with
\fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no mask is in effect.
.\" METHOD: iconname
.TP
\fBwm iconname \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewName\fR?
.
If \fInewName\fR is specified, then it is passed to the window
manager;  the window manager should display \fInewName\fR inside
the icon associated with \fIwindow\fR.  In this case an empty
string is returned as result.  If \fInewName\fR is not specified
then the command returns the current icon name for \fIwindow\fR,
or an empty string if no icon name has been specified (in this
case the window manager will normally display the window's title,
as specified with the \fBwm title\fR command).
.\" METHOD: iconphoto
.TP
\fBwm iconphoto \fIwindow\fR ?\fB\-default\fR? \fIimage1\fR ?\fIimage2 ...\fR?
.
Sets the titlebar icon for \fIwindow\fR based on the named photo images.
If \fB\-default\fR is specified, this is applied to all future created
toplevels as well.  The data in the images is taken as a snapshot at the
time of invocation.  If the images are later changed, this is not
588
589
590
591
592
593
594

595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604

605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622


623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631

632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646

647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661

662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681

682
683
684
685
686
687
688
format, and becomes the application icon in dialogs, the Dock, and
other contexts. At the
script level the command will accept only the first image passed in the
parameters as support for multiple sizes/resolutions on macOS is outside Tk's
scope. Developers should use the largest icon they can support
(preferably 512 pixels) to ensure smooth rendering on the Mac.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm iconposition \fIwindow\fR ?\fIx y\fR?
.
If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they are passed to the window
manager as a hint about where to position the icon for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case an empty string is returned.  If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are
specified as empty strings then any existing icon position hint is cancelled.
If neither \fIx\fR nor \fIy\fR is specified, then the command returns
a Tcl list containing two values, which are the current icon position
hints (if no hints are in effect then an empty string is returned).

.TP
\fBwm iconwindow \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR?
.
If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it is the path name for a window to
use as icon for \fIwindow\fR: when \fIwindow\fR is iconified then
\fIpathName\fR will be mapped to serve as icon, and when \fIwindow\fR
is de-iconified then \fIpathName\fR will be unmapped again.  If
\fIpathName\fR is specified as an empty string then any existing
icon window association for \fIwindow\fR will be cancelled.  If
the \fIpathName\fR argument is specified then an empty string is
returned.  Otherwise the command returns the path name of the
current icon window for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if there
is no icon window currently specified for \fIwindow\fR.
Button press events are disabled for \fIwindow\fR as long as it is
an icon window;  this is needed in order to allow window managers to
.QW own
those events.
Note: not all window managers support the notion of an icon window.


.TP
\fBwm manage \fIwidget\fR
.
The \fIwidget\fR specified will become a stand alone top-level window.  The
window will be decorated with the window managers title bar, etc. Only
\fIframe\fR, \fIlabelframe\fR and \fItoplevel\fR widgets can be used
with this command. Attempting to pass any other widget type will raise
an error. Attempting to manage a \fItoplevel\fR widget is benign and
achieves nothing. See also \fBGEOMETRY MANAGEMENT\fR.

.TP
\fBwm maxsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR?
.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give
the maximum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR.
For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in
grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel units.
The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be
less than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are
specified, then the command returns an empty string.  Otherwise
it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the
maximum width and height currently in effect.
The maximum size defaults to the size of the screen.
See the sections on geometry management below for more information.

.TP
\fBwm minsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR?
.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give the
minimum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR.
For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in
grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel units.
The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be
greater than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are
specified, then the command returns an empty string.  Otherwise
it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the
minimum width and height currently in effect.
The minimum size defaults to one pixel in each dimension.
See the sections on geometry management below for more information.

.TP
\fBwm overrideredirect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIboolean\fR?
.
If \fIboolean\fR is specified, it must have a proper boolean form and
the override-redirect flag for \fIwindow\fR is set to that value.
If \fIboolean\fR is not specified then \fB1\fR or \fB0\fR is
returned to indicate whether or not the override-redirect flag
is currently set for \fIwindow\fR.
Setting the override-redirect flag for a window causes
it to be ignored by the window manager;  among other things, this means
that the window will not be reparented from the root window into a
decorative frame and the user will not be able to manipulate the
window using the normal window manager mechanisms.
.RS
.PP
Note that the override-redirect flag is only guaranteed to be taken notice of
when the window is first mapped or when mapped after the state is changed from
withdrawn to normal. Some, but not all, platforms will take notice at
additional times.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm positionfrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR?
.
If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or
\fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two.  It indicates
whether \fIwindow\fR's current position was requested by the
program or by the user.  Many window managers ignore program-requested







>










>

















|
>
>









>















>















>




















>







596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
format, and becomes the application icon in dialogs, the Dock, and
other contexts. At the
script level the command will accept only the first image passed in the
parameters as support for multiple sizes/resolutions on macOS is outside Tk's
scope. Developers should use the largest icon they can support
(preferably 512 pixels) to ensure smooth rendering on the Mac.
.RE
.\" METHOD: iconposition
.TP
\fBwm iconposition \fIwindow\fR ?\fIx y\fR?
.
If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they are passed to the window
manager as a hint about where to position the icon for \fIwindow\fR.
In this case an empty string is returned.  If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are
specified as empty strings then any existing icon position hint is cancelled.
If neither \fIx\fR nor \fIy\fR is specified, then the command returns
a Tcl list containing two values, which are the current icon position
hints (if no hints are in effect then an empty string is returned).
.\" METHOD: iconwindow
.TP
\fBwm iconwindow \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR?
.
If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it is the path name for a window to
use as icon for \fIwindow\fR: when \fIwindow\fR is iconified then
\fIpathName\fR will be mapped to serve as icon, and when \fIwindow\fR
is de-iconified then \fIpathName\fR will be unmapped again.  If
\fIpathName\fR is specified as an empty string then any existing
icon window association for \fIwindow\fR will be cancelled.  If
the \fIpathName\fR argument is specified then an empty string is
returned.  Otherwise the command returns the path name of the
current icon window for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if there
is no icon window currently specified for \fIwindow\fR.
Button press events are disabled for \fIwindow\fR as long as it is
an icon window;  this is needed in order to allow window managers to
.QW own
those events.
Note that not all window managers support the notion of an icon window, and
the concept is entirely meaningless on non-X11 platforms.
.\" METHOD: manage
.TP
\fBwm manage \fIwidget\fR
.
The \fIwidget\fR specified will become a stand alone top-level window.  The
window will be decorated with the window managers title bar, etc. Only
\fIframe\fR, \fIlabelframe\fR and \fItoplevel\fR widgets can be used
with this command. Attempting to pass any other widget type will raise
an error. Attempting to manage a \fItoplevel\fR widget is benign and
achieves nothing. See also \fBGEOMETRY MANAGEMENT\fR.
.\" METHOD: maxsize
.TP
\fBwm maxsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR?
.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give
the maximum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR.
For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in
grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel units.
The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be
less than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are
specified, then the command returns an empty string.  Otherwise
it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the
maximum width and height currently in effect.
The maximum size defaults to the size of the screen.
See the sections on geometry management below for more information.
.\" METHOD: minsize
.TP
\fBwm minsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR?
.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give the
minimum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR.
For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in
grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel units.
The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be
greater than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are
specified, then the command returns an empty string.  Otherwise
it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the
minimum width and height currently in effect.
The minimum size defaults to one pixel in each dimension.
See the sections on geometry management below for more information.
.\" METHOD: overrideredirect
.TP
\fBwm overrideredirect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIboolean\fR?
.
If \fIboolean\fR is specified, it must have a proper boolean form and
the override-redirect flag for \fIwindow\fR is set to that value.
If \fIboolean\fR is not specified then \fB1\fR or \fB0\fR is
returned to indicate whether or not the override-redirect flag
is currently set for \fIwindow\fR.
Setting the override-redirect flag for a window causes
it to be ignored by the window manager;  among other things, this means
that the window will not be reparented from the root window into a
decorative frame and the user will not be able to manipulate the
window using the normal window manager mechanisms.
.RS
.PP
Note that the override-redirect flag is only guaranteed to be taken notice of
when the window is first mapped or when mapped after the state is changed from
withdrawn to normal. Some, but not all, platforms will take notice at
additional times.
.RE
.\" METHOD: positionfrom
.TP
\fBwm positionfrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR?
.
If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or
\fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two.  It indicates
whether \fIwindow\fR's current position was requested by the
program or by the user.  Many window managers ignore program-requested
696
697
698
699
700
701
702

703
704
705
706
707
708
709
source of the window's current position, or an empty string if
no source has been specified yet.  Most window managers interpret
.QW "no source"
as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR.
Tk will automatically set the position source to \fBuser\fR
when a \fBwm geometry\fR command is invoked, unless the source has
been set explicitly to \fBprogram\fR.

.TP
\fBwm protocol \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR?
.
This command is used to manage window manager protocols. The \fIname\fR
argument in the \fBwm protocol\fR command is the name of an atom corresponding
to a window manager protocol.  Examples include \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR or
\fBWM_SAVE_YOURSELF\fR or \fBWM_TAKE_FOCUS\fR.







>







712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
source of the window's current position, or an empty string if
no source has been specified yet.  Most window managers interpret
.QW "no source"
as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR.
Tk will automatically set the position source to \fBuser\fR
when a \fBwm geometry\fR command is invoked, unless the source has
been set explicitly to \fBprogram\fR.
.\" METHOD: protocol
.TP
\fBwm protocol \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR?
.
This command is used to manage window manager protocols. The \fIname\fR
argument in the \fBwm protocol\fR command is the name of an atom corresponding
to a window manager protocol.  Examples include \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR or
\fBWM_SAVE_YOURSELF\fR or \fBWM_TAKE_FOCUS\fR.
743
744
745
746
747
748
749

750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765

766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783

784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797

798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809

810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818

819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836

837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
is not returned).  If \fIcommand\fR is specified as an empty string then the
atom for \fIname\fR is removed from the \fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR property of
\fIwindow\fR and the handler is destroyed; an empty string is returned.
Lastly, if neither \fIname\fR nor \fIcommand\fR is specified, the
\fBwm protocol\fR command returns a list of all of the protocols for which
handlers are currently defined for \fIwindow\fR.
.RE

.TP
\fBwm resizable \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR?
.
This command controls whether or not the user may interactively
resize a top-level window.  If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are
specified, they are boolean values that determine whether the
width and height of \fIwindow\fR may be modified by the user.
In this case the command returns an empty string.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are omitted then the command
returns a list with two 0/1 elements that indicate whether the
width and height of \fIwindow\fR are currently resizable.
By default, windows are resizable in both dimensions.
If resizing is disabled, then the window's size will be the size
from the most recent interactive resize or \fBwm geometry\fR
command.  If there has been no such operation then
the window's natural size will be used.

.TP
\fBwm sizefrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR?
.
If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or
\fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two.  It indicates
whether \fIwindow\fR's current size was requested by the
program or by the user.  Some window managers ignore program-requested
sizes and ask the user to manually size the window;  if
\fBuser\fR is specified then the window manager should give the
window its specified size without asking the user for assistance.
If \fIwho\fR is specified as an empty string, then the current size
source is cancelled.
If \fIwho\fR is specified, then the command returns an empty string.
Otherwise it returns \fBuser\fR or \fBwindow\fR to indicate the
source of the window's current size, or an empty string if
no source has been specified yet.  Most window managers interpret
.QW "no source"
as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR.

.TP
\fBwm stackorder \fIwindow\fR ?\fBisabove\fR|\fBisbelow \fIwindow\fR?
.
The \fBstackorder\fR command returns a list of toplevel windows
in stacking order, from lowest to highest. When a single toplevel
window is passed, the returned list recursively includes all of the
window's children that are toplevels. Only those toplevels
that are currently mapped to the screen are returned.
The \fBstackorder\fR command can also be used to determine if one
toplevel is positioned above or below a second toplevel.
When two window arguments separated by either \fBisabove\fR or
\fBisbelow\fR are passed, a boolean result indicates whether
or not the first window is currently above or below the second
window in the stacking order.

.TP
\fBwm state \fIwindow\fR ?newstate?
.
If \fInewstate\fR is specified, the window will be set to the new state,
otherwise it returns the current state of \fIwindow\fR: either
\fBnormal\fR, \fBiconic\fR, \fBwithdrawn\fR, \fBicon\fR, or (Windows and Mac
OS X only) \fBzoomed\fR.
The difference between \fBiconic\fR and \fBicon\fR is that
\fBiconic\fR refers to a window that has been iconified (e.g., with the
\fBwm iconify\fR command) while \fBicon\fR refers to a window whose only
purpose is to serve as the icon for some other window (via the \fBwm
iconwindow\fR command).  The \fBicon\fR state cannot be set.

.TP
\fBwm title \fIwindow\fR ?\fIstring\fR?
.
If \fIstring\fR is specified, then it will be passed to the window
manager for use as the title for \fIwindow\fR (the window manager
should display this string in \fIwindow\fR's title bar).  In this
case the command returns an empty string.  If \fIstring\fR is not
specified then the command returns the current title for the
\fIwindow\fR.  The title for a window defaults to its name.

.TP
\fBwm transient \fIwindow\fR ?\fIcontainer\fR?
.
If \fIcontainer\fR is specified, then the window manager is informed that
\fIwindow\fR is a transient window (e.g. pull-down menu) working on
behalf of \fIcontainer\fR (where \fIcontainer\fR is the path name for a
top-level window).  If \fIcontainer\fR is specified as an empty string
then \fIwindow\fR is marked as not being a transient window any more.
Otherwise the command returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current
container, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not currently a
transient window.  A transient window will mirror state changes in the
container and inherit the state of the container when initially mapped. The
directed graph with an edge from each transient to its container must be
acyclic.  In particular, it is an error to attempt to make a window a
transient of itself.  The window manager may also decorate a transient
window differently, removing some features normally present (e.g.,
minimize and maximize buttons) though this is entirely at the
discretion of the window manager.

.TP
\fBwm withdraw \fIwindow\fR
.
Arranges for \fIwindow\fR to be withdrawn from the screen.  This
causes the window to be unmapped and forgotten about by the window
manager.  If the window
has never been mapped, then this command
causes the window to be mapped in the withdrawn state.  Not all
window managers appear to know how to handle windows that are
mapped in the withdrawn state.
Note: it sometimes seems to be necessary to withdraw a
window and then re-map it (e.g. with \fBwm deiconify\fR) to get some
window managers to pay attention to changes in window attributes
such as group.
.SH "GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT"
.PP
By default a top-level window appears on the screen in its
\fInatural size\fR, which is the one determined internally by its







>
















>


















>














>












>









>


















>










|







760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
is not returned).  If \fIcommand\fR is specified as an empty string then the
atom for \fIname\fR is removed from the \fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR property of
\fIwindow\fR and the handler is destroyed; an empty string is returned.
Lastly, if neither \fIname\fR nor \fIcommand\fR is specified, the
\fBwm protocol\fR command returns a list of all of the protocols for which
handlers are currently defined for \fIwindow\fR.
.RE
.\" METHOD: resizable
.TP
\fBwm resizable \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR?
.
This command controls whether or not the user may interactively
resize a top-level window.  If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are
specified, they are boolean values that determine whether the
width and height of \fIwindow\fR may be modified by the user.
In this case the command returns an empty string.
If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are omitted then the command
returns a list with two 0/1 elements that indicate whether the
width and height of \fIwindow\fR are currently resizable.
By default, windows are resizable in both dimensions.
If resizing is disabled, then the window's size will be the size
from the most recent interactive resize or \fBwm geometry\fR
command.  If there has been no such operation then
the window's natural size will be used.
.\" METHOD: sizefrom
.TP
\fBwm sizefrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR?
.
If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or
\fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two.  It indicates
whether \fIwindow\fR's current size was requested by the
program or by the user.  Some window managers ignore program-requested
sizes and ask the user to manually size the window;  if
\fBuser\fR is specified then the window manager should give the
window its specified size without asking the user for assistance.
If \fIwho\fR is specified as an empty string, then the current size
source is cancelled.
If \fIwho\fR is specified, then the command returns an empty string.
Otherwise it returns \fBuser\fR or \fBwindow\fR to indicate the
source of the window's current size, or an empty string if
no source has been specified yet.  Most window managers interpret
.QW "no source"
as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR.
.\" METHOD: stackorder
.TP
\fBwm stackorder \fIwindow\fR ?\fBisabove\fR|\fBisbelow \fIwindow\fR?
.
The \fBstackorder\fR command returns a list of toplevel windows
in stacking order, from lowest to highest. When a single toplevel
window is passed, the returned list recursively includes all of the
window's children that are toplevels. Only those toplevels
that are currently mapped to the screen are returned.
The \fBstackorder\fR command can also be used to determine if one
toplevel is positioned above or below a second toplevel.
When two window arguments separated by either \fBisabove\fR or
\fBisbelow\fR are passed, a boolean result indicates whether
or not the first window is currently above or below the second
window in the stacking order.
.\" METHOD: state
.TP
\fBwm state \fIwindow\fR ?newstate?
.
If \fInewstate\fR is specified, the window will be set to the new state,
otherwise it returns the current state of \fIwindow\fR: either
\fBnormal\fR, \fBiconic\fR, \fBwithdrawn\fR, \fBicon\fR, or (Windows and Mac
OS X only) \fBzoomed\fR.
The difference between \fBiconic\fR and \fBicon\fR is that
\fBiconic\fR refers to a window that has been iconified (e.g., with the
\fBwm iconify\fR command) while \fBicon\fR refers to a window whose only
purpose is to serve as the icon for some other window (via the \fBwm
iconwindow\fR command).  The \fBicon\fR state cannot be set.
.\" METHOD: title
.TP
\fBwm title \fIwindow\fR ?\fIstring\fR?
.
If \fIstring\fR is specified, then it will be passed to the window
manager for use as the title for \fIwindow\fR (the window manager
should display this string in \fIwindow\fR's title bar).  In this
case the command returns an empty string.  If \fIstring\fR is not
specified then the command returns the current title for the
\fIwindow\fR.  The title for a window defaults to its name.
.\" METHOD: transient
.TP
\fBwm transient \fIwindow\fR ?\fIcontainer\fR?
.
If \fIcontainer\fR is specified, then the window manager is informed that
\fIwindow\fR is a transient window (e.g. pull-down menu) working on
behalf of \fIcontainer\fR (where \fIcontainer\fR is the path name for a
top-level window).  If \fIcontainer\fR is specified as an empty string
then \fIwindow\fR is marked as not being a transient window any more.
Otherwise the command returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current
container, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not currently a
transient window.  A transient window will mirror state changes in the
container and inherit the state of the container when initially mapped. The
directed graph with an edge from each transient to its container must be
acyclic.  In particular, it is an error to attempt to make a window a
transient of itself.  The window manager may also decorate a transient
window differently, removing some features normally present (e.g.,
minimize and maximize buttons) though this is entirely at the
discretion of the window manager.
.\" METHOD: widthdraw
.TP
\fBwm withdraw \fIwindow\fR
.
Arranges for \fIwindow\fR to be withdrawn from the screen.  This
causes the window to be unmapped and forgotten about by the window
manager.  If the window
has never been mapped, then this command
causes the window to be mapped in the withdrawn state.  Not all
window managers appear to know how to handle windows that are
mapped in the withdrawn state.
Note that it sometimes seems to be necessary to withdraw a
window and then re-map it (e.g. with \fBwm deiconify\fR) to get some
window managers to pay attention to changes in window attributes
such as group.
.SH "GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT"
.PP
By default a top-level window appears on the screen in its
\fInatural size\fR, which is the one determined internally by its
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967

968
969
970
\fBwm resizable\fR .fixed 0 0
.CE
.PP
A simple dialog-like window, centred on the screen:
.CS
# Create and arrange the dialog contents.
toplevel .msg
label  .msg.l  \-text "This is a very simple dialog demo."
button .msg.ok \-text OK \-default active \-command {destroy .msg}
pack .msg.ok \-side bottom \-fill x
pack .msg.l  \-expand 1    \-fill both

# Now set the widget up as a centred dialog.

# But first, we need the geometry managers to finish setting
# up the interior of the dialog, for which we need to run the
# event loop with the widget hidden completely...
\fBwm withdraw\fR .msg
update
set x [expr {([winfo screenwidth .]\-[winfo width .msg])/2}]
set y [expr {([winfo screenheight .]\-[winfo height .msg])/2}]
\fBwm geometry\fR  .msg +$x+$y
\fBwm transient\fR .msg .
\fBwm title\fR     .msg "Dialog demo"
\fBwm deiconify\fR .msg
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
toplevel(n), winfo(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
aspect ratio, deiconify, focus model, geometry, grid, group, icon, iconify, increments, position, size, title, top-level window, units, window manager

'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:







|
|
|
|








|
|








|
>



962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
\fBwm resizable\fR .fixed 0 0
.CE
.PP
A simple dialog-like window, centred on the screen:
.CS
# Create and arrange the dialog contents.
toplevel .msg
label  .msg.l  -text "This is a very simple dialog demo."
button .msg.ok -text OK -default active -command {destroy .msg}
pack .msg.ok -side bottom -fill x
pack .msg.l  -expand 1    -fill both

# Now set the widget up as a centred dialog.

# But first, we need the geometry managers to finish setting
# up the interior of the dialog, for which we need to run the
# event loop with the widget hidden completely...
\fBwm withdraw\fR .msg
update
set x [expr {([winfo screenwidth .] - [winfo width .msg]) / 2}]
set y [expr {([winfo screenheight .] - [winfo height .msg]) / 2}]
\fBwm geometry\fR  .msg +$x+$y
\fBwm transient\fR .msg .
\fBwm title\fR     .msg "Dialog demo"
\fBwm deiconify\fR .msg
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
toplevel(n), winfo(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
aspect ratio, deiconify, focus model, geometry, grid, group, icon, iconify,
increments, position, size, title, top-level window, units, window manager
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End: